DRM Manual

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL INTRODUCTION
Section Subject Approved
CI-0000-01
Page
Introduction
How To Use Your Manual
June 1, 2006
1 of 2
SUMMARY
This manual is designed for random access of information. It has also been written and structured to provide the users with information in a manner, which can be quickly retrieved and easily understood.
NUMBERING SYSTEM
This manual uses a numbering system (procedure number), which combines an ALPHA PREFIX with the TAB, SECTION and SUBJECT numbers. For example: CI - 0207 - 03 CI 02 07 03 is the Alpha prefix for the Corporate Infrastructure Design Requirements Manual; is the Tab number, e.g., Tab 3 - Architecture; is the Section number; and is the Subject number.
This procedure number is found on the upper right corner of each page.
TABS
Tabs are the major divisions of the manual. They are physically separated by dividers, which show the number of the tab. Systems is a tab.
SECTIONS
Sections are divisions of a tab.
SUBJECTS
Subjects are divisions of a section.
400WP
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL INTRODUCTION

CI-0000-01
Page
Introduction
How To Use Your Manual
June 1, 2006
2 of 2
OVERVIEWS
Overviews provide a general description of the contents of each tab and section in the manual. It is always numbered -01.
CHANGES TO CONTENT
If you notice any information in this manual, which you know to be inaccurate, notify Controls & Standards.
DISTRIBUTION OF MANUALS
Manuals are distributed as required. Since manuals may be shared, they should not be moved from the location in the event of employee changes.
AMENDMENT RECORD
The Amendment Record is designed to record all amendments by number and date. This permits the user to determine if all revisions have been received. To complete the Amendment Record, enter the date recorded on the Manuals Amendment Notice next to the appropriate number on the Amendment Record. Note: If any amendments are missing, contact CI Controls & Standards.
400WP
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
1 of 17
TAB 0
INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Amendment Record .........................................................................CI-0000-00 How To Use Your Manual................................................................CI-0000-01 Summary ....................................................................................................1 Numbering System .....................................................................................1 Tabs ...........................................................................................................1 Sections......................................................................................................1 Subjects......................................................................................................1 Overviews...................................................................................................2 Changes to Content....................................................................................2 Distribution of Manuals ...............................................................................2 Amendment Record....................................................................................2 Table of Contents ............................................................................CI-0000-02
TAB 1
GENERAL INTRODUCTION Overview (of Tab) ............................................................................CI-0101-01 Summary ....................................................................................................1 GO TRANSIT CONTEXT Overview..........................................................................................CI-0102-01 Background ................................................................................................1 Ontario Building Code ................................................................................1 Overview ....................................................................................................1 Copyright ....................................................................................................2 DESIGN PRINCIPLES Background......................................................................................CI-0103-01 Standards ...................................................................................................1
400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
2 of 17
General ........................................................................................... CI-0103-02 Station Site Program.................................................................................. 1 Site Layout................................................................................................. 2 Customer Services .................................................................................... 3 Waiting Areas ............................................................................................ 4 Corporate Identity ...................................................................................... 4 Standardization of Fixed Facilities ............................................................. 4 Responsiveness To Change...................................................................... 5 Joint Venture Development........................................................................ 5 Fare Collection and Validation ................................................................... 6 Station Staffing .......................................................................................... 6 Information and Guidance.......................................................................... 6 Provisions for Passengers with Special Needs.......................................... 6 Easier Access ............................................................................................ 6 Maintenance and Cleaning ........................................................................ 7 Advertising ................................................................................................. 8 Artwork....................................................................................................... 8 Pay Parking ............................................................................................... 8 Sustainable Development .......................................................................... 8 Kyoto.......................................................................................................... 8 ELEMENTS Standard Elements.......................................................................... CI-0104-01 AMENDMENT PROCEDURES Text ................................................................................................. CI-0105-01 Summary ................................................................................................... 1 Standards Review Committee ................................................................... 1 Manual Co-ordinator .................................................................................. 1 Initiator ....................................................................................................... 1 Notice of Amendment ................................................................................ 1 Accessibility..................................................................................... CI-0106-01 Overview.................................................................................................... 1 Basis of Criteria ......................................................................................... 1 Key Elements............................................................................................. 6 Easier Access Features ............................................................................. 3
400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
3 of 17
TAB 2
ENGINEERING INTRODUCTION Overview (of Tab) ............................................................................CI-0201-01 Summary ....................................................................................................1 Rail Station Sites .............................................................................CI-0202-02 Scope .........................................................................................................1 Site Layout Properties ................................................................................1 Vehicular Circulation...................................................................................2 Specific Criteria ..........................................................................................2 Pedestrian and Bicycle Access ..................................................................3 Shared Pedestrian Bicycle Paths ...............................................................4 Bike Shelters ..............................................................................................5 Automobile Access .....................................................................................5 Parking Layouts..........................................................................................5 Islands and Curbs.......................................................................................6 Signs and Posts .........................................................................................6 Barrier Free Parking ...................................................................................7 Scooter/Motorcycle Parking........................................................................8 Reserved and Staff Parking........................................................................8 Passenger Drop off and Pick Up ................................................................8 Taxi Facilities..............................................................................................8 Bus Loops ..................................................................................................9 Ramps ........................................................................................................9 Curb Ramps ...............................................................................................9 Stairs ..........................................................................................................9 Bicycles ....................................................................................................10 Pedestrian Tunnels and Bridges ..............................................................11 Site Preparation........................................................................................11 Access Roads ..........................................................................................11 Rail Platforms ...........................................................................................12 Mini Platforms...........................................................................................12 Passenger Shelters ..................................................................................13 Station Building ........................................................................................13 Parking Structures ....................................................................................13 Designated Waiting Area (DWA) ..............................................................13
400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
4 of 17
Figure: Typical Cross Section for Shared Pedestrian/Cyclist Paths......... 14 Figure: Scooter/Motorocycle Parking Stalls ............................................. 15 Figure: Access Road and Parking Interface (Guideline only)................... 16 Figure: Parking Layout (Guideline only)................................................... 17 Figure: Passenger Drop-off and Pick-up Layout (Guideline only) ............ 18 Figure: Bus Loop (Guideline only) ........................................................... 19 Figure Mini-Platform Location ............................................................... 20 Figure Locomotive end of Train Consist ............................................... 21 Figure Designated Waiting Area ........................................................... 22 Bus Terminal Sites .......................................................................... CI-0202-03 Scope......................................................................................................... 1 GO Design Vehicles................................................................................... 1 Bus Radii Design Guidelines ..................................................................... 2 Straight Platform ........................................................................................ 3 Sawtooth Platform ..................................................................................... 3 Platform Selection...................................................................................... 3 Platform Layout.......................................................................................... 4 Clearances................................................................................................. 4 Accessible On Street Bus Stops ................................................................ 4 Emergency Vehicles .................................................................................. 7 Related Facilities ....................................................................................... 8 Materials .................................................................................................... 8 Figure Typical Bus Loop Figure .............................................................. 9 Figure Bus Radii Design Turning Template ......................................... 10 Figure Bus Bay Guidelines for D4500 Bus with Bike Rack Deployed ... 11 Bus Rapid Transit (BRT) Stations ................................................... CI-0202-04 Scope......................................................................................................... 1 Approvals................................................................................................... 2 Basis of Criteria ......................................................................................... 2 Site Access ................................................................................................ 3 Platform ..................................................................................................... 4 Passenger Waiting Building/Shelter........................................................... 4 Parking Lot................................................................................................. 5 Services ..................................................................................................... 6 Fences ....................................................................................................... 7 Landscaping .............................................................................................. 7 Signs/Advertising ....................................................................................... 7 Fixtures ...................................................................................................... 8 400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
5 of 17
Drainage ..........................................................................................CI-0202-05 Scope .........................................................................................................1 Catch Basins ..............................................................................................1 Gutter Drainage ..........................................................................................1 Ditch Drainage............................................................................................1 Sub-Grade Drainage ..................................................................................1 Pavement and Line Marking ............................................................CI-0202-06 Scope .........................................................................................................1 Specifications .............................................................................................1 Slopes ........................................................................................................2 Line Marking...............................................................................................2 Figure: Line Marking - Access Roads and Aisles ......................................3 Figure: Line Marking - Perimeter Parking Stalls ........................................4 Figure: Line Marking - Row Parking Stalls.................................................5 Figure: Line Marking - Parking Restricted Area .........................................6 Figure: Line Marking - Islands ...................................................................7 Figure: Line Marking - Crosswalks ............................................................8 Figure: Line Marking - Designated Parking Layouts ..................................9 Figure: Line Marking - Pavement Arrows ................................................10 Figure: Line Marking - Rail Platform and Mini-Platform ...........................11 Site Related Items ...........................................................................CI-0202-07 Scope .........................................................................................................1 Fencing.......................................................................................................1 Gated..........................................................................................................5 Noise Barriers.............................................................................................5 Concrete Curbs ..........................................................................................6 Guide Rails, Guardrails, and Bollards.........................................................7 Bollards ......................................................................................................8 Passenger Shelters ....................................................................................8 HEAVY RAIL General ............................................................................................CI-0203-01 Scope .........................................................................................................1 Basis of Criteria ..........................................................................................1 Railway Owned Corridors...........................................................................1 GO Transit Owned Corridors......................................................................1 Clearance Diagram.....................................................................................2 Track/Train Data.........................................................................................2 400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
6 of 17
Platform Design Criteria............................................................................. 2 Platform Enclosures................................................................................... 3 Platform Signs ........................................................................................... 3 Mini-Platform.............................................................................................. 3 Clearance Diagram .................................................................................... 3 CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL Engineering Design ......................................................................... CI-0204-01 General ...................................................................................................... 1 Codes ........................................................................................................ 1 Scope......................................................................................................... 1 Specific Requirements ............................................................................... 1 UTILITIES General ........................................................................................... CI-0205-01 Overview.................................................................................................... 1 Scope......................................................................................................... 1 Basis of Criteria ......................................................................................... 1 Specific Requirements ............................................................................... 1 Utilities Crossing Tracks ............................................................................ 2 MECHANICAL General ........................................................................................... CI-0206-01 Scope......................................................................................................... 1 Basis of Criteria ......................................................................................... 1 HVAC......................................................................................................... 1 Plumbing and Drainage ............................................................................. 5 Fire Protection ......................................................................................... 10 Noise/Vibration ........................................................................................ 11 ELECTRICAL General ........................................................................................... CI-0207-01 Scope......................................................................................................... 1 Codes and Approvals................................................................................. 2 Basis of Criteria ......................................................................................... 2
400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
7 of 17
Power Supply and Distribution........................................................CI -0207-02 Incoming Utility Services ............................................................................1 Utilization Voltages .....................................................................................1 Balancing of Phases...................................................................................3 Voltage Drops.............................................................................................3 Power Factor ..............................................................................................3 Service Ductbanks......................................................................................4 Protection and Metering .............................................................................4 Panelboards ...............................................................................................5 Grounding and Lightening Protection .........................................................5 Distribution Method.....................................................................................6 Wiring Method ............................................................................................6 Motor Control..............................................................................................8 Receptacles................................................................................................8 Wayside Power ..........................................................................................9 Back up Power Systems .................................................................CI -0207-03 Scope .........................................................................................................1 General Description....................................................................................1 Essential Loads ..........................................................................................1 Generator Requirements ............................................................................3 Transfer Switch (Automatic and Bypass)....................................................5 Uniterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Requirements .....................................7 Alarms to Monitoring Services Providers..................................................10 Figure: Emergency Power Distribution with Generator............................11 Figure: Emergency Power Distribution without Generator.......................12 Service Rooms ...............................................................................CI -0207-04 General Requirements ...............................................................................1 Electrical Room ..........................................................................................7 Communciation and Hub Rooms..............................................................11 Illumination......................................................................................CI -0207-05 Scope .........................................................................................................1 Basis of Criteria ..........................................................................................1 Illumination Levels ......................................................................................1 Exterior Lighting .........................................................................................3 Light Sources and Controls ........................................................................4 LED Lighting Minimum Requirements ........................................................5 400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
8 of 17
Lighting Control Design Criteria ................................................................. 6 Exterior Lighting - On and Off Controls ...................................................... 7 Exit Lights .................................................................................................. 7 Emergency Lights ...................................................................................... 7 Glare .......................................................................................................... 7 Daylight...................................................................................................... 8 Minimum Height ........................................................................................ 8 Sundry ....................................................................................................... 8 Standard Light Pole Drawings ................................................................... 8 Identification and Labelling............................................................. CI -0207-06 Scope......................................................................................................... 1 Regulatory Requirements ........................................................................ 1 General ..................................................................................................... 1 Nameplates................................................................................................ 2 WireMarkers .............................................................................................. 3 Panelboard Directories .............................................................................. 4 Communication Cable and Equipment Labelling ....................................... 4 Colour Identification of Wiring .................................................................... 4 Name/Number Identification of Wiring ....................................................... 5 Equipment Identification Schedule............................................................. 6 Equipment - Conduits, Boxes, Splitters and Panels................................... 7 Colour Identification of Equipment ............................................................. 8 System Colour Identification ...................................................................... 9 Identification of Pull and Junction Boxes.................................................. 10 Identification of Receptacles, Fire Alarms, Resistors and Duct Detectors 11 Manhole and Handhole Markers.............................................................. 11 Labelling Nomenclature ........................................................................... 11 Electrical Room........................................................................................ 15 Testing and Commissioning ........................................................... CI -0207-07 General ...................................................................................................... 1 Megger Test............................................................................................... 1 Coordination .............................................................................................. 1 Motor Control Centre & Panelboard........................................................... 1 Cables........................................................................................................ 2 Grounding .................................................................................................. 2 Reports ...................................................................................................... 2 Commissioning .......................................................................................... 2
400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
9 of 17
Drawings.........................................................................................CI -0207-08 Drawing Requirements ...............................................................................1 TAB 3 ARCHITECTURE INTRODUCTION Overview (of Tab) ...........................................................................CI -0301-01 Summary ....................................................................................................1 ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN General ...........................................................................................CI -0302-01 Overview ....................................................................................................1 Code Classification.....................................................................................1 Design & General Review ..........................................................................2 Basis of Criteria ..........................................................................................2 Conceptual Layouts....................................................................................3 Cost Estimates ...........................................................................................3 Integration ..................................................................................................3 Environmental Guidelines...........................................................................3 Joint Development......................................................................................4 Security Guidelines.....................................................................................4 STATION BUILDINGS Station Program..............................................................................CI -0303-01 Overview ....................................................................................................1 Waiting Area...............................................................................................2 Station Attendant Room .............................................................................3 Concession Area ........................................................................................5 Public Washrooms......................................................................................6 Maintenance Room ....................................................................................7 GO Storage Room/Driver Washroom .........................................................8 Communications Room ..............................................................................8 Electrical Room ..........................................................................................8 Mechanical Room.....................................................................................10
Platform Access Buildings ................................................................CI -0303-02
Overview ....................................................................................................1 400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
10 of 17
Stair Enclosure Buildings ........................................................................... 1 Elevator Enclosure Buildings ..................................................................... 4 Elevators.................................................................................................... 6 Shelters .......................................................................................... CI -0303-03 Overview.................................................................................................... 1 Size............................................................................................................ 1 Clearance .................................................................................................. 1 Form .......................................................................................................... 1 Loads ......................................................................................................... 1 Features..................................................................................................... 2 Fixtures ...................................................................................................... 3 BUS TERMINAL BUILDINGS Program ......................................................................................... CI -0304-01 Overview.................................................................................................... 1 Roof/Canopy/Platform................................................................................ 2 Entrances................................................................................................... 4 Waiting Room ............................................................................................ 5 Dispatcher Room ....................................................................................... 5 Driver Room............................................................................................... 7 MULTILEVEL PARKING STRUCTURES Program ......................................................................................... CI -0304-02 Design Requirements .............................................................................. 17 AIR RAIL LINK Overview ........................................................................................ CI -0304-03 Line Station Design Requirements ............................................................ 6 MAINTENANCE BUILDINGS Program ......................................................................................... CI -0305-01 Train Layover Buildings ............................................................................. 1
400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
11 of 17
Bus Operational Facilities ...............................................................CI -0305-02 Design Requirements ...............................................................................30 ANCILLARY BUILDINGS Program ..........................................................................................CI -0306-01 Overview ....................................................................................................1 Criteria........................................................................................................1 MATERIALS Program ..........................................................................................CI -0307-01 Overview ....................................................................................................1 General Criteria ..........................................................................................1 Exteriors .....................................................................................................3 Interior ........................................................................................................8 Floors .........................................................................................................9 Walls.........................................................................................................10 Ceilings.....................................................................................................11 Doors........................................................................................................13 Public Area Doors.....................................................................................13 Non-Public Area Door...............................................................................14 Wood Doors .............................................................................................14 Windows...................................................................................................16 Skylights ...................................................................................................16 Grilles, Covers, Etc...................................................................................16 Door Hardware .........................................................................................16 Station Furniture .......................................................................................16 Millwork ....................................................................................................17 Figure: Standard material & Colour Selections.........................................20 Figure: Tiles at Ramp/Stair Approach.......................................................22 LANDSCAPING Program ..........................................................................................CI -0308-01 Overview ....................................................................................................1 General Requirements ...............................................................................1 Codes and Standards.................................................................................2 Plant Material .............................................................................................3 400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
12 of 17
Internal Landscaping ................................................................................. 3 Stormwater Management........................................................................... 4 Snow Sorage ............................................................................................. 5 Snow Control ............................................................................................. 6 Planting Guide ........................................................................................... 6 Native Species Planting ............................................................................. 7 Landscaping Design Elements and Fixtures............................................ 11
SIGNS AND GRAPHICS Program ......................................................................................... CI -0309-01 Overview.................................................................................................... 1 Legibility..................................................................................................... 1 Constraints/Opportunities .......................................................................... 1 Advertising ................................................................................................. 2 Constraints................................................................................................. 3 ARTWORK Program ......................................................................................... CI -0310-01 Overview.................................................................................................... 1 Objectives .................................................................................................. 1 Design Opportunities ................................................................................. 1 Media and Application................................................................................ 2 Examples ................................................................................................... 4 TAB 4 SYSTEMS INTRODUCTION Overview (of Tab)........................................................................... CI -0401-01 Summary ................................................................................................... 1 COMMUNICATIONS Telephone Network ........................................................................ CI -0402-01 Overview.................................................................................................... 1
400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
13 of 17
Security System..............................................................................CI -0402-02 Scope .........................................................................................................1 Codes and Standards.................................................................................1 Alarm Systems ...........................................................................................1 General Features........................................................................................2 System Functional Performance ................................................................6 Fare Handling Equipment ...............................................................CI -0402-03 Scope .........................................................................................................1 Locations ....................................................................................................1 Conduits .....................................................................................................1 Wiring .........................................................................................................1 PRESTO...................................................................................................18 Ticket Booth Talk-Thru System.......................................................CI -0402-04 Scope .........................................................................................................1 Function......................................................................................................1 Components ...............................................................................................1 Wiring .........................................................................................................1 Public Address System ...................................................................CI -0402-05 Overview ....................................................................................................1 Coverage....................................................................................................1 Paging ........................................................................................................1 References .................................................................................................1 General Features........................................................................................3 Audio Power, Coverage and Quality...........................................................4 Components ...............................................................................................5 Installation ................................................................................................10 CCTV System .................................................................................CI -0402-06 Basis of Criteria ..........................................................................................1 Codes and Standards.................................................................................1 Local Monitoring .........................................................................................2 Remote Monitoring .....................................................................................2 Components ...............................................................................................2 Design/Installation Criteria..........................................................................3 Installation ..................................................................................................4 CCTV Camera Placement ..........................................................................6 400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
14 of 17
TAB 5
PROCEDURES INTRODUCTION Overview ........................................................................................ CI -0501-01 Summary ................................................................................................... 1 DRAWING STANDARDS General Standards ......................................................................... CI -0502-01 CAD submission Requirements For Contract and record drawings Documents................................................................................................. 1 Standard Requirements ............................................................................. 1 Standard GO Transit Drawing Sheet Sizes................................................ 1 Title Block .................................................................................................. 2 Line Work................................................................................................... 7 Lettering, drawing identification block and contract title sheets lettering.... 7 Dimensions ................................................................................................ 7 Section and Detail Markers........................................................................ 8 Scales On Subtitles ................................................................................... 8 Signatures.................................................................................................. 8 Engineers Or Architects Seal ................................................................... 8 Drawing Orientation and North Arrows ...................................................... 8 Chainages.................................................................................................. 9 Abbreviations and Symbols ....................................................................... 9 Structure Identification and Detailing ......................................................... 9 Graphic Symbols ..................................................................................... 11 Drawing Media and Close Out Drawings ................................................. 11
TAB 6
HEAVY RAIL INTRODUCTION Overview (of Tab)........................................................................... CI -0601-01 Summary ................................................................................................... 1 HEAVY RAIL Scope ............................................................................................. CI -0602-01 General ...................................................................................................... 1 Purpose ..................................................................................................... 1
400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
15 of 17
Definitions .......................................................................................CI -0602-02 Clearance Point ..........................................................................................1 Compromise Bars.......................................................................................1 Crossing, Diamond .....................................................................................1 Crossover ...................................................................................................1 Curvature, Track.........................................................................................1 Double Slip Switch......................................................................................1 Frog ............................................................................................................1 Gauge, Track..............................................................................................2 Insulated Joint (IJ) ......................................................................................2 Rail, Bridge Guard ......................................................................................2 Rail, Compromise .......................................................................................2 Rail, Continuous Welded (CWR) ................................................................2 Rail, Guard .................................................................................................2 Rail, Running..............................................................................................3 Railway.......................................................................................................3 Rail, Welded ...............................................................................................3 Special Trackwork ......................................................................................3 Superelevation ...........................................................................................3 Turnout .......................................................................................................3 Weld, Flash Butt .........................................................................................4 Weld, Thermite ...........................................................................................4 Track Material .................................................................................CI -0602-03 General.......................................................................................................1 Rail .............................................................................................................1 Frogs ..........................................................................................................2 Other Track Material (OTM) .......................................................................2 Track Ties...................................................................................................5 Ballast.........................................................................................................6 End-of-Track Construction..........................................................................6 Special Trackwork ..........................................................................CI -0602-04 Turnout .......................................................................................................1 Double Slip Switches..................................................................................2 Crossings (Diamond)..................................................................................3 Track Layout and Construction .......................................................CI -0602-05 General.......................................................................................................1 Track Centres .............................................................................................1 400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
16 of 17
Spacing of Special Trackwork.................................................................... 2 Track Alignment and Special Trackwork.................................................... 2 Clearance Points ....................................................................................... 2 Clearance Envelope .................................................................................. 2 Bridge Guard Rails .................................................................................... 3 Track Capacity........................................................................................... 3 Road Crossings ......................................................................................... 3 Drainage .................................................................................................... 3 Track Assembly ......................................................................................... 4 Track Tolerances ........................................................................... CI -0602-06 General ...................................................................................................... 1 Track Gauge .............................................................................................. 1 Line ............................................................................................................ 1 Surface ...................................................................................................... 1 Cross-Level................................................................................................ 1 Deviation.................................................................................................... 2 Continuous Welded Rail................................................................. CI -0602-07 General ...................................................................................................... 1 Preferred Laying Temperature................................................................... 1 Structure Interface.......................................................................... CI -0602-08 GO Transit Platforms ................................................................................. 1 Pedestrian Tunnels .................................................................................... 1 Utilities ....................................................................................................... 1 Lighting ...................................................................................................... 2 Maintenance Access.................................................................................. 2 STANDARD DRAWINGS Track Material ................................................................................ CI -0603-01 Figure: 115 Re Running Rail Section........................................................ 1 Figure: 14 Tie Plate For 100/115 Rail-5-1/2 Base Width ........................ 2 Figure: Tie Plate For 100/115 Rail For Elastic Fasteners and Screw Spikes ........................................................................................................ 3 Figure: Insulated Rail Joint ....................................................................... 4 Figure: Timber Ties................................................................................... 5 Figure: Timber Tie To Concrete Tie Transition ......................................... 6 Figure: Concrete Track Ties ..................................................................... 7 Figure: Cross-Section Single Track .......................................................... 8 400WP

EN-0000-02
Page
April 30, 2012
17 of 17
Figure: Ballast Cross Section ....................................................................9 Figure: Ballast Cross Section Super-Elevation........................................10 Figure: Turnout Dimensions & Speeds....................................................11 Figure: Double Slip Switch ......................................................................12 Figure: One-Way Vehicle Service Road (Surface at Top of Ties)............................................................................13 Figure: One-Way Vehicle Service Road With Drainage Ditch (Surface at Top of Ties)............................................................................14 Figure: Two-Way Vehicle Service Road at Lighting Poles 76m (250) To 91m (300) Apart (Surface at Top of Ties)............................................................................15 Figure: Cross Over LENgths ...................................................................16 Figure: Turnout and Crossover Spacing..................................................17 Figure: Track Clearances ........................................................................18 Figure: Track Clearances ........................................................................19 Figure: Clearance Envelope On All Structures Over or Beside The Railway Tracks..................................................................20 Figure: USRC Trainshed Minimum Clearance Envelope.........................21 Figure: Track Capacity ............................................................................22 Figure: Mud Rail Crossing Detail .............................................................23
400WP
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL GENERAL

CI-0101-01
Page
Introduction
Overview (of Tab)
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
SUMMARY
This Tab No. 1 deals with Design Policies governing the standards and the day-to-day use of this manual, in terms of the following subjects: GO Transit Context Design Principles Elements Amendment Procedures
400WP

CI-0102-01
Page
GO Transit Context
Overview
May 27, 2010
1 of 2
BACKGROUND
GO Transit is the Province of Ontarios interregional public transit service for the Greater Toronto Area (GTA). Legally a Crown Agency, officially it is the Greater Toronto Transit Authority (GTTA). Quantitative facts about GO Transit are available upon request: fact sheets, reports and system maps. Qualitative fact: during one recent year GO Transit carried about 40 million passengers, purchasing about 40 million litres of diesel fuel to do so. Therefore, on average, each passenger commuted on one litre of diesel fuel. Passenger and GO Transit expectations for comparable economy of means in the design and construction of fixed facilities motivate the criteria comprising these Standards. This may seem to be a lofty aspiration, but it is in fact meaningful when facility capital and lifecycle operating costs are related to passenger volumes and reduced to the cost and revenue of a passenger per day.
ONTARIO BUILDING CODE

In accordance with the GO Transit Act, 2001, GO Transit is a Crown Agency. The Ontario statutes do not bind the Provincial Crown unless the statute specifically so provides. The Building Code Act does not expressly bind the Provincial Crown. In effect, GO Transit is not bound by the Building Code Act and the Ontario Building Code (OBC). However, in practice, GO Transit does comply and applies for building permits, though it does not enter into Site Plan Agreements nor pay development charges or other levies. GO Transit also recognizes the OBC requirement that Group A division 2 buildings (passenger stations and depots) shall be designed by an architect and professional engineer, each within their respective practice, as set out in the Architects Act and the Professional Engineers Act. Note: OBC 3.13 Rapid Transit Stations does not apply to GO Transit. However, GO Transit subscribes to the application of Article 3.13.4.5. Width of means of Egress for passenger flow calculations, etc.
OVERVIEW
GO Transit owns this document, in both printed and/or digital form, and will keep a record of issuance, and forward amendments to Manual Holders. Manual Holders shall return the Manual to GO Transit upon request.
400WP

CI-0102-01
Page
GO Transit Context
Overview
May 27, 2010
2 of 2
COPYRIGHT
Manual Holders may reproduce the contents for use as required during a project assignment from GO Transit, but shall not lend out or sell or reproduce the contents for publication.
400WP

CI-0103-01
Page
Design Principles
Background
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
STANDARDS
GO Transit respects the professionalism of consultants, and relies on their sound knowledge of the fundamentals of engineering, architecture, landscaping, signs and graphics. These Standards are not intended to prescribe HOW but rather to elucidate WHAT is to be designed, in terms of location, size, clearances, functional relationships, features, fixtures, mechanical, electrical and communications systems, fare collection systems, information systems, security systems, landscaping, signs, the added value of artwork, all with certain key materials, in certain key colours. GO Transit relies on consultants to design in accordance with all applicable codes and to the approval of all authorities having jurisdiction. All GO Transit standards are written in the context of GO Transit Design Principles. Consultants shall be thoroughly familiar with these principles as a basis for the design of GO Transit facilities: Corporate Identity; Standardization of Fixed Facilities; Responsiveness to Change; Joint Venture Development; Fare Collection and Validation; Information and Guidance; Passenger Comfort and Convenience; Provisions For Passengers with Special Needs; Maintenance and Cleaning; Advertising; and Artwork.
Consultants and their specialized subconsultants shall both be familiar with all Tabs and sections of these standards, due to overlapping information concerning the integration of systems, components, parts, materials, finishes and colours.
400WP

CI-0103-02
Page
Design Principles
General
November 10, 2010
1 of 9
STATION SITE PROGRAM

This program describes the general spatial and physical provisions to be made at each station to accommodate passenger activities, staff functions and related systems. The standard station is based on the following: Station Building providing attended ticket sales and services, waiting area, and accommodation for station systems; Exterior station service area accommodating information displays, ticket vending machines, public telephones, ticket cancellers, bicycle parking/storage, newspaper distribution; Rail platform (including mini-platform and passenger shelters); Platform access (including pedestrian tunnel or bridge, stairs and elevators); Bus loop, bus platform, and related shelter; Passenger Drop-off/Pick-up and taxi areas and related shelter; Site access from adjacent community for pedestrians, bicycles, buses (GO and local) and cars; Bicycle parking and/or storage; Automobile parking facilities, including reserved parking and snow clearing and storage areas; Passenger service systems including related accommodation, servicing and infrastructure: lighting, public address, staffed ticket sales, automated ticket sales (TVMs), ticket cancellers (validators), information displays, newspaper distribution, waste containers, public telephones, and CCTV; Emergency vehicle (fire-truck) access; Maintenance and service vehicle access and parking, including platform maintenance access; Landscaped areas, visual screening and acoustical buffers from adjacent areas; Fences and Signs; and
400WP

CI-0103-02
Page
Design Principles
General
November 9, 2010
2 of 9
Utilities and storm water management.
SITE LAYOUT
The GO Transit station should provide convenient access and use of the station services by customers arriving at the station by each of the applicable modes in the following order of priority: Pedestrian and bicycle Bus Passenger drop off and pick up, taxi Parked personal vehicle
The overall layout should respect any existing natural assets of the site, and complement the form of the adjacent community. The platform should be located to take into account any operational constraints (curves, distance from level crossing), for the full range of applicable train lengths. The location of the platform access (tunnels and stairs, parking access and pedestrian routes) and station facilities with respect to the platform length should be considered in relation to other stations on the same corridor in order to distribute activity within the corridor along the full length of the train. The station building should be centrally located with respect to parking facilities, taking into account future likely expansion (parking growth, tunnels, etc.). Pedestrian and bicycle access from the surrounding community, and from the surrounding sidewalk/path network should be encouraged by providing short, convenient paths from each applicable direction. Bus service to the station by local transit and by GO should be provided, where warranted, to a bus platform close to the station building, with a separate access from the street to facilitate bus access and egress. Passenger drop-off facilities, including taxi and accessible bus accommodation, should be provided close to the station building. Accessible parking spaces should be provided close to the station building. A convenient accessible pathway with curb cuts should be provided from the accessible parking spaces
400WP

CI-0103-02
Page
Design Principles
General
November 10, 2010
3 of 9
and accessible drop-off location to the station building, and continue throughout the station facility. Bicycle parking/storage should be provided in the vicinity of the station, if possible under cover; it should be located where station staff can observe it directly or by CCTV. Station egress should be designed to mitigate the peak volumes of vehicles leaving the site after arrival of a busy train; multiple egress points should be provided where feasible, and intersection design should reflect the high peak volumes. The station layout should support distributed activity, and a high level of visibility between areas, to avoid isolated areas.
CUSTOMER SERVICES
Customers approaching the station building area by each of the modes should have convenient access to: An information display providing service information at the approach to the station area; Ticket sales (attended and TVM); Newspaper boxes and, if appropriate, concessions; Ticket cancellers; and Pay phones.
Frequent customers not requiring information or ticket sales may access the platforms directly and need access to: Ticket cancellers.
The arrangement of the station should ensure that all needed facilities are available for customers using the station at times when it is not attended and portions of the station are locked. In addition to automated ticket vending, and access to public telephones and information, shelter should be provided for customers waiting for trains, buses and rider/taxis as appropriate.
400WP

CI-0103-02
Page
Design Principles
General
November 9, 2010
4 of 9
WAITING AREAS
The rail platform should be equipped with seating, with shelter to accommodate an appropriate number of intending passengers during inclement weather; barrier-free access to the trains is provided by a mini-platform in close proximity to a shelter with automated door and a public telephone. The bus platform should be equipped with seating, with shelter to accommodate an appropriate number of intending bus passengers during inclement weather, and with an information display for bus schedules applicable to the station. A waiting area for the Passenger drop-off/pick-up facility should provide a public telephone, seating, and shelter for patrons waiting for a ride or taxi.
CORPORATE IDENTITY
The presently established corporate identity of GO Transit shall be extended throughout the system by prominent application of the existing GO logo and colour to all stations. The corporate identity shall be further strengthened by consistent graphics, format, layout, and display of all graphic materials that will be visible and/or available to patrons of the GO Transit system.
STANDARDIZATION OF FIXED FACILITIES

The key objectives of station design shall be: 1. 2. 3. 4. Customer comfort, convenience and safety; Employee effectiveness, safety and comfort; Facility maintainability; and Visual image.
The key objectives of standardizing station design shall be: 1. 2. 3. Functional and operational consistency of stations; Economy of construction and maintenance; The visual consistency of all stations within the GO Transit System; and
400WP

CI-0103-02
Page
Design Principles 4.
General
November 10, 2010
5 of 9
The visual compatibility of stations with the functional, technology, operation, and aesthetic aspects of the system and vehicle.
Visible elements of stations shall respond to individual station sites with either unusual inherent qualities or notable contextual features. Stations shall be consistent in terms of fundamental planning principles, functional components (e.g., platforms, stairs, washrooms, graphics and signage, fare dispensing and verification), structural systems and materials, and lighting. A complete list of station elements may be found in CI-0304-01 Standard Elements. Standardization of station design shall not be applied so rigidly as to preclude architectural responses to special site characteristics such as: 1. 2. 3. 4. Heritage features of surrounding neighbourhoods; Significant natural features, identity or image; Surrounding high-density development; and Possible integration with multi-use buildings on same site.
RESPONSIVENESS TO CHANGE
In the design of stations, emphasis shall be placed on flexibility, such that stations are capable of responding to changes generated either from within the system or external to it, with minimal disruption of on-going system operations.
JOINT VENTURE DEVELOPMENT

The planning and design of stations and station sites shall take into consideration the potential for joint development by encouraging the integration of stations into major residential and commercial developments where this will result in the generation of revenue, by means of rental agreements, density transfers, capital cost sharing and arrangements to lease air and subsurface rights. The likelihood and nature of development in the immediate vicinity of individual station sites shall be identified prior to the design of each station to ensure that integration into any development is consistent with GO Transits present and future interests.
400WP

CI-0103-02
Page
Design Principles
General
November 9, 2010
6 of 9
FARE COLLECTION AND VALIDATION

For the purpose of maximizing the convenience and efficiency of passenger flow through and around station facilities, all stations shall be designed on the basis of (a barrier-free, proof-of- payment), honour fare system.
STATION STAFFING
Operation of the GO Transit system includes periods when stations are not staffed. Some stations are designed to operate without regular staffing. Design must address the effectiveness, comfort, convenience and safety of the facility for customers at times when the station is not staffed.
INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE

A uniform, comprehensible and comprehensive system of information and guidance will be provide at stations, for the benefit of all transit patrons from the uninitiated to the regular system user. Information and guidance systems shall be treated as an integral element in station design.
PROVISIONS FOR PASSENGERS WITH SPECIAL NEEDS

Passengers with special needs include passengers who use mobility devices; have hearing or sight impairments; are elderly or ill, travel with children and/or strollers; or travel with cumbersome parcels or baggage. Provisions shall be made in the design of stations to ensure that the GO Transit system will be accessible to and usable by all groups of passengers with special needs, without compromising service to other passengers.
EASIER ACCESS DESIGN FEATURES

Easier Access Design Features are consistent with GO Transits goals for quality service with value-added amenities for all customers, and is not necessarily limited to the needs of customers with mobility disabilities. All Easier Access Design Features are to be considered at all new and renovated GO Rail Line Stations and Facilities, as appropriate, and are to be implemented in the design on a case by case basis. 400WP

CI-0103-02
Page
Design Principles
General
November 10, 2010
7 of 9
Performance requirements and associated details, as applicable, can be found throughout the Manual in their respective sections. These features are inherent in the Design Requirements Manual and are equal to or exceed existing industry standards and best practices. The Easier Access Design Features include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Delineated Pedestrian crosswalks and pavement markings; Designated accessible parking spaces and loading areas; Sidewalks with curb cuts to accommodate barrier-free access; Benches in stations and designated shelters on Train and Bus platforms and Park and Ride and Kiss N Ride areas; Stairways with accessible features, such as colour contrasted, non-slip stair nosing, handrails and detectable tactile flooring in advance of stairs; Power door operators and door guards throughout all accessible designated interior routes; Accessible washrooms; Floor grilles compatible with the use of canes and crutches and grating located away form the main pedestrian traffic flow; Barrier-free ticket sales counters and accessible ticket booth audio communication systems; Increased illumination near passenger loading and waiting areas; Accessible Bus Bays and platform areas; Signage for Station Way finding; Public Address System; Elevators with accessible features, where the station or facility requires an elevator; and Elevated Accessible Rail Platform (Mini Platform).
400WP

CI-0103-02
Page
Design Principles
General
November 9, 2010
8 of 9
MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

All stations shall be designed for the ease of on-going maintenance and cleaning programmes aimed at reducing operating costs. All equipment and supplies necessary for normal on-going maintenance and cleaning operations shall be readily available on each level of each station.
ADVERTISING
Station buildings and sites shall be designed to incorporate advertising in a coherent manner. Advertising shall be considered as an integral part of station design, in terms of media used, amount and location of space provided, electrical power and lighting required, and relationships to essential system signage.
ARTWORK
Certain architectural elements primarily serving the practical needs of the GO Transit system shall be designed with (extra) consideration for their aesthetics. The aesthetic design of these architectural elements shall be complementary to the objectives, function and technology of the transit system such that they become an integral part of the station layout, structure, materials, illumination, landscaping, or furnishings, rather than becoming applied features existing for their own purposes. An architect shall review the station for opportunities for artwork and shall make recommendations to GO Transit for review and approval.
PAY PARKING
GO Transit provides parking without charge to passengers, except as follows: 1. 2. Reserved parking in designated areas is an optional amenity for passengers. Provisions for future pay parking infrastructure may be required at certain sites, if requested by GO Transit, including at future open air parking garages.
400WP

CI-0103-02
Page
Design Principles
General
November 10, 2010
9 of 9
SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
Material and design features should reflect green initiatives for sustainable development. Although GO buildings are not LEEDS accredited, general compliance is encouraged.
KYOTO
GO Transit shall comply with the Montreal Protocol and Kyoto Accords. Standards to be determined (TBD). Consultants shall recommend Sustainable Development features for GO Transit consideration. GO Transit Reference Report: Sustainable Development and the Implications to the Ministry of Transportation MTO Sustainable Development Task Group Report, April 1990.
400WP
ENGINEERING DESIGN MANUAL GENERAL

EN-0104-01
Page
Elements
Standard Elements
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
A number of building elements are standardized for fixed facilities across the GO Transit system in order to create and maintain a unified image and standard of quality. Building Identification; Signage and Graphics; Information and Guidance; Lighting; Fare Equipment; Emergency and Security Equipment; Vending Machine Enclosures; Telephones/Telephone Kiosks; and Advertising Display Systems.
Stations in residential areas are also standardized in plan, section and elevations, subject to site constraints, municipal requirements. See Standard Station Plan.
400WP

EN-0105-01
Page
Amendment Procedures
Text
June 1, 2006
1 of 3
SUMMARY
This is an outline of the process by which an addition or an amendment to an Engineering Manual can be proposed, implemented and approved.
STANDARDS REVIEW COMMITTEE

GO Transit Engineering has a Standards Review Committee to deal with all issues related to Engineering Standards.
MANUAL CO-ORDINATOR
One representative from the Engineering Office shall be designated as the Manual Co-ordinator, with the following responsibilities: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Represent the Engineering Office at any standards or procedures meeting. Receive, review and edit the proposed draft addition/amendment. In consultation with the Standards Review Committee establish a distribution list. Co-ordinate review results. Identify standards or procedures requiring updating; expedite changes. Co-ordinate efforts with Insurance & Claims to ensure that standards or procedures are in the proper format and processed through the Insurance & Claims Office. The Manual Co-ordinator is responsible for ensuring that standards or procedures, which involve more than one group, are properly co-ordinated and developed in a systematic fashion.
INITIATOR
New or amended standards or procedures can be initiated by any user of the Manual.
NOTICE OF AMENDMENT
A standard form (See Notice of Amendment Form) should be completed by the Initiator.
400WP

EN-0105-01
Page
Text
June 1, 2006
2 of 3
The Initiator shall fill out the form as follows: 1. 2. Identify the standard or procedure to be amended. State both: (a) (b) 3. 4. the existing Section Number and Item Number; and the proposed new or revised wording.
Give justification for the proposed amendment. Identify: (a) (b) Any reference in existing standards or procedures by external groups that may be impacted by the change; and Briefly state the pros and cons of impact, such as: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) Operations improvements; Decreased operating costs; Improvements (safety, appearance, etc.); Streamlining approval procedures; and Reference attachments (if required), schematics, figures, sample forms, etc.
400WP

EN-0105-01
Page
Text
June 1, 2006
3 of 3
400WP
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL Version 1 July 1, 2010

Section Subject
CI-0104-01
Accessibility
Overview
ACCESSIBILITY
OVERVIEW "GO Stations and Terminals are (currently) deemed accessible when step-free access is provided from, and between, all public areas of a station to the accessible railcar or bus, respectively. Accessible facilities also incorporate GO Easier Access Features as deemed appropriate. (See definition of Easier Access Features detailed later in this section). GO provides amenities for customers with special needs. Customers with special needs include: customers who use mobility devices; have hearing or sight impairments; are elderly or ill; travel with children. These needs whether physical, sensory or cognitive disabilities are to be included at the planning and design stage of projects including renovations and new construction, rather than after a project has been completed and provisions are made in the design of stations and facilities to ensure that they all have an accessible route. The relevant performance design requirements for accessible features span all sections of the Design Requirements Manual (DRM) as appropriate and are governed by OBC, AODA and industry best practice. The design requirements should be tailored to suit all customer needs and site conditions.
G U I D I N G P R I N C I P L E S
GO Standards - Accessibility CORPORATE INFRASTRUCTURE
Page 1 of 11

Section Subject
CI-0104-02
Accessibility
Basis of Criteria
BASIS OF CRITERIA
Application: The DRM guidelines are applicable to the design, construction and alteration of all newly constructed and retrofitted facilities owned, leased or operated by GO and set minimum requirements for accessible design. Where design alternatives will provide substantially equivalent or greater access to GO facilities or where conflicts exist between the requirements of this design requirements manual and standards or legislation enacted by the federal or provincial governments, the most stringent requirements shall apply without compromising the minimum requirements of the current Ontario Building Code. All reasonable efforts should be made to exceed the most stringent minimum requirements. Maintenance: Typical elements installed on or adjacent to an accessible interior route and an accessible exterior route at GO facilities, requiring regular maintenance include: Timely removal of snow and ice; Timely repair of uneven surfaces and gaps between surfaces; Removal of furniture, fixtures and stored items that impede clearance spaces or corridor (e.g., lane, path and aisle) widths; Proper levelling of elevators and adjustment of door closers and elevator doors to prescribed limits; Repair / replacement of wayfinding signs and displays; Maintenance of prescribed lighting levels; and Proper maintenance of non-glare surfaces.
Emergency Evacuation Planning: Persons with disabilities who regularly occupy a facility should have access to Emergency Evacuation Plans in a range of formats, including, but not necessarily limited to, large text, Braille, tactile characters and electronic formats.
Page 2 of 11

Section Subject
CI-0104-03
Accessibility
Key Elements
G U I D I N G P R I N C I P L E S
KEY ELEMENTS Performance requirements of the key accessible elements defined below are detailed in all applicable sections of the DRM. Accessible Route: The accessible route is defined as a continuous unobstructed external and internal path connecting all accessible elements and spaces to enable personal barrier free mobility. At GO facilities, the accessible route is identified as the travel path to/from/between the barrier-free parking or drop off area, to the rail mini platform / bus platform. Features on the accessible route are to meet the conditions listed above and be accompanied with appropriate signage. Exterior accessible routes elements include parking access aisles, curb ramps, crosswalks at vehicular ways, walks and ramps at a minimum. Interior accessible routes elements include corridors, floors, ramps, elevators and clear floor space at fixtures. Accessible Access: An accessible entrance elements include the approach walk; the vertical access leading to the building (includes access to rail platforms); the building itself; vestibules, if provided; the entry door(s) or gate(s); and the hardware of the entry door(s) or gate(s). Site Entrance: An accessible pedestrian route(s), path(s) and sidewalks wide enough to accommodate wheelchairs, scooters, or other mobility devices and be connected with accessible municipal sidewalks, signals, crossings, etc. The accessible routes shall not be obstructed by poles, plants, bicycle racks, etc. At least one primary pedestrian entrance to GO Facilities shall be accessible with a no-step entrance and be connected to or integrated with an accessible interior route. If a pedestrian entrance from an enclosed parking garage to the building is provided, at least one entrance from the enclosed parking garage to the building shall be accessible. Loading/Unloading Zones: The passenger pick up and drop off area (Kiss n Ride) or station loading/unloading zone shall provide for barrier-free drop off that is parallel and adjacent to the pedestrian walkway or station plaza, protected from vehicular traffic with related accessible elements and signage and located on the shortest possible accessible route to the station or tunnel entrance.
Page 3 of 11

Section Subject
CI-0104-04
Accessibility
Easier Access Features
Accessible Bus Bay in Bus Loop: Depending on the type of accessible bus, wheelchair or scooter, loading devices may be located mid-way or toward the rear of the bus, and require unobstructed platform area. Platforms must be constructed with firm, non-slip material with curb-ramps and extensive signage, to identify bus bay numbers and destinations. Barrier-Free Parking: Parking spaces designated for persons with disabilities and accessible passenger pick-up areas that serve GO facilities should be located on the shortest possible circulation route to an accessible entrance (preferably 30m or less). Where the location of designated accessible parking spaces is not obvious, directional signage incorporating the International Symbol of Access shall be placed along the route leading to the designated parking spaces. The accessible route shall not require people to pass behind vehicles that may be backing out. Colour-contrasted bollards or curbs should be used to prevent parked vehicles from protruding into the accessible circulation route. Barrier-Free Curb Ramps: Shall be provided on the interconnecting route between the vehicular travel lanes including, but not limited to, pedestrian crossings, designated accessible parking space, customer drop-off areas/access aisles and the adjacent exterior walkway. Delineated Crosswalks: Shall be installed in conjunction with signs and barrier free curb ramps. Crosswalk markings provide guidance for pedestrians and alert road users of a designated pedestrian crossing point by defining and delineating paths. Unobstructed Pathways/Sidewalks, Walkways: Every accessible exterior and interior route shall have unobstructed minimum widths and where adjacent to a vehicular route be provided with a physical separation. Building Entrance: At least one entrance to GO facilities shall be mobility accessible and shall be located on a level that would provide access to elevators and/or ramps. Entrances shall be accessible to people using wheelchairs or scooters. The following features shall form part of an accessible entrance: Power assisted door operators, with guards; Accessible entrances shall be clearly marked with the International Symbol of Accessibility;
Page 4 of 11 CORPORATE INFRASTRUCTURE
GO Standards - Accessibility

Section Subject
CI-0104-04
Accessibility
Can be easily opened with one hand; Canopies or other sheltering devices where present, shall have adequate headroom; and Mats shall be level with the floor and door thresholds are bevelled so they do not create a tripping hazard.
Doors: Doors provided in an accessible entrance shall be identified by the International Symbol of Access and shall be equipped with barrier-free operators with adequate manoeuvring areas for front approach and appropriate minimum door widths. For multiple-leaf doorways, at least one active leaf shall be power assisted and the use of a centre post should be avoided. Door Guards: Power-assisted doors where they open into a barrier-free route of travel, shall be provided with cane-detectable guardrails or other barriers at right angles to the wall containing the door. Location and size of controls for power-assisted doors along the route of travel shall: be clearly visible before reaching the door with clear floor area and placement of the buttons to open the power assisted doors should be such that the passenger can continuously flow on their journey. Glazing: Clear glass doors, windows and sidelights at the entrances shall have a colour contrasting strip for detectability. Station Layout: Queuing areas shall be wide enough for people using mobility aids including electric wheelchairs and scooters. Public telephones, display shelves shall be accessible to and easy to use by patrons with various disabilities, e.g., wheelchair users, persons with low vision or hearing loss. Appropriate lighting shall be installed to ensure that people with vision disabilities may clearly identify colours, patterns and signage. Open-concept, accessible routes shall be marked by bright colour or textural changes at floor level, to provide directional cues for people with vision disabilities. There shall be no protruding objects or tripping hazards in accessible routes, and if so, they shall be clearly marked with a bright colour, a cane-detectable floor finish, or a guard. Corridors: Interior barrier-free routes shall be of adequate width for barrier free passage and turnaround, free from overhead and protrusion hazards. All floor surfaces shall be hard, level, slip-resistant, non-glare. Carpets shall be non-static and short, dense pile. Floor patterns shall not be visually confusing.
GO Standards - Accessibility CORPORATE INFRASTRUCTURE Page 5 of 11

Section Subject
CI-0104-04
Accessibility
Washrooms: Every floor that is served by washrooms shall have either a barrierfree individual washroom or a barrier-free water closet stall, with lavatory and accessories as required. An accessible stall shall be provided for each sex when integrated into regular washrooms or an accessible stand-alone unisex washroom shall be provided with washroom features accessible to people with a wide range of disabilities as appropriate. Finishes: Floor finishes shall be non slip and shall retain their slip resistance under both wet and dry conditions. Where floors are carpeted, the carpet is of firm, dense construction and easy for a wheelchair user to roll over without difficulty. Thresholds shall be bevelled to accommodate different floor materials. Walls in busy areas, corridors, ramps or staircases shall be finished in smooth, nonglossy, non-abrasive finishes. Colour of doors or door frames in hallways shall contrast with surrounding wall colours. Fire exit doors, fire hose cabinets and fire extinguishers shall be consistently coloured in a high contrast colour throughout the building, so that they are easily distinguishable. Tunnel or Platform Entrance: Access to the rail platform via tunnel shall be provided by an accessible interior route that may include independently operated passenger elevators or ramps. Grade Level Walk on to Platform/Station Plaza: Except where technically infeasible, there shall be an entrance on grade with the exterior ground surface; otherwise a ramp shall be used. Elevator: All floor levels above or below the main accessible level that are used by the public shall be accessible by elevators or ramps as applicable (see conditions for ramp installation). Ramps: Typical ramp installations shall provide access from grade to side platforms. Ramp installation may also be considered at locations where installation of an accessible passenger elevator is not possible due to island platform width restrictions. Adverse weather can cause slippery conditions on exterior ramps; based on the infrastructure availability at the location, the ramp surface may be heated or the ramp may be covered. Stairs: Shall be clearly marked, located near the major circulations routes and offset from the direct route of travel so that they are not a hazard and easy to find. Stairs shall have uniform riser heights and tread depths; with nosings, handrails, landings, etc., detectable by persons with vision loss.
Page 6 of 11

Section Subject
CI-0104-04
Accessibility
Tunnel/Overpass: Tunnels and overpasses connecting platforms shall have unobstructed interior barrier-free routes and turn-around spaces. Corridors shall be free from overhead and protrusion hazards. Mini Platform: Barrier-free access to the trains is provided by an accessible elevated mini-platform in close proximity to a shelter with automated door and a public telephone, and a covered canopy connection to and over the mini platform (Designated Waiting Area). Designated Waiting Area: The Designated Waiting Area (DWA) at GO rail line stations is to be located at the rail mini-platform. It is intended to be a convenience feature, whereby a customer can expect to avail assistance and have a reasonable sense of safety. The DWA has augmented functionality and visibility, at the rail line station mini-platform. Ticket Sales/TVM: All GO Ticket Sales counters and fare vending machines shall be barrier free to the public with clear floor area; heights and adequate manoeuvring space to approach them. Signage: Shall display the International Symbol of Accessibility; universal hearing disability symbols where equipment is available, e.g., TTY; and include Braille information. Signage shall include appropriate pictograms, wherever possible (e.g., on washroom doors); with large high contrast text, clear, light-coloured lettering or symbols on a dark background, or dark characters on a light background; and shall be mounted at a convenient height for both wheelchair users and people with vision disabilities. Wayfinding: Considerations include at a minimum, the positioning of entrances and exits, the use of colour contrasting, pattern direction on floors or walls, tactile markings, the arrangement of architectural features such as walls or columns, acoustics, and lighting to help direct people to their intended destination. Trailblazing: At facilities with multiple lots, where one or more parking areas may not all be connected to the accessible route, trailblazing is required at the local street level to provide direction to the proper lot. At Grade Pedestrian Crossings: Crossing approach shall be detectable at the boundary between the platform and the crossing to identify a safe stopping location outside of the clearance envelope. Fire and Life Safety: A fire policy and fire safety plan shall be in place for the evacuation of people with disabilities. Main exit routes and exit doors shall be easily
GO Standards - Accessibility CORPORATE INFRASTRUCTURE Page 7 of 11

Section Subject
CI-0104-04
Accessibility
accessed and used by people using mobility aids. Exit instructions shall be printed in large text, and mounted in an accessible, highly visible location. Fire alarms shall have both visual and audible signals.
Page 8 of 11

Section Subject
CI-0104-05
Accessibility
Easier Access Design Features
ACCESSIBILITY
EASIER ACCESS DESIGN FEATURES Easier Access Design Features are consistent with GOs goals for quality service with value-added amenities for all customers, and is not necessarily limited to the needs of customers with mobility disabilities. All Easier Access Design Features are to be considered at all new and renovated GO Rail Line Stations, Bus Terminals and Facilities, as appropriate, and are to be implemented in the design on a case-by-case basis. Performance requirements and associated details, as applicable, can be found throughout the Manual in their respective sections. These features are inherent in the Design Requirements Manual and are equal to or exceed existing industry standards and best practices. The EASIER ACCESS DESIGN FEATURES include: 1. 2. 3. 4. Delineated Pedestrian crosswalks and pavement markings; Designated accessible parking spaces and loading areas; Sidewalks with curb cuts to accommodate barrier-free access; Benches in stations and designated shelters on Train and Bus platforms and Park and Ride and Kiss N Ride areas; Stairways with accessible features, such as colour contrasted, non-slip stair nosing, handrails and detectable tactile flooring in advance of stairs; Power door operators and door guards throughout all accessible designated interior routes;
5.
6.
Corporate Branding CORPORATE INFRASTRUCTURE
Page 9 of 11

Section Subject
CI-0104-05 7. 8.
Accessibility
Accessible washrooms; Floor grilles compatible with the use of canes and crutches and grating located away form the main pedestrian traffic flow; Barrier-free ticket sales counters and accessible ticket booth audio communication systems; Increased illumination near customer loading and waiting areas; Accessible Bus Bays and platform areas; Signage for Station Way finding; Public Address System; Elevators with accessible features, where the station or facility requires an elevator; and Elevated Accessible Rail Platform (Mini-Platform).
9.
10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
15.
Page 10 of 11

Section Subject
CI-0104-05
Accessibility
Page 11 of 11
DESIGN REQUIREMENT MANUAL ENGINEERING

EN-0201-01
Page
Introduction
Overview (of Tab)
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
SUMMARY
This Tab 2 is a guide to the Engineering design of GO Transit fixed facilities in terms of the following sections: Site Development Heavy Rail Civil and Structural Utilities Mechanical Electrical
400WP

EN-0202-01
Page
Site Development
General Design Criteria
June 1, 2006
1 of 3
OVERVIEW
The scope of this section pertains to the following facilities: Rail stations; Bus Terminals; Bus Rapid Transit (BRT) Stations; Bus Garages; Train layover facilities (electrical substations and wayside power plug-ins); Rail Service Facilities (train storage and servicing); and Regional GO Transit Operations facilities.
BASIS OF CRITERIA
This section is subject to the following Design Guidelines, and the approval of all authorities having jurisdiction. 1. The current GO Transit Environmental Assessment Class Document. Issues to be addressed: 2. Mitigation of adverse impacts; Hazardous Waste Disposal; Issues of soils and ground water: geotechnical investigation; Storm Water Management; and Noise and vibration abatement.
Municipal zoning: Site Plan Agreements do not apply to a provincial Crown Agency such as GO Transit, including development charges and levies;
400WP

EN-0202-01
Page
Site Development
June 1, 2006
2 of 3
GO Transit will make an effort to generally comply with municipal requirements: land-use, grading, right-of-way, easement, drainage, utility, screeninglandscaping, traffic control improvements, and signage, etc.; and GO Transit will assist the Consultant in dealings with the Municipality regarding zoning issues.
3.
Ontario Provincial Standards, MTO Drainage Manuals, and the MOE Storm Water Management Practices, Planning and Design Manual, and the Ontario Water Resources Act. Railway Standards shall apply as follows: CN Rail format contract documents are required for work on their R.O.W. They include Safety Guidelines which are applicable also to the Consultants access to the R.O.W.; CP Rail allows GO Transit contract documents for work on the CP R.O.W., and also has Safety Guidelines, applicable to the Consultants access to the R.O.W.; TTR (Toronto Terminal Railway) standards apply within the Union Station Rail Corridor; and The Consultant shall verify the ownership of rail corridors applicable to the assigned project.
4.
5.
Fundamental Planning, Engineering and Architectural site design principles shall apply: Site user safety, pedestrian circulation, and security; Traffic maneuverability: flow and distribution, including for emergency vehicles; Reserved Parking shall be located in close proximity to the station building and platform access; Easements and Rights-of-Way pertaining to vehicular or pedestrian movement, hydro or gas lines, drainage, etc.; Optimum arrangement of utilities; Consideration of adjacent properties and infrastructures including future development;
400WP

EN-0202-01
Page
Site Development
June 1, 2006
3 of 3
Consideration of maintenance requirements, including snow clearing/storage; Principles of Sustainable Development (maximized land use), preservation of significant existing topography and landscaping; Site appearance (landforms and landscaping, non-glare lighting, fencing, decorative paving and overall visual compatibility with the neighbourhood suburban or urban fabric); and Optimum economic integration of all of the above.
ROAD DESIGN CRITERIA

Specific road design criteria apply in accordance with the following: Transport Association of Canada (TAC) Urban Supplement to the Geometric Design Guide for Canadian Roads; Transport Association of Canada (TAC) - Turning Vehicle Templates; Ontario Building Code (OBC) as applicable to fire hydrants and fire routes; Local Municipality: issues pertaining to site access, curb cuts, traffic signals, pedestrian crossings, bike lanes, etc.; Ontario Provincial Standards: curbs, fencing, manholes, catch basins, concrete barrier curbs, bumper curbs and bollards; and MTO: line marking specifications.
SITE LAYOUT
In developing a site layout, the convenience and safety of the users or passengers, along with the economy of the overall layout, shall be the prime considerations.
400WP
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL ENGINEERING

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
1 of 22
SCOPE
A typical GO rail station site comprises the following key components: Site access; Rail platform(s) including mini platform(s) and bus platforms, if applicable; Platform access including pedestrian tunnel or bridge and associated stairs, elevators and service rooms; Platform maintenance access; Station building(s); Rail shelters; Bus passenger shelter(s); Parking facilities, including Passenger Drop-off and Pick-up (Kiss & Ride) areas; Landscaped areas (berms, swales, retaining walls, planter beds, trees, lawns, rockeries, etc.) For Landscaping see Tab 3 - Architecture; and Fences and signs. For signs see Signage Manual.
SITE LAYOUT PRIORITIES

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Emergency vehicle access including fire-trucks. Bus access. Passenger drop off and pick up facilities (Kiss & Ride). Vehicle and pedestrian access including barrier-free requirements. Taxi waiting area. Parking facilities including Reserved Parking. Accessibility to nearby community facilities. Bicycle access (bike path).
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
2 of 22
Maintenance and service vehicle access and parking, including platform maintenance access. Snow clearing and snow storage areas. Fencing (both site and platform). Landscaping/screening. Illumination, utilities and storm water management. Acoustical buffers.
The exact order and balance of these priorities may vary, based on the modal split (percent of walk-ins, cyclists, drop off and pick-up, park and ride, and bus passengers).
VEHICULAR CIRCULATION
A basic objective of the GO Transit System is the integration of rail and bus and other modes of transportation. In order to implement this objective, the station facilities should be designed to promote convenient and efficient transfer of patrons between modes. Separate access roads for buses and cars are preferred. The entrance for buses should be distanced from the car entrances to minimize peak hour traffic congestion. Priority shall be given to buses and kiss n ride traffic.
SPECIFIC CRITERIA
Specific criteria for vehicular circulation on the site are as follows: Transportation Association of Canada (TAC) Manual of Geometric Design Standards. For bus lanes, bays, platforms, etc. see Bus Terminal Sites; Vehicle circulation elements shall be designed in accordance with the TAC Guide, TAC Urban Supplement, TAC Turning Vehicle Templates, and OPSD Standards, as well as OBC Fire Access Route Criteria; Layout and widths of main access roadways should allow for emergency vehicles, including buses to pass in the event of a stalled vehicle;
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
3 of 22
At designated stations, the bus bays, the bus layover bays and turning space shall be designed to accommodate articulated buses; Where a passenger drop-off and pick-up area is provided including for lift equipped vehicles, it shall be free flowing and give easy access to station entrances and exits. It should face the station building or secondary entrance to the platform; Curbs at station buildings are to be no stopping areas. They are reserved for emergency vehicles; Where disabled passenger loading zones are required as an exception to the above no stopping, curb-ramps shall be in accordance with OBC requirements; and Guardrails shall be provided where access roads and parking lots are adjacent to steep slopes or ditches.
PEDESTRIAN AND BICYCLE ACCESS

Principal pedestrian access shall provide dedicated routes for pedestrians wishing to walk to and from the station area. Pedestrians should not be required to cross the parking lot in order to access the station. Design sidewalks and pathways to create continuous direct connections between station and surrounding areas. Ensure pedestrian pathways are separated from vehicular traffic whenever possible. Walkways shall be minimum 1.5 m wide. Sidewalk and walkways shall be constructed of hard and sustainable level materials that are slip resistant and capable of clearing during winter months. Ensure curb cuts at all crossings to enable access for people with mobility issues. Incorporate an unbroken tactile strip leading from major access points into the station and various waiting areas. Provide dedicated bicycle lanes along primary vehicular access points leading to and from the station plaza. Depending upon different station configurations, it may be preferable to introduce a separate bicycle entrance. The width of curb-side bike lane shall be no less than 1.5 m. Bike route shall be distinguished with specially coloured paving or line painting.
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
4 of 22
Ensure bicycle access routes are free of obstacles such as curbs, stairs and escalators. Where barriers are unavoidable, provision of bicycle ramps shall be considered.
SHARED PEDESTRIAN/CYCLISTS PATHS

DESIGN USE Shared pedestrian/cyclists paths are to be used, on a site-by-site case, where it is determined to promote a safe and visible alternate mode of transportation at stations. Shared paths should provide connectivity from the main municipal access points, surrounding neighbourhoods and to existing recreational paths, where applicable. Shared paths are to be implemented in conjunction with and leading to bicycle shelters and racks. DESIGN INTENT A shared path is considered to be a single lane of travel, delineated for pedestrians and a single lane of travel delineated for cyclists. Newly constructed shared-use paths should be built to provide access for people with disabilities and provide sufficient width to accommodate the potential condition of two (2) wheelchairs having to pass, side by side. The shared path should have a centreline pavement marking, to reduce the cyclists perception of freedom to manoeuvre between lanes. Key features to be considered include trail access points, grade, cross-slope, street crossings, curb ramp design, railings, and signage. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS The shared path width should be minimum 3 m (10 ft) wide. Surfaces must be constructed of hard and sustainable level materials that are firm, stable, and slip-resistant. Grades should generally be less than 5 percent. Level landings or rest areas should be provided at appropriate intervals on grades steeper than five percent. Cross-slopes for drainage or super elevated curves should be no greater than two percent.
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
5 of 22
Bicycle supported drainage solutions (i.e., out of path of travel). The shared path should have a 100 mm solid, standard yellow, painted centreline pavement marking. SIGNAGE For signage details refer to GO Signage Design Requirements Guidelines.
BIKE SHELTERS
Cycling customers are provided the convenience of covered bicycle shelters for storing their bicycles while using the GO rail and bus services and promoting alternative green methods of transportation. Bicycle Shelters at GO facilities, shall be located in highly visible well lit locations to discourage theft or vandalism. Video cameras in these areas can increase bicycle security as well as personal safety. Ensure bicycle path and bicycle shelters do not conflict with vehicular traffic and pedestrians. Concrete pad should be provided as a base for the Bicycle Shelter. For Bicycle Shelter details refer to Standard Drawings.
AUTOMOBILE ACCESS
The required number of access roads is one for approximately 300 parking spaces. Access roads shall be 4.5 m wide for single lane one-way traffic, 7.0 m wide for two-way traffic and 10.5 m wide for three-lane access roads (where a left turn lane is required). Parking lot aisles shall be 7.0 m wide. Adjustments in aisle widths to increase parking efficiencies should be considered wherever possible to allow customer parking where tolerable, within acceptable typical parking lot design and traffic engineering design principles. See Figures for aisle width layouts.
PARKING LOTS
Parking layouts shall respond to property size and site geometry. Parking structures and surface parking shall be designed as an integral component of the coordinated site plan
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
6 of 22
and architectural theme. Parking layout configurations should look at maximizing parking while maintaining a safe environment where possible, taking into consideration typical customer vehicular travel patterns. Awkward, irregular gaps in parking layouts should be filled in wherever possible. Where no parking is possible within a parking layout, adjustments to include softscape landscape items planters etc must be considered. The dimensions provided below are typical requirements, and designers should avail opportunities to maximize parking in layouts wherever possible. Standard parking stalls shall be 2.5 m wide and 5.5 m long. Stalls abutting curbs shall be 4.5 m long with a 1.0 m allowance for vehicle overhang. Parallel parking stalls shall be 3 m wide x 7 m long. Material for 1 m overhang shall be determined by implementing progressive, sustainable and environmentally friendly design practices and solutions. Refer to Line Marking Section to see appropriate Figures.
ISLANDS/CURBS
The use of curbed islands shall be minimized to facilitate snow clearing. Line-marked islands are preferred. Curbs shall be restricted to the perimeter, access/egress, bus-loop platforms and pedestrian walk areas around station buildings, and to facilitate traffic flow and control. Islands between access roads and parking stalls shall be 2.5 m wide between curb faces, minimum, including a 1.0 m section for vehicle overhang. The remaining width may accommodate either pedestrian circulation or vegetation, as directed by GO.
SIGNS AND POSTS

The ends of parking rows shall be terminated with sign posts. See Figures. The Consultant is to provide the basic sign-post layout and sign requirements during the Detail Design stage. Contract documents shall include supply and installation of signs. Site identification signs and access road signs shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor. GO to provide Sign drawings accordingly. For other signs, see Signage Manual.
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
7 of 22
BARRIER FREE PARKING

Parking lots shall have the minimum number of designated parking spaces for passengers with disability in accordance with the following table. GO will add spaces in response to passenger demand. Number of Designated Spaces* Total Number of Parking Spaces Percentage Formula 4% 3% 2% 1.5% 1% Minimum Number of Spaces 2 4 6 8 10
1 100 101 200 201 500 501 1,000 1,001 more
* The greater of the resultant Number of Designated Spaces shall be used. Each designated Barrier Free parking space shall be 3.0 m wide and 5.5 m long plus a 1.5 m wide barrier-free access aisle. It shall be clearly marked with a sign bearing the International Symbol of Accessibility. The space shall be located close to the station building entrance and/or rail/bus platform access. Note that two (2) designated spaces share one access aisle with cut curb with detectible surface and are equal to three (3) standard spaces. If there are more than two (2) designated spaces adjacent to each other there shall be low curb with detectible surfaces along the entire length of multiple designated spaces (no curb ramp for each unloading area). At multiple designated Barrier-Free parking spots, each parking spot shall have a bollard with International Sign of Accessibility. Refer to Figure. Line Marking and Bollard Location. Designated Parking Layouts EN0202-06.
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
8 of 22
SCOOTER/MOTORCYCLE PARKING
Parking space should be efficiently used by introducing scooters and motorcycle parking spots. These spots shall always use space that it is otherwise unusable and where cars cannot fit, should be free for motorcycles and scooters. Motorcycle/Scooter parking should be placed in an ideal spot with priority second only to that of barrier-free parking and Kiss & Ride users. Parking stalls for motorcycle and scooter shall be concrete base with steel reinforcing. Each parking space should be min. 1.5 m wide and 2.5 m long. Line painting is not required for the area designated to motorcycle/scooter parking. A refuge area designated either by pavement markings or a raised island shall be adjacent to motorcycle and scooter parking, for the purposes of protecting the rider during dismounting and mounting form the motorcycle/scooter ride.
RESERVED AND STAFF PARKING

Provisions shall be made in the planning and design stage of various facilities to accommodate Reserved Parking for passengers and staff.
PASSENGER DROP-OFF & PICK-UP

Short term parking facilities for passenger drop-off and pick-up shall be provided at stations with parking lots. The design should be a lineal, parallel layout, sized on the basis of passenger loading and vehicle projections, allowing a space 3.0 m wide x 7.0 m long for each vehicle. Where possible, provide more lanes of shorter length to allow for easier vehicle access and exit. Orient vehicle circulation in a counter-clockwise direction to eliminate vehicle cross over. Drop-off and pick-up area should also accommodate the physical requirements of passengers with disabilities. Passenger drop-off and pick-up design shall include a 3 m wide hatched area for lift equipped vehicles.
TAXI FACILITIES
Taxi facilities shall be part of the passenger drop-off and pick-up area, or as directed by GO, if designated spaces are required.
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
9 of 22
BUS LOOPS
See Figure (pg. 19 of this section) for typical rail station Bus Loop. See Bus Terminal Sites section for bus bay design. Bus loops and bus bays shall be concrete paved. Pedestrian crosswalks shall not be located where buses may require back-up movements.
RAMPS
Where pedestrian ramps are required in a barrier-free path of travel, they shall be in accordance with the Ontario Building Code. Vehicular ramps with excessive slopes may require snow melting system.
CURB RAMPS
Curb ramps shall be provided where walks cross access roads, at barrier-free designated parking stalls, and within a barrier-free path of travel, as per the OBC and the OPSD. Directional grooves at 300 mm centres shall be provided, in accordance with OPSD 310.030.
STAIRS
The following pertains to tunnel and exterior stairs, including stairs remote from buildings. RISERS 150 mm preferred. Where a toe space is not required according to the OBC, the riser face shall be vertical. TREADS 305 mm preferred, with inserts as noted below. INSERTS Cast-in safety inserts 50+/-10 mm wide on an extruded aluminum or carborundum base with epoxy or abrasive filler. Refer to CSA B651-04 and CNIB Guidelines for contrasting and slip resistance factors.
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development NOSINGS
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
10 of 22
Tread nosings to be rounded, 12.7 mm radius. For specially surfaced stairs refer to Tab 3, Architectural. DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE All stairs shall have cane-detectable warning surface at the top of stairs as well as on intermediate landings. The detectable surface shall extend the full width of the stair tread. Refer to EN-0303-03 for general positioning of detectable surfaces, except that material shall be suitable for exterior applications. The cane-detectable warnings on this surface shall be colour and texture contrasted with the adjacent surfaces. Raised ridges shall be placed perpendicular to the direction of travel.
EDGE DRAIN Tunnel stairs shall have concrete drainage side-gutters 40 mm deep by 80 mm wide, continuous with the tunnel floor gutters. Gutter drains shall not be located at the bottom of tunnel stairs or in front of service doors or elevator doors. HANDRAILS Exterior stair and ramp handrails shall be smooth galvanized steel pipe, minimum 38 mm, maximum 51 mm diameter, 915 mm above nosings or ramps. All anchorage and fittings shall also be galvanized. Tunnel stair or bridge stair handrails to be stainless steel 38 mm diameter, at a height of 915 mm above nosings. All anchorage and fittings shall also be stainless steel. Handrail ends shall extend in accordance with the OBC and the OBC Illustrated Guide, also for exterior stairs. GUARDRAILS Guardrails to be 38 mm diameter minimum, galvanized steel pipe.
BICYCLES
Bicycle paths are encouraged and shall fit in with overall site layout. Space near the station shall be designed for bicycle storage racks. Allow approximately 2.5 m x 2.5 m plus access aisles per rack.
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
11 of 22
PEDESTRIAN TUNNELS AND BRIDGES

To meet railway standards and the standards of other authorities having jurisdiction: See Civil and Structural Section. See also Tab 3, Architectural.
SITE PREPARATION
GRADING Grading shall be designed to avoid excessive slopes and shall be integrated with surrounding landforms to provide slope stabilization and positive flows to the drainage system. Where existing landforms or vegetation are to be preserved, appropriate protection and construction controls shall be designed. SLOPE PROTECTION All unpaved slopes shall be stabilized with appropriate hydro-seeding to avoid erosion. The preferred slope is 3:1, maximum 2:1. RETAINING WALLS Where retaining walls are adjacent to buildings, the material shall be compatible with the architecture. See the Civil and Structural Section.
ACCESS ROADS
Traffic Studies shall be done where required to determine the need for controlled access, traffic lights, turning lanes, and impacts on municipal road infrastructure, including associated costs or cost sharing, and project scheduling. Refer to the TAC Guide, the TAC Urban Supplement, and the TAC Turning Vehicle Templates, the OPSD Standards, the OBC Fire Route Criteria, and municipal standards where applicable, for the following: Curves; Radii; Superelevation;
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
12 of 22
Sight distances and stopping sight distances; Vertical and horizontal alignments and clearances; and Gradients at intersections.
RAIL PLATFORMS
Sealed passenger platforms shall conform to Railway clearances. Refer to Heavy Rail Clearance Diagram. Generally on tangent track, platforms shall be side platforms and/or island platforms. Side platform size: 3.6 m-4.9 m x 315 m. Island platform size: 7.4 m x 315 m. Platform ends may be tapered due to track convergence. For curbs see Civil and Structural section. For stairwells and shelters, see Tab 3, Station Buildings Section and relevant Figures. Side platform shelters may be projected beyond platform paving into sodded areas. Generally, platform cross slopes shall be 0.5% to 1.0%. Side platforms shall drain away from the tracks. Where platforms slope longitudinally with the tracks, the floor elevations of elevator, stair enclosure and shelter buildings shall be raised, and the longitudinal platform slope shall be transitionally adjusted at door locations to prevent water entry. Electrical handwells shall not be located at platform building doors, nor elsewhere in pedestrian circulation pathways. See also Drainage catch basins. Where site conditions permit, side platforms should be designed with ramps as an accessible means of egress onto site grade level.
MINI-PLATFORMS
LAYOUT Rail platforms shall have sealed raised mini-platforms for barrier-free access to railcars. They shall typically be located 122.5 m to centreline, from the locomotive end of platform. Location may be adjusted to suit existing physical conditions or restrictions as determined by rail operations. Mini-platforms shall be at least 5 m from the base of the ramps to stair/elevator enclosures, shelter, and light standards to accommodate movements of snow clearing equipment. For lateral clearances refer to the Heavy Rail Clearance Diagram. For mini-platform curbs see Civil and Structural Section. For Line Marking Layout, see Figure (0202-06). 400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
13 of 22
For Finishes, see Tab 3, Exterior Finishes.
PASSENGER SHELTERS
Passenger shelters shall be provided on or adjacent to rail and bus platforms as directed by GO. Shelters can either be architecturally designed to match existing building features or be a standards GO shelter. Also refer to shelters under the Station Buildings section of the Architectural Tab.
STATION BUILDING
For General Arrangement Plan purposes the station building site area shall be at least 4 times the building footprint, to accommodate walkways, street furniture, and landscaping. For the station building and ancillary buildings see Tab 3 ARCHITECTURAL, (shelters, stair/elevator buildings, etc.) Street furniture comprises benches, newspaper boxes, salt bins, waste containers, info boards, pay telephones, bike racks and ticketing machines. The minimum building apron clearance shall be 3 m from the roof overhang to a curb.
PARKING STRUCTURES
Open air parking garage design standards - TBD.
DESIGNATED WAITING AREA (DWA)

The rail platform designated waiting area (DWA) is the area in proximity to the barrier-free coach (the 5th coach from the locomotive end, which has a train crew member aboard). The DWA features to be provided are: Pay telephone; Increased illumination (adjacent to light pole); Shelter with one of the doors to be power-assisted; DWA related signage; and CCTV coverage.
Designated waiting areas may be requested in parking lots in vicinity of bus stops or as determined by GO.
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
14 of 22
FIGURE TYPICAL CROSS SECTION FOR SHARED PEDESTRIAN/CYCLIST PATHS
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
15 of 22
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
16 of 22
FIGURE ACCESS ROAD AND PARKING INTERFACE (GUIDELINE ONLY)
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
17 of 22
FIGURE PARKING LAYOUT (GUIDELINE ONLY)
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
18 of 22
FIGURE PASSENGER DROP-OFF AND PICK-UP LAYOUT (GUIDELINE ONLY)
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
19 of 22
FIGURE BUS LOOP (GUIDELINE ONLY)
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
20 of 22
FIGURE MINI-PLATFORM LOCATION
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
21 of 22
FIGURE LOCOMOTIVE END OF TRAIN CONSIST
400WP

CI-0202-02
Page
Site Development
Rail Station Sites
April 30, 2012
22 of 22
FIGURE: DESIGNATED WAITING AREA
400WP

CI-0202-03
Page
Site Development
Bus Terminal Sites
April 30, 2012
1 of 11
SCOPE
The Site Development Standards for various Bus Facilities are generally identical to the Rail Station Sites Standards, excluding rail references. There are several different GO Bus Facilities: Maintenance Facilities Bus Storage Facility Bus Terminals BRT Lots Carpool Lots Park and Ride Lots
The key elements to bus facility design vary for each type of facility.
GO DESIGN VEHICLES
GO has two (2) types of highway coaches; single deck and double deck. The TAC Design Vehicle requirements should be used as an overall guideline, but GO vehicles should govern the criteria and design. When designing bus related facilities, the MCI model shall be used for bus length and width, and the double deck coach shall govern for the height. Some GO facilities may have to accommodate local transit or other carriers, which may have their own specific design requirements. The bus route, movement, and turning radius should be designed to meet performance requirements, and ensure safe and smooth vehicle movements with minimal restrictions. All GO buses have a Bicycle Rack mounted at the front of the bus, and when deployed adds an additional 1.0 m to the bus length. The rack will accommodate two (2) bicycles. GO coach fleet is fully accessible and will seat two (2) wheelchairs.
400WP

CI-0202-03
Page
Site Development
Bus Terminal Sites
April 30, 2012
2 of 11
There are two (2) models for the GO coaches. Single Coach Model MCI 2.591 m wide, 13,843 m long with an additional 0.3 for bike rack stored (add 1.0 m for deployed bicycle rack). Double Deck Coach Model ADL 2.520 m wide, 13.198 m long with an additional 0.3 m for bike rack stored and the height is 4.255 m. (add 1.0 for deployed bicycle rack). Accessible Highway buses require a platform side clearance of 3.0 m minimum for their exterior wheelchair lifts, and bus-height headroom for 1.5 m along the platform edge. Highway buses have one front door and most have ability to kneel, lowering the front end. Their wheelchair lifts are located as follows: Double Deck Bus at the front door; and MCI Model lift is located off the centre, towards the front of the bus.
The municipality may request GO to provide bus stops or bus bays on a municipal road. For street stops, GO design requirements shall govern and MTO design guidelines shall be considered. Bus pull off stops are preferred.
BUS RADII DESIGN GUIDELINES

1. Turning Template The following criteria shall be considered when using the turning template guidelines: Design Vehicle GO Bus Model MCI D4500; Bus speed 15 kmp/h; Bicycle rack deployed; Steering wheel turned all of the way to the Right stop; Lateral clearance of 0.5 m; and Bus turn does not begin until the rear wheels have reached the TangentCurve (TC) point of the inside face of curb or other obstruction.
400WP

CI-0202-03
Page
Site Development 2. Applications
Bus Terminal Sites
April 30, 2012
3 of 11
The design bus turning template eshall be used where the operating speed of the bus is low, 15 kmp/h, and sharp short turns can be made without rider discomfort, for the design of surface features such as: Straight and saw-toothed platforms; Bus bay entrances; Bus loops; Entrance roads; and Bus maintenance facilities.
STRAIGHT PLATFORM
Straight platform layout requires minimum driveway width but maximum length. The platform is kept to a practical length by allowing the rear corner of the bus to be offset from the platform curb by approximately 0.45 m.
SAWTOOTH PLATFORM
A sawtooth platform provides minimum length requirements but requires an increase in driveway width. The nominal driveway width (8.8 m) is determined by summing the clearance path of the bus (7.3 m), the additional bus clearance (0.5 m) and the indent depth (1.0 m). The nominal driveway width is the average of the high and low points of the sawtooth and allows a direct comparison, with the straight platform.
PLATFORM SELECTION
Where the bus driveway length is the limiting factor, the full sawtooth should be used. Conversely, if bus driveway width is the limiting factor, the straight platform should be used. If the limiting factor is a combination of driveway width and length, the appropriate partial indent sawtooth platform should be used. Refer Figure for bus bay guidelines for D4500 bus with bike rack deployed.
400WP

CI-0202-03
Page
Site Development
Bus Terminal Sites
April 30, 2012
4 of 11
PLATFORM LAYOUT
The factors affecting the layout of areas for bus platforms are the turning space and turning radius. In the design of off-street terminals, on street bus bays, and roadways, these factors are of prime importance to the operating efficiency and safety of the layout. Vehicle turning requirements shall be in accordance with GO Guidelines. A clearance of 1.5 m should be provided between each (inner and outer) line given by the Design Vehicle Turning Radius and any fixed object that a bus could collide with. Fixed objects should include curbs.
CLEARANCES
The vertical clearance height between driveway pavement and underside of overhead structures shall be 5.3 m minimum in any bus travel area. Overhead canopies, or other roof assemblies, shall be setback 2.0 m minimum from the face of the curb at bus platforms. The supporting structure of a canopy, or any other structure, shall have a minimum horizontal clearance of 3.0 m from the face of curb at bus platforms. The horizontal clearances are set to allow for wheelchair lift deployment. The bus platform curb shall be 150 mm above the bus driveway pavement level.
ACCESSIBLE STREET BUS STOPS

The municipality may request GO to provide bus stops or bus bays on a municipal road. For street stops GO design requirements shall govern and MTO design guidelines shall be considered. Bus pull off stops are preferred. The design requirements of an on street bus stop include the following elements as listed below: Placement Stops shall be at visible locations; publicly accessible and be able to serve travel in both directions. There must be an accessible paired stop that allows the costumers to return to the same point where they boarded the bus. Shall be located 1.5m from an approaching driveway and NOT located directly in front of a door of residential property. Shall incorporate CPTED security and placement design principles. 400WP

CI-0202-03
Page
Site Development
Bus Terminal Sites
April 30, 2012
5 of 11
Barrier Free Path to Station Buildings and Parking Lots In addition to the above, a barrier-free access path is required to and from the on street bus stops and any public areas at the station (e.g., station building, parking lot, rail platforms, etc.) and other designated barrier free access, e.g., a sidewalk to and from a public street to a walk in GO Station. The minimum accepted width of a barrier-free access path is 1.5m. Clear Accessible Area A clear accessible area is needed to accommodate the deployment of the bus lift device plus the roll off/roll on area for wheeled mobility aids. The clear accessible area is required to accommodate the two types of buses GO will utilize in their accessible bus routes, with one having a front door folding ramp and the other a mid-bus door lift. The clear accessible area must meet the following requirements: Be 3000mm deep x 6000mm in length (as a minimum). The front edge of the required space shall be from the front of the bus bay/stop (A bus bay is a commonly used term for bus terminals and loops will also include a bus stop (commonly used term for on street stop) unless stated otherwise.) Maximum gradient shall be1:40 for the bus stop and 1:12 for any ramps. Be clear and free of any obstructions including bus bay markers. Be provided at every bus bay/stop so as to allow Bus Operations full flexibility to assign any GO bus route or local bus transit route to any bus bay/stop. The clear accessible area shall have a clear height for its full area so it is not infringed by elements such as bus shelter overhangs, lighting fixtures, and sign blades. etc. Note: final position of the clear accessible area shall be reviewed with GO Transits Bus Operations Staff representative. Must incorporate a landing area, adjacent to the sidewalk for customers using wheelchairs or mobility aids (WMAs) as part of the overall clear accessible area. Bus Platform Bus platforms shall: Incorporate a firm, level surface, and not be impeded by adjacent street furniture, such as dispensers, vending machines, waste boxes, planters, posts, signs and guy wires. Have a 90 degree upright curb of 0.15m. Waiting areas at bus stops should be, at least 3000 mm wide by 6000 mm long, in order to accommodate waiting persons (clear accessible area) For persons who have visual limitations, a tactile warning surface at least 610 mm deep should be provided at the edge of the platform ( TBD)
400WP

CI-0202-03
Page
Site Development
Bus Terminal Sites
April 30, 2012
6 of 11
Bus Stop Classification The classification of on street accessible bus stops shall follow the following criteria:
Clear Accessible Area Shelter Street Furniture Stop ID with Sche dule Infor matio n Yes
Accessible Stop Classification
Information Display Board/Map
Electronic Customer Information
Lighting
Type A
A firm, level surface ;3000mm deep x 6000mm in length A firm, level surface ;3000mm deep x 6000mm in length
No
Outdoor seating
No
No
Adjacent stre lighting
Type B
Accessible bus shelter, heated, except for on street bus shelters Accessible bus shelter, heated,
Seating within shelter; Waste receptacle; bike parking. Refer Standard Drawings and Specs for Bus shelter specifications Seating within shelter; Waste receptacle; bike parking; payphone. Refer Standard Drawings and Specs for BRT shelter specifications
Yes
Within Shelter
No
Lighting integrated in the shelter
Type C
A firm, level surface ;3000mm deep x 6000mm in length
Yes
Within Shelter
Yes
Lighting integrated in the shelter
The appropriate level of amenity is determined by Bus Operations based on ridership demand and other variables. Bus Shelter Features Accessible Bus Shelters, where provided, shall: Be installed or positioned as to provide an accessible exterior route from the shelter to adjacent sidewalks, streets, or pedestrian paths and the passenger zone; Have a minimum clear floor area that is 1500mm wide and 3000 mm deep entirely within the perimeter of the shelter to accommodate a wheelchair or a scooter; and,
400WP

CI-0202-03
Page
Site Development
Bus Terminal Sites
April 30, 2012
7 of 11
Provide a lighting level of not less than 100 lx, provided by adjacent street lighting or lighting integrated into the shelter, to provide safe access for persons with disabilities from sidewalks and bus stops to nearby facilities and amenities. All glazed panels surrounding bus shelters shall incorporate decals, and other safety features. Should be set back from the curb by atleast 1.5m with openings oriented to the curb. Detailed specifications for bus stop and BRT shelters are located within Standard Drawings and Specifications. Stop Identification Pole and Sign Stop identification pole and sign are the main means of identifying a bus stop; therefore, it needs to be clearly visible. Sign should give basic information, such as routes served (schedules) and direction. The stop identification pole should be located at a standard or uniform position at all stops, to the maximum extent possible, as they serve as a point of reference for those with disabilities, particularly the visually impaired to determine the approximate location of the front entrance of the bus. The stop pole shall be located 1.0m from the back of the face of the curb. The design of each pole and sign should be consistent throughout the transit system as to provide a strong visual identity for the system and to provide clarity to transit users. Other Clearances The vertical clearance height between driveway pavement and underside of any overhead structures shall be 5.3 m minimum in any bus travel area within terminals and stations. For outdoor accessible bus stops, a vertical clearance of 4.5m shall be maintained. Overhead canopies, or other roof assemblies, shall be setback 2.0 m minimum from the face of the curb at bus platforms. The supporting structure of a canopy, or any other structure, shall have a horizontal clearance of 3.0 m from the face of curb at bus platforms. The bus platform curb shall be 150 mm above the bus driveway pavement level.
EMERGENCY VEHICLES
Provisions shall be made for access by emergency vehicles. Designated fire access routes, if required, shall meet OBC and local fire department requirements.
400WP

CI-0202-03
Page
Site Development
Bus Terminal Sites
April 30, 2012
8 of 11
RELATED FACILITIES
Bus Layover Bays: to have rear concrete roll curb to indicate back up stop position. Dispatcher: where other carriers share a GO bus terminal, a dispatcher kiosk may be required, distinct from the terminal building. The GO dispatcher shall be within the terminal building, if required by GO. Shelters: where bus bays are remote from the terminal building, passenger shelters shall be provided, where required by GO. Refer to Shelters Section under Station Buildings of the Architectural Tab. CATCH BASINS Catch basins and manholes shall be located out of bus wheel paths. Passenger platform curbs shall not be indented around catch basins.
MATERIALS
Bus loop area and bus bay area shall be concrete with final texturing meeting OPSS 350 recommendations to achieve desired skid resistant surface. Bus access roads shall be asphalt. Passenger waiting bus platform shall be hard, level materials that are resistant to slipping and capable of clearing during winter months by motorized equipment. Walkways or sidewalks shall not be located where buses may require back up movements. Refer to typical Bus Loop Figure under Bus Terminal Sites.
400WP

CI-0202-03
Page
Site Development
Bus Terminal Sites
April 30, 2012
9 of 11
TYPICAL BUS LOOP FIGURE (GUIDELINE ONLY)
400WP

CI-0202-03
Page
Site Development
Bus Terminal Sites
April 30, 2012
10 of 11
BUS RADII DESIGN TURNING TEMPLATE
400WP

CI-0202-03
Page
Site Development
Bus Terminal Sites
April 30, 2012
11 of 11
BUS BAY GUIDELINES FOR D4500 BUS WITH BIKE RACK DEPLOYED
400WP
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL

CI-0202-04
Page
Site Development
Bus Rapid Transit (BRT) Stations May 3, 2011
1 of 9
SCOPE
This section outlines key criteria. For additional details the consultant shall refer also to all other relevant subjects of these Standards, some of which are repeated here, but in less detail. Bus Rapid Transit (BRT) stations are facilities that accommodate bus passengers. They consist of most of the features of a rail station except they are not staffed. BRT station component generally comprise the following: Site Access; Platform; Passenger Waiting Building/Shelter; Parking lot; Utilities: o o o o Storm Drainage; Electrical; Illumination; and Communications.
Fences; Landscaping; Signs/Advertising (high-mast); Fixtures: o o o o o o Fare Equipment; Bicycle Racks; Payphone; Benches; Salt Bin; Waste Containers;
400WP
ENGINEERING DESIGN MANUAL ENGINEERING

EN-0202-04
Page
Site Development
2 of 9
GO Information Display; Newspaper Boxes; Vending Machines; CCTV; Radiant Heating in Shelters; and Heated Platform Area (Snow Melt System).
APPROVALS
Site development shall be to the approval of all authorities having jurisdiction.
BASIS OF CRITERIA
Key Standards Fundamental Planning, Engineering and Architectural site design principles and standards shall apply. Key standards and design parameters are as follows: The Ontario Building Code (2006); Ontario Provincial Standards, MTO Drainage Manuals, and MOE Storm Water Management Practices, Planning and Design Manual; Transport Association of Canada (TAC) Urban Supplement to the Geometric Design Guide for Canadian Roads, TAC Turning Vehicle Templates and OPSD Standards; Barrier-Free Accessibility; City Bus, TAC reference: Bus Design Vehicles; Highway Bus, TAC reference I-Bus Design Vehicle; Articulated Bus, TAC reference A-Bus Design Vehicle; Double Decker Buses; Accessible Bus requirement: 2.8 m minimum platform side clearance; Emergency vehicle access requirements, if warranted;
400WP

CI-0202-04
Page
Site Development
3 of 9
Snow removal and storage requirements; Pavement Design: See Engineering TAB; Pavement marking: in accordance with the current MTO Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices with Material Standards as per OPSS 532, organic solvent-based traffic paint; Protection of utilities where applicable in accordance with all current codes, and the requirements and regulations of Utility owners and authorities having jurisdiction; Electrical systems in accordance with the latest edition of the Ontario Electrical Safety Code; Consideration shall be given to passenger safety where overhead ice accumulation may occur on hydro cables and support structures; and Bus driver layover facilities shall be considered at larger facilities.
Site Layout Priorities 1. 2. 3. Bus access/egress (Bus Only links to Highways shall be considered). Pedestrian access including barrier-free, waiting area and related amenities. Automobile access and parking facilities (Park n Ride transit users shall be given priority parking where possible).
Optimum Land Use Layout shall maximize the number of parking stalls by minimizing concrete islands and using GO Transit aisle and stall sizes.
SITE ACCESS
Direct, dedicated pedestrian sidewalk from street and as warranted from any other adjacent traffic generators. Bicycle path as warranted by providing direct access from nearby traffic generators, where street access is not direct.
400WP

EN-0202-04
Page
Site Development
4 of 9
PLATFORM
Designed to minimize passenger path of travel across roads used by buses. A near side bus bay shall not be used on a right turn lane into the site. Straight platform: rear corner of the bus may be offset from the platform curb by 0.45 m. maximum. Saw tooth platform: nominal driveway width 8.8 m (7.3m bus clearance path plus 0.5 m additional bus clearance plus indent depth (1.0 m), for a maximum indent design). A clearance of 0.5 m to be provided between the line given by the Design Vehicle Turning Radius and any fixed object. Vertical clearance for overhead structures shall be 4.65 m above driveway pavement, or to suit bus tow-truck hoists. Platform curb elevation: 150 mm above bus driveway pavement level. Materials: bus driveway areas and passenger platforms shall be concrete paved. Accessibility: depending on the type of accessible bus, wheelchair or scooter loading devices may be located mid-way or toward the rear of the bus, and require a 3.0 m minimum platform width. Platforms must be accessible, with curb-ramps, in accordance with the OBC. Also refer to Bus Terminal Site Section.
PASSENGER WAITING BUILDING/SHELTER

The passenger waiting building shall be a GO Transit typical BRT building. Size shall be as advised by GO Transit. Common features shall be as follows: In the future, large BRT sites may be equipped similar to GO Rail Stations. Shelter-like building with structural steel framing contained within the building envelope; Perimeter clear butt-joint tempered glazing on a raised concrete sill (clear insulating tempered glass where heating is provided); Cantilevered roof canopy for partial shelter;
400WP

CI-0202-04
Page
Site Development
5 of 9
Door swings oriented against prevailing winds, if possible. On larger facilities, two doors will be used with doors on either end - typically one with power assist. Interior illumination, shelters shall be heated and CCTV shall monitor fare equipment; Fare equipment located against the common electrical/communications room wall; TVMs and future Next Bus technology will be considered; Snowmelt system for the passenger loading areas will be installed; Radiant heating; and Kiss n ride consideration.
PARKING LOT
Parking lots shall be asphalt paved. Refer to Rail Station Sites and Pavement Line Markings Sections. Parking Aisles and Stalls Minimum dimensions shall be: Access roads shall be 7.0 m wide for 2-way traffic and 10.5 m wide for 3-lane access roads at entrances and exits to streets where a left-turn lane is required; Parking lot aisles shall be 7.0 m wide; and Parking stalls to be 2.5 m wide x 5.5 m long. Perimeter stall lengths (abutting curbs) shall be 4.5 m in length with 1m wide strip beyond the curbs for vehicle overhang. Where the parking row overall length is not a multiple of 2.5 m, some parking stall widths may be increase according to suit, to a maximum width of 2.9 m. Parallel parking stalls shall be 3.0 m x 7.0 m.
Sign Posts Refer to Rail Station Sites Section (high-mast signage will typically be installed). Pavement Markings Refer to Rail Station Sites Section.
400WP

EN-0202-04
Page
Site Development Bicycle Path
6 of 9
To be provided. GO Transit encourages provision of bicycle path where appropriate. Passenger Drop-off And Pick-up If required by GO Transit, a parallel lineal aisle arrangement shall be provided, on the basis of 3 m x 7 m spaces for each vehicle, near the bus platform.
SERVICES
Existing services shall be protected as required. New services required are electrical and telephone line (see below). Storm Drainage See Above. Culverts shall have safety grille at ends. Deep ponded areas shall be fenced, for safety. Electrical Supply, Illumination and Telephone Service requirements: 120/208 volt service. A closet to contain a circuit control panel/meter shall be provided adjacent to the communications closet of the passenger waiting building. ILLUMINATION Refer to Electrical Illumination Section for information regarding illumination levels and, light source and controls. High-mast lighting preferred. COMMUNICATIONS A telephone line for fare equipment and a pay telephone shall be provided. Provision shall be made for CCTV systems. Communications equipment to be housed in the communications closet of the passenger waiting building, adjacent to the electrical closet. Passenger Information Display Boards.
400WP

CI-0202-04
Page
Site Development
7 of 9
FENCES
Fences, where required, shall be galvanized chain link 50.8 mm mesh 1.2 m high unless required to be higher in accordance with OPSD and OPSS. Posts, rails, bracing and accessories are to be galvanized. Ornamental fence is to be used around station buildings. Safety fencing may be required around hazardous areas (deep ponded ditches, high embankments, retaining walls, high platforms or walkways, etc.). Fences on concrete barriers may be required to direct passengers to designated crosswalks, around bus loop lanes, etc. Bumper curbs, if required, shall be restricted to parking lot perimeters. Guardrails per OPSD or bollards shall be used at hazardous grade slopes for vehicular safety, using standard commercially available products.
LANDSCAPING
Material for 1 m car overhang shall be determined by implementing progressive, sustainable and environmentally-friendly design practices and solutions. Where trees are required, they shall be located to prevent overhanging of cars. Shrubbery shall not present a concealment safety hazard or obstruct passive surveillance. All landscaping shall be road-salt resistant, require minimal maintenance and no manual watering. See Landscaping, Tab 3.
SIGNS/ADVERTISING
Signs shall conform to municipal regulations and all safety requirements, and to the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices of Ontario (MUTCD). Site identification sign(s) to be the GO Transit illuminated pylon sign(s) with BRT graphics. MTO carpool signs may also be required. Trail-blazer signs on public roads leading to the site, by GO Transit. Directional signs: to be standard traffic control signs as noted above. Passenger Information Display Board: Information signs shall be provided if required by GO Transit.
400WP

EN-0202-04
Page
Site Development
8 of 9
Bus stop pole sign: by GO Transit. Advisory signs: private property, etc., by GO Transit and MTO. Payphone illuminated sign: to be part of the phone booth design. Advertising signs: free-standing exterior or attached to shelter building, and illuminated.
FIXTURES
Fare Equipment Floor or wall mounted TVM (only) in the passenger waiting building. Bicycle Racks To be GO standard bike racks mounted on pre-cast concrete modules, approximately 2 m x 3 m per rack plus access. Payphone To be an accessible unit with telephone directory, illuminated with illuminated signage (phone symbol, minimum), located in proximity to the bus stop/building, with a southeast opening orientation. Benches GO Transit standard shelter benches; interior and exterior. Salt Bin A GO Transit standard salt bin on the platform. Waste Containers GO Transit standard waste containers typically installed on the exterior. Newspaper Boxes Where site-warranted, free-standing newspaper boxes shall be grouped against a U-shaped 1.2 m high chain-link fence on the platform. Space allocation 0.6 m x 4.0 m minimum.
400WP

CI-0202-04
Page
Site Development CCTV and PA
9 of 9
Interior and exterior CCTV and PA coverage to be provided as is warranted based on the size of the facility, the extent of the systems to be defined by GO Transit. Radiant Heating The passenger waiting building shall have an electric radiant heating system. Snow Melt System Snow melt system shall be provided on the bus platform areas. Snow melt system design TBD.
400WP

CI-0202-05
Page
Site Development
Drainage
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
SCOPE
The design flood criteria for station sites shall comply with the MOE Storm Water Management Practices, Planning and Design Manual, the OPSD and MTO Drainage Manuals, as well as Regional and/or Municipal Storm Water Management requirements. Such requirements may include oil and grit separators and inlet control devices. Generally surface water flow shall be directed from landscape areas to parking lot catch basins. Catch basins in landscape areas shall be avoided if possible.
CATCH BASINS
Catch basins shall be located upstream of pedestrian crossing areas, and 1.5 m clear of any driveway curb depressions. Grates shall be diagonal type. Catch basins shall not be located in the path of bus wheels, especially in bus loops. Retention ponds and catch basin flow restrictors shall be provided in accordance with Storm Water Management requirements. Catch basins shall not be located on walkways and/or in front of building doors.
GUTTER DRAINAGE
Gutter drainage shall be restricted to access roads if required to prevent storm run-off onto adjacent property. Road and gutter gradients shall not exceed fire access route requirements.
DITCH DRAINAGE
Where a storm sewer system is not available, or where an interim type of development is desired, ditches and related culverts may be used to carry the drainage down one or both sides of the paved areas. Culverts shall have safety grilles at ends, and ditches subject to substantial ponding shall be fenced, for safety, or filled with rip-rap, and topped with geotextile fabric and granular topsoil and sod.
SUB-GRADE DRAINAGE
Rail platform sub-grade drainage is subject to Railway requirements. See Heavy Rail section. Parking lot sub-grade design shall be used as required by site conditions. 400WP

EN-0202-06
Page
Site Development
Pavement and Line Marking
May 10, 2011
1 of 11
SCOPE
This subject covers asphalt paving, concrete paving and line marking.
SPECIFICATIONS
Pavement Design shall be based on the Geotechnical Consultants recommendations. However, the minimum asphalt thicknesses shall be: Car and emergency vehicle access routes: 40 mm HL3 on 80 mm HL8; Parking: 40 mm HL3 on 40 mm HL8; Bus Platforms: 50 mm HL3, HL3A, or Concrete; Sealed Rail Platforms: 50 mm HL3A; and Asphalt walkways, if required and miscellaneous items: 40 mm HL3 on granular.
CONCRETE PAVING Concrete walkways: OPSD sidewalk criteria to govern. Concrete bus access routes: per Geotechnical and Structural Engineers design.
SLOPES
Longitudinal Preferred Walks Platforms (Rail & Bus) Parking Lots Fire Access Routes 0% 0% 1% Max 4% 1% (Note 1) 3% Cross-slopes Preferred OPSD 1% 1% Max OPSD 2% 3%
To suit OBC fire access route criteria.
400WP

EN-0202-06
Page
Site Development
March 30, 2011
2 of 11
LINE MARKING
Design and layout are to be in accordance with details shown on Figures. Material standards: OPSS 532, organic solvent based traffic paint. For pavement areas interfacing with public thoroughfares, design shall be in accordance with the current MTO Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices and the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Canada. For Rail platform safety line, see Figures. Material Standards: OPSS 532, organic solvent based traffic paint with reflectorizing glass beads. Line Colours (see Figures): Location Parking stalls, parking restricted areas and islands Directional dividing lines Rail Platform safety line Lane lines, stop lines, arrows and pedestrian crosswalk lines Yellow Yellow Yellow (glass beads) White Colour
400WP

EN-0202-06
Page
Site Development
May 10, 2011
3 of 11
FIGURE: LINE MARKING - ACCESS ROADS AND AISLES
400WP

EN-0202-06
Page
Site Development
March 30, 2011
4 of 11
FIGURE: LINE MARKING - PERIMETER PARKING STALLS
400WP

EN-0202-06
Page
Site Development
May 10, 2011
5 of 11
FIGURE: LINE MARKING - ROW PARKING STALLS
400WP

EN-0202-06
Page
Site Development
March 30, 2011
6 of 11
FIGURE: LINE MARKING - PARKING RESTRICTED AREA
400WP

EN-0202-06
Page
Site Development
May 10, 2011
7 of 11
FIGURE: LINE MARKING - ISLANDS
400WP

EN-0202-06
Page
Site Development
March 30, 2011
8 of 11
FIGURE: LINE MARKING - CROSSWALKS
400WP

EN-0202-06
Page
Site Development
May 10, 2011
9 of 11
FIGURE: DESIGNATED PARKING CONFIGURATION FOR MULTIPLE PARKING SPOTS (MORE THAN TWO)
400WP

EN-0202-06
Page
Site Development
March 30, 2011
10 of 11
FIGURE: LINE MARKING - PAVEMENT ARROWS
400WP

EN-0202-06
Page
Site Development
May 10, 2011
11 of 11
FIGURE: LINE MARKING - RAIL PLATFORM AND MINI-PLATFORM
THE YELLOW DETECTABLE TILES (600 X 600MM) SHALL CONSIST OF A SURFACE OF TRUNCATED DOMES OF VITRIFIED POLYMER COMPOSITE (VPC) SURFACE OF AN EPOXY POLYMER COMPOSITION WITH ULTRA-VIOLET RESISTANCE. THE TRUNCATED DOMES SHALL BE SPACED AT 41MM (MIN.) TO 60MM (MAX.) APART FROM THE CENTRE OF ONE DOME TO THE CENTRE OF ANOTHER AND SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 23 MILLIMETRES WIDE AND 5 MILLIMETRES HIGH, WITH A BASE TO BASE SPACING OF 17MM (MIN.) MEASURED BETWEEN THE MOST ADJACENT DOMES ON A SQUARE GRID.
400WP

CI-0202-07
Page
Site Development
Site Related Items
April 30, 2012
1 of 7
SCOPE
This subject covers the following: Fencing Gates); Noise barriers; Concrete curbs; and Guardrails and bollards.
FENCING
OVERVIEW The following design requirements should be only considered as guidelines for design and planning of physical fencing systems. It is intended to ensure that security measures are employed in the design, material specification, installation and placement of fencing systems; that security and aesthetic considerations are incorporated into the design, selection and placement of fencing systems A fencing system is a component of safety and access control systems. It defines boundaries and limits, and channels access and egress, provides visual barriers, supports security and safety, and can deter and delay intrusion and trespassing. To the maximum extent possible, fencing systems should be designed to meet the specific needs of users of GO facilities. Installation of fencing systems should be conducive to operations and not become a maintenance burden. The fencing system design should comply with local and community ordinances, by laws, and also complement the crime prevention through environmental design (CPTED) principle of natural surveillance in the appropriate environment. BASIS OF CRITERIA Fencing system should: Give notice of legal boundary of the outermost limits of a facility.
400WP

CI-0202-07
Page
Site Development
Site Related Items
April 30, 2012
2 of 7
Assist in controlling and channelling people into or along specific areas and deterring entry elsewhere along the boundary. Support surveillance, detection, assessment and other security functions by providing a zone for installing intrusion detection equipment and closed-circuit television CCTV). Creates a psychological deterrent. Deter casual intruders from penetrating a secured area Cause a delay in access to a facility, thereby increasing the possibility of detection. Provide a cost-effective method of protecting facilities.
SITE CONSIDERATIONS Many factors can impact fencing system installation, operations and maintenance. However, fencing system material construction, fencing height and installation method are key factors in fence selection. Design process should strive to identify all factors when evaluating existing and designing proposed fencing systems. Site considerations should include the assessment of hazards as well as threats. They should also include the following: Identify high water tables, retaining ponds and site grading plan drainage above and below ground, which may affect the material condition of fencing components or footings, or can affect drainage or result in debris build up. Identify topography and analyze surface and subsurface soil components and other conditions to determine suitability and stability for fencing. Identify surface and subsurface utilities and other installations. Check local ordinances, covenants or agreements for restrictions or requirements that may affect fencing system type, style, color, height, etc. Determine impact to pedestrian/vehicle circulation, users of the community and the transit service. Identify frequency, location and targets of vandalism, which may influence the type,style or manufactured components of the fencing design.
400WP

CI-0202-07
Page
Site Development
Site Related Items
April 30, 2012
3 of 7
Identify load, wind or other ratings associated with area weather patterns, conditions or other hazardous conditions, such as wind and snow, seismic, wildfire, etc., that may damage or destroy fencing components or structure; weaken its strength or stability; or allow climbing, jumping or stepping over to penetrate the perimeters boundary. Complete a survey of the property to identify natural access and surveillance, erritorial reinforcement, crime prevention, as well as homeland security exposures and recommendations. Complete a site survey of the property boundary to identify pre-existing conditions, such as adjacent property clear zones, stand-off distance, property encroachment, etc. Investigate and research to identify the locations of fencing systems located within close proximity to power lines, catenary wires, and the third rail to determine the proper grounding of power systems.
FENCING SYSTEMS AND MATERIALS Fencing system material, construction, installation method and fencing design are significant factors to determining fencing system selection. Fencing systems materials including posts, rails, bracing and accessories are typically various metals or wood construction, in accordance with OPSD and OPSS standards. New technologies such as vinyl, plastics, composites and combined wood-metal-plasticscomposite products are being introduced to the fencing system industry standards should also be considered. Each of the materials has specific maintenance issues and concerns that can impact the use and life expectancy of the system. Some of these materials have demonstrated use in reducing maintenance, upkeep and repair, as well as increased life cycle, and should be considered in the final fencing system selection. Some fencing systems are designed and installed for temporary use, while others are installed for short- to long-term or even permanent use. A combination of the types of installation that may best suit a facility or an areas specific security requirements should be carefully evaluated as part of the security risk assessment FEATURES All fencing shall include same characteristics and features listed below, which will vary only in height without performance of fence at given location.
400WP

CI-0202-07
Page
Site Development Each fence shall be:
Site Related Items
April 30, 2012
4 of 7
Secure Anti - Climb Anti Cut Vandal Proof Highly Transparent All fences shall have attractive appearance.
FENCING SECURITY MEASURES AND CHARACTERISTICS Fencing system characteristics are part of the information needed for choice of an appropriate fencing system for different locations and functions. In addition, implementation, maintenance, life expectancy, safety and security must be included in the selection criteria. Fences, where required, but not limited to shall be installed at the following GO facilities/locations categorized as: High Risk Facilities High risk security fencing shall be 2.4 m high and would apply to facilities listed below, but not limited to: Layover Yards/Sites Electrical Sub-Stations Fuel Yards and Tanks Maintenance Facilities For layover and electrical Sub Stations security and fencing refer to Layover section of GO Design Requirements Manual. Medium Risk Facilities Medium risk security fencing shall be minimum 1.8 m and will apply to facilities listed below, but not limited to: Storage/Warehouse Facilities Signal Bungalows
400WP

CI-0202-07
Page
Site Development
Site Related Items
April 30, 2012
5 of 7
Low Risk Facilities/Site Components Low Risk fencing shall have knuckles down and shall be not higher than 1.2 m with an attractive appearance and with no vertical protrusions specially around facilities serving public and transit passengers, The following locations shall be provided with low risk fencing systems: Fencing Dividing Multiple Tracks Rail Side Platforms Significant Grade and Elevation Change Boundary Definition as directed by GO Bus Loops and Platforms Access control flow Ponds, ditches, swales and high embankments Condensers and generators adjacent to a station or terminal building shall have decorative fencing and lockable gates
OVERPASS FENCING Pedestrian overpasses may require vertical fences on both sides with partial or full overhead mesh closure. RAILWAY CORRIDORS ROW FENCING Shall be provided as per specifications Rail Corridors Right of Way. Refer to latest version of Fencing Guidelines published by GO Transit Railway Corridors.
GATES
Maintenance access gates shall be a minimum of 2.7m wide hinged single or double gates. Sliding gates between tracks shall be a minimum of 2.7m wide, single or bi-parting gates. All gates must be lockable, single or double locks if required by the Railway, Hydro, or other users.
NOISE BARRIERS
Where required, they shall be pre-cast concrete or as directed by GO Transit. Colours and patterns to be reviewed by GO Transit.
400WP

CI-0202-07
Page
Site Development
Site Related Items
April 30, 2012
6 of 7
CONCRETE CURBS
Concrete curbs, gutters, barriers and bumper curbs shall be in accordance with OPSD and CAN/CSA B651-04 Accessibility Standards. Surfaces, including flared sides at curbs, curb cuts and unloading zones shall be slip resistant, colour and texture contrasted with adjacent surfaces. For rail platform curbs see Heavy Rail section. Bus layover rear wheel stop-curbs shall be per OPSD 600.100 (concrete mountable curb with narrow gutter), with load transfer joints per OPSD 552.01, complete with a 0.6 m heavy duty concrete kill strip at the back of the curb. Pre-cast concrete bumper curbs shall not be used. Curb Ramps Curb ramps shall be provided where walks cross access roads, at barrier-free (designated) parking stalls, and within a Barrier-Free path of travel, as per the OBC and the OPSD. Directional grooves at 300 mm centres shall be provided, in accordance with OPSD 310.030.
GUIDE RAILS, GUARDRAILS, AND BOLLARDS

Steel Beam Guide Rails At hazardous grade slopes for vehicular safety in accordance with the applicable OPSD Metal Pipe Guard Rails At walkways adjacent to hazardous traffic or ditches. Material shall be galvanized pipe minimum 50 mm diameter, and 1070 mm high with midrail, etc. Decorative steel fencing may be used in lieu of railing. Bollards To prevent vehicular access at transformers, gas meters, hydrants, accessible parking spots, near ancillary rooms in parking garages, vehicular traffic areas in bus and rail maintenance etc.,
400WP

CI-0202-07
Page
Site Development
Site Related Items
April 30, 2012
7 of 7
BOLLARDS
EXTERIOR BOLLARDS Shall be 200 mm diameter galvanized steel pipe, concrete filled, and protected with 3 mm minimum thick high density polyethylene safety yellow (or other colour as specified by GO) coloured cover, projecting 1.2 m above grade and set minimum 1.2 m into concrete pier. At bus fuel storage areas, provide 250 mm diameter concrete filled bollards. Interior Bollards Shall be 150 mm diameter galvanized steel pipe, concrete filled, and protected with 3 mm minimum thick high density polyethylene safety yellow (or other colour as specified by GO) coloured cover, projecting 1.2 m. above floor and cast with welded plate and 4 anchors into concrete slab. Removable Bollards Shall consist of: a permanently installed receiver below grade, with a top that is flush with the pavement and a cap to prevent dirt accumulation while the post is removed; a removable post that can be manually lifted out of the receiver to allow access; and an exposed locking mechanism, with a padlock keyed to the station master, to prevent unauthorized removal. Dimensions, covers and colour schemes shall meet Exterior and Interior Bollard's requirements.
PASSENGER SHELTERS
Refer to shelters under the Station Buildings section of the Architectural Tab.
400WP

CI-0203-01
Page
Heavy Rail
General
June 1, 2006
1 of 3
SCOPE
These criteria apply to the design of all trackwork including yard track, surface elevated and underground sections on the railway right-of-way (R.O.W.).
BASIS OF CRITERIA
Governing authorities and standards are: Railway Safety Act (RSA); Regulations Administered by Transport Canada pursuant to the RSA; Railway Association of Canada industry rules; American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association (AREMA), Manual for Railway Engineering; CN Rail or CP Rail standards; and Relevant GO Transit requirements including platform design criteria.
RAILWAY OWNED CORRIDORS

GO trains are operated mostly on railway-owned tracks, shared with freight and intercity passenger trains. Any new track, modifications or upgrading are to be designed by consultants engaged by the relevant railway, except that GO Station related track changes may be designed by consultants engaged by GO Transit, to railway standards, and railway contract document formats and procedures may apply, as directed by GO Transit.
GO TRANSIT OWNED CORRIDORS

Additional requirements may apply, as follows: Higher platforms (maximum 250mm above top of rail) where the GO Transit R.O.W. is not shared with freight trains; and Chain-link R.O.W. fencing: see SITE DEVELOPMENT, Site Related Items.
400WP

CI-0203-01
Page
Heavy Rail
General
June 1, 2006
2 of 3
CLEARANCE DIAGRAM
See Figure. Note that the basic clearance is 3.35 m horizontally from centre line of track, and 7.4 m vertically above the top of rail (A.T.R.), which allows for future electrification. The minimum horizontal clearance is 2.546 m from centre line of track, and the minimum vertical clearance is 6.7 m A.T.R., possibly applicable in a terminus, end-of-the-line site, where trains move at low speeds. Side clearances must be adjusted for curved track, in accordance with the CN or CP Railway Standards. The curve allowance is approximately 25.4 mm per degree of curve, and a further 25 mm for each 10 mm of superelevation.
TRACK/TRAIN DATA
See Tab 6 for Track/Train Data.
PLATFORM DESIGN CRITERIA

These criteria are based on CN Rail data, applicable also to CP Rail, for preliminary design. Detail design shall be reviewed by the appropriate railway authority and GO Transit, at which time some dimensions may be defined more precisely.
Track centres, centre line to centre line, new station facilities only Centre line of track to edge of platform Width of island platform Width of side platform Length of platform Centre line to centre line of tracks serving island platform (35 feet even) Maximum height of platform A.T.R. Exclusive GO Transit tracks, maximum height of platform A.T.R. Passenger circulation zone, edge of platform to platform structures (shelters/stair enclosures, etc.) Lateral clearance to major and elevated platform structures, centre line of track to canopies, roof overhangs, etc. Lateral clearance from centre line of track to mini-platforms Maximum height of mini-platform A.T.R. Platform safety line (see Figure, Pavement Design) Tunnel (pedestrian underpass) clearance, top of tunnel roof membrane overlay to underside of rail, minimum approximately. (This is based on 30 mm sub-ballast, 300 mm ballast to bottom of ties and 178 mm ties). 4.27 m 1.632 m 7.4 m 3.6 m-4.9 m 315 m 10.668 m 0.127 m 0.25 m 2.44 m 3.35 m 1.98 m 0.559 m 0.6 m
0.8 m
400WP

CI-0203-01
Page
Heavy Rail
General
June 1, 2006
3 of 3
PLATFORM ENCLOSURES
See Tab 3 for stair enclosures, elevators, and shelters, etc.
PLATFORM SIGNS
See Tab 3 for signs and graphics. No illuminated signs are permitted due to railway signal priority.
MINI-PLATFORM
See Rail Station Sites and Civil and Structural Sections.
CLEARANCE DIAGRAM
See Tab 6 for Clearance Diagram.
400WP

CI-0204-01
Page
Civil and Structural
Engineering Design
June 24, 2009
1 of 5
GENERAL
This Standard applies to the civil and structural engineering design of GO Transit fixed facilities.
CODES
Engineering Design shall comply with the current edition of The Ontario Building Code and all other applicable codes, standards and regulations as required by all Authorities having jurisdiction, including, ESA Requirements, the Ontario Highway Bridge Design Code (MTO), Canadian Foundation Engineering Manual (Canadian Geotechnical Society), applicable CSA Structures Design and Material Standards, and the Manual for Railway Engineering (AREMA).
SCOPE
Geotechnical. Pavement Design. Concrete Design. Structural Steel Design. Cut and Cover Structures. Pedestrian Tunnels and Bridges. Retaining Structures. Building Structures. Drainage.
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
GEOTECHNICAL For new sites GO Transit may provide the consultant with an Environmental Site Assessment Report, especially where soil contamination and site decommissioning are issues. Consultants
400WP

CI-0204-01
Page
Engineering Design
June 24, 2009
2 of 5
shall retain the services of Geotechnical Consulting Engineers, and Civil and Structural design shall be based on their report and recommendations. PAVEMENT DESIGN See SITE DEVELOPMENT, Pavement Design. CONCRETE DESIGN General Platform structures such as stair enclosures shall have concrete foundation walls and footings extending 500 mm above the finished platform. Exposed concrete vertical surfaces above grade shall be bush-hammered or sand-blasted. Concrete walking surfaces shall be broom finished, including stairs. Stairs are also to have non-slip inserts. Exposed concrete horizontal surfaces such as sills, tops of walls or bollards, etc. shall be sloped to drain and minimize deposits of de-icing chemicals. All concrete exposed to freezing and thawing cycles shall be air-entrained. See also Tab 3, Shelters, for floating concrete slabs. Rail Platform Curbs Rail platform curbs at track-side, including mini-platform curbs shall be sealed pre-cast concrete, or sealed cast-in-place concrete. See Figure for Precast Rail Platform curb on next page. STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN Structural Steel shall be new material. Weathering steel, especially for bridge structures, shall be designed with vertically or diagonally 10 mm deep, 20 mm wide minimum grooved face concrete supports for controlled rust run-off. Consultants shall take into consideration excessive wind loads generated by high-speed trains on platform structures i.e., shelters, stair and elevator buildings, including canopies and soffits. See also Tab 3 - ARCHITECTURE. Consultants shall also take into consideration GO Transits extensive use of salt or other deicing chemicals during winter, and locate structural steel on the inside of wall surfaces. See Tab 3 ARCHITECTURE.
400WP

CI-0204-01
Page
Engineering Design
June 24, 2009
3 of 5
400WP

CI-0204-01
Page
Engineering Design
June 24, 2009
4 of 5
CUT AND COVER STRUCTURES The construction of cut and cover structures such as pedestrian tunnels on the railway operating Right-of-Way is restricted to short durations, therefore design shall be such as to enable expedient construction. PEDESTRIAN TUNNELS AND BRIDGES Pedestrian tunnels and stairs shall be cast-in-place concrete, with the portion of tunnels under railway tracks to be pre-cast concrete units. Tunnel width under the tracks to be 3.66 m, or as directed by GO Transit to suit pedestrian traffic flow characteristics. The minimum tunnel height shall be 2.7 m inclusive of concrete floor topping. Tunnel features are: Angled wall corners at directional changes, 300 mm x 300 mm minimum corner cuts at 45 degrees, for sight lines to reduce probability of passenger collisions; Stairs (see Tab 2 for rise, run and handrails); Elevator shafts and pits; Elevator machine room(s), if applicable; Sump room(s); Electrical room; Communications room if required; and Concrete sealed walls, to be protected by clear non-sacrificial anti-graffiti coating.
Pedestrian bridges over tracks shall be single-span structures with supports beyond the operating right-of-way, to the approval of the Railway. Intermediate supports are not allowed. Bridges at public thoroughfares may have intermediate supports, subject to the approval of the authority having jurisdiction. Where pedestrian overpasses over the R.O.W. have stairs/elevators down to an island platform, the bridge structure shall be cable-stayed to uphold the bridge in case of derailment.
400WP

CI-0204-01
Page
Engineering Design
June 24, 2009
5 of 5
RETAINING STRUCTURES The Consultant shall select the optimum permanent retaining method (wood shall not be used for retaining walls). Where concrete retaining walls are in proximity to the public, they shall be sandblasted and protected with a clear anti-graffiti coating. Low retaining walls shall be precast concrete units. Gabion walls may be used in non-public areas. BUILDING STRUCTURES Generally, station building and terminals building structures shall be residential type design using load-bearing steel/wood stud walls or concrete block walls with ceiling joist and roof rafter framing to allow for mechanical equipment installations and maintenance access. Special framing (open concept) is required for the waiting room. Roof trusses may also be used where required. Maintenance buildings shall be industrial/commercial type steel structural design. See Tab 3, ARCHITECTURE, and Standard Station Plan, Sections and Elevations. DRAINAGE For Drainage design see SITE DEVELOPMENT, Drainage. Major cost-shared storm mains shall be to municipal standards.
400WP

CI-0205-01
Page
Utilities
General
June 1, 2006
1 of 2
OVERVIEW
This Section applies to the engineering design of all new utilities, relocations and tie-ins.
SCOPE
Utility Easements. Existing or new Utilities; water supply, storm and sanitary sewers, natural gas and hydro. Hydro overhead power lines. Co-ordination.
BASIS OF CRITERIA
Current applicable codes and regulations, and requirements of Utility owners and authorities having jurisdiction. Railway requirements: applicable to all utilities on the railway R.O.W. (see also Heavy Rail section). Minimized construction duration on Railway R.O.W.s (due to the cost of the Railway requirement for a full time flagman and consultant site supervision). Minimized disruption of utilities to adjacent properties, vehicular traffic and GO Transit operations. Restoration work necessitated by utility installations. Arc flash analysis shall be included in design services.
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
EASEMENTS The Consultant shall identify and show utility easements on the site plan, where applicable, in accordance with GO Transits survey plan(s).
400WP

CI-0205-01
Page
Utilities
General
June 1, 2006
2 of 2
As-built drawings shall be provided at completion of work, accurately showing the location of all utilities. EXISTING OR NEW UTILITIES The Consultant shall be responsible for field locates of all existing utilities, confirmed with the Utility owner or authority. All existing utilities must be shown on the Contract Drawings. Where existing utilities are disrupted, they shall be replaced with new or modified construction to the approval of the utility and GO Transit. Where utility work is done by others prior to new construction, it is to be shown on the Contract Drawings as existing for reference. HYDRO OVERHEAD POWER LINES High voltage overhead clearance constraints pertaining to any buildings or structures shall be identified and co-ordinated. COORDINATION Storm water management study. Telecommunications (including fibre optics and signal lines along the railway R.O.W.) Traffic signals, including railway crossing signals. Utilities crossing or paralleling railway tracks. Communications towers (antenna/transmission). Tower or cable ice accumulation shall be addressed for the safety of people, vehicles and buildings or structures.
UTILITIES CROSSING TRACKS

Where it is necessary to cross under tracks with utilities, the pipes or ducts shall be buried below the track sub-ballast. Design and construction of crossings, including bedding material, casing materials and loading requirements shall comply with Canadian Transport Commission General Orders and applicable CSA standards. Requirements for utilities passing over CN, CP or GO tracks shall conform to Canadian Transport Commission General Orders and applicable CSA standards.
400WP

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
1 of 19
MECHANICAL
SCOPE
This section applies to the mechanical engineering design of GO fixed facilities for the following systems: Heating, Ventilation and Air-Conditioning (HVAC); Plumbing and Drainage; Fire Protection; and Noise/Vibration.
BASIS OF CRITERIA
THE ONTARIO BUILDING CODE Apart from compliance with good Engineering practice and the Ontario Building Code, the design shall address energy and water conserving systems to reduce consumption. Basic and user-friendly computerized and automated equipment controls and energymanagement programs shall be utilized. Remote monitoring of equipment shall be provided if required by GO.
HVAC
ENERGY SOURCE Heating, Ventilation and Air-Conditioning shall be by means of the most cost-effective energy source available at the site.

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
2 of 19
TEMPERATURES (DAYTIME: WITH NIGHT-TIME SET-BACKS) Daytime design temperatures for rooms shall be as tabulated below.
C WINTER MIN. 18 22 22 22 22 15 22 C SUMMER MAX. 25 22 22 22 22 22 22 HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC HVAC (Note 1) HVAC Ventilation & Heating Ventilation & Heating Ventilation & Gas Monitoring HVAC (Note 1) Ventilation Ventilation Ventilation Ventilation Natural Ventilation per Electrical Authority Natural Ventilation/Heating
ROOM Passenger Waiting (including vending/concessions) Station Attendant Staff Room Dispatcher Office Communications Electronics Workshop Washrooms Janitor Battery Electrical Mechanical Equipment Elevator Mechanical Workshop Storage Station secondary entrances and tunnels Hydro Vaults Shelters
NOTES
* * *
15 * 5* 22* 20 N/A N/A N/A
* * *
25 * 25 22 22 N/A N/A N/A
* Electric heating, if required (supplementary), to maintain 18C winter temperature.

Note 1: High wall, heat pump with hyper heating and low ambient cooling (no night-time set-back).
400WP

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
3 of 19
STATIONS HVAC
Radiant heating should be considered in new Stations on a project by project basis. Otherwise, Heating and Air Conditioning of the waiting area and the ticket sales area shall be achieved by one high efficiency, premium quality furnace c/w outdoor condensing unit. The ticket sales area will have a VAV box controlled by a thermostat, while the main thermostat should be located in the janitor room and interlocked with the waiting area temperature sensor. Communications room and Electrical room shall have dedicated split Heat Pump A/C unit. It is preferred to have one condensing unit for both rooms, if possible. Refer to Communications room section for HVAC and ventilation details. Depending on area, washrooms shall be ventilated by Energy Recovery Ventilators or exhaust fans, and shall be heated by radiant heating (if available in the building) or by electric baseboard heating. Refer to Elevators section for Elevator hoistway HVAC..
FACILITIES HVAC
Radiant heating shall be the main heating system in the entire facility. Offices area shall be heated and air conditioned by energy efficient, premium quality rooftop packaged gas heating/electric cooling A/C units. Storage area and repair area shall be ventilated by heavy-duty industrial Air Handling Units c/w heat recovery unit. This system shall be controlled by thermostats and gas monitoring system. To minimize infiltration through open overhead doors in rail facilities, heavy-duty industrial air curtains shall be installed above overhead doors. Small Communications room shall be supplied with a split Heat Pump A/C unit. Large Communications rooms and/or Computer rooms shall have an independent dedicated HVAC system including precision air conditioning equipment and underfloor plenum supply. The complete HVAC system shall comply with ASHRAE Thermal Guidelines for Data Processing Environments.

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
4 of 19
ROOFTOP PACKAGED A/C UNITS

The rooftop packaged gas heating / electric cooling shall have the following features: From a recognized manufacturer with proven product testing. High efficiency, meeting ASHRAE 90.1 requirements, UL listed and labelled. Factory assembled, internally wired, fully charged with R410A. Downflow unit c/w roof curb. Factory installed downflow economizer c/w barometric relied damper, solid state enthalpy, and differential enthalpy control. Hinged access doors, 50mm (2) pleated media filters, and a convenience outlet. Unit surface shall be tested in compliance with ASTM B117. Cabinet construction shall allow for all maintenance on one side of the Unit. Crankcase heaters to improve compressor reliability. Drum and tube heat exchanger with corrosion resistant steel components. Discharge line thermostat, and phase monitor. Units supplying high occupancy rooms, such as meeting rooms, shall be controlled by a carbon dioxide sensor, in order to modulate the outside air damper.
ROOFTOP PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS

Heavy-duty industrial Air Handling Unit with the following features: From a recognized manufacturer with proven product testing. Double wall unit with 16 gauge steel sheet outer skin, 20 gauge steel sheet interior liner, and 50mm (2) thick insulated wall and roof panels. 16 gauge checkered plate floor with reinforcement and insulation. Fully hinged access doors, filter frames, and drains in every section. Exterior paint shall meet ASTM B117. ARI certified heating coils. Heating shall be via hydronic coil when boiler plant is available. Fans shall be centrifugal plenum type.
400WP

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
5 of 19
Non-overloading backward inclined Aluminium blades. Heavy-duty weathertight and drainable stationary louvers. Internal vibration isolation of the fan and motor. Fully insulated and independent motorized dampers. Lights in access compartments with switch on the unit exterior. GFI receptacle. Separate 120v for light and GFI receptacle.
AIR CURTAINS
Heavy-duty industrial Air Curtain with the following features: From a recognized manufacturer with proven product testing. Suited for blanketing the door width and minimum 50mm (2) overlap on each side. Performance and air flow delivery shall be rated in accordance with AMCA Standard 211. Belt drive motors shall be open drip-proof type, easily accessible for maintenance, and outside the airstream. Blowers shall be centrifugal forward curved type and tested in accordance to AMCA Standard 210. Minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel frame. Minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel casing. Maximum deflection of 6.35mm (0.25). Inlet screens. Outer air velocity pattern shall have over 90% uniformity over the entire length of the Air Curtain. Complete factory-wired control panel.

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
6 of 19
SPLIT HEAT PUMP A/C UNIT

The split Heat Pump system shall have the following features: High efficiency Hyper heating at -25C Low ambient cooling at -5C R410A refrigerant Variable speed compressor Variable refrigerant flow Auto restart after power failure Hot start.
RADIANT HEATING & SNOW MELTING SYSTEMS

BASIS OF CRITERIA Ontario Building Code Ontario Fire Code Ontario Electrical Safety Code ASHRAE 90.1 Standard MOE requirements Relevant CSA Standards Relevant TSSA requirements Relevant ASME codes and standards ASHRAE Handbooks
APPLICATION Full width snow melting systems shall be installed on all new and rehabilitated Rail platforms. Radiant heating and partial snow melting systems 3.05m (10 ft) in front of overhead doors shall be installed in all Bus Facilities.
400WP

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
7 of 19
Radiant heating and partial snow melting should be considered in new Station buildings and bus terminals, on a project by project basis. Snow Melting Systems should be considered in BRT Facilities on a project by project basis.
SYSTEM COMPONENTS Supply and installation of a complete radiant heating system and/or snow melting system, including but not limited to, the following: Gas fired boilers. Pumps. Expansion tank. Chemical treatment. Glycol make-up system. Pipework inside boiler room including manifolds, piping, fittings, valves, thermometers, gauges, devices, pipe hangers & support, and accessories. Pre-insulated supply and return pipes and fittings. Distribution manifolds c/w valves inside platform chambers. Embedded tubing and fittings. Complete control system. Electrical works.
WARRANTY All warranty periods are measured from the date the substantial completion of the system has been confirmed by the Engineer and GO: The complete system shall be covered by 2-year warranty against failure due to defects in material or workmanship. During this period, the system shall be startedup and inspected in November, shut-down in April, and monitored 24/7 via central station by Contractor and/or Supplier. The complete system shall be covered by 10-year limited system performance warranty. This warranty requires that the system detailed design, supervision, commissioning, and test witnessing shall be performed by the manufacturers authorized personnel along with the contractors superintendent and the Engineer.

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
8 of 19
All tubing and pre-insulated piping shall carry a 25-year non-prorated warranty against failure due to defects in material or workmanship.
BOILERS Natural gas boilers shall be approved to ANSI Z21.13 CSA 4.9-2000 with efficiency between 85% and 89%. 52C (125F) water supply temperature with no limit on inlet water temperatures. Constructed of eutectic cast iron sections in accordance with ASME requirements, with modulus of elasticity of 30% greater than other cast iron. Boiler plant shall include minimum 2 boilers. If one boiler is down, the remaining boiler(s) shall be capable of handling 60-70% of the full design load. Boiler warranty shall not be affected if flue gas condensation is allowed within the boiler. Boiler and burner shall be listed as package. Site approval is not acceptable. Package must have proven field verified track record for a minimum period of 3 years. All control circuits shall be 120v/60Hz/1Ph c/w fuse protection. Burner shall be fully modulating, factory tested, and CSA listed. No CO shall be present in the products of combustion. Boiler shall be fully started up and commissioned by factory trained personnel. Manufacturer shall have facility in Ontario. Qualified personnel and spare parts shall be available in GTA.
PRE-INSULATED PIPING AND TUBING Tubing shall be cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) manufactured by the Engle method, in accordance with ASTM F876 and ASTM F877, and tested for compliance by an independent third-party agency. Minimum bend radius no less than six times the outside diameter. Oxygen diffusion barrier not to exceed 0.10 grams per cubic meter per day at 40C (104F). Pre-insulated piping shall be durable cross-linked polyethylene (PEX-a) manufactured by the Engle method, protected by multilayer PEX-foam insulation and covered by a corrugated seamless waterproof HDPE jacket.
400WP

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
9 of 19
Manifolds shall be 50mm (2) valved type L copper complete with cold expansion adaptors. For system compatibility, use manifolds, fittings, connectors, wall sleeves, and all accessories from the same manufacturer. Use 50mm (2) Styrofoam insulation under the tubing, to maximize heat transfer upward. For tubing under asphalt, the tubing shall be embedded in limestone screening. Tubing shall be installed in one continuous piece and no splice shall be allowed in the slab. Contractor and Supplier shall have minimum 10 years demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. Contractor and Supplier shall submit as-built drawings verified by the Engineer.
PUMPS The heating plant piping arrangement shall contain a primary/secondary loops layout, with 4-way mixing valve between the two loops. Each loop shall be served by two vertical in-line centrifugal pumps. The vertical in-line centrifugal pumps shall have cast iron casing, bronze impeller, stainless steel shaft, stainless steel mechanical seals, 50 micron cartridge filter, and a sight indicator. These pumps shall be equipped with suction guides, stainless steel strainers, triple duty valves, and insulation. In-line circulator pumps shall have bronze fitted construction, and shall be equipped with a water-tight, long life Armseal mechanical seal. They shall be suitable for 107C (225F) and 125 psi. Downstream each in-line circulator pump goes a circuit balancing valve, Y pattern, to provide precise flow measurement, precision flow balancing, and positive driptight shut-off.
CONTROLS Complete microprocessor-based programmable control system able to interface with LONWORKS and BACNET, in order to control, monitor, and adjust the radiant heating system and/or snow melting system remotely and/or locally. The control system shall include all required PCUs (Primary Control Units), PACs (Programmable Application Controllers), and ASCs (Application Specific Controllers) to interface with all equipment.

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
10 of 19
The control system shall also include dynamic graphics, snow sensors, outdoor air temperature sensors, immersion temperature sensors, current sensors, status relays, automatic control valves, automatic control valve actuators, local service ports, and LAN cabling.
MANIFOLD CHAMBERS The recessed manifold chambers on the platform shall be fully accessible with adequate maintenance clearances around the manifolds and valves. Footprint and depth to avoid classification as confined space. Adequate means of drainage shall be provided. Cover shall be heavy-duty Aluminium, traffic bearing, lockable, self opening with piston kit, and with recessed handles. GLYCOL/WATER SOLUTION The Glycol/Water solution shall be premixed, or site mixed with proper concentration before entering the system. Glycol shall be non-toxic, environmentally friendly, and suitable for boilers. TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING The TAB agency shall be a subcontractor of the general contractor who should identify it within 10 days after the award of the contract. The TAB agency shall be a certified member of AABC. TRAINING Mechanical Contractor / Manufacturer shall provide adequate training for GO staff including advanced maintenance level training as determined by GO. Training sessions may take place on site, or any other suitable location.
400WP

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
11 of 19
FANS In public area and occupied spaces, low noise centrifugal fans shall be used. Public area fan systems shall be provided with suitable attenuating silencers capable of maintaining space noise level no greater than NC40. Airfoil or backward inclined design is preferred. Forward curved wheels may be used for low pressure applications. Variable pitch axial fans should be considered for fan wheel diameters greater than 610mm and where system air volumes vary, due to control characteristics of summer/winter operation. Propeller fans may be used where they serve non-public or unoccupied areas. Additional ventilation with emergency power back-up may be required in large facilities, such as Willowbrook or Steeprock.
ENERGY RECOVERY Energy Recovery Ventilators (ERV) shall be specified for energy conservation in all GO facilities, where practical and cost effective. In station buildings they shall be above the public washrooms or the janitor room, in the attic space, where applicable. Access by ceiling hatch. FILTERS Filters used in supply air systems shall be 50mm (2) thick throw-away type, with minimum efficiency of 30%. HEATERS Electric fan forced heaters shall be considered in the waiting area and entrances. Heaters can be wall or ceiling mounted. Heaters should be controlled by wall mounted space sensors. Supplemental electric fan forced heater should be considered in the ticket sales area. Electric resistance duct heaters shall have Silicon Control Rectifiers (SCR), minimum airflow switch, and two high-temperature limit sensors.

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
12 of 19
Gas fired unit heaters and infrared heaters shall be considered in large facilities. In all shelters, CSA compliant electric infrared radiant heaters c/w factory installed protective wire cage and stainless steel or nickel chromium tubular heating element shall be suspended by chains or threaded rods at 2440 mm (8 ft) above finish floor level and controlled by a push button and timer. DIFFUSERS Diffusers shall be aluminum. For perforated metal ceilings; diffusers to be perforated type to match the ceiling profile and colour. For high-traffic door locations, or where drafts are a problem with station attendants, linear diffuser air-curtains shall be provided at the doors. DUCTS Air ducts shall be galvanized sheet metal confirming to ASHRAE, SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, and NFPA 90A. Diffuser branch-ducts and air terminal ducts may be circular metal flex-ducts where concealed. Exposed ducts in public areas shall be aluminum spiral ducts. FIRE DAMPERS Fire dampers shall be fusible link type conforming to ULC-S505. An access door shall be installed for inspection and resetting. CONNECTORS Flexible connectors shall be provided between vibrating equipment and connecting ducts. INSULATION Acoustical and thermal duct insulation shall be in accordance with the O.B.C. and ASHRAE 90.1. Acoustical insulation shall be provided to maintain a maximum room sound rating of 40dBA. Piping insulation shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1, with PVC jackets. SYSTEM CONTROL HVAC systems shall be controlled using programmable thermostats to achieve night setbacks. Interlocks for fire protection to be as per OBC and NFPA.
400WP

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
13 of 19
IDENTIFICATION Equipment, piping and systems shall be clearly identified according to industry standards. Equipment shall include manufacturers nameplate, CSA and/or CUL registration plates where applicable. Piping and ducting systems shall be identified using a standard identification system, ASHRAE, CGSB or similar. All labels, tags, nameplates, etc., shall be stainless steel, brass or thick laminated plastic, as appropriate to suit application. APPEARANCE All equipment, vent, access door, door grille, diffuser, return air grille, and exposed duct locations shall be coordinated by the architect/prime consultant. Roof-mounted equipment shall be screened. Where permitted, multiple exhaust ducts shall be combined to minimize building penetration. On sloping station roofs, exhaust ducts shall be directed to vertical gable vents, if applicable. Exterior grade-level equipment (condensing units, etc.) shall be elevated 300 mm minimum above grade, and screened by fencing. Grilles, vents and diffusers shall be recessed or flush with adjoining base-building materials, as detailed by the architect/prime consultant, and shall not be surface-mounted over base-building materials.
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE

BASIS OF CRITERIA The Ontario Building Code (OBC) This article deals with cold and hot water distribution, building storm and sanitary drainage and site drainage within the immediate vicinity of the building. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS Staff washrooms. Public washrooms. Tenant and vending premises. Shop/maintenance facilities. Hosebibs at buildings, tunnels and on platforms. Sump pits for tunnels, elevators and buildings, if applicable.

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
14 of 19
Specialized installations: vehicle wash equipment, progressive maintenance bays (PMBs) for locomotive and coach water supply and sewage disposal, and wells and septic systems or holding tanks at rural sites, if required.
WATER PIPING Water piping shall be copper, type L above ground, type K for buried services. Copper type M and galvanized pipe shall not be used. Waterlines in unheated areas shall be protected from freezing with electric tracing, thermostatically controlled. These sections of piping shall be valved to enable isolation and drainage. Insulation shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 standard. Piping shall be concealed in public areas. Exposed chrome piping shall have chromeplated anchors and hangers. Pipes shall not be routed through electrical rooms, control rooms or communication rooms. Cathodic protection for buried pipes shall be provided if required. Vending and concession areas shall have a cold water supply valved and capped connection as well as a sanitary and vent capped connections, c/w check-meter and remote reader. DRINKING FOUNTAINS Drinking fountains are not to be included in station buildings. HOT WATER The energy source shall be the most economical available. Service hot water shall be provided tempered at 40C at station and terminal washbasins in washrooms. Shops, maintenance and garage facilities may have higher temperatures if required. A re-circulation system normally is not required in a typical GO Station building. Hot water heaters in stations/terminals shall be located in janitor rooms, ceiling-hung to suit space requirements. Relief valves shall be piped to floor drains with air break. A gas fired tankless type hot water system may be used where approved by GO, to minimize piping. HYDRANTS AND HOSE BIBS Wall hydrants and hose bibs shall be minimum 20 mm anti-siphon, non-freeze type in flush mounted box with locking cover and located at buildings, tunnels and on platforms to suit maintenance requirements as directed by GO. Tunnel/platform hose-bib pipe systems shall have gravity drain capability for water shut-off. Hose-bibs shall also be located in 400WP

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
15 of 19
shops, maintenance facilities, loading docks, bus platforms, etc. as directed by GO, sized to suit. LANDSCAPE WATER Buried water supply piping systems shall be provided for the manual watering of landscaping only if specifically requested by GO. If requested, they shall consist of PVC piping and quick coupling hose attachments spaced so that every point in the landscaped area can be reached by a 30 m hose extended from the hose attachment. The system shall be capable of being completely drained or air-blown dry in the autumn. PIPE SLEEVES Galvanized steel pipe sleeves shall be provided in concrete structures to accommodate future piping installations, if required. WATER METERS Water supply lines shall be sized for the specific requirements of the facility. The incoming service shall be metered inside with an exterior readout acceptable to the local utility. Major tenants shall have check-meters. VALVES Each fixture shall have a key operated service valve or shut-off valve. Additional shut-off valves shall be provided for each group of fixtures, e.g., a washroom. At least one shut-off valve shall be provided for each room with one or more fixtures. STORM DRAINAGE Drainage shall be designed to meet the requirements of local authorities, and the relevant storm water management study. See Stormwater Management (section CI-0408-07). Drainage: oil and grit interceptors and inlet control devices may be required. The location of scupper drains and splash pads should be coordinated with the prime consultant. Rail platform shelter roof drains where required, may be directed to Railway R.O.W. ditches, where approved by the Railway, or to a sump pit in the tunnel and then pumped to the storm system.

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
16 of 19
SANITARY DRAINAGE Drainage shall be designed to meet the requirements of local authorities. All washrooms, janitor rooms, mechanical rooms, vending and concession areas and certain maintenance areas as directed by GO, shall be provided with floor drains and strainers. Strainer and sediment buckets shall be provided for heavy duty floor drains, trench drains, and tunnel floors. Tunnels shall have open shallow trench drains at the wall perimeters. See Technical Standards. Food preparation areas require grease interceptors. This applies particularly to tenant premises. Service stations, repair shops and garages require oil interceptors. Parking lots and elevator pits do not require oil interceptors as per O.B.C. SUMP PUMPS Where storm or sanitary drains cannot be discharged to the sewer by gravity flow, flow shall be discharged into a tightly covered and vented sump pit, from which the liquid is lifted and discharged to the sewer by an automatic duplex pump system with automatic changeover and guide bars. Each pump should be sized for 100% flow. Pumps shall be epoxy coated with two (2) totally independent seal assemblies. A 4 float control system shall be provided (OFF LEAD ON LAGG ON ALARM). Provision shall be made for dry C contacts for connection to a remote alarm. Pumps shall be easily removable for maintenance without the need to enter the wet well. Pit cover shall be gas tight, self-opening with piston kit and safety grid. System shall be complete with lifting equipment including lifting davit, chain hoist, lifting device, and chain hook. Sump pits are used for shelter, roof and tunnel drainage, and in elevator or escalator pits. Special sump pumps may be required for maintenance facilities or rural stations (TBD). FIXTURES: GENERAL All fixtures except janitor sink shall be vandal resistant vitreous china.
400WP

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical CUSTODIAN SINKS
General
March 17, 2011
17 of 19
Janitor sinks to be terrazzo, floor mounted. WASHBASINS Multi use public washrooms to have individual semi-countertop basins with one barrier free basin. Faucets to be two-handle centreset type for the barrier free basin. Single use public washrooms to have a barrier free semi-countertop mounted basin with a two-handle centreset faucet. Staff washroom basin to be countertop type with a two handle centreset faucet. There shall be a storage cabinet below. Shop or maintenance facility washrooms to have a trough-type multi-station sink or circular wash basin. Faucets can have foot control, infrared control, or push button control.
WATER CLOSETS Water closets in public washrooms shall be wall hung, with carrier elongated siphon jet flush action bowl, top spud for exposed manual flush valve with non-hold open feature. Seats shall be white, elongated, heavy duty, solid material, open front without cover. Water closets in staff washrooms shall be floor mounted, tank type. Seat shall be white, heavy duty, open front, solid material, oval, with cover. Barrier-free (accessible) water closets shall have covers (lids) as back-rests, to code requirements.
URINALS Urinals shall be wall hung with carrier, top spud for exposed manual flush valve with nonhold open feature and vacuum breaker, siphon jet flush action, integral flush spreader. EYE WASH FOUNTAINS Eye wash fountains shall be wall recessed, stainless steel, located per Code outside battery rooms, or other areas with hazardous products. Typically found in plant facilities.

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
18 of 19
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Septic systems and/or holding tanks for rural facilities. Filling stations for locomotive and coach washroom water supply. Coach washroom sewage removal facilities at progressive maintenance bays (PMBs) in train maintenance facilities. Train and bus wash facilities including recycling of wash water. Wells or water reservoirs at rural facilities to approval of authorities having jurisdiction, including filtration and purification systems. A minimum GO requirement is ultraviolet purification for coliforms and e-coli bacteria with pre-filters. Thermostat controlled electric pipe heating cables shall be used on all water pipes in unheated areas, where the temperature may fall below freezing. Minimum burial depth of piping shall be 1.65m or to municipal requirements.
400WP

EN-0206-01
Page
Mechanical
General
March 17, 2011
19 of 19
FIRE PROTECTION
BASIS OF CRITERIA The Ontario Building Code, N.F.P.A. Standards, and Municipal Fire Department. SPRINKLERS Sprinkler systems are typically found in facilities and regional offices, not typical station buildings. Where sprinklers are required by code, sprinkler systems shall be designed, constructed, installed, and tested in conformance with NFPA 13. Sprinkler heads in public areas shall be concealed flush type, where sprinklers are code-required for major station or terminal facilities. FIRE HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be provided at all facilities. Fire hydrants in landscaped areas or snowdrift areas shall be raised or marked with raised identification flag devices. Minimum burial depth of piping and pipe-marking/protection shall be to municipal requirements. DRY FIRE SUPPRESSION Dry Fire Suppression Systems or clean agent systems for main computer and telephone equipment rooms shall be provided where required by GO Transit. Not found in Station Buildings.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS The Consultant shall specify fire extinguishers to be available during construction and identify and locate fire extinguishers that are required to be supplied and installed by GO Transit for occupancy of premises.
NOISE/VIBRATION
Isolators and vibration control devices shall be specified as required to ensure that equipment-noise and vibration do not interfere with GO Transit operations, as well as to protect adjacent properties from noise and vibration, where necessary.

CI-0207-01
Page
Electrical
General
June 1, 2006
1 of 3
SCOPE
Electrical systems for GO Transit facilities shall comprise the following, including all relevant supply, protection, distribution and control of alternating and direct current systems: Primary and secondary power services; Secondary power distribution; Lighting system including controls; Grounding; and Emergency power.
Also included is the provision of power supply and interface requirements to the following equipment and systems (for SYSTEMS see Tab 4): Illumination; Heating, ventilation and air conditioning equipment; Elevators; Proof of Payment fare collection system (POP) including ticket vending machines (TVMs); CCTV system; Signage, display cases and advertising; Fire alarm system; Telephone system including paging phones; Public Address system (PA); Intercom (including voice-activated); Signal and data systems (including passenger information and computer systems); Security systems (and alarm monitoring); 400WP

CI-0207-01
Page
Electrical Shop equipment;
General
June 1, 2006
2 of 3
Tenant premises/vending machines; Wayside Power systems (rail and bus); Heat tracing (roof drainage and plumbing pipes at exterior walls); Platform and ramp snow-melting systems; Controls and digital clocks; and Isolated ground requirements for the above where required;
CODES AND APPROVALS

The latest editions of the Ontario Building Code (OBC). Canadian Electrical Code. Ontario Electrical Safety Code. C.S.A., U.L.C., N.F.P.A., and the Occupational Health and Safety Act (O.H.S.A.). Electrical Safety Authority (E.S.A.) bulletins. Illumination Engineering Society (I.E.S.) standards. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineering (I.E.E.E.) standards. Local Hydro inspection procedures and approval requirements.
BASIS OF CRITERIA
Energy efficiency and conservation. Cost effectiveness. Compatibility of materials and equipment. When equipment is interconnected to form a system, the characteristics of performance shall be compatible. Supervisory control and data acquisition system requirements.
400WP

CI-0207-01
Page
Electrical
General
June 1, 2006
3 of 3
Also refer to Station Communications and Electronic Systems Document for additional information regarding GO Transit systems.
400WP

CI-0207-02
Page
Electrical
Power Supply and Distribution
April 30, 2012
1 of 12
INCOMING UTILITY SERVICES

Utility services to a site or building will be supplied by the local Supply Authority (PUC). Services to an electrical room or kiosk shall be underground. Service Requirements Line Stations: 120/208 volt service or 347/600 volt; 400 amp min. Maintenance, Repair, Shop and Garage facilities and facilities with elevators: 347/600 volt service. Remote facilities: 120/208 volt service. Incoming services, utility metering, disconnect switch, distribution breakers/switches shall be in one distribution panel. Where GO Transit has tenants, check meters shall be required. One for each tenant. Service size shall be based on the application of conservative engineering design principles consistent with cost effective provisions for future station/terminal or other facility expansion. Temporary facilities shall have overhead service.
UTILIZATION VOLTAGES
Utilization voltages shall be as follows:
SYSTEM Lighting UTILIZATION LED, Fluorescent, high pressure sodium, metal halide VOLTAGE 347V or 120 V 1 phase interior, 347 V or 120 V 1 phase for all exterior application 347V or 120 V 1 phase interior, + Life safety emergency power 600/347 V 3 phase
Life Safety Egress Lighting
LED, Fluorescent, high pressure sodium, metal halide Greater than 5 kW
Heating
400WP

CI-0207-02
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
2 of 12
SYSTEM
UTILIZATION 5 kw or less 120/208 V 1 phase
VOLTAGE
Life Safety Fire Pumps
600/347V or 208/120 V 3 phase interior, + Life safety emergency power Greater than HP 120/208V, or 600/347V 3 phase 120V 1 phase 120/208V, or 600/347V 3 phase + emergency power 120V 1 phase + emergency power 120V 1 phase + emergency power 120V 1 phase + emergency power to each exterior camera 120V 1 phase + emergency power 120V 1 phase + emergency power 120V 1 phase + Life safety emergency power 120V 1 phase + emergency power 120V 1 phase + emergency power 120V 1 phase + Life safety emergency power 120V 1 phase + emergency power 120V 1 phase + emergency power
Motors
HP or less Elevators Motors and Controls
P.A. Telephone System C.C.T.V. Security/Alarm Passenger Information Fire Alarm Proof-of-Payment Fare Collection System Electronic Payment Systems Intercom Video Transmission Digital Clock System (network)
400WP

CI-0207-02
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
3 of 12
SYSTEM Signage and Display System Wayside Power System: Energy Management System Computers Fuel Management Systems
UTILIZATION
VOLTAGE 120V 1 phase + emergency power 600V 3 phase 120V 1 phase + emergency power 120V 1 phase + emergency power 120/208V, or 600/347V 3 phase + emergency power 120/208V, or 600/347V 3 phase + emergency power 120V/208 1 phase 120V1 phase + emergency power
Sand Distribution Systems
Electric Vehicle Charging Systems Car counting Systems
BALANCING OF PHASES
Where single phase power is taken from a 3 phase source, the loads shall be balanced among the three distribution phases. Sites that have a single phase sources available are keep the load on distribution panels balanced.
VOLTAGE DROPS
Voltage drop calculations for motor circuits shall be based on an 80% power factor, lagging.
POWER FACTOR
The overall system power factor shall be greater than 90%.
400WP

CI-0207-02
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
4 of 12
SERVICE DUCTBANKS
Service ductbanks shall conform to the local Utilitys, including Bell Canada, requirements. Spare duct cells and conduits with pull-cords shall be provided in ductbanks as deemed necessary for future use, if requested by GO Transit.
PROTECTION AND METERING

Protective disconnect devices shall be moulded case automatic thermal-magnetic circuit breakers except where distribution system fault current dictates the use of fuse disconnect switches. The single line wiring diagram for the building shall indicate the available fault current at the service entrance, and on each main bus. Voltage surge, lightning, phase overcurrent and ground fault protection shall be provided as required. Consideration shall be given to providing for energy management and smart digital metering. Phase overcurrent and ground fault devices shall be coordinated such that ground faults, short circuits or overloads will trip only the immediate upstream protective device from the point where the fault or overload occurs. The Preliminary Arc Flash hazard study analysis shall be submitted along with the design drawings prior to the co-ordination study. The preliminary arc flash study shall be used to modify the design in order to minimize the hazard. The study shall also be used for the floor boundary marking. Surge Protective Devices (SPD, formerly known as TVSS), Lightning, Phase Over & Under Current and Ground Fault Protection shall be provided as required for protection and safety of building, equipment and personnel. SPD is to be distributed through the distribution system.
PANELBOARDS
Shall be flush or surface mounted as required, complete with hinged locking door and flush catch, and finished with corrosion-resistant primer, equipment gray. Surface mounted panelboards shall be installed on unistrut galvanized steel framing channels with 75mm clear between back of panelboard and wall. Where practical, panelboards shall be grouped in proximity.
400WP

CI-0207-02
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
5 of 12
Panelboard shall be copper bus type, with full capacity solid neutral design and sequence style bussing, composed of an assembly of bolt-in-place moulded case circuit breakers with thermal and magnetic trip and trip-free position separate from either the ON or OFF positions. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall have common simultaneous trip. Overcurrent devices feeding emergency equipment shall be located only in electrical equipment rooms, and fitted with breaker locking devices. Panelboards shall be provided with type-written directories indicating loads controlled by each circuit installed in metal framed clear acetate cover, affixed to the inside cover of the panelboard.
GROUNDING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION GENERAL

This Section outlines protective grounding and equipotential bonding requirements, based on the TN-S system arrangement, including: Transformer neutral grounding; Electrical and Communications Rooms; Exposed conductive parts of electrical equipment; Extraneous conductive parts; and Building main ring electrode.
The design of the ground system shall be based on: Ground resistivity data Ground resistance of the whole system and its components Ground potential rise High ground resistance Systems fault currents and their duration Conductor ratings
The design calculations shall show that the fault currents and DC stray currents will not damage the grounding system.
400WP

CI-0207-02
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
6 of 12
SOIL SURVEY AND CALCULATIONS

A ground resistivity survey shall be carried out at each site. The weather conditions prior to and at the time of the surveys shall be recorded in the report and an assessment made of the seasonal variations in resistivity based on meteorological data for the area.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Grounding system components include: Ground electrode; Main grounding terminals or bars; Grounding conductors; Protective conductors; Equipotential bonding conductors; Electrically independent ground electrodes for special systems (clean ground).
Shared neutral is not allowed. Ground electrode total combined resistance value shall no exceed 0.5 ohm, during any season of the year and before interconnection to other grounded systems or grounding means. Protective conductors shall not to be formed by conduit, trunking or ducting. Ground Fault Loop Impedance for complete circuits shall be recorded. Supplementary Equipotential Bonding: Connect all extraneous conductive parts of the buildings such as metallic conduit and raceways, cable trays and cable armour to nearest grounding terminals by equipotential bonding conductors. A Ground Inspection Chamber shall be provided for each ground rod where connected to a grounding conductor and shall extend 150 mm below top of ground rod.
TRANSFORMER GROUNDING
Transformer body grounding terminal shall be connected to MV main grounding bar by insulated copper grounding conductor not less than 3 AWG per 100 kVA of transformer rating, with a minimum of 2 AWG.
400WP

CI-0207-02
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
7 of 12
Transformer neutral (star point) shall be connected by insulated grounding conductor (colour White) directly to independent grounding electrode. Neutral grounding conductor shall be sized for maximum ground fault current for 5 seconds.
GROUNDING OF DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS AND WIRING ACCESSORIES

Distribution, lighting and power panel boards shall be connected by separate insulated protective conductors run together with incoming feeder cable, connecting ground terminals in panel boards with respective main distribution board grounding bar.
Final Ring Sub-circuits: Protective conductor of every final ring sub-circuit shall be in the form of a ring having both ends connected to ground terminal at origin of circuit in panel board. Lighting fixtures and other exposed conductive parts of electrical installations, such as switches, heaters, air conditioning units, etc. shall be connected by protective ground conductors to grounding terminals of their respective panel boards.
GROUNDING OF ELECTRICAL AND COMMUNICATIONS ROOMS, AND FIXED MACHINERY

A common 50 mm wide x 6 mm thick grounding copper bus shall be connected to the door frame and encircle the Electrical Room and Communications Room. Motor and other equipment ground terminals shall be connected also by protective ground conductors of each branch circuit to ground terminal/bar at motor control centre, panel or distribution unit. Conductors shall be securely fixed, recessed in floor grooves or niches, or fixed to walls by appropriate staples. Ground bar or loop shall be securely fixed to building wall with copper or brass saddles.
GROUNDING OF ROAD/PARKING LOT LIGHTING POLES

Separate protective grounding cables for lighting pole circuits shall be run with power circuit, terminated at LV supply position in lighting control panel and looped into pole grounding terminals. Any metal surfaces associated with handwells and manholes, including non-conductive metal surfaces, must be grounded. 400WP

CI-0207-02
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
8 of 12
Every second pole shall be grounded with a minimum of one ground rod complete with inspection chamber.
GROUNDING OF SIGNAL AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide a clean system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
CLEAN GROUND
In general, clean ground grounding system shall be provided for data system, telephony and other communication systems, and: shall be single point ground to main electrical system ground; and grounding cables shall not be run parallel with other grounding cables or power cables.
GROUNDING OF FENCES
Metallic fences within 1.8 m of any equipment or structure above the surface of the ground, which is connected to the main grounding system, shall be bonded to the grounding system. Ground rods shall be driven adjacent to the posts inside the fence line to a depth of not less than 3.0 m. Where no metallic posts are provided the ground rods shall be connected directly to the metal wires, mesh or other components of the fence.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Lightning protection system is designed to protect structures from damage due to lightning strikes by intercepting such strikes and safely passing their extremely high voltage and current to "ground". Such system shall be installed were there are no surrounding structures that would provide a cone of protection. Lightning protection systems shall include a network of lightning rods, metal conductor, and ground electrodes, designed to provide a low resistant path to ground for potential strikes.
400WP

CI-0207-02
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
9 of 12
In general, grounding conductor connections to structures, connections within the lightning protection system conductors, shall be exothermic copper-weld type unless stated otherwise specified.
ELECTRIFIED RAIL GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS

Under development
DISTRIBUTION METHOD
In general, loads shall be locally fed from power panels, distribution panels and motor control centres. General lighting and system circuits shall be alternately circuited to maintain partial lighting in the event of circuit failure.
WIRING METHOD
RACEWAYS Raceways and branch circuitry shall be implemented to minimize failure of a complete system due to failure or malfunctioning of any single electrical component. Distribution minimizing conductors of different circuits sharing common raceways and pull-boxes, etc., shall be implemented. Raceways selected shall suitably resist mechanical damage and environmental deterioration effects. In particular, special attention shall be applied to corrosion inhibitors and protective coatings or treatments on surface mounted conduit in underground areas (e.g., tunnels, below grade electrical rooms, etc.). CONDUITS Rigid galvanized steel conduit, or other GO Transit approved cabling methods shall be used for all exposed work in normally dry areas not likely to present corrosion problems. Rigid steel or rigid PVC conduit may be used embedded in slabs where high impact protection is required. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be used below ground, either direct buried or concrete encased. PVC or epoxy coated rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used in corrosion problem areas. Conduit, having a minimum of 50mm shall be used in parking lots where deemed necessary; concrete encasement shall be provided for bus loops, road crossings, and railway Right-of-Ways. In finished areas, all conduits shall be concealed. See also Tab 3. ARCHITECTURE.
400WP

CI-0207-02
Page
Electrical CABLE TRAYS
April 30, 2012
10 of 12
Where required, hot dip galvanized cable trays shall be of the totally enclosed, ventilated, or ladder type; steel or aluminium or non-metallic as required for the application, complete with vertical barriers to separate systems or cables as required. Class shall be selected based on conductor weight plus 50% spare capacity as a minimum. Cable trays to be cantilever supported for ease in installation of cables. Fire barriers of multi-transit type shall be provided at fire walls and fire separations, and shall be in accordance with the O.B.C. and CAN4-S115-M. WIRE AND CABLE All conductors shall be stranded copper. Conductors smaller than No. 12 AWG shall not be permitted for lighting or motor branch circuit wiring, except that No. 14 AWG multi-strand type conductors may be used for control circuits only. Provide appropriate connection for terminating and standard wire. Conductors shall have a minimum insulation temperature rating of 90C. All conductor insulation shall be colour coded. RESPONSIBILITY The Consultant shall specify responsibility for wiring and equipment connections. Examples: For voice-activated intercoms the type of wiring is to be as recommended by the equipment supplier, and is to be installed by the electrical contractor, but connected by the equipment supplier. For the P/A, CCTV and security systems, the electrical contractor shall provide conduit with pull-strings, and the equipment supplier shall install wiring and the equipment, making all connections, testing and commissioning. See Tab 4, SYSTEMS. ENCLOSURES Enclosures shall be selected for the environment in which they are intended to be installed. In general, enclosures for indoor, dry application shall be EEMAC sprinkler proof type 1 or type 12 where applicable. Enclosure for damp and wet areas (e.g., tunnels and escalators or elevator pits) shall be EEMAC type 4. Where installed in public areas, all enclosures, cover-plates, outlets plates, access panels, and handwells shall be provided with method of securing doors and covers. All enclosures and panels shall have a common key.and in an enclosed, protected area where possible. Manholes and handholes shall be located remotely from doors and main road and pedestrian traffic areas.
400WP

CI-0207-02
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
11 of 12
No splices are permitted below grade! Underground conduits entering Mechanical, Electrical and Communications Rooms from the exterior shall be sloped to ensure positive drainage away from room. Underground raceways entering any Mechanical, Electrical or Communications Room shall be interrupted by a drained manhole or handhole within 3 m of the room. The minimum opening in the top of the handhole shall be no smaller than 460 mm. The lip of the handhole and manholes shall be identified as to the type of service within by means of grooves cut into the collar of the handhole or manhole. These markings are on the collar shall be 2 grooves; 3mm deep for communications in the direction of conduit in and out and 1 groove; 3mm deep in the direction of conduit in and out for electrical. All electrical or communications handholes placed in the path of vehicular traffic or snow removal equipment shall be OPSD-2112.040 with OPSD-401.030 covers. If OPSD-2112.02 handholes are used, the covers shall be reinforced.
MOTOR CONTROL
In general, circuit breaker type combination starters in Motor Control Centres shall be used for 600 volt motors. However, individually mounted circuit breaker type combination starters may be used where practicable. All starters shall be magnetic, full voltage start, single speed, non-reversing type (except when the driven equipment characteristics or power company limitations require other types), and shall be equipped with an additional one open and one normally closed contact for possible remote status indication at the Motor Control Centre. Each starter shall be equipped with 120 volt transformer and three thermal overload relays. Each motor starter shall have stop and start button and/or hand/off/auto switch with indicator lights. A local heavy-duty unfused isolating disconnect shall be provided within sight of the motor to safely disconnect equipment for servicing. The power for the control circuit shall be from the downstream of the breaker supplying power for the motor.
RECEPTACLES
Receptacles shall be specification grade suitable for back and side wiring and complete with wire ground terminal. Receptacles shall be 20 amp 120 volt duplex non-locking grounding type (CSA configuration 5-20RA) in service areas and 15 amp 120 volt duplex
400WP

CI-0207-02
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
12 of 12
locking ground type (CSA configuration L5-15R) in public areas. Stainless steel face plates shall be used throughout. Twist lock receptacles and special coloured ground receptacles to be used in communications. Receptacles shall not be on lighting circuits, and there shall be no more than six (6) receptacles per circuit in public areas, and no more than four (4) receptacles per circuit in service areas. In general building areas - janitorial outlets are required for cleaning and maintenance. In public open areas, receptacles shall be spaced at 5m centres maximum, and at ceiling level for Christmas Lights as directed by GO transit. Tunnel and exterior building receptacles shall be GFI type, located at spacing to suit 15 m extension cords or as required by GO user groups during detail design review. Other receptacle requirements: Electrical/mechanical rooms - minimum 2 receptacles per room; Station attendant room - See Tab 3, ARCHITECTURE: electrical and communications outlets for computers and fare equipment, voice-links and alarms, etc., in millwork and walls and partitions; Elevator and escalator machine room, as required by Code; Maintenance facility, shop and garage receptacles shall suit equipment requirements; Receptacles shall also be provided for tenants and vending machines as required; and Communications room - minimum of 4 receptacles with 2 on emergency power.
WAYSIDE POWER
Wayside power requirements for trains and buses (bus layover bays): Refer GO STANDARD DRAWINGS.
400WP

CI-0207-03
Page
Electrical
Backup Power Systems
April 30, 2012
1 of 12
SCOPE
This subject describes the functional requirements for Metrolinx facilities backup power system. The power generated by the backup system shall be either true sinusoidal 60 Hz or DC, depending on the requirements. The intent is to ensure the continuing operation of essential equipment and services, and to effectively move passengers from station buildings and train platforms to outside parking areas in the event of a sustained power failure. The final design of the backup power system must include an as-built schematic drawing of the system distribution. It should also include a checklist for commissioning, operation and maintenance, respectively. On a project by project basis Metrolinx will determine which project should include a backup power system, based on scope of work and given site specific conditions.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Backup Power Systems design can include components such as: Generator, UPS, Inverter, Rectifier, etc. As a minimum, the backup Power System shall include: Diesel generator complete with UPS systems having a minimum of 30 minute duration, OR
UPS systems with 90 minute minimum duration if there is no diesel generator set. In each case, the UPS shall be double conversion continuous duty type to provide the electronic communications systems with clean sine wave power. The UPS shall be rated for life safety applications and shall be provided with signals for indication of UPS general alarms and with dial-in remote monitoring control, plus a remote alarm to the station alarm system. Rectifiers shall be used for backup DC power in maintenance and layover facilities where required.
ESSENTIAL LOADS
The following table shows a list of items that are considered to be essential. The table shows both backup power system conditions (i.e. Generator + UPS OR UPS only) and provides an estimated power draw for each item. The actual power draws shall be considered in the detail design and specification must be verified on a project by project basis.
400WP

CI-0207-03
Page
Electrical
Backup Power Systems Estimated Power Draw (Watts)
April 30, 2012
2 of 12
With Generator Diesel Generator UPS System
Essential Load
With NO Generator UPS System
Life Safety Exit signs - buildings, tunnels and similar 100 x x + Life Safety structures (LED type) Public Address System 2,000 x x x CCTV System 2,000 x x x Any additional rack in the Comms Room 2,000 x x x + Life Safety GO Transit telephone System 500 x x x Elevator (only one elevator operating at a 4,500 x time) Elevator controls 2,000 x Alarm Monitoring Systems 400 x x x + Life Safety Lighting Tunnels, bridges and stairwell illumination (at least 1fixture on normal 2,000 x x + Life Safety power) Electrical Room Illumination (at least 1 100 x x x fixture on normal power) Communications Room Illumination (at 100 x x x least 1 fixture on normal power) Ticket Sales Illumination 300 x x Waiting Area Illumination - minimal 1,000 x x + Life Safety Platform Lighting 9,000 x Equipment Ticket Sales Equipment 3,000 x x x Communications Equipment (white board, Pins etc) Presto 4,500 x Mechanical Sump/Sanitary Pump 3,000 x HVAC for electrical & communication 7,500 x room 44,000 10,100 13,500 Estimated Total Power Draw in Watts * Public washrooms shall have their own dedicated plug-in emergency light fixture x
400WP

CI-0207-03
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
3 of 12
** CHUBB security to be considered if automatic locking system is implemented *** Tunnels, Bridges and stairwell assumed to be single tunnel and stair structure at both ends; separate conduit for emergency lighting **** Satellite lots not to be included in emergency lighting ***** Presto system is backed up by its own UPS systems ( 20 and 30 amp receptacles.)
GENERATOR REQUIREMENTS
The generator shall be provided as a factory tested single unit and rated kW, 120/208 or 347/600 Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60Hz, 1800 rpm. The generator shall be certified to CSA C22.2 No. 100, EEMAC MG1-22.40, and NEMA MG1, and shall meet the requirements of Ontario Electrical Safety Code, ESA, EPA, MOE, TSSA, along with all applicable local codes and regulations. The generator shall be self ventilated and shall be a single bearing type direct coupled to the engine. Under short circuit conditions, the generator shall be capable of delivering sufficient current to enable protective breakers to trip. Ambient working temperature: -20C to 40C Acceptable noise level: maximum 65 dB(A) at 7.0 m 1. Diesel Engine The engine shall be EPA compliant (tier 2 engine), with maximum nox plus hc of 3.87g/kw-hr. ULC/CSA labelled double wall construction sub-base mounted steel fuel tank with an enough storage capacity to run the generator set at full load for 24 hours without refuelling. The tanks and fuelling system has to be accepted by TSSA and equipped with fuel paddling system. 2. Alternator The alternator (generator) shall be 120/208 or 347/600 Volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz AC, drip proof, rotating field type with an integral exciter of the brushless or static type and a static voltage regulator utilizing silicon rectifiers on solid-state amplifiers. Voltage regulation shall be within plus or minus 2% of rated voltage for all loads from no load to full load. Output voltage shall be manually adjustable over a range of plus or minus 5% of rated voltage. Rotors shall be salient pole type with amortisseur windings. The generator shall include for 300% short circuit capability for 10 seconds. 3. Engine-generator mounting
400WP

CI-0207-03
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
4 of 12
The engine and generator shall be aligned and mounted on a common fabricated steel base of sufficient rigidity to maintain adequate alignment. Approved adjustable steel spring vibration isolators shall be supplied with such set by the set manufacturer.
4. Control panel Environmentally sealed, solid state, microprocessor-based module for engine control, monitoring, protection and metering. The controller shall meet the CSA (Z462). The controller shall be listed under ULC and UL-508. Set-mounted controller capable of facing right, left, or rear shall be vibration isolated on the generator enclosure. Remote-mounted controller shall also be supplied. The microprocessor control board shall be moisture proof and capable of operation from -40C to 85C. Relays will only be acceptable in high-current circuits. The unit must be able to interface easily to provide remote monitoring and control capabilities over the METROLINX Windows based Network. Monitoring shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Dual range voltmeter +/- 2% accuracy b. Maximum demand ammeter +/- 2% accuracy c. Voltmeter-ammeter 3 phase selector switch d. Battery charging voltmeter and AMP e. Coolant temperature reading f. Oil pressure reading g. Running time h. Direct reading frequency meter 0.5% accuracy on 45 to 65 Hz 5. System protection Circuitry to shut down the engine when signal for high coolant temperature, low coolant level, low oil pressure, or over speed is received. Circuitry shall be of plug-in design for quick replacement. Controller shall be equipped to accept a plug-in device capable of allowing maintenance personnel to test controller performance without operating the engine. The controller shall include: a. Indicating Lights to signal: b. Standard (Not-in-Auto (flashing red)) c. Equipment (Over crank (Red)) d. UPS + Generator Stop (Red) e. High Engine Temperature (Red) f. Over speed (Red) g. Low Oil Pressure (Red) h. Air Damper (Red)
400WP

CI-0207-03
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
5 of 12
i. Battery Charger Malfunction (Red) j. Low Battery Voltage (Red) k. Low Fuel (Red) l. Auxiliary Pre-alarm (Yellow) m. Auxiliary Fault (Red) n. System Ready (Green) o. Optional (Prealarm High Engine Temp. (Yellow)) p. Anticipatory (Prealarm Low Oil Pressure (Yellow)) q. Group (Low Coolant Temp. (Red)) r. Push to test button for indicating lights s. Alarm horn with silencer switch per CSA (Z462). Note: Terminals shall be provided for each signal in above, plus additional terminals for common fault and common pre-alarm 6. Minimum required accessories Line circuit breakers Dedicated load bank of 100% capacity foar each generator
There should be a load bank for testing available on site rather than bringing a load bank onto site and connecting and disconnecting it. This load bank shall be able to be added in steps for testing up to 110 of the generators capacity. The controller shall have provisions for disconnecting a load bank (during exercise) if there is a loss of normal power by an Electrical and Mechanical interlock through ATS.
TRANSFER SWITCH (AUTOMATIC AND MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH)

The transfer switch shall be 120/208 or 347/600 V, 4 wire, 3 phase, 100% rated in Amperes for total system transfer including control of motors, electric-discharge lamps, electric heating, electronic and tungsten-filament lamp load. Switches rated 400 A and below shall be suitable for 100% lamp loads. Switches rated above 400 A shall be suitable for 30% Lamp loads. Automatic transfer switch shall be rated for continuous duty or repetitive load transfer switching. The bypass selector switch shall provide three operating positions: Bypass Normal, Bypass UPS + Generator, and Bypass Open. A two-way bypass isolation switch shall provide manual bypass of the load to either source and permit isolation of the automatic transfer switch from all source and load power
400WP

CI-0207-03
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
6 of 12
conductors. All main contacts shall be manually driven. Electrical and Mechanical interlock arrangements utilizing electrically driven contacts are prohibited. The manual bypass handle will provide two operating modes: Bypass Open and Bypass Closed. Bypass to the load-carrying source shall be affected without any interruption of power to the load (make-before-break contacts). Load break-type bypass for ATS test and isolation shall not be acceptable. In the bypass open mode, bypass contacts shall be open so they will not be subjected to fault currents. The control module shall be mounted separately from the transfer mechanism unit for safety and ease of maintenance. Interfacing relays shall be industrial control grade plug-in type with dust cover. All moveable parts of the operating mechanism shall remain in positive mechanical contact with the main contacts during the transfer operation without the use of separate mechanical interlocks.
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) REQUIREMENTS

Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) are used to support Life Safety systems and protects computers and other sensitive electronic loads from power outages and other power anomalies. This Section includes 3 phase 3 kVA and Single phase < 3 kVA, on-line, static-type, UPS system, comprising the following: Complete rectifier/charger-battery-inverter system with automatic static switch and maintenance by-pass circuit; Central Monitoring System for all UPS units, along with proper interfacing with METROLINX software, IT communication and station operations shall be provided in order to display and control all required parameters. All intercommunication shall be through the Mod bus, BAC Net, etc.; Input isolation transformer for UPS units, where technically required; and Connection of normal AC power from assigned terminals/switch/circuit breaker.
The UPS shall be of commercial type and shall comply with relevant IEC, EIA, NEMA, NFPA 70, IEEE, ISO 9001, ISO 14001, UL-1778, CSA, FCC Class A and Life Safety certified standards. Radio frequency interference (RFI) suppression shall be in accordance with CISPR and IEC 50091-2 recommendations. UPS should be certified for use to support Life Safety Systems. UPS assembly shall include a mimic diagram with digital and LED displays, indicating instruments and control devices, in true relative positions.
400WP

CI-0207-03
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
7 of 12
1. General requirements To meet the existing codes, a separation of equipment backup power and life safety devices must be achieved by a life safety approved UPS system. The UPS shall be interposed between normal AC power supply and critical load, to secure a minimum period of continuity of no-break battery back-up in case of failure of normal AC supply and maintain output voltage, frequency and phase deviation within specified tolerances. An initial 50% expandability should be incorporated for future provisions added in later. The UPS is not to be loaded more than 80% of its overall capacity. System shall be of the programmable type, microprocessor based with CPU and memory capabilities for storage of alarms, faults, status change, etc. The UPS shall permit setting parameters for the environment and type of usage to be specified. UPS shall be of the self-diagnostic type, equipped with a self-test function to verify correct system operation. The self-test shall identify the parts of the UPS requiring repair in case of a fault. The system shall be provided with multi-password levels to limit access to software and data. Non-Redundant System: System complete with 1 set of rectifier-battery-inverter with integrated static switch and external maintenance bypass. UPS shall be maintained (continuously supplying load through the inverters), with automatic no-break transfer to or retransfer from alternate source (bypass) in case of failure or overload on rectifierbattery-inverter system. System overall efficiency shall be not less than 92% at full load and 91% at half load. Noise level of complete assembly is not to exceed 55 dB (A) at 1.0 m distance anywhere within the room that the UPS is located. Temperature limits within which equipment is to be designed to operate are 0C to +40C at 100% rated output. Equipment shall be capable of operating up to 55C ambient conditions with a derating factor of 1.25% per C over 40C. The system shall have an external maintenance bypass that will allow the removal and replacement of the UPS without rewiring. The Voltage supplied to the UPS shall be the voltages on the output of the UPS. 2. Rectifier/Charger Input: Nominal input voltage: 208 or 600 V as required, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz or available voltage upon approval. Voltage input variation: +10%, -15% from nominal
400WP

CI-0207-03
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
8 of 12
Frequency: +/-2%from nominal Transformer exciting current in rush: less than 600% nominal current Power factor: 0.8 smooth and step less at full load and nominal input voltage Total harmonic feedback: maximum 5% (total) Current limiting: 120% maximum of that required to operate inverters and charge battery at full rated load, adjustment possible between 100% and 130% Walk-in current in rush: 25% to 100% FLC in 15 seconds Over-load rating: 130% for 10 minutes, 150% for 60 seconds, and 110% continuous Input Filter Disconnection: UPS control system shall disconnect the input filters in case of interruption of utility power supply failure while the UPS is operating at light loads (less than 25%) Output: Float and equalize operation: Adjustable, automatic, compatible with battery Regulation: +/-1% maximum from 0-100% load Ripple: +/-2% rms. (0 - 100% resistive loads) 3. Inverter Inverter shall employ Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT) technology in threeleg, pulse width modulation (PWM) design with high frequency switching technique, and complete with output transformer and filters. Inverter start-up shall be automatic, to reach full voltage within milliseconds and deliver power to the load within 2 seconds. Inverter shall start at any load including short-circuit. Output transformer shall be 2 winding dry-type, Class H insulated, class B temperature rise, with metallic electrostatic shielding, high efficiency (98%). Nominal net system power output rating. Nominal output voltage: 208 or 600 V as required, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz, adjustable +/-2% of nominal. Output voltage regulation: a. Balanced load: +/-1% (0 100% load) b. Unbalanced load (3-phase output only): +/-3% (at 10% unbalance) c. Phase displacement: 120 (+/-5) at 100% load unbalance 400WP

CI-0207-03
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
9 of 12
d. Inverter Output Neutral: Designed to continuously carry twice the full load phase current. e. Output voltage waveform: 5% max. f. Total harmonic 3% max single harmonic. g. Frequency stability: Normally synchronized to input line frequency over +/-2 adjustable ranges; free running at +/-0. Full battery voltage variation, load and P.F range; slew rate not to exceed 0.1 Hz/sec. 4. Battery High rate discharge, heavy duty, industrial, high impact resistant, clear plastic encased, sealed (gas recombination) type cells with automatically re-closing explosion proof safety vents. Ampere-hour rating shall be sufficient for UPS + Generator period specified with all inverters operating at full rated output, to a discharge limit of not less than 1.65 V per cell. Cells shall be normally maintained at 2.25 V per cell. Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual-cell voltages.
5. Control and Monitoring Panel Local panel instruments shall include at least the following digital readings: Inverter output overload, indicating inverter output beyond specified rating failure of any stage, DC bus earth fault, and inverter output earth fault Event history display for at least last 200 events System on battery supply Inverter phase locked to verify synchronization between inverter output and normal AC supply input. Static switch on normal AC supply (bypass mode) Static switch inhibited. Over-temperature, indicating excessive temperature in heat sinks for transformers, rectifier/charger and inverter (alarm to automatically transfer load to by-pass circuit). Inverter input voltmeter, measuring DC bus volts. Battery ammeter, measuring charge/ discharge current with battery status monitoring system AC voltmeter to measure inverter output voltage, normal supply voltage or system output UPS output ammeter and frequency meter
400WP

CI-0207-03
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
10 of 12
6. System protection Inverter on / off Battery input circuit breaker. Auto / Manual reset-test switch Manual reset switch Hybrid switch transfer test push-button Re-transfer auto/inhibit selector switch to allow automatic re-transfer of load to inverter after timed interval of normal operation and inhibit re-transfer of load to inverter until hybrid switch is in auto-mode Battery automatic/equalize recharge timer, 0-30 hours adjustable, with automatic/boost/equalize switch (accessible to maintenance personnel only and to be used only with manufacturer's recommendation for battery specified). Voltage and frequency adjustment controls with locking devices (accessible to maintenance personnel only) Indicator test / reset switch Control power supply isolator (accessible to maintenance personnel only) Alarm test-accept-reset
ALARMS TO MONITORING SERVICES PROVIDER

Fan failure: Alarm only. Over Temperature: Alarm with automatic transfer of load to by-pass after a safe preset period. D.C. Volts out of Limits: Alarm with indication. Fuse Failure: Alarm only. Battery on Load/Disconnected: Alarm only. Overloads: Alarm only with a trip command if pro-longed, for each rectifier/inverter unit. Normal AC Supply Failure: Alarm only. Hybrid Switch Operation to By-Pass Mode: Alarm only. Low and High Output Voltage: Alarm only.
400WP

CI-0207-03
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
11 of 12
FIGURE 1.A Emergency Power Distribution with Generator
Incoming Power Supply
Main Distribution Panel Generator Minimum Size: 42kW Emergency Life Safety Distribution Panel Fuel Tank Size = 24 hours = 8 hrs emergency run time + 12 months X 1 UPS min. size 3kW UPS Minimum Size: 7.5 kW Emergency Loads Emergency Distribution Panel
Transfer Switch
Transfer Switch
Non-Emergency Loads
UPS By-Pass
30 minute battery size
UPS By-Pass
LIFE SAFETY LOADS
Operational Critical UPS Loads
N.B. The above estimated size of generator/UPS would be the minimum size allowed. The actual size is to be based on specific facility requirements such as parking lot size, building size, number of platforms and tunnels, elevators, etc.
400WP

CI-0207-03
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
12 of 12
FIGURE 1.B Emergency Power Distribution with No Generator
Incoming Power Supply
Main Distribution Panel Life Safety 90 minute battery
By-Pass
UPS Min. Size: 3 kW
UPS Minimum Size: 17 kW
UPS By-Pass
Non-Emergency Loads
Life Safety Loads
UPS Loads
N.B. The above estimated size of generator/UPS would be the minimum size allowed. The actual size is to be based on specific facility requirements such as parking lot size, building size, number of platforms and tunnels, elevators, etc.
400WP

CI-0207-04
Page
Electrical
Service Rooms
April 30, 2012
1 of 11
SERVICE ROOMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Incoming utility services at Metrolinx facilities shall be located in the primary Substation and/or Electrical Room, kiosk, bunker, Hub and Communications Room. All Electrical Rooms and Communications Rooms shall be dedicated and not be shared with other functions, including, but not limited to: custodial, access services, communications, electrical, mechanical and storage. Access to Electrical Rooms and Communications Rooms via (pass through) Communications, Electrical, Mechanical, Janitors Rooms, etc., shall be avoided. Wherever feasible, the main Electrical Room and the main Communications Room shall be located next to each other with exterior access if possible. The Service rooms floor plan shall always be rectangular or square in shape. The room shall never be L-shaped, triangular or any other odd shape. Electrical Room, Hub and Communications Room shall always be a one level room and preferably above grade. The room shall be sized for the known equipment with a provision for a minimum of 25% extra space to accommodate future additional equipment (on a project by project basis). Electrical Room, Hub and Communications Room walls shall not have windows, skylights, roof access hatches/doors, etc. Locating Electrical Room and Communications Room on perimeter curtain walls where windows comprise the entire surface of walls shall be avoided. Drawings shall indicate to scale the arrangement of allocated equipment inside Electrical Rooms, Hub and Communications Rooms, including spaces and clearances. Elevation drawings shall show to scale all related wall mounted equipment for each wall. A minimum 1 m clear working space shall be provided in front of access points, which may occur behind equipment and patch panels, and in front of and behind racking. Racking shall not be positioned closer than 1 m from any wall. No liquid piping, steam piping, drainage piping and/or dry liquid piping shall pass through or within walls of any Electrical Room, Hub or Communications Room, except for refrigerant and condensate piping for the A/C unit in the room. Sprinkler systems that are located in these rooms shall be a dry type pre-action system. All Electrical Rooms, Hub and Communications Rooms shall have a break in all ducts within 3 m of the building by a junction box, handhole or manhole. All manholes or
400WP

CI-0207-04
Page
Electrical
Service Rooms
April 30, 2012
2 of 11
handholes shall be designed so that water is drained away. All ducting shall have the piping slope away from the room. Ducting in the Electrical Room, Hub and Communications Room shall be tray and rigid galvanized steel conduit above floor. EMT is accepted, but only with compression type connectors (screw connectors are not allowed). Walls The building envelope shall be insulated to meet or exceed ASHRAE 90.1 requirements. Walls shall extend from finished floor to the structural ceiling and shall be structurally sound for wall mounted equipment. Concrete cinder blocks shall be used on all walls where poured concrete structural walls are not present. Studded walls are not permitted. Walls shall be fire-rated as required by the applicable codes and regulations and shall be painted with a minimum of two coats of fire-retardant non-dust producing white or light gray paint. 1200 mm wide x 2440 mm x 21 mm A-C grade or better fire retardant plywood, void free, shall be installed all around Communications and Hub Room walls for wall mounted communications equipment. The bottom of plywood shall be mounted 150 mm above finished floor. Paint plywood with a minimum of two coats of fire-retardant white or light gray paint. The fire rating designation shall be placed in an area that is visible and shall not be painted over. Floor Poured concrete sealed floor is preferred in Electrical Room, Hub and Communications Room. Floor finish shall be antistatic dissipative light gray epoxy sealer, applied per manufacturers published specifications for Hub and Communications rooms. A 100mm rubber wall base shall be provided. No floor drain is allowed. Doors The doors shall be at least 915 mm wide x 2135 mm high and shall be hollow metal slab type (no windows) with hollow metal frames. Double or oversized doors should be provided for rooms that have large equipment to be installed and maintained. If the door to the Room is in a fire separation then the door shall have an appropriate fire resistance rating per O.B.C.
400WP

CI-0207-04
Page
Electrical
Service Rooms
April 30, 2012
3 of 11
When feasible, the rooms shall have exterior access but doors shall not open onto a public space. The Electrical Room and Communication Room within a parking structure may be exempt from having an exterior door access, providing access to the Room door is unrestricted. Doors shall not open in to the path of vehicle traffic. Access shall be provided through GO Transit uniform master key system and a centrally controlled alarm keypad and proximity access device system, with an access override feature. The door shall be lockable from outside only. Ceiling No suspended ceiling shall be installed. Finished ceiling minimum height shall be 3.05 m (10- 0). Prime and paint the ceiling with a minimum of two coats of non-dust producing fire retardant paint. Where OWSJ are present, prime and paint all exposed structures to meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings designated by local Code requirements. Flood Prevention Locate Electrical Room and Communications Room above any threat of flooding. Avoid locations that are below grade or adjacent to potential water hazards (restrooms, tunnels, etc). Roof drains and pipe penetrations into the room shall be avoided. Fire Protection Fire-stop all room penetrations (cables, pipes, pathways, trays, conduit slots). Ensure that the fire-resistance rating of installed fire-stopping assembly shall be not less than the fireresistance rating of surrounding floor and wall assembly to match the corresponding fire rating of fire separation. For fire suppression, install a hand held 10lbs CO2 (10 B:C rated) fire extinguisher, with current certification, meeting NFPA 10 requirements. The extinguisher shall be wall mounted on the latch side of the entry door and installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. All panels, boxes and conduit shall be sprinkler proof if required. HVAC Heating, ventilation and air conditioning of Electrical Room and Communications Room shall be provided by a heat pump AC unit with the following features:
400WP

CI-0207-04
Page
Electrical - Low ambient cooling - Heating at -25C - R 410A refrigerant
Service Rooms
April 30, 2012
4 of 11
- Variable compressor speed A fan forced heater shall be provided as a redundancy in case the heat pump does not provide enough heating during the extreme cold days. Because a Hub Room is smaller than a typical Communications Room, and a bunker or kiosk is smaller than an Electrical Room, a heat pump with hyper heating may not be available on the market. If this is the case, a split A/C unit with ambient cooling would provide cooling and the fan forced heater will provide heating. Control of both systems shall be central in order to avoid both systems fighting each other. The heat pump and heater shall be fed from the regular power panel located in the Room. Temperature and humidity requirements are on a 24 hours, 7 days a week basis, regardless of the heat generated by normally operating electrical and communications equipment. The required capacity shall be calculated based on the following: For sensible heat gain from electrical equipment use 2000 Watts per rack (in the Communications Room). Sensible heat gain from lighting. Include the future growth of systems by 25%. Determine heat gain/loss to the room from the outside (heat transfer through building structures, including solar load) using the following design criteria: Outdoor temperatures: Use 2% winter & summer design temperatures per Ontario Building Code for the geographical location. Indoor temperatures: Winter design: 15C Summer design: 22C D B with a maximum of 50% relative humidity. An infiltration rate from outside of 0.5 air changes per hour.
400WP

CI-0207-04
Page
Electrical
Service Rooms
April 30, 2012
5 of 11
A recirculation rate of 100% for the air conditioning system. A safety factor of 5%.
The air conditioning system shall be selected to suit the specific capacity by taking into consideration the rooms very high sensible load factor. Heat loss calculation shall not include credit for equipment and lighting heat gain. Refrigerant Piping The contractor shall provide, install, vacuum test and charge refrigerant piping between the fan coil unit and the condenser unit. Refrigerant suction and liquid pipes shall have the sizes required by the equipment supplier, and should be indicated on the engineering drawing. Piping Material: Hard copper, type ACR (K), conforming to ASTM B280 (Latest Edition) Fittings: wrought copper to ANSI/ASME B16.22 (Latest Edition) Joints to be copper phosphorous (95% Cu-5%P) and non-corrosive flux Pipe Supports: maximum spacing for the copper tubing, up to 32mm (1 ), shall be 1780mm with rod diameters of 10mm (3/8). Insulation: refrigerant piping shall be insulated (individually) with 13mm () Armaflex, c/w Armaflex finish with mesh for all outside piping. Condensate Piping Run condensate pipes from the indoor unit to outside or install condensate pump. Condensate pipes shall never run through or across the room. Run the condensate pipes down the side of the building and terminate the pipe outside at 300 mm above ground. Condensate pipe size shall be NPS 20 mm (3/4). Piping Material: hard drawn copper, type DWV tubing, conforming to ASTM B306, with copper solder joints drainage fittings to ANSI/ASME B16.23 respectively. Pipe Supports: maximum spacing for the copper tubing shall be 1780mm with rod diameters of 10mm (3/8). Miscellaneous Proper selection of voltage and phase for the mechanical equipment shall be coordinated. The condensing unit shall have low ambient control.
400WP

CI-0207-04
Page
Electrical
Service Rooms
April 30, 2012
6 of 11
The split type air conditioning is to consist of an indoor fan coil unit and an outdoor condensing unit as follows: The fan coil unit shall be the wall hung type mounted 2300 mm above floor level, preferably above the door. Any condensing unit location is subject to approval by Metrolinx.
A wall mounted cooling thermostat (set at 22C) shall be installed approximately 1700 mm above floor level and be marked Heat Pump. Thermostat should be on interior wall whenever possible. Thermostat must have auto-changeover capability. If heaters are installed in same room they should be interlocked with HVAC to prevent heating and cooling at same time. A Dual Temperature Sensor, for a high and low room temperature alarm, shall be installed for connection to The Security Monitoring System. The dual sensor shall be of the approved type that is appropriate for this specific application. A carbon monoxide sensor shall control the ventilation system and shall be able of sending an alarm to the Security Monitoring System in case of higher CO concentrations. All equipment shall have nameplates indicating model, capacity and electrical data. The wall mounted thermostats shall be supplied with the units (for field wiring). The air conditioning equipment and heater shall be supplied by a reputable manufacturer. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Noise/Vibration Isolators and vibration control devices shall be specified as required to ensure that equipment-noise and vibration do not interfere with operations, as well as to protect adjacent properties from noise and vibration. Grounding A common 50 mm wide x 6 mm thick copper bus shall be connected to the door and frame and encircle the Electrical Room and Communications Room. Conductors shall be securely fixed, recessed in floor grooves or niches, or fixed to walls by appropriate staples. Ground bar or loop shall be securely fixed to building wall with copper or brass saddles.
400WP

CI-0207-04
Page
Electrical
Service Rooms
April 30, 2012
7 of 11
ELECTRICAL ROOM
Electrical service Substations are typical at GO Rail Service Centres. For details, see Layover document. Install HVAC in all electrical rooms w/auto changeover. Whenever possible there should be one main Electrical Room that feeds the entire site, as it is the goal at most facilities to have only one utility power source. Sub Room(s) shall be strategically placed around the main Electrical Room to facilitate an efficient distribution of power to loads to boilers, tunnels, bridges, main and sub-structures (e.g. parking structures, stations, service and storage buildings and maintenance facilities), as required. Electrical closets shall be provided to minimize the number of home runs from distribution panels to their respective sub-panels or equipment loads, and to reduce the number of conductors and minimize voltage drop or in preparation for future requirements. The typical Electrical Room at Metrolinx facilities shall include space for locating: Distribution panels Metering Cabinets Transformer Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) Transfer Switches Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) Data and telephone outlets A service-working station by the door with power and data connections. The station shall be a cabinet-lectern combination sized to hold ANSI B drawings, to serve as a working surface and storage for drawings, manuals and onsite component and parts
A minimum continuous 17 m of wall space is required for equipment installation. All wall installed panels and conduits or ducts shall be installed on strut channel mounting system. All floor mounted panels and equipment shall be installed on housekeeping concrete pads. The housekeeping pad shall be a minimum of 100 mm above the floor and shall extend beyond the equipment footprint as per manufacturers requirements. A non-fade single line diagram of the electrical system related to the room shall be framed and posted under a polycarbonate cover adjacent to the entrance of the Electrical Room. The diagram shall be legible from a distance of 1 m. 400WP

CI-0207-04
Page
Electrical
Service Rooms
April 30, 2012
8 of 11
Provide markings on the floor showing the arc flash boundaries in around equipment and panels.
COMMUNICATIONS AND HUB ROOM OVERVIEW

All Communications Rooms shall be designed in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-ACommercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. The Room shall accommodate the following equipment (refer to IT Telecommunications and Systems Document for list of IT equipment): Network System Rack CCTV System Rack PA System Rack Passenger Notification System (PINS, Whiteboard, etc) Telephone Infrastructure Two-way Communication Infrastructure (elevator cab intercom and information intercom) Fare Collection Equipment: Presto and legacy Alarm and Security Monitoring Equipment Fire Safety System Space Counting System (in parking structures) Building Automation System Server Snow melt management system
At facilities where the distance of cable runs exceeds 90m (300ft) between the end device and accumulation point as deemed necessary by Metrolinx, Communications Hub Room(s) shall be implemented. Hub Rooms are satellite Communications Rooms, designed to accommodate a minimum of two floor mounted racks. Hub Rooms purposes are to: Minimize the number of home runs from remote devices to their respective head end equipment; reduce usage of optical fiber and associated equipment; concentrate the distribution of collocated devices; facilitate future implementation of Communications systems. At multi-level parking structures, Communications Hub Room(s) shall be strategically placed directly above the main Communications Room and centrally located to meet
400WP

CI-0207-04
Page
Electrical
Service Rooms
April 30, 2012
9 of 11
the 90 m (300 ft) cable run distance limitation. One Hub Room can serve more than one floor. Communications Room and Hub Room shall be dedicated and not be shared with other functions, including, but not limited to: custodial, access services, electrical, mechanical and storage. Access to Communications Room and Hub Room via (pass through) Electrical, Mechanical, Janitors Rooms, etc., shall be avoided. Room dimensions (minimum wall to wall): 3.2 m wide x 3.6 m long Communications Hub Room 3.2 m wide x 4.8 m long Communications Rooms at stations and small to medium sized facilities 3.2 m wide x 5.4 m long - Communications Rooms at large facilities and/or parking structures Note: Small, medium, and large size facilities are determined by the number of racks that are needed to house all equipment systems and varies per facility. For Type A Bus and Rail Facilities: 3.2 x 6.6 Space for 6 Racks Type B Bus Facilities: 3.2 x 5.4 Space for 5 Racks Type C Bus Facilities: 3.2 x 4.8 Space for 4 Racks Communications Room shall be located next to the Electrical Room with exterior access if possible, within parking garages these rooms shall open onto the interior of the garage.
Communications Room and Hub Room connectivity A minimum of nine (9) 53 mm (2) dedicated conduits shall provide connectivity from the Communications Hub Room to its respective Communications Room. If more than one Hub Room is required, then each Room must have its own direct dedicated set of conduits linking it to the Communications Room which may be designed as a pass-through layout.. If more than one Communications Room on site, a minimum of nine (9) 53 mm (2) dedicated conduits shall provide connectivity from one Communications Room to the other. Refer to IT Telecommunications and Systems Document for list of equipment Electrical Codes and Standards All electrical work shall conform to the Ontario Electrical Safety Code and other applicable codes and standards as referenced throughout this document.
400WP

CI-0207-04
Page
Electrical Electrical Guidelines
Service Rooms
April 30, 2012
10 of 11
All communications equipment in the Communications Room shall be serviced by a dedicated 120/208 V 3 4W 225 A panel located inside the Room, and fed from an UPS placed inside the Electrical Room. If 208 V service is not available, 120/240 V 1 3W 225 A panel shall be used. There is one exception, Presto shall be fed from a dedicated 120/208 V 3 4W 225 A regular generator backed up panel located inside the Room All communications equipment in the Hub Room shall be powered from a sub-panel fed from the dedicated back-up electrical panel located in the Communications Room. A dedicated electrical panel shall be provided for regular power inside each Communications Room. This panel grounding shall be connected to the Electrical Room grounding system. All panels shall be sized to meet Design Requirements Manual guidelines. All panels shall have remote monitoring and control of all circuits capabilities. Half of the light fixtures inside Communications and Hub Room shall be powered from the UPS backed-up panel. Heating and air conditioning of the Communications and Hub Room shall be generator backed-up only (no UPS back-up). All panels, boxes and conduit shall be sprinkler proof. Power Outlets Each communications equipment rack shall be fed from two independent tray mounted twist lock L-20R single receptacles. Each such receptacle shall be fed from a dedicated circuit. Refer the IT telecommunications and Systems document for detailed specifications. See Presto subsection under Fare Handling Systems section for power requirements. Provide a minimum of three (3) normal power 5-20RA 120 V duplex receptacles, powered from three dedicated circuits, for maintenance and identified as such. These receptacles shall be wall mounted and not located on cable tray or cable ladders, as not to be confused with communication dedicated receptacles. Provide a power bar for the equipment mounted on the plywood backboard. Each connection on the power bar shall have nameplates to provide power tracing ease. The power bar shall be a multi-outlet raceway. All equipment connecting to the power bar shall have nameplates indicating model, capacity and electrical data. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
400WP

CI-0207-04
Page
Electrical Grounding
Service Rooms
April 30, 2012
11 of 11
The Communications rooms and Hub rooms shall form a Dedicated Ground Zone (DGZ). All communications equipment in the Communications and Hub Room shall be electrically insulated from the building structure. A single point grounding method shall be employed in grounding the communications equipment. The access door frame and door to the communication room shall be grounded using the same grounding method and loop as the Communications and Hub Room.
400WP

CI-0207-05
Page
Electrical
Illumination
April 30, 2012
1 of 9
ILLUMINATION SCOPE
This section addresses interior and exterior illumination requirements illumination for GO site and building facilities. The intent is to provide good uniform quality lighting that meets the locations application.
BASIS OF CRITERIA
The levels and quality of lighting for the various types of areas shall be as outlined in the latest edition of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IES) Lighting Handbook, as modified here and as required to accommodate the Ontario Building Code and Ontario Electrical Safety Code. They shall take into consideration the aging population and the needs for accessibility of all groups (e.g. CNIB recommendations). Illumination systems shall require minimal maintenance, and shall be energy efficient and readily accessible, designed for passenger safety and security. Illumination shall be designed to provide visual comfort and minimum glare for GO staff and passengers. The illumination systems shall be compatible with CCTV systems. Building luminaries in public areas shall be integrated with the architecture. Luminaries shall be in locations designed by the architect, complementing daylight sources. All luminaries must be accessible for maintenance and lamp replacement without having to construct special means of approaching the fixture. Where lighting is of a complex or unique nature or if required by GO, the Consultant shall engage the services of a qualified Illumination Designer. Design photometric digital file in PDF or dwg format, complete with printouts using recognized computer lighting design software, shall be provided for GO review of design illumination levels. These photometric files shall be included in the As-built drawings. ILLUMINATION LEVELS For the purpose of calculation, the working plane for illumination shall be: Location Working Plane Height Circulation areas both public and nonFloor level public including exterior traffic areas. Public seating (waiting) areas 850mm Workshops 850mm
400WP

CI-0207-05
Page
Electrical
Illumination
April 30, 2012
2 of 9
Location Working Plane Height Vertical illumination (task lighting) At the task The average maintenance factor for use in all areas other than offices shall be 0.75. Interior Lighting Minimum average maintained illumination levels as per IES / CNIB or as directed by GO: Waiting Room Station Attendant Room Ticket Counter task lighting Staff Washroom Public Washroom Electrical Room Communications Room Janitorial/Storage Room Elevator/Escalator (incl. elevator vestibules) Shelter BRT Building (Bus Rapid Transit) Shop/Workbenches Electronic Shop Workbenches (task lights) Garage Mechanical Room Dispatch Room Hallway/Corridor/Tunnel/Stairwell Office Other 20 Fc (200 LUX) 20 Fc (200 LUX) 40 Fc (400 LUX) 20 Fc (200 LUX) 20 Fc (200 LUX) 75 Fc (750 LUX) 75 Fc (750 LUX) 20 Fc (200 LUX) 20 Fc (200 LUX) (Note 1) 5 Fc (50 LUX) (Note 2) 15 Fc (150 LUX) 30 Fc (300 LUX) As per IES 30 Fc (300 LUX) 20 Fc (200 LUX) 15 Fc (150 LUX) 20 Fc (200 LUX) As per IES or CIBC As per IES or as directed by GO or CNIB
Note 1: Elevator Code to govern Note 2: Low illumination level to equalize visibility of the platform
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Minimum average maintained illumination levels as per IES / CNIB or as directed by GO: Parking Lot Parking Structures General parking and Pedestrian areas occupied unoccupied Ramps and corners 2 Fc (20 LUX) 5 Fc (55 LUX) 2.5 Fc (28 LUX) 10 Fc (110 LUX)
400WP

CI-0207-05
Page
Electrical
Illumination
April 30, 2012
3 of 9
Entrance areas 50 Fc (540 LUX) Passenger Drop off & Pick-up Areas 5 Fc (50 LUX) Train Platform 5 Fc (50 LUX) Mini-Platform/Designated Waiting Area 15 Fc (150 LUX) Access Road 2 Fc (20 LUX) Bus Platform 5 Fc (50 LUX) Platform boarding area (bus and train) 10 Fc (100 LUX) Canopy 20 Fc (200 LUX) Tunnel or Overpass & Open Stairwell at a 20 Fc (200 LUX) Building Exterior Stairs & Walkways Separate from 20 Fc (200 LUX) Buildings Pedestrian Paths and Bike ways 2 Fc (20 LUX) Layover General lighting 2 Fc (20 LUX) Wayside cabinet and Switch area 5 Fc (50 LUX) Station locations with a high probability of vandalism shall have extra bright illumination, if required and viable in terms of adjacent neighbourhoods.
UNIFORMITY RATIO
Maximum to minimum: Average to minimum: 4:1 or better 3:1 or better.
LIGHT SOURCES AND CONTROLS INTERIOR

Location Waiting Control and Backup Time-of-day controller, 100% station open hours, 10% minimum station closed, 10% on Generator. Day light harvesting were possible. LED, Electronic ballast fluorescent Local switches. One luminaries, rapid start fluorescent fixture UPS + bulbs, parabolic lenses, Generator backed-up Light Source Electronic ballast fluorescent luminaries (rapid start fluorescent bulbs 1219 mm long or 600 x 600 luminaries with U-tubes, or compact fluorescent pot lights), LED or metal halide sconce lights
Station Attendant
400WP

CI-0207-05
Page
Electrical Location
Illumination
April 30, 2012
4 of 9
Staff Washroom
Public Washroom
Light Source continuous task lights over counters with parabolic lenses for glare-free illumination (no visible light source) Mirror task light or surface mounted LED or fluorescent luminaries c/w lenses LED, vandal resistant luminaries or valance or cove lights for large facilities
Electrical, Comms., 2-tube strip LED or fluorescents, Mechanical, Janitor, and rapid-start fluorescent bulbs, 1219 Storage Rooms. mm long or surface mounted luminaries with lenses
Shop
Garage Maintenance Shop
LED or 2-tube strip fluorescents, rapid-start T8 bulbs, 2438 mm long, suspended. Task lights over equipment and workbenches to suit functions LED, high pressure sodium (HPS), metal halide luminaries or fluorescent luminaries for shops. LED Task lights where required
Control and Backup over sales counter, one over cash area and safe, or 10% minimum station closed Occupancy sensor switch. One luminary on UPS + Generator On/Off switch with occupancy sensor, one fixture on UPS + Generator On/Off switch with occupancy sensor, 50% on UPS + Generator in Mechanical, Electrical and Comms. Rooms only Local switching or to suit particular application, 10% on UPS + Generator Panel or central switching to suit particular application. 10% on UPS + Generator or to Code requirements Local switches, dimmers, 10% on UPS + Generator.
Dispatch
Office Location Parking Lot, Passenger Drop-off and Pick-up Areas, and Bus Loop Areas including Bus Platforms and Access 400WP
LED or fluorescent, parabolic lenses, and supplementary illumination for maintenance with task lights to suit Per IES
10% on UPS + Generator Light Source Control LED, or 250 W or 400 W High Circuited for 30% in Pressure Sodium (HPS) area operation during lights or down lights on 6 or 12 m station closed hours high galvanized steel poles or high (photo-control only) masts on concrete bases. See and to have manual

CI-0207-05
Page
Electrical Location
Illumination Light Source Notes below.
April 30, 2012
5 of 9
Control Roads override of the photo control and time-clock (the manual override shall not be digital) Parking Structure LED Day light harvesting and occupancy sensor control of two light levels and timer Rail Platform LED or 150 W HPS luminaries, flat Both timer and photo lens, on 6 m hinged poles on 300 cell controlled, on mm high concrete bases or in Generator. During canopy. Urban platforms may station closed hours require LED or Metal Halide 100% off. Override luminaries if requested by the switch (snow removal municipality. use): 100% on Mini-Platform Same as Rail Platform Controlled as part of Rail Platform Tunnel, enclosed LED , 1219 mm long, c/w vandal Breaker control, 30% bridges and canopies resistant lenses, lights should be on UPS + Generator dimmable, when space not occupied Internal Stairwell LED or H.O. compact fluorescent Breaker control, 30% (tunnel, parking luminaries, semi-recessed in on UPS + Generator structure) walls, below handrails Exterior Stair and Same as parking lot, Pole location Same as parking lot Walkway to suit Notes: 1. The Consultant shall examine the different alternatives of parking lot illumination design: high mast, flood lighting and area lighting. Generally, stations near residential areas shall have area lighting. (Flood lighting should be avoided were ever possible) Where floodlighting is used, upward glare shall be addressed and minimized. High mast lighting shall be considered for parking lots in industrial areas. 2. For ease of lighting maintenance, large areas (tunnel, bride, waiting area, boardrooms, lunch rooms, maintenance facilities, etc) lighting shall have at least two sources of light control.
LED LIGHTING MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

1. LED light fixtures shall be warranted for a minimum of 5 years.
400WP

CI-0207-05
Page
Electrical
Illumination
April 30, 2012
6 of 9
2. LED light fixtures shall work with the available power supply on site. Every fixture shall have surge suppression. 3. Fixtures lighting efficiency shall equal the most current industry accepted standard. The lighting efficiency shall not be achieved by overdriving the LEDs. 4. The LEDs in the fixture must be of the same colour temperature. LEDs with CRI below 75 are not acceptable for indoor lighting. 5. Fixtures shall be provided with a lighting facts label. Outdoor fixtures must have an IP65 general use rating. For locations subject to high pressure washing (tunnels, platforms or parking structures) the fixtures shall have an IP 66 rating. 6. The fixture shall meet LM 79 rating and the chips shall meet LM 80 rating. LED B50 and L70 lifetime graph shall be provided. 7. The fixture must be vandal resistant and shall be modular in design for easy upgrade of the LED light engine, simple maintenance (straightforward part replacement) and installation. 8. The component connections shall be of plug-in type, tool-less removal and replacement. 9. The fixture shall be dark sky compliant, with good light control and minimum to no glare. 10. Lens, if required, shall be flat tempered glass. 11. The fixtures shall have network connectivity and be remotely dimmable.
LIGHTING CONTROL DESIGN CRITERIA

One half (1/2) hour before the first AM train: Platform, platform canopy, platform shelter, information signs and shelters, and building canopy lighting to be 100% ON. One half (1/2) hour before the first AM bus: Bus loop and bus loop shelter lighting to be 100% ON. Parking lot lighting shall be 100% ON.
*All lights to turn OFF once the light levels are high enough that the photocell turns the exterior lights off.
400WP

CI-0207-05
Page
Electrical
Illumination
April 30, 2012
7 of 9
**Where applicable, illuminated Station ID signs to turn ON 1/2 hour before the first AM bus or train, whichever is earlier. One (1) hour after the last PM train: Platform, platform canopy, platform shelter, information signs and shelters, and building canopy lighting to be 100% OFF. Building canopy security lighting (i.e. 30% or better, as determined by Station Services) to remain on where ON/OFF is to be controlled by photocell. Parking lot lighting to drop to security lighting (i.e. 30% or better, as determined by Station Services). Illuminated Station ID sign to turn OFF. One (1) hour after the last PM bus: Bus loop and bus loop shelter lighting to be 100% OFF. Parking lot lighting to be further reduced to 100% OFF. Illuminated facility ID sign to turn OFF.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING ON/OFF CONTROLS

The lighting controls shall be designed to provide the following functions: The lighting controller (i.e. timer) shall be programmable controlled, PLC, complete with automatic daylight savings adjustment. Provide a photocell control on all control designs where the default is dusk to dawn. Sites that are being rehabilitated should have their lighting controls modified to meet these requirements. OVERRIDE SWITCHES Three master override switches shall be provided for station, electrical room,.ticket booth and terminal outdoor illumination (including parking, bus loop, access road, rail platform, bus platform and roof overhang or canopy illumination). One switch shall be located inside the electrical room, the ticket booth and the last located outside the station building in a location determined by GO and housed in weather tight, PVC lockable box. The lighting control system will resume its normal operation after the override switch has been switched off.
400WP

CI-0207-05
Page
Electrical
Illumination
April 30, 2012
8 of 9
Every remote parking lot shall have its own master override switch, following the same guidelines as above: one switch inside the local power cabinet and one switch conveniently located outside the cabinet and housed in weather tight, PVC lockable box.
EXIT LIGHTS
Exit lights shall be of the fully self-contained and low energy LED type.
EMERGENCY LIGHTS
Emergency lighting shall be in accordance with the OBC, the Ontario Electrical Safety Code, and the latest CSA standards.
GLARE
Adjacent properties shall be shielded from glare or light trespass. There shall be no interference with railroad signal or operations systems due to glare. The discomfort Glare Rating shall have a Visual Comfort Probability (VCP) of 65% or greater for interior lighting. Station attendants and passengers at ticket sales counters shall be able to see each other 100% through the glass separating them. Luminaries in this location shall have parabolic egg crate lenses, with all illumination directed vertically down to the task. Passengers and station attendants shall be capable of seeing out to the exterior at night. All glass shall be clear and not tinted, for maximum visibility, also of the interior. Luminaries' placement shall take into account viewing angles and fields of view of close circuit television cameras. Luminaries shall not present a source of glare to surveillance cameras.
DAYLIGHT
Particular attention shall be directed to parking structure, rail station and bus terminal entrance/exit areas, especially on large projects. Illumination shall provide for a visually comfortable transition from outdoors to facility entry areas during all hours of system operation. Illumination levels will likely have to be graduated during the daylight hours to minimize otherwise abrupt changes from outdoors to indoors, and vice versa. Photoelectric cells for the automatic operation of additional lighting fixtures may be utilized.
400WP

CI-0207-05
Page
Electrical
Illumination
April 30, 2012
9 of 9
MINIMUM HEIGHT
Light fixtures shall generally be mounted at least 2.44 m above floor level. Exceptions are task lights under cabinets or above counters (including shop maintenance counters). Tunnel-stair fixtures shall be wall recessed below stair handrails, or at tread level.
SUNDRY
All rail platform poles shall be hinged to avoid flagman services. Hinged poles shall be installed in such a manner to avoid obstructions when lowered. Hinging shall be always parallel to the track. CCTV camera(s) shall have dedicated split pole(s). PA speakers can be installed on existing lighting poles only if they are split. High-mast lighting poles shall have no objects attached onto (e.g. parking identification, PA speakers, etc) to avoid obstruction of the lowering device.
STANDARD LIGHT POLE DRAWINGS

Digital drawing files (AutoCAD 2007) are available for 3 and 6 metre hinged pole, 6 metre, 12 metre and 30 metre (high mast) pole under PMPS GO Standard Drawings.
400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical
Identification and Labelling
April 30, 2012
1 of 15
SCOPE
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Name plates and labels. Wire and cable markers. Conduit markers. Panel & race way identification. Pull and junction box identification. Receptacle identification. Fire Alarm identification. End of line resistances. Communication cabinets identification. Manhole and handhole markers. Underground warning tapes. Labelling nomenclature. Electrical Rooms are to have a framed Single Line Drawing of the Electrical Distribution System which is to be updated with any addition or deletion of part of the system.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Provide products listed and classified by CSA, ESA and acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
GENERAL
Label and identify all equipment, instruments, control and electrical devices etc. to indicate duty, nomenclature identification number, service/function, to the satisfaction of GO. Identifications shall be in English. Alternative methods of labelling may be submitted for approval. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or 400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
2 of 15
required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. All designations shall be to client approval. Conflict: Should an instance occur in the document or on the drawings in which material or construction methods called for is less than minimum requirement of the Regulations, the Engineer shall be immediately informed in writing. Consequent to the Engineers approval, supply the materials and perform the work as through called for to code standards. In the event of any conflict arising between the local regulations, IEEE, IEE, IEC standards and / or the document, the more stringent of these are to be followed. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors prescribed by these guidelines.
NAMEPLATES
Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background. Lamicoid Nameplates: 3 mm thick plastic engraving sheet, black face, white core, mechanically attached, sizes as follows: NAME PLATE SIZES Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 7 Size 8 (a) 10 x 50 mm 12 x 70 mm 12 x 70 mm 20 x 90 mm 20 x 90 mm 25 x 100 mm 25 x 100 mm 53 X 100 mm 1 Line 1 Line 2 Line 1 Line 2 Line 1 Line 2 Line 1 Line 3 mm high letters 5 mm high letters 3 mm high letters 8 mm high letters 5 mm high letters 12 mm high letters 6 mm high letters 25 mm high letters
Locations: Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. (i) Nameplate Identification of Equipment A. Panel board Directories;
400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical B. C. D. E. F. G. H. (ii) (iii) (b)
April 30, 2012
3 of 15
Communications Cabinets, Cable and Equipment Labelling; Intermittent Colour Coding of Conduit and Cable; Identification of Pull and Junction Boxes; Colour Identification of Wiring; Name/Number Identification of Wiring; Identification of Receptacles & Fire Alarm End-of-Line Resistors and Duct Detectors; and Equipment Identification Schedule.
Use 3mm [1/8 inch] letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. Use 6mm [1/4 inch] letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 5mm [3/16inch] white letters on black background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, control device, and junction boxes.
WIRE MARKERS
(c) Locations: Each conductor in a panel board, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, patch panel, rack and each connection. (i) Wire Identification Materials: Use one of the following: A. B. C. D. E. Heat shrink sleeves, blank; Clear plastic tape wrap-on strips with white writing section; Wrap-on strips, pre-numbered; Slip-on identification bead markers or sleeves, blank or pre-numbered; Power& Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit/feeder number indicated on drawings;
400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical F.
April 30, 2012
4 of 15
Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic& interconnection diagrams on drawings & shop drawings.
(ii)
Nameplate Identification of Equipment: A. Identify equipment with lamicoid nameplates as indicated in Equipment Identification Schedule.
PANEL BOARD DIRECTORIES

(d) Identify loads controlled by each over current protective device in each panel board, by means of a typewritten panel board directory.
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE AND EQUIPMENT LABELING

(e) (f) (g) (h) Label communication outlets, panels and ports with lamicoid nameplates as specified in Equipment Identification Schedule. Label each of cables with other ends addressing the Enter and Exit Point of Junction Box, Pull Box & Panels using Wire Identification Materials. Label outlets with labels vertically aligned in each row. Position panel labels in the same position on each panel.
COLOUR IDENTIFICATION OF WIRING

(i) (j) Identify No. 4/0 AWG wiring and smaller by continuous insulation colour. Identify wiring larger than No. 4/0 AWG by continuous insulation colour or by colour banding tape applied at each end and at splices. Colour coding shall be in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code, and as follows:
(k)
400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
5 of 15
Voltage 1. 2. 3. 12V, 24V and 120 V dc 120/208 V, 3 phase:(300V max) 120/208 V emergency: :(300V max) Blue
Colour
Red, black and blue ( neutral White) Red, black and blue with Yellow tracer (neutral white) Orange, brown and yellow. .( neutral White) Orange, brown and yellow with red tracer. . (neutral White)
4. 5.
347/600 V 3 phase 347/600 V emergency
(l) (m)
Where multi-conductor cables are used, use same colour-coding system for identification of wiring throughout each system. Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout each system.
NAME / NUMBER IDENTIFICATION OF WIRING

(n) (o) (p) (q) Identify No 8 AWG wiring & smaller using wire identification methods. Types or print on blank wire identification materials using indelible black ink. Identify wiring at all pull boxes, junction boxes, and outlet boxes for all systems. Identify each conductor as layout in section Labelling Nomenclature include in labelling panel & circuit, terminal, terminal numbers, system number scheme& polarization, as applicable.
400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
6 of 15
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

Equipment Main Distribution Centre Colour Voltage Colour Nameplate Identification Building name, consulting engineer, date installed, amp, volt Main breaker, Metering cabinet Instrument transformer enclosure Loads controlled by each over current protective device Metering devices Distribution Centre Voltage Colour Distribution centre designation, amperage, and voltage Loads controlled by each over current protective device Panel boards MCC Voltage Colour Voltage Colour Panel board designation M.C.C. designation, amperage and voltage Relay terminal and transformer compartments Manual Motor starters Ground Bus On / Off Switches Disconnect Switches Transformers (Trx ) Emergency Power Equipment Wire ways Line Voltage Poles N/A N/A N/A Voltage Colour Voltage Colour Voltage Colour Load controlled and mnemonics System Ground Load controlled Voltage and equipment controlled and mnemonics Trx designation, capacity, secondary & primary volt Designation and voltage Plate Size 6 4 4 2 2 4
4 4 2 2 2 2 4 4 4
N/A Voltage
Voltage and system designation Designation and voltage Each pole shall have a unique id number above the electrical access hole stamped into the metal or pole material by the manufacture.
4 4
400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
7 of 15
Equipment Low Voltage Cabinets and Enclosures Communications handholes and manhole
Colour System Colour
Nameplate Identification System name; system name and number if more than one cabinet or enclosure Major components within cabinets and enclosures Two (2) markings ground in to surface 24.5 mm apart on the entry and exit side of the manhole on the collar of the manhole or handhole. Inside manhole and handhole should be painted the handhole or manhole number. No markings on the collar of the manhole or handhole. Inside manhole and handhole should be painted the handhole or manhole number.
Plate Size 4
2 8
Power handholes and manhole
Outlet: Data, clocks, radio, fair system, video, telephone and PA Outlet to power communication equipment Panels
N/A
Panel Designation
EQUIPMENT INCLUDING CONDUITS, BOXES, SPLITTERS AND PANELS

(r) Conduit Markers Location: Provide markers for each conduit longer than 2m [6 ft.]. (i) (ii) (iii) (s) Colour Banding Tape: Adhesive backed plastic tape, integrally coloured. Code conduits and cables where conduits or cables enter or leave walls, ceilings or floors. Spacing: maximum spacing 6m [20feet] on centre.
Colour: prime colour to be 25 mm wide and the Auxiliary Colour to be 19 mm wide.
400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
8 of 15
COLOUR IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT

Conduits, boxes, splitters and Panels Electrical equipment shall be prefinished in coded colours designating voltage or system as indicated in Equipment Identification Schedule.)
(t) Voltage colour identification for line voltage equipment shall be as follows:
Voltage
Fibre O V 12V, 24V, 120 V dc
Colour (in boxes & on ducts)

Bronze Blue
Colour of Wire
Blue = Ungrounded DC power Blue/white stripe = DC grounded voltage white with blue tracer = dc common Red = AC 3 Ph - phase A Black = AC 3 Ph - phase B Blue = AC 3 Ph - phase C(neutral White) Red, black & blue with yellow tracer. ( neutral White) Brown = AC 3 Ph - phase A Orange = AC 3 Ph - phase B Yellow = AC 3 Ph - phase C (neutral White) Orange, brown & yellow with red tracer (neutral White)
120/208 V /120/240 V / under 300V ac 120/208 V 120/240 V: or under 300V ac emergency: 347/600 V Up to 600V
Grey
Grey with auxiliary Red Sand
347/600 V emergency: High voltage (above 750 V): High voltage (above 5KV): High voltage (above 15K V):
Sand with and auxiliary Red White with a Black stripe up to 5K Yellow with auxiliary blue up to 15K ; Black with auxiliary Yellow up to 30K ;Black with auxiliary Orange
400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
9 of 15
SYSTEM COLOUR IDENTIFICATION for low voltage systems equipment

shall be as follows:
S. No 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Systems Evacuation, Fire Alarm and Fire Telephone, Emergency Call, Firemans Emergency power off Security, Card Access and Security TV Telephone Cabinets CCTV and TV Distribution Intercom System Public Address Mobile Radio All other communications 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Building automation, Computer & Data systems Clock System Digital information Signage PRESTO Dedicated Ground Colour (in boxes and on ducts) Red emergency Voice red/blue Yellow red / yellow Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Green / blue Purple Purple Purple Pink Green
Where impracticable to obtain equipment prefinished in coded colours, equipment may be site painted in coded colours. Coordinate with other work.
400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
10 of 15
IDENTIFICATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

(u) Identify pull and junction boxes over 100 mm size as follows: (i) Use boxes which are prefinished in coded colours, or spray paint inside and outside of boxes prior to installation, in coded colours designating voltage or system. Apply size 2 lamicoid nameplates to cover for each box. Identify system name. Where sequence identification is required, identify system name and number.
(ii)
(v)
Identify pull and junction boxes 100 mm or less in size as follows: (i) (ii) Spray paint inside of boxes in coded colours designating voltage or system. Apply permanent identifying markings directly to box covers designating voltage or system using indelible black ink. Legend - See Tables "Colour Identification of Equipment including conduits, boxes, splitters and panels above. (iii) Fire alarm end-of line resistors & duct detectors: Identify zone number with 6 mm high white lettering on red background on lamicoid nametag located on wall above device. Identify remote LED indicators for duct detectors.
IDENTIFICATION OF RECEPTACLES, FIRE ALARM, END-OF-LINE RESISTORS & DUCT DETECTORS

Standard duplex receptacles: provide lamicoid name tag with 6 mm high white lettering on black background (red background for emergency receptacles), indicating circuit and panel designation and locate on wall above receptacle. On all other receptacles provide nametag indicating voltage, phase, amps, and circuit and panel designations. Underground warning tape shall be used and identified.. Underground conduits shall use underground warning tape, Install one tape per trench at 75 mm [3 inches] below finished grade.
400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
11 of 15
MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE MARKERS

Electrical and Communication manhole or handhole collars shall be provided with a single and two grooves respectively with minimum of 3mm deep and 25mm apart in the direction of the conduits entering and exiting the manhole or handhole. APPLICATION (w) (x) (y) (z) (aa) (bb) (cc) Install nameplate & label parallel to equipment lines after Degrease & Clean surfaces to receive. Secure nameplate to equipment front using adhesive, and screws. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panel board that is recessed in finished locations. Identify conduit using field painting to painting section. Paint coloured band on each conduit longer than 2m [6 feet]. Paint bands 6m [20 feet] on centre. Colour: See Table "Colour Identification of Equipment" including conduits, boxes, splitters and panels.
LABELLING NOMENCLATURE
Use the following identification standard when labelling communications cabling components. Include required cabling designations on the drawings. (dd) The nomenclature for Wire Labelling is as follows: The type of service, source is to be identified & device id, a unique number id & a destination id, XXXX- YYYY- NN-NNN - DDDD - NNN. (ee) The Source ID is as follows: Is one of following sources: Where N can be a sequential unique alpha-numeric address, which will designating any of the following building, floors, room, panel or rack and the wire ID. (ff) The Destinations ID are as follows: 400WP " YYYY - NN - NNN...

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical (i) (ii)
April 30, 2012
12 of 15
"DDDD - NN...is one of following sources. Outlet Assembly: YYYY- NN - nnn where: A. B. NN is the source alpha-numeric identifier panel or rack, etc.; "nnn" is a digit address .i.e. circuit number, etc.
400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
13 of 15
Service ID "XXXX
T" for telephone outlet. "C" for data (copper) outlet. "FO" for data (fiber) outlet. "D" for data energy management. "FA" for fire alarms equipment. "PA" for PA & intercom systems. "FARE" for Presto Rack "RF" for radio system. "S" for security systems. "TV" for CCTV and TV systems. "EL" for ELECTRICAL POWER. "RK" for rack "ST" for Station "PG" for Parking Garage "PF" for Platform "OB" for Outside Building (Bunker, Kiosk etc) "CCTV" for CCTV Cabinets
Source ID " YYYY

"EU" for electrical utility supply "EG" for Emergency standby generator "UPS' for Uninterruptible Power Supply or inverter "COG for cogeneration Power PV for Photovoltaic power source "DP" for distribution panel "DPE" Emergency Distribution Panel "DPU" for UPS distribution panel "PP" for Power Distribution Panel "PPU" for UPS Power Distribution Panel "LP" for Lighting panel "MCC" for motor control centre "PDB" for Punch down block "NS" for network server " RT" for router, multiplexer etc "RK" for rack "FL" for floor followed by B9-B1 - Sub Grade Floors or 1 - 99 - Above Grade Floors "RM" for room followed by : MC - Main Telecommunications Room or CR communications Room (Any other space designated as a communications room which is not the primary.) or CC - Communications Closet (Typically located in the Ticket Sales area.) "SS" for substation "ES" elect closets / sub elect room "HUB communication hub room "Bell D" for BELL DEMARCATION "PX" for patch panel "SEL" sub electrical rooms "RDC" for Rectifier "INV" for Inverter "DPLS" for Emergency Distribution for Life Safety Building Out Building to be determined
Destination ID " DDDD

EU" for electrical utility supply "EG" for Emergency standby generator "UPS' for Uninterruptible Power Supply or inverter "COG for cogeneration Power PV for Photovoltaic power source "DP" for distribution panel "DPE" for Emergency distribution panel "PP" for Power Distribution Panel "PPE" for Emergency Power Distribution Panel "PPUn" for UPS Power Distribution Panel "LP" for Lighting panel "MCC" for motor control centre "PDB" for Punch down block "NS" for network server "RT" for router, multiplexer etc. "RK" for rack "FL" for floor followed by B9-B1 - Sub Grade Floors or 1 - 99 - Above Grade Floors RM" for room followed by : MC - Main Telecommunications Room or CR communications Room (Any other space designated as a communications room which is not the primary.) or CC - Communications Closet (Typically located in the Ticket Sales area.) SS" for substation "ES" for elect closets/sub elect rooms HUB for communication hub room
"NET" for Network Cabinets
"IS" for information signage "EVC" for electric Vehicle charging and recovery system "PARK" for Parking Systems ( car counting) "LFS" for Layover Fuelling Station "LCS" for Layover compressor Station "LWS" for Layover Wayside Station "LPMB" for Preventive Maintenance Bay "LWR" for Wheel Maintenance House "LWL" For Locomotive Wash "BSM" for Boiler Snow Melt
PX for patch panel ''MHC" for Manhole communications "HHC for Hand well Communication ''MHE" for Manhole Elect Power "HHE for Hand well Elect Power PL" for Pole
400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
14 of 15
WALL JACK COLOUR STANDARDS Use Data / Corporate Network Telephone Radio Data / Communication BACK BONE FIBRE Minimum number of strands of a backbone cable is to be no less than 24 strands. All fibres are to be terminated Meaning Single-mode optical fibre Multi-mode optical fibre 10 gig laser-optimized 50/125 micrometer multi-mode optical fibre Sometimes used to designate polarization-maintaining optical fibre Buffer/jacket colour Yellow Orange Aqua Blue Colour Blue Blue Orange
PATCH COPPER CABLE COLOUR STANDARDS All copper patch cables being provided must be Category 6 cables. Cable lengths will be of reasonable length allowing for proper cable routing needed for a tidy and organized installation. Use Data / Corporate Network PC / Printers / Telephone Sets Corporate Servers Switch / Router Crossovers and Normal iLO / KVM / Management Colour Blue Red Yellow Purple / Indigo
PATCH COPPER CABLE COLOUR STANDARDS All Fibre patch cables being provided must be either single or multimode matching the type of cable it is to connected. Cable lengths will be of reasonable length allowing for proper cable routing needed for a tidy and organized installation.
400WP

CI-0207-06
Page
Electrical
April 30, 2012
15 of 15
ELECTRICAL ROOM
(gg) Panels and Racks: (i) Horizontal Distributions: DDDD - H, where: A. B. C. (ii) "DDDD" is destination, numbers, or lost services manhole, handhole, Pole etc. as described above. "H" indicates "Horizontal". Port Labelling: three-digit address of workstation connected.
Equipment: DDDD - EQ. A. B. C. "DDDD" is Destination number as described above. "EQ" indicates "Equipment". Port Labelling: three-digit sequential number
(iii)
Risers: DDDD-R A. B. C. "DDDD, or lost services manhole, handhole, Pole, etc. as described above; "RZ" indicates "Riser"; Port Labelling: three-digit sequential number.
(iv)
Attach inter-room connection to identically numbered panel or data outlets, and, wherever possible, to outlets at same position on each panel. A. Cables: I Equipment Room/Riser/Backbone Cables: will follow the same principle of type of service, source is to be identified and device id, a unique number id and a destination id, i.e., XXXX - YYYY- NN NNN DDDD - NN...-
400WP

CI-0207-07
Page
Electrical
Testing and Commissioning
April 30, 2012
1 of 2
GENERAL
Prior to testing, all concrete and masonry work in the vicinity of the equipment and all enclosures, walls, doors, gates, fences shall be completely installed, all loose dirt and debris removed and area cleaned. Interior areas shall be broom cleaned and washed down to remove all dust. Tests shall include meggered insulation values, voltage and current readings to determine balance of panels and feeders under full load condition and examination of each piece of equipment for correct operation.
MEGGER TEST
Provide megger test with equipment as follows: Megger Voltage 500V 1000V up to 250V 277V to 1000V System Voltage
COORDINATION
Coordinate settings of relays, rating of fuses and trip elements of circuit breakers, so that the protective device immediately ahead of any fault operates before any upstream protection and establish selective coordination throughout the system.
MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE & PANELBOARD

Bolted connections between bus to bus, to cable lug shall be checked with torque wrench, to manufacturers recommended values. Contact resistance on low voltage fusible and non-fusible switches, circuit breakers, contactors and auxiliary equipment shall be checked and reports submitted to the Consultant.
400WP

CI-0207-07
Page
Electrical
Testing and Commissioning
April 30, 2012
2 of 2
Megger test insulation resistance phase to phase, and phase to ground of fusible switches, circuit breakers, contactors, buswork, and auxiliary equipment. Acceptable values as follows: Voltage up to 250V Voltage 277V to 1000V 1 Megohms 50 Megohms
Ground bus and ground path shall be checked for continuity, and for all bonding connections. Acceptable reading: 0.1 ohms.
CABLES
All feeder cables shall be checked for continuity prior to connection. All feeders shall be megger tested after connection. Minimum acceptable value: 50 megohms.
GROUNDING
Grounding system shall be checked according to Electrical Safety Authority requirements.
REPORTS
The consultant shall specify that all tests must be performed by qualified personnel and recorded in approved format and approved by the consultant prior to final acceptance of the installation.
COMMISSIONING
In the presence of the Consultant and GO Transit, operate equipment through design functions, including remote control operation, actuation of alarm and indication devices, mechanical and electrical operation and operation of protective relays.
400WP

CI-0207-08
Page
Electrical
Drawings
April 30, 2012
1 of 2
DRAWING REQUIREMENTS
The consultant shall provide the following electrical and communications drawings, schematics and details. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Lighting layout including legend and fixture schedule. Power layout including new transformer, conduit and cable sizes. Communications layout showing PA, intercoms, telephones, alarm devices, and CCTV. Single line diagram including panel schedules and service load calculations. Details and block diagrams: 6. Lighting control schematic; AC power failure alarm; Exhaust fan schematic; Power door operator schematic; and Panel board and junction box mounting detail.
Communications System Details: PA system block diagram; Voice link block diagram; Fare collection equipment block diagram; and Security system block diagram.
7. 8.
CCTV system block diagram and cabinet layout. To confirm the electrical room wall space and equipment arrangement, the consultant shall provide a 1:50 scale drawing of the electrical room wall elevations, showing all wall-mounted and free-standing equipment as well as all conduits and conduit bends, and one lineal metre for future equipment, (all to scale and not just diagrammatically).
400WP

CI-0207-08
Page
Electrical 9. 10.
Drawings
April 30, 2012
2 of 2
To confirm the communications room wall space and equipment arrangement, the consultant shall show wall elevations, as noted above for the electrical room. The electrical/communications outlet plans of the station attendant room shall not be based on the smallest architectural plans but on the largest, using the millwork enlarged scale plans, including counter top plans and below counter plans, as well as counter sections to locate all outlets to scale, horizontally and vertically. Schematic diagram plans are not acceptable for outlet location within custom designed millwork items. The consultant shall also show grouped outlets in elevation, to scale, in order to confirm the fit of the arrangement within the millwork spaces available. It shall not be left to the contractor to resolve such location and design issues belatedly on site. GO Transit project coordinators shall make reference to this requirement, in these Standards, in the Consultant agreement Scope of Work.
400WP
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL ARCHITECTURE

CI-0301-01
Page
Introduction
Overview (of Tab)
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
SUMMARY
This Tab 3 is a guide to the Architectural design of GO Transit buildings in terms of the following sections: Architectural Design Station Buildings Bus Terminal Buildings Maintenance Buildings Ancillary Buildings Materials Landscaping Signs and Graphics Artwork
400WP

CI-0302-01
Page
Architectural Design
General
May 5, 2010
1 of 8
OVERVIEW
HISTORY GO Transit has been building and upgrading stations and terminals since its inauguration in 1967, in response to the following: System expansion (increased ridership); Building and equipment life-cycle renovations (including heritage station buildings); Introduction of the Proof-of-Payment (P.O.P.) fare collection system; The introduction of barrier-free accessibility at various stations; New technology (communications improvements, security improvements, energy conservation, etc.); and Safety improvements (Easier Access, etc.).
CONFIGURATIONS Existing GO Stations have been designed in response to variations of site geometry, topography and platform arrangements. There are two basic station building and platform access configurations: 1. 2. Stations with a single side platform and no pedestrian tunnel, with the station building on the platform side; and Stations with island platforms or two side platforms and a pedestrian tunnel or tunnels, with the station building on one or the other side of the tracks, adjacent to or remote from a platform access building. Where site conditions permit, side platforms should be designed with ramps as an accessible means of egress onto site grade level.
CODE CLASSIFICATION
GO rail stations are classified as Group A, Division 2 as per the Ontario Building Code refer to appendix listing for A2, Rail Stations and Depots. GO rail stations are NOT considered a RAPID TRANSIT STATION for OBC classification purposes.
400WP

CI-0302-01
Page
General
May 5, 2010
2 of 8
STATION BUILDING TYPES Generally, there are two types of station buildings in the GO Transit system: Heritage buildings: these are restored steam-era railway station buildings with both renovations and contemporary interventions sensitively designed by architects sympathetic to restoration guidelines set by heritage groups/municipalities; Contemporary buildings: these are of various plan shapes, forms and materials, that were deemed suitable at the time, including contemporary versions of the traditional steam-era station forms; There is also at least one station without a station building, relying on the P.O.P. system by means of automatic Ticket Vending Machines (TVMs). This type of station requires only an electrical room/communications room kiosk(s) and platform shelters. See Tab 1, Policies; and GO Transit also has station attendant rooms and shares common facilities in a number of VIA-owned buildings. Both VIA and GO standards shall apply.
DESIGN & GENERAL REVIEW

An architect shall provide services within the practice of architecture, and a professional engineer shall provide the services within the practice of professional engineering as per Part 2 of the Ontario Building Code.
BASIS OF CRITERIA
All buildings must be designed in accordance with the Ontario Building Code, and all equipment and fixtures must be CSA approved. RESIDENTIAL AREA STATIONS New station buildings shall be designed to complement surrounding residential/commercial/ industrial communities and may incorporate classical steam era station buildings, which are instantly recognizable as railway stations, with black shingled pitched roofs, wide roof overhangs on support brackets, red brick walls with a combination of punched and bay windows above a continuous sill course, over a rough stone wall base. GO Transit station buildings in residential areas shall incorporate most of such recognizable heavy rail station features, materials and colours. See Figures (Standard Station Plans)
400WP

CI-0302-01
Page
General
May 5, 2010
3 of 8
NON-RESIDENTIAL AREA STATIONS New station buildings in non-residential areas, while based on the Standard Station Plan, shall be designed with materials and forms to suit the special characteristics of their sites. See Policies, Tab 1. For example, roof forms could be monopitch or curved, but should incorporate large overhangs.
CONCEPTUAL LAYOUTS
GO Transit will provide the consultant with conceptual layout plans for the site, platforms, platform access and the station/terminal building. See Tab 2 for Site Development. Such conceptual layout plans shall include any expansion or phasing requirements. The conceptual layout for a station building shall be based on the Standard Station Plan. It is recognized that the consultants input, during the general arrangement and preliminary design stages, may result in variations from the standard station building layout, subject to GO Transit approval.
COST ESTIMATES
GO Transit will provide capital budget information to the consultant. The consultant shall make every effort to design the work within the budget. The consultant shall provide detailed construction cost estimates as required by GO Transit during various stages of design, and prior to the project tender, in accordance with the Consultants Agreement.
INTEGRATION
The optimum design solution shall demonstrate the architectural integration of all building elements, including structural, mechanical, electrical, communications, fare collection, and security systems, easier access and barrier free route.
ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDELINES
See Policies in Tab 1 (sustainable development, etc.) Water and energy conservation shall be maximized as per Tab 2 - Mechanical & Electrical Sections.
400WP

CI-0302-01
Page
General
May 5, 2010
4 of 8
GO Transit operations require the use of salt for passenger safety. The consultant shall design accordingly, to minimize adverse effects on buildings and structures and to camouflage salt spray. The consultant shall identify engineering issues related to the environment and the required notification to authorities having jurisdiction. Examples are air emission tests, buried or surface fuel storage tanks and their registration, spent oil tanks and relevant instrumentation, hydrant and generator testing requirements, etc.
JOINT DEVELOPMENT
Joint development of a site where applicable, shall be planned to maintain the station identity and its transit functions as priorities, even while integrating the GO Transit station or terminal into the development.
SECURITY GUIDELINES
The key goals of these security guidelines are: 1. 2. 3. SITES Maximize sight-lines: within site, station building to site, and site to adjacent properties and roads, including suitable landscaping, fencing, street furniture so as not to obstruct; Adjoining component areas: parking, bus, taxi, passenger pick-up and drop-off, bicycle-rack areas, newspaper areas, concession areas for optimum passive surveillance; Illumination: uniform and independent of adjacent site/road illumination, with redundant luminaires for fail-safe illumination of remote areas; Provide exterior pay telephones and/or voice intercoms; lighting/signage specifically designed to suit; To humanize station and terminal environments, in order to enhance individuality and autonomy in an otherwise anonymous mass-movement context; To maximize staff and passenger visibility for passive and active surveillance so as to eliminate isolation; and To facilitate access to communication/monitoring devices.
400WP

CI-0302-01
Page
General
May 5, 2010
5 of 8
Ensure contract document conditions address security during construction (hoardings, additional illumination and signs, for example); Articulate retaining walls; Use columnar oaks and columnar maples for landscaping; do not use bushes or dense shrubbery which afford hiding places; Avoid low containment walls, use railings; and Liaise with adjacent or joint-use developers for adoption and continuity of these guidelines.
BUILDINGS Stations, terminals, concessions: open plan; maximize windows and sight-lines; Use day-lighting: clerestoreys, skylights; Maintain and enhance the natural grade level as the human-scale reference level, particularly for future open-air parking garages; Minimize column sizes; Locate ticket seller at exterior wall(s) and maximize fenestration for sight lines inside and outside; Ticket seller space: clear tempered glass, no direct openings: electronic voice communication system, recessed cash scoop, staff washroom within; Public washrooms: to be single-use washrooms, doors visible from station attendant room (multi use washrooms: without doors if possible); Pay telephone and information display fixtures: to be low height, open bottomed, no obstruction of key sight-lines; Large shelters to have entrances/exits at opposite ends for emergency exit options (no dead-ends); To improve outward vision, luminaires shall not reflect in windows. Glare from glass shall not obstruct ticket seller/passenger vision or visibility at any time; Concessions shall not obstruct key sight lines; kiosks shall be open concept;
400WP

CI-0302-01
Page
General
May 5, 2010
6 of 8
Sight-lines shall be extended by mirrors where necessary (example: tunnel corners); and Where possible, street furniture shall back against a building wall, as opposed to being freestanding obstructions to sight-lines. Bicycle racks shall be located for visibility from ticket sales/dispatch areas or passenger circulation routes.
VERTICAL SPACES Stairs and elevators shall be in close proximity to each other, for acoustical and visual continuity; Elevators, elevator doors and shafts to be glazed (subject to code requirements and sun shading); Guards and balustrades shall be glazed where sight lines are required and in order to maximize illumination to lower levels; Perimeter walls of stairs and elevator vestibules shall be fully glazed where possible; Stairwell openings shall be extended across tunnels where possible, for day-lighting, and to reduce the apparent tunnel lengths; concrete sealed walls to be protected by clear non-sacrificial anti-graffiti coating; and Stair centre handrails shall terminate at landings to permit crossover.
TUNNELS AND OVERPASSES Open overpasses shall not have solid guards. Enclosed overpasses and stairs shall have windows/skylights, including at the ends, or shall have mesh type enclosures; Tunnel corners shall be 45 angled and internal 90 corners shall have at a minimum convex mirror units; and concrete sealed walls to be protected by clear non-sacrificial anti-graffiti coating. Heights of tunnels and overpasses shall be compatible with CCTV requirements.
SHELTERS Shelters shall have clear-glazed walls; For large shelters, doors shall be at opposite ends (one door at each end) and swing out;
400WP

CI-0302-01
Page
General
May 5, 2010
7 of 8
Shelters shall have translucent roofs and internal and external luminaires that do not reflect/glare in glazed walls. Translucent roofs also borrow illumination from platform light standards and provide sun shade; and Platform shelters remote from public announcement speakers shall have internal speakers.
HUMAN SCALE Buildings shall be designed closer to an intimate domestic rather than an institutional scale, by articulation of components and good detailing, and shall have other features as follows; Entrance-waiting areas shall have indirect illumination as the main source, plus a variety of accent luminaires. Shelters shall have luminaries for a warm ambience. Tunnels shall have H.O. fluorescents, due to emergency lighting requirements. Tunnel concrete walls to have painted metal pane raceway that houses electrical conduits to counteract the cool fluorescent light, and to facilitate orientation, with diagonal striping extending up stairwell walls; Long walls shall be articulated by material or colour accents, textures, or patterns and by pre-located advertising signs. Tunnel walls shall have recessed colour-accented electrical/communications raceways; Floors and walkways except tunnel floors shall have patterns related to wall lines and level changes; Ceilings shall be similarly articulated, with the use of bulkheads, skylights, and accent luminaires; and The natural grade reference level shall be enhanced by soft and hard landscaping including planter beds, flowering shrubs, patterned and coloured concrete, natural stone planter walls, etc.
COMMUNICATIONS Signs/intercoms/CCTV shall be pre-located and not superimposed: architectural components shall be coordinated with signs and equipment. Illumination and sight-lines shall be integrated with CCTV requirements; Security devices/monitoring devices shall be identified by signs as a deterrent: doors and windows to incorporate such signs or decals;
400WP

CI-0302-01
Page
General
May 5, 2010
8 of 8
International symbols and colours shall be used for barrier-free, pay telephone, high voltage and other signs where applicable. Signs shall be oriented and illuminated to suit sight-lines. See GO Transit Sign Manual; and Advertising signs do serve to communicate a sense of place, but their location, especially when freestanding, must not conflict with directional signs or sight-lines. Consultants shall work with GO Transit to pre-determine advertising sign locations and provide a concealed electrical supply system, to ensure no exposed conduits and no obstructed sight-lines.
400WP

CI-0302-02
Page
Pedestrian Circulation
June 24, 2009
1 of 1
PEDESTRIAN FLOW
For Pedestrian Circulation in terms of flow characteristics and to determine the exit capacity or the exit duration for facilities (especially tunnels, stairs and doors in series), refer to the OBC Pedestrian Flow Rates Table 3.13.4.5 (OBC 2006). References 1. Fruin, J. Pedestrian Planning and Design, Metropolitan Association of Urban Designers and Environmental Planners, New York, N.Y. (1971) Library of Congress Cat. No. 70-159312. Gregory P. Benz, Pedestrian Time-Space Concept, Parsons Brinckerhoff Quade & Douglas Inc. (1986).
2.
400WP

CI-0303-01
Page
Station Buildings
Station Program
December 01, 2011
1 of 13
OVERVIEW
This program applies to both residential and non-residential area stations, in terms of the general arrangement of functions and circulation, and the features and fixtures for each room. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT This program describes the general spatial and physical provisions to be made at each station to accommodate patron activities, staff functions, and mechanical/electrical and communications systems as well as fare collection and security/alarm systems. As shown on the Figures, which also show dimensional requirements, the Standard Station Plan is based on the following: Room 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Waiting area Station attendant room Concession area Public washrooms Maintenance room Location Central location projecting beyond base building Overlooking waiting area Within waiting area In station attendant line of sight Adjacent to public washrooms, interior access (exterior access if site conditions allow) Exterior access Next to electrical room, exterior access Behind station attendant, exterior access Exterior access
6. 7. 8. 9.
GO storage room/driver washroom Communications Electrical Mechanical room
ALTERNATIVES Where it is necessary to reduce the footprint area of the station building, a multi-level design solution may be appropriate, especially when the station building is linked to a tunnel. The communications room must be at grade level or on an upper level. Mechanical, electrical and storage rooms can be in a lower level or tunnel level.
400 WM

CI-0303-01
Page
Station Buildings EXPANSION
Station Program
December 01, 2011
2 of 13
The site layout and the location of a station building shall allow for future expansion if required.
WAITING AREA
FEATURES The waiting area shall project beyond the main building, for a bay window type entrance configuration, with sight lines along the length of the building; Single door entrances at right angles to the main building, to minimize drafts, protected by the roof overhang, with doors hinging to open against exterior walls. See Doors, on page 3; Queuing space in front of ticket sales counter. Minimum requirement: five passengers per attendant; Combined circulation and waiting space beyond queuing space; Concession space (staffed kiosk or vending alcove); No visual obstructions within and maximized sight lines to the exterior; High ceiling to a maximum of 4 m with daylighting (clerestorey bay gable windows, or skylights): peaked or shallow arch ceiling for perimeter illumination (cove lighting); Projecting perimeter bulkhead (low to high ceiling transition) for ducts, linear diffusers, and indirect lighting, etc.; and Station attendant ticket sales counter complete with purse shelf, with butt-joint clear glazing from the counter top to the bulkhead soffit.
DOORS 2 adjacent doors if swinging together to have frame to frame clearance of 600 mm minimum, with an intermediate guard rail. Guardrail to have rubber doughnut bumpers.
FIXTURES Digital clock; and
400 WM

CI-0303-01
Page
Station Buildings
Station Program
December 01, 2011
3 of 13
Ceiling down-draft fan(s).
The architects design must accommodate the following additional fixtures: Fare equipment; Bench seating; Pay telephone(s); Food/beverage vending machine(s), if required; GO information display; Signs and decals (including GO logos on end gable clerestorey glass if required); Waste receptacle(s); Motion detectors (see Tab 4); CCTV cameras (see Tab 4); P/A speakers (flush mounted or concealed: see Tab 4); Fire extinguisher; and Recessed floor mats at all entrance doors. *
STATION ATTENDANT ROOM

FEATURES Inswinging glazed door; Insulated ticket sales counter with a solid polymer counter top with integral cash scoops. See Figures for dimensions. The dimensions are the result of prior GO accessibility studies and extensive liaison with representatives of persons with various disabilities; Frosted film on glass for screening, as required by GO;
400 WM

CI-0303-01
Page
Station Buildings
Station Program
December 01, 2011
4 of 13
Ticket sales counters are Barrier-Free to public; No visual obstructions to public washrooms, and maximized visibility of the waiting area; Line of vision to the train platform and as much of the parking lot as possible; Staff washroom with a vanity lavatory and floor mounted tank type WC, mirror, etc. as noted below; Individual staff lockers, padlock lockable (quantities as directed by GO, minimum double the number of ticket seller positions); Common staff coat closet, with a louvered door, near the entrance to the room; Communications cabinet adjacent to the communications room; Recessed fluorescent luminaires with parabolic (12 mm x 12 mm x 12 mm) eggcrate lenses to minimize glare from equipment and glass; and Back of the room work counters with storage cabinets above and below, knee spaces for computer work, space for refrigerator, filing cabinet, etc. See Figures.
FIXTURES Voice communications, station computers, ticket sales equipment, banking equipment, CCTV equipment, telephones, and alarm equipment to be provided as per Tab 4; Refer to standard ticket sales counter drawings for accessories associated with ticket sales requirements; Additional equipment or appliances in the ticket sales areas to be as determined by GO; Grommets in counter tops (sized for communications plugs); Under-counter lateral filing cabinet; Fax/copier machine; Refrigerator (below back counter); Microwave; Clipboards, wall hung; 400 WM

CI-0303-01
Page
Station Buildings
Station Program
December 01, 2011
5 of 13
Magnetic bulletin board(s); First aid kit; Plug-in flashlight; Chairs (high-chairs with armrests on castors) for attendants; Waste receptacles for attendant area and staff washroom; Fire extinguisher; Staff washroom accessories (mirror, recessed stainless steel combined work receptacle and paper towel dispenser with capacity 6L, soap dispenser, coat hook, air freshener and single roll toilet paper dispenser); and Water cooler.
CONCESSION AREA
FEATURES The concession area can be a tenant staffed kiosk or coffee/soft drink/snack vending machines; The concession area shall have sufficient space for a storage closet (by tenant); and Service includes 60 amp, minimum electrical service, a telephone outlet (separate line), hot and cold water connection, sanitary connection, and floor drain.
FIXTURES Fixtures such as counters, cabinets, coolers, etc. shall be supplied and installed by the tenant, to GO approval in accordance with the GO Transit Tenant Manual. Where vending machines are to be used, they shall be supplied and installed by the vending company. A suitable alcove shall be designed to accommodate the machines, with back and top clearances for heat dissipation to code requirements. The alcove recess or gables shall conceal the plumbing and wiring.
400 WM

CI-0303-01
Page
Station Buildings
Station Program
December 01, 2011
6 of 13
PUBLIC WASHROOMS
FEATURES Single use male barrier-free washroom. Single use female barrier-free washroom. Door hardware to be a lever handle passage set, and a latch, operable from the interior, to display vacant or occupied. Door swing and/or screens shall at least partially obstruct the line of vision to water closets and urinals. Refer to Figure Typical Station Building Layout at back of this section. Signage shall be provided that advises patrons to lock the door behind them for privacy. Doors shall have closers, and be undercut for exhaust make-up air (doors shall not have louvers).
Notes: Where multi-use washrooms are required for larger stations or terminals, toilet partitions shall be ceiling-hung. All plumbing fixtures to be located on interior walls.
FIXTURES Urinal (in male washroom); Lavatories (wall hung) barrier free (lever handle faucets, wrist-blade type); Water closets (wall hung) barrier free; Semi-recessed hand-dryers (at barrier free height); Infant changing units in both male and female washrooms; Waste receptacles, recessed, stainless steel, vertical type, with a capacity of minimum 20L; Toilet tissue dispensers, surface mounted multi-roll vertical type, lockable; 400 WM

CI-0303-01
Page
Station Buildings
Station Program
December 01, 2011
7 of 13
Stainless steel tilt mirrors with s.s frames (barrier-free); Stainless steel grab-bars; Stainless steel shelf (at barrier free height); Two coat hooks in each washroom (one at barrier free height); Stainless steel wall surface mounted liquid soap dispensers or as required by GO; Room deodorizers; Free-standing sanitary napkin disposal receptacle (supplied and installed by GO); and For washroom faucets, flush valves, floor drains, etc. see Tab 2 - Mechanical. Floor drains shall not be in pedestrian or wheelchair paths.
MAINTENANCE ROOM
FEATURES 3.0 x 5.0m, separate lockable room with key fob access. Adjacent to public washrooms, interior access (exterior access if site conditions allow) No meters, water tanks or other intrusions are to be placed in the maintenance room. Interior in-swinging door; extra wide heavy duty HM double door with a 34" single leaf and a second 12" latching section, for a total opening of 46" with min. four (4) butt hinges. Vinyl composite Tile (VCT) floor with rubber base. Wall: Paint except, area around slop sink shall be ceramic tile (1200 mm high) ;Ceiling: Drywall Painted. Faucets, Floor drain; Electrical requirements include a 60 amp service, 4-6 receptacles, with 220v and 110v supply and Exhaust fan.
FIXTURES Floor mounted slop sink wit easy access clean out for slop sink P trap 400 WM

CI-0303-01
Page
Station Buildings
Station Program
December 01, 2011
8 of 13
Four metal staff lockers; full height; ventilated louvers at base Open Shelving and mop hooks; Lockable metal storage cabinet; Desk and chair; Mop and broom hangers and floor sweepers. Where required, provide wall mounted ladder with ceiling access hatch for mechanical equipment access (principally, the Heat Recovery Unit above the public washrooms);
GO STORAGE ROOM/DRIVER WASHROOM

FEATURES A separate lockable storage room, minimum 1.5 m x 1.5 m, exterior in-swinging door, or as noted below; Space for a driver washroom (capped plumbing outlets); and Where required by GO, two rooms, one for each function, to be provided, or a larger room to be partitioned accordingly, for both uses.
FIXTURES Storage cabinets supplied and installed by GO; and Provide rough-ins for electrical, water and sanitary connections.
COMMUNICATIONS ROOM
Refer to the GO Transit Station Communications and Electronic Systems Document.
ELECTRICAL ROOM
The electrical room accommodates local utility metering equipment (with exterior meter readout), distribution panels for power, lighting, and emergency power systems (see Tab 2, Electrical).
400 WM

CI-0303-01
Page
Station Buildings FEATURES
Station Program
December 01, 2011
9 of 13
Rectangular room, minimum area 11 square metres. If the station has a tunnel, elevator, etc., additional space shall be provided as required. The room shall have exhaust ventilation (see Tab 2, Mechanical). There shall be no plumbing or condensation prone ducts or mechanical equipment through or above the room. Centrally located access hatch complete with pull down ladder.
FIXTURES (See also Tab 2, Electrical). Metering cabinet with exterior read-out; Main distribution panel; Power panel; Isolated ground panel; Related dry type transformers if required; Lighting panels; Lighting contactors (2 minimum); Emergency power and lighting panel; UPS unit and battery rack; Master clock; Timers; and Grounding system.
Notes: Sufficient clearance shall be provided between the above items to allow for conduit installation. See drawing requirements for wall elevations of equipment to scale. 400 WM

CI-0303-01
Page
Station Buildings
Station Program
December 01, 2011
10 of 13
Spare wall space shall be allocated for future equipment. Where a generator is provided it shall be on a raised base enclosed with a decorative fence with one access gate. This space shall be shared with a condenser unit.
MECHANICAL ROOM
The HVAC equipment shall be located in a room with exterior access or in the attic space (with exterior located and elevated, fenced-in condensing unit). The size of the room shall suit equipment and circulation/access requirements. A heat recovery unit shall also be located in the attic space usually above the public washrooms. See Figures for locations of attic access panels and fixed ladders. FEATURES See Standard Station Plan; Attics shall have a floor and illumination suitable for equipment and maintenance access; Ladder rails and rungs are to extend above the access hatch; The exterior condensing unit shall be adjacent to the building wall, on the track side, raised on a min. 100 mm high concrete base and enclosed with a decorative fence with a lockable gate. Disconnect switches shall be wall mounted, and out of reach to prevent vandalism; and Where a sump pump and pit are located in the mechanical room, the size of the room shall be increased and the Standard Station Plan modified accordingly.
FIXTURES Mechanical equipment and related accessories; Filter, etc. storage shelves or cabinet; Maintenance electrical receptacles and lighting; Maintenance log clipboards supplied and installed by GO; Guardrails where required; and Floor drain. 400 WM

CI-0303-01
Page
Station Buildings
Station Program
December 01, 2011
12 of 13
FIGURE TYPICAL STATION BUILDING ELEVATIONS
400 WM

CI-0303-01
Page
Station Buildings
Station Program
December 01, 2011
13 of 13
FIGURE TYPICAL TICKET SALES AREA LAYOUT
400 WM

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings
Platform Access Buildings
April 30, 2012
1 of 14
OVERVIEW
This subject covers platform access buildings. See also Tab 2 Civil and Structural and the preceding SECURITY GUIDELINES. Platform access tunnels or bridges can be linked to the station building, connected to the station building or remotely located, as determined by site layout. The architecture of the platform access buildings can be compatible with the station building (principally the roof-forms) or it can be completely diverse, depending on site and municipal requirements, as directed by GO. Platform access buildings shall not visually overpower the station building.
STAIR ENCLOSURE BUILDINGS

Stair enclosures can be stand alone or combined with elevator enclosures, where applicable. Island platform stair enclosure wall glazing shall extend for the full length of the stairwell, and where possible over the tunnel to provide daylight into the tunnel. On side platforms the trackside glazing shall be maximized, and the opposite side shall also be glazed, if accessible for maintenance, or it shall be a solid wall if requested by GO or the municipality (glazed walls are preferred as being graffiti resistant). The minimum acceptable platform edge clearance for stair enclosure buildings is 2.44 m, areas which do not meet the minimum stated platform edge clearance should be marked with a conspicuous yellow painted hatch augmented by warning signage indicating the reduced clearance. Reduced platform edge clearances should be approved by GO staff prior to design. FEATURES Concrete floor, broom finished, sealed; Floor elevation to be set to provide positive slope from the doors to the platform; Concrete wall base, to be sandblasted finish, and sealed, no paint. To prevent snow plough damage and salt deterioration of the superstructures, the base shall be 600 mm high (minimum) above the platform, and the top of the base shall slope on the exterior as a sill, away from the glazing; Where enclosed, stairs shall be cast-in place concrete sealed, steel trowelled broom finish with contrasting cast in safety nosing inserts on an extruded aluminum or
400WP

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings
April 30, 2012
2 of 14
carborundum base with epoxy or abrasive filler. Minimum concrete strength shall be 35 MPa with non chloride admixture for waterproofing. Refer to B651-M90 and CNIB for contrasting factor. A detectable ribbed tile shall indicate approaching grade changes are ramp or stairs, with ridges placed perpendicular to the direction of travel. Refer to Figure Tiles at Ramp/Stair Approach. Where exposed to exterior environmental conditions, stairs to be broom finished air entrained concrete with cast-in safety inserts 50+/-10 mm wide on an extruded aluminum or carborundum base with epoxy or abrasive filler. Refer to CSA B651-04 and CNIB Guidelines for contrasting and slip resistance factors. Minimum concrete strength shall be 35 MPa with non chloride admixture for waterproofing; Window walls shall be: designed to minimum 1.0 kPa Reference Wind Pressure, with appropriate gust factor and wind pressure coefficients applied to the RWP; frameless with silicone butt-joint glazing, with top and bottom stainless steel glazing channels; glazing shall be clear, fully-tempered, designed for local wind loads and high speed train turbulence (including door glazing); and glass in doors and sidelights that could be mistaken for doors shall have horizontal framing or decals and located as per CNIB guideline. Such decals shall be applied to glass surface. Decal colour to be highly visible. Structural steel framing shall not be exposed to the salt-corrosive atmosphere of the rail platform and must be contained within the building envelope (reference Tab 2 Civil and Structural). For example, steel columns shall be located behind the window walls and where exterior columns are required, they shall be concrete or masonry encased, to a minimum height of 1.0 m, with a sloped cap; Cladding material, especially for canopies, soffits and fascias must be designed for wind turbulence generated by high-speed trains. Roofing shall also resist train turbulence. Shingled roofs shall not be used on platform buildings (unless rigid material); Guardrails shall be provided behind the window walls of stair and elevator wells, for safety in the event of glass breakage. Rectangular HSS or pipe guardrails shall be mounted on the inside face of columns. Where required due to column spacing, the guardrail shall be supported by intermediate stanchions fixed to the inside face of the base foundation wall. Height of guardrails: to code minimum above platform level;
400WP

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings
April 30, 2012
3 of 14
Where column spacing permits, guardrails can be galvanized steel pipe or stranded stainless steel cable with turnbuckles, through eyebolts secured to the columns; Space for window washing shall be provided between columns/guardrails and glazing; Doors and frames: Door swings in the open position shall be parallel to the tracks. Doors shall not open perpendicular to the tracks. Doors to have door stop guardrails to prevent excessive door swings, set back to clear the door pull handles; Both vertical and horizontal wiring conduits shall be concealed and integrated with the structure; Roof design shall meet the following design criteria: Live loads shall be determined in accordance with Part 2 and Part 4 of the Ontario Building Code. Overhanging, sloped, vaulted or arched roofs shall have snow guards and built-in concealed gutters, with heat-tracing if warranted, especially over door locations. Rain water leaders both vertical and horizontal shall be recessed or concealed and shall be heat-traced, particularly where located within the building envelope. Any rainwater leader fastening devices shall be carefully designed to withstand corrosion, and for visual (architectural detail) compatibility with the building architecture. This is an example of a detail to be designed by the consultant and not left open to the choice of the contractor, applicable to all details of the GO station and building design process in general. See BASIS OF CRITERIA. Rain water leader shall be connected to storm drainage system, wherever possible. Side platform stair enclosure roof gutters can have scuppers or rainwater leaders draining to an adjacent swale or ditch. Rainwater leaders shall spill onto splash pads or grilles flush-set into pavement (over granular french drains). Where site conditions permit, side platforms should be designed with ramps as an accessible means of egress onto site grade level. Exterior rain water leaders shall be protected against damage due to parking, snow clearing, vandalism and corrosion. Sheet metal covers are not acceptable: heavy gauge galvanized metal guards shall be designed accordingly. Island platform rain water leaders shall be connected to the storm water drainage system. Drainage onto platforms or tracks is not permitted. Storm drains undercrossing tracks shall be encased according to Railway approval.
400WP

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings
April 30, 2012
4 of 14
Roof sheet drainage is acceptable only for stand-alone pre-engineered platform shelters (GO standard platform shelters). Roof mounted HVAC equipment to be fully screened. There shall be no ceiling mounted luminaires over stairwells due to maintenance access problems; Stair lighting shall be recessed in the concrete walls below the handrails. Lighting at the top of the stairs may be ceiling mounted or at the window wall head. Ceiling mounted lights shall not be used where maintenance would require special equipment; Natural ventilation shall be provided, with louvers complete with fly screens, in door transoms and similarly in enclosure roof ends (gables); and Water supply to be provided to hose bibs at the platform level: see Tab 2 Mechanical. Water supply to be gravity drained for winter shut-off. Any pipes exposed in tunnels to be insulated against condensation and integrated with the tunnel structure by recessing, etc., and galvanized protective covers.
FIXTURES The architectural design shall accommodate CCTV cameras, the P/A system and related wiring conduits, including a pay telephone if applicable; The architectural design shall also accommodate surface applied signs and decals. Illuminated signs are not permitted on platforms due to possible interference and confusion with railway signals and train operations. Advertising signs are not permitted on rail platforms; and Proof-of-payment fare equipment, if applicable on 150 mm elevated bases.
ELEVATOR ENCLOSURE BUILDINGS

Elevator enclosures can be stand-alone, however, it is preferred to be or combined with stair enclosures for acoustical continuity of stairs and elevator vestibules. Where possible, elevator shafts shall project above the roof level to serve as a distinctive architectural roof design element, featuring the GO logo, if possible. The minimum acceptable platform edge clearance for elevator enclosure buildings is 2.44 m, areas which do not meet the minimum stated platform edge clearance should be marked with a conspicuous yellow painted hatch augmented by warning signage indicating
400WP

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings
April 30, 2012
5 of 14
the reduced clearance. Reduced platform edge clearances should be approved by GO staff prior to design. FEATURES Basic features shall be the same as for the stair enclosures as applicable, except as follows; Single oversized (1,065 mm clear opening) width door shall be provided for the elevator/vestibule; The higher shaft enclosure may also be glazed as a clerestorey and used for daylight and for station identification signs or for the GO logo as a translucent icon; The vestibule shall have a waiting and seating area and shall accommodate an exiting and waiting wheelchair/Wheeled Mobility Aid passenger. Vestibule doors shall have power operators and guardrails; Elevator doors and side lights shall be subdivided horizontally with aligning frames, to match the glazed elevator cab doors; Glazed elevator shafts shall have roof overhangs to provide sun-shading. GO elevators are not deemed observation elevators and shafts shall be glazed for safety reasons to provide sight-lines. GO elevators shall be on emergency power to lower them to the lowest level, where doors will open automatically; Guardrails shall be provided behind window walls of elevator enclosure, for safety in the event of glass breakage; and Fall arrest protection shall be provided at elevator roofs.
FIXTURES Emergency speaker-phone; CCTV camera to view the elevator cab interior; Signs and decals; Vandal resistant luminaires compatible with CCTV (shall not glare in glazing); and
400WP

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings
April 30, 2012
6 of 14
1,065 mm wide oversized doors to allow passage of WMAs.
400WP

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings
April 30, 2012
7 of 14
ELEVATORS
OVERVIEW The purpose of these guidelines is to encourage a standard approach to the provision of vertical transportation systems provided for GO Transit facilities. Included in the guidelines are elevator related considerations that are important to the realization of GOs design objectives and are therefore expected to be incorporated into the design of all GO platform and parking garage projects. The guidelines do not constitute a project specification. Each project shall have its own specification prepared on a detailed basis and reflect the individual projects unique and comprehensive requirements. It is recognized that strict adherence to specific guideline elements may not be appropriate to all project designs. However, deviation from these guidelines is discouraged and variance approval rests solely with GO Transit. Variance requests shall be supported by an explanation of the reason for the deviation and detailed information on the proposed alternative. PLANNING AND DESIGN OBJECTIVES GO Transits key design objectives shall apply to considerations relating to vertical transportation and include development of appropriate project specific designs that incorporate: Highest degree of safety, Functionality for use by persons with physical disabilities, Passenger security, Service reliability, Effective, efficient operations and maintenance.
Elevator design, construction, installation and maintenance must be in strict conformance with CAN/CSA-B-44 Elevator Safety Code (latest edition) and all other codes and regulations that may apply. Provide car enclosure / door arrangement with interior dimensions suitable to accommodate a prone stretcher 2010 mm (79) long by 610 mm (2-0) wide. In the event of a loss of Utility Power, standby power shall be provided to permit continued operation of the elevator(s). 400WP

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings
April 30, 2012
8 of 14
All elevator rotating equipment shall be provided with protective measures to minimize pinching and related hazards as required by the Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Industrial Establishments. All elevators shall be provided with battery powered emergency lighting and two speed ventilation fans. Glass elevator hoistways and car enclosures shall be supplied with HVAC systems that will provide climate control of the hoistway and limit the interior cab temperature to <= 26 degree C. Provide car enclosure ventilation systems which satisfy CAN/CSA B-44 requirements for such conditions.
Barrier Free Design

All elevators shall be designed to contribute to the provision of a barrier free path of access and conform to the requirements of the latest applicable edition of the Ontario Building Code (OBC). Elevator configuration shall feature flow through designs to permit loading and unloading of persons in wheelchairs or, employing other mobility assist devices, without requiring a change in direction in the path of travel. Design shall allow sufficient discharge space to permit ease of access and transfer. All elevators shall satisfy accessibility standards indicated in the CAN/CSA-B44 Safety Code for Elevators, Appendix E Elevator Requirements for Persons with Physical Disabilities (latest update). Car Operating Panel shall be located on the side wall of the car enclosure to permit parallel approach to panel. Operating panel shall incorporate oversized buttons with appropriate markings.
Safety and Security

Elevator shaft, car enclosure and entrance doors shall be constructed with the maximum amount of glazing to provide internal and external site lines. Elevators shall include provisions in the Car Operating Panel for installation of Elevator Code compliant emergency two way communications device (provided by GO Transits Communication Contractor) as well as interface connections between the activation buttons and indicators in the COP. Travelling cable provisions shall be provided by Elevator Contractor for wiring between the car enclosure and control room. Communications Contractor to provide two- way communication connections between the elevator controller room and GO Transits monitoring service central station.
400WP

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings
April 30, 2012
9 of 14
Provide wiring and interface for installation of CCTV within the car enclosure. Monitoring System Contractor (Chubb Security) to provide continuous monitoring of signals related to the elevator and other sensing devices located in the elevator hoistway and controller room. Elevator must be designed to operate within unrestricted areas. Its signals, fixtures, car enclosure finishes and doors shall be of vandal proof design. Installations and equipment installed shall conform to latest safety codes and shall not be easily damaged or abused. As elevators are generally installed in unattended areas, the equipment must be sensitive to certain security concerns, including high visibility into and out from elevator cars; therefore, car and shaft walls must be glazed with safety glass in stainless steel frames.
Reliable Operation
Use only components which can be shown to have performed satisfactorily and proven reliable for a minimum period of at least two (2) years. The use of prototype or first time installation equipment, component combinations or equipment mixes is not acceptable. Elevator shaft and control room shall be provided with means of maintaining hoistway and control room temperatures between 10 and 27 degree C, under all seasonal conditions.
Operations and Maintenance

Elevators shall be designed to operate within unrestricted areas. Its signals, fixtures, car enclosure finishes and doors shall be of vandal resistant design. Stainless steel shall have a No. 4 brushed finish, with final selection and grain direction being confirmed by the Architect, at time of shop drawing reviews. Elevator equipment shall not contain proprietary features, which limit the Owners ability to engage a qualified elevator maintenance contractor, other than the original manufacturer/installer, for provision of maintenance services. Elevators shall be continually maintained under a comprehensive, planned, preventative maintenance program designed to maximize equipment availability, ensure operational reliability and sustain equipment performance at optimum levels. The program shall include regular component replacement, as recommended by the original equipment manufacturer (OEM), to extend equipment life. Provide two (2) year warranty for new elevators from date of substantial completion of Elevator Trade Contractors Work and acceptance of unit(s) by GO Transit.
400WP

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings
April 30, 2012
10 of 14
Provide 24 month warranty period maintenance service from date equipment is taken over and accepted by GO Transit, coinciding with Warranty period. Maintenance shall include comprehensive full coverage maintenance services as provided under the elevator contractors standard program for full maintenance services, including overtime callback services at no additional charge.
Communications
CCTV cameras and wiring shall be provided as required. All elevators shall have CCTV camera mounted inside elevator cab. Camera mounted in vestibules and lobbies shall view inside and outside of each elevator at each level where possible. If the elevator has doors on two sides then CCTV cameras must be placed to view both lobbies/vestibules. CCTV Cameras connectivity and monitoring must adhere to GO standards and security concerns. Lighting in elevators will consider the usage of CCTV cameras, interior or external.
Equipment and Construction Considerations

Heating Fan forced heater with built-in thermostat, mounted on elevator pit wall. Heat Pump with hyper heating capability down to -25C. If possible, Heat Pump should be ducted type and located outside the elevator hoistway.
Ventilation or Air Conditioning Ventilation via axial, wall mounted, shuttered exhaust fan with thermostatic control mounted at top of hoistway. Orientation: South. Discharge protection:8" long galvanized sheet metal duct with birdscreen on open end. Air Conditioning via Heat Pump with low ambient cooling. If possible, Heat Pump should be ducted type and located outside the elevator hoistway.
400WP

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings Hoistway
April 30, 2012
11 of 14
Glazed construction above ground with solar control window film on South and West exposures. Glazed construction below ground adjacent to elevator entrances, no window film.
Floor Grille Floor grille shall be capable of capturing and retaining crystalline ice melting products in winter and road grit and gravel during all seasons. Its hall be constructed from rustresistant materials and shall be designed for cleanout by one person, unaided. Window Film Window film shall be selected to balance a reduction in heat build-up with minimizing any reduction in visibility.
Project Specific Provisions

To ensure adherence to these standards and guidelines, a qualified vertical transportation consulting firm shall be retained to provide design, specification and construction review services. A comprehensive project specification outlining requirements for both the elevator trade and related work to be provided by other trades to interface with the elevator shall be prepared for review and approval by GO. Utilize only Machine-Room-Less (MRL) type traction equipment. Unless prevented by specific project site conditions, provide elevator 1814kg (4000 lb) elevator capacity, arranged in a service car configuration (i.e. cab interior more narrow than deep), utilizing 1220mm (4-0) wide two speed side opening doors. Refer to general arrangement of cab configuration as reflected GO Transits Outline Performance specifications. Car controls shall be located on the car side wall. Control panel shall include a separate cabinet enclosure to house the emergency two way communication system (to be provided by GOs Communication Contractor). Elevator Contractor to provide activation button and LED indicator. Where site or other project specific conditions require elevator solutions that are not in full conformance with these guidelines and GO Transits outline specification, prior approval of alternate elevator provisions shall be obtained from GO Transit at the projects 50% Design Development stage
400WP

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings
April 30, 2012
12 of 14
GO Elevator Installation Planning Checklist

The following are design elements which should be considered when planning elevator installations in GO Transit facilities: Element Vestibule Orientation: Floor grille: Entrance door:
At Tunnel Level:
Basic Design Criteria Quadrant spanning South through East. Inside entrance door, arranged to capture foot-borne debris. Mandatory, power operated barrier free accessibility compliant. Optional below ground level. Maximum slope away from elevator entrance, as permitted by applicable codes. Optional below ground level. Mandatory at ground level or above ground level. Away from elevator entrance. Mandatory. Away from elevator entrance. Fan forced heater or heat pump with hyper heating. Exhaust Fan with fresh air louver or Heat Pump with low ambient cooling. Glazed above ground. Mandatory. Per manufacturers requirements (typically in corridor or vestibule adjacent to elevator hoistway at upper landing). Provide heating and ventilation equipment necessary to maintain controller cabinet within the recommended manufacturers temperature range.
Elevator vestibule Slope of concrete floor

At Intermediate Level:
Elevator vestibule Slope of concrete floor

At Overhead Walkway/Platform Level:
Elevator Vestibule Slope of concrete floor Hoistway heating: Hoistway ventilation or air conditioning Hoistway construction Pit drain Elevator Controller Cabinet: Location HVAC
400WP

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings
April 30, 2012
13 of 14
FIGURE:SAMPLE CAR ENCLOSURE ARRANGEMENT 400WP

CI-0303-02
Page
Station Buildings
April 30, 2012
14 of 14
FIGURE: CUT OUT IN ELEVATOR COP PANEL FOR 2 WAY COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE
400WP

CI-0303-03
Page
Station Buildings
Shelters
February 16, 2009
1 of 3
OVERVIEW
Because GO Transit is primarily a commuter system, operating in accordance with timetables, most passengers arrive on platforms to coincide with train or bus departures. GO Transit provides only a limited number of shelters accordingly, and will generally advise the consultant on the size, number and location of shelters for each project, to suit the ridership. For example, a limited service medium ridership accessible station with a bus loop, would have 2 rail platform shelters, one near the mini-platform, and one bus platform shelter. Each shelter would accommodate approximately a bus-load of passengers. The two rail shelters would accommodate approximately a half coach-load of passengers.
SIZE
The approximate size of a shelter for preliminary layout purposes, based on a 2.4 m module, is 2.4 m wide by 7.2 m long (3 modules). At 0.37 m2 per passenger, the 17 m2 area equals approximately 45 passengers (a bus-load).
CLEARANCE
The minimum platform edge clearance for both rail and bus shelters is 2.438 m. For clearances adjacent to tracks, refer to Tab 6, Heavy Rail.
FORM
Refer to GO Transit Platform Shelter design drawings on attached CD. Shelters are pre-fabricated metal frame structures on concrete slabs on grade, fully glazed, with doors. Roof geometry is either barrel vault (preferred) or pitched depending on architecture of station building. Roofs are translucent with no major overhangs, for storm water sheet drainage down walls at corners and to minimize snow and ice build-up. The translucent roof material allows for borrowed light from platform light standard luminaires, but also provides shade. Pitched roof shapes may be provided, but require snow guards.
LOADS
Shelters are to be designed to resist the following specified minimum loads: Snow = 1.5 kPa (Uniform and Patterned Loading); and 400WP

CI-0303-03
Page
Station Buildings
Shelters
February 16, 2009
2 of 3
Wind = 1.0 kPa (Reference Wind Pressure).
The appropriate gust factor and pressure coefficients are to be applied to the Reference Wind Pressure. All design loads shall be in accordance with Part 2 and Part 4 of the Ontario Building Code.
FEATURES
Concrete slab-on-grade, broom finished, sealed; Metal structural framing painted or anodized aluminum. Colour (to be selected by GO Transit) to match adjacent features; Single doors at shelter ends, hinged on the high-speed track side, with a guard-rail and latch to secure doors open during summer; One door power-assisted in the rail shelter which is near the mini-platform, and one bus shelter door also power-assisted. The activation plate shall be in the door guardrail; Intermediate horizontal mullion, in a contrasting colour, usually orange, with glass above and below, sized for replacement by one or two persons to avoid a flagman requirement. The orange colour is per CNIB guidelines; Clear fully tempered glass or designed for local wind loads and train turbulence, with vertical clear silicone butt joints, in a wind-screen metal base on a neoprene gasket, caulked to the slightly elevated concrete base; Barrel vault roof and roof gables of translucent tinted thermoclear polycarbonate; Ventilation grilles with insect screens in the roof gables or door transoms at the shelter ends to reduce the probability of condensation on the interior of the glass walls; HPS interior illumination, vandal resistant luminaires with lenses connected to platform lighting; Stainless steel electrical junction box and removable access panel; Provision for electric infrared radiant heaters in all shelters; and One P/A speaker in each shelter.
400WP

CI-0303-03
Page
Station Buildings
Shelters
February 16, 2009
3 of 3
FIXTURES
Floor-mounted bench, with armrests (easier access); GO logo on roof gables, if required, and; Route map or timetable display frame and tempered glass face, double-sided display, for mounting on the glass walls, lockable.
400WP

CI-0304-01
Page
Bus Terminal Buildings Program
June 1, 2006
1 of 8
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL TYPES GO Transit has 3 basic types of bus terminals: stand-alone, station-shared, and jointdevelopment. The exterior architectural form will vary, as follows: Stand-alone terminal buildings shall be designed to suit the architectural context of the site; Station-shared terminals shall be accommodated within station buildings, suitably enlarged; and Joint-development terminals shall conform to the architecture of the development that encompasses them or shall be designed as stand-alone terminals, where external visual identity is warranted within the development.
STRUCTURAL FRAMING The architecture of bus terminals shall be based on steel or concrete frame structural design, to permit monopitch roofs with cantilevered canopies, and glazed window walls. STREAMLINING The key architectural element of a bus terminal is a large roof overhang, extended beyond the building as a sheltering canopy, for passengers and passenger amenities. KEY COMPONENTS Key components additional to or different from rail station buildings are as follows: Higher exterior walls, particularly if roofs overhang buses; Larger waiting rooms; Window walls for broader sight lines of arriving buses and of all bus bays, if possible; Multi-use in lieu of single-use washrooms; Dispatcher and driver rooms, with a kitchenette and washroom(s); Additional shelters for remote bus bays, at the rate of 1 shelter per 2 bus bays;
400WP

CI-0304-01
Page
Bus Terminal Buildings Program Double door entrances with vestibules;
June 1, 2006
2 of 8
Waiting rooms with air-conditioning, particularly at multi-carrier terminals; More extensive signage, to identify bus bay numbers and destinations; Provisions for concession area; Ticket vending equipment to be located as directed by GO Transit; and Increased display areas and signage to address needs of terminal passengers.
ROOMS For mechanical, electrical, communications, washrooms, janitor, and storage rooms, the architectural program is basically the same as for station buildings, except washrooms are typically multi-use with stainless steel toilet partitions. See Station Program. The program for additional terminal-specific components and rooms is as follows:
ROOF/CANOPY/PLATFORM
The following minimum clearances shall be provided for roofs and canopies: Passenger platform canopy height above the platform: 3.35 m (11-0) minimum; Platform curb to canopy edge: 0.5 m (20) (this applies also to sawtooth platforms at the narrowest point); and Height of a passenger platform canopy within 0.5 m (20) of the platform curb, extending also partly over a bus, or a roof over a bus driveway: 4.775 m (15-8) minimum above the bus driveway. GO Transit may also require additional clearances for bus towtrucks, particularly on ramps.
FEATURES A radio antenna above the roof; Any roof-mounted HVAC equipment to be fully screened; Where a canopy or a roof may trap diesel fumes, the consultant shall design natural ventilation features;
400WP

CI-0304-01
Page
June 1, 2006
3 of 8
Where mechanical ventilation must be provided, the consultant shall design acoustical features to ensure that passengers may hear P/A announcements and converse on the platform; Exposed structural members shall be HSS steel and shall have fittings to prevent birdnesting; Where scuppers are used in lieu of rain-water leaders, they shall be located away from buses and passengers; Wood soffits are acceptable, to Code requirements; Support columns shall be sized and shaped to maximize sight lines. Round columns are preferred; The consultant shall locate and accommodate all fixtures, integrating them with the features; and Rain water leaders to be connected to storm drainage system.
FIXTURES Luminaires; P/A speakers; CCTV cameras; Clocks; Bus bay signs and any other terminal related signs that are to be suspended from the canopy; Passenger Information Display Boards; Advertising signs, if required by GO Transit; Ducts, diffusers, louvers, vents, grilles or other ventilation items, if required; Skylights or clerestorey windows if required; Exterior type GO Transit standard benches with armrests; Waste receptacles; 400WP

CI-0304-01
Page
Bus Terminal Buildings Program Bicycle racks; and
June 1, 2006
4 of 8
Railings along walls for passengers to lean on, at a height of 914 mm above platform level.
ENTRANCES
Main public entrances to terminals shall have double doors and heated vestibules, where possible. Objectives: to permit easier access for passengers with baggage, to reduce drafts in the waiting room, energy saving, and for passenger comfort. Secondary doors may be grouped single or double doors with 600 mm (24) spacing in between. GO Transit to advise consultants accordingly. FEATURES Maximized glazing of doors, transoms and sidelights. Single glazing, fully tempered, for vestibules. Insulating glass, fully tempered, if vestibules are not provided. High vestibule ceilings, to result in door transoms. Objectives: ceiling mounted forced air heaters and signs on transom glazing. Recessed floor mats. Barrier-free access: at least one door with a power-assisted door operator (and matching inner vestibule door).
FIXTURES Luminaires; Door decal signs, by GO Transit. Signs on transom glazing for terminal identification or directional signage, by GO Transit; Diffusers; and Exit signs.
400WP

CI-0304-01
Page
June 1, 2006
5 of 8
WAITING ROOM
See Station buildings. Terminal waiting rooms are similar to station waiting rooms. However, they shall be larger, to suit ridership. GO Transit will advise the consultant of area requirements. A rule of thumb is to provide one 4-seat bench per bus bay (GO Transit standard interior bench), queuing for 20 at each ticket sales location, and circulation/waiting space on the basis of 0.7 m2 for each passenger. GO Transit to advise consultant on passenger capacity in accordance with ridership projections. FEATURES Window walls for sight lines to bus bays: insulating glass in aluminum thermal break frames; More space for queues in front of ticket sales than in station buildings. A rule of thumb is to provide double the space at stations. Minimum: 20 passengers; and The concession space may also need to be larger than at stations (minimum, 6 m2), requiring also an exterior table/seating area. GO Transit will advise the consultant of concession requirements accordingly.
FIXTURES Minimum 3 lineal metres wall space for GO Information displays; More pay telephones than in station waiting rooms, as will be advised by GO Transit, to suit ridership. Rule of thumb: one phone per bus bay, minimum 4 phones; Window blinds and/or solar film if required, particularly for the concession area; Concession signs by Tenant (shall not interfere with Station Attendant sight lines); GO Transit standard interior benches with armrests; Waste containers; and Digital clock, etc. (see Station Program).
DISPATCHER ROOM
The bus dispatcher room, where required, shall be elevated to permit the dispatcher in a seated position to have sight lines of all buses. It shall be located strategically for visibility of bus bays, particularly of arriving buses, where possible. The usual location is on an 400WP

CI-0304-01
Page
June 1, 2006
6 of 8
external wall, but it may also be located within the waiting room. Generally it shall be adjacent to the driver room and shall have access from the driver room. Both rooms may also be adjacent to the station attendant room, in which case a staff room may be provided in common for the dispatcher, drivers and station attendants, with shared washroom and kitchenette facilities. Depending on the size of the facility, separate male and female staff/driver washrooms may be required. FEATURES Floor elevated a minimum of 570 mm above the waiting room floor level and platform level, equivalent to a minimum 3 riser stair requirement. The seated dispatchers eye level will then be approximately 1.69 m above platform level, over the heads of most passengers; Desk-height counter with insulated glazing above, knee-space below; Side and/or back counters to be typical counter height with task lighting from wall-hung cabinets; Wall hung cabinets with adjustable shelves and lockable doors; Non-glare recessed fluorescent luminaries with 12 x 12 x 12 mm parabolic eggcrate lenses; If the room is on an exterior wall, insulating glass shall be fully tempered tinted low-E glass. Interior locations to have fully tempered 10 mm clear glazing; Where a dispatcher room is adjacent to a driver room, but has a separate entrance, a pass-through sliding-glass window shall be provided between them, operable by the dispatcher, for receiving driver reports and direct communications; Where a dispatcher room is in a waiting room, the pass-through window may be required into the waiting room; Lockable full or glass door swinging into the dispatcher room; A coat storage closet, or coat space behind the entrance door; A Driver Manual storage cabinet with shelves and doors; A window transom/bulkhead designed for blinds; A magnetic bulletin/white-board, wall mounted or on cabinet doors above counterheight, built-in if required;
400WP

CI-0304-01
Page
Bus Terminal Buildings Program Access to a staff washroom (see above); and Water cooler.
June 1, 2006
7 of 8
FIXTURES Most of the following fixtures shall be supplied by GO Transit. Bus radio, microphone; CCTV monitor, if applicable (TBD); Computer; Printer/fax machine (consultant to verify whether one or two units); Filing cabinet (to be under a counter). The consultant shall confirm the size and shape with GO Transit. Lateral filing, 2 drawers, preferred; Office chair (plus side chair, if required); Window blinds; and Wall clock (24 hour digital).
DRIVER ROOM
Where a driver room is required, GO Transit will confirm the number of drivers forecast to use it simultaneously, but the minimum requirement is room for a couch or 2 easy chairs, and a lunch table/chairs. The room should have daylight, and where it is adjacent to a dispatcher room, the dividing partition shall be glazed, with a pass-through window. The room shall also have direct access to a staff washroom or to separate male and female driver washrooms (at major terminals). FEATURES Coat closet with a door; Staff lockers; Kitchenette with counter and cabinets; Refrigerator;
400WP

CI-0304-01
Page
June 1, 2006
8 of 8
Drawers and cabinets below the counter top with adjustable shelves; A stainless steel sink, single compartment; Counter-top space for a coffee kettle, and if required, for a microwave unit and toaster: consultant to verify GO Transit requirements; and Major terminal driver-rooms may require a kitchen exhaust hood and space for a TV monitor.
FIXTURES Most fixtures shall be supplied by GO Transit. Refrigerator (and microwave unit, if required); Table, chairs (and easy chairs and/or sofa, if required); Paper towel dispenser; Waste container; Wall clock; Major terminal driver rooms may also have a TV monitor (commercial programs); Kitchen exhaust hood, if required; Window blinds and/or solar film; Radio; and Water cooler.
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Multilevel Parking Structures
Program
December 01, 2011
1 of 17
BASIS OF CRITERIA
This program applies to the design of multi-level parking garages for GO Rail facilities. The general arrangements will need to be tailored and adjusted to suit the specific properties and site traffic conditions, as well as surrounding pedestrian and vehicular circulation patterns. The primary design objective is to provide a suitable quantity and balance of commuter parking spaces relative to customer needs (i.e., accessible, non-accessible spaces, motorcycles, bicycles, etc.). The multi-level structure is to be of sound construction and provide a reasonable level of personal security with due consideration to stated care and maintenance procedures and defined design requirements. The basic design considerations for a Standard Multi-Level Parking Garage are based on the following elements: Functional Parking geometries with consideration for size, height, and turning radius of automobiles and statistical quantity must be taken into account. Efficient internal pedestrian & vehicular flow with independent access / egress points. Consideration for pedestrian and bicycle access; by choice of the garage location; optimizing its site potential and interface with adjacent facilities on site. Code compliance for exiting, travel distance, ventilation, and fire separations, accessibility, controls, emergency lighting levels and exit signs. Incorporation of CPTED - Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design ( e.g controlled access, natural surveillance; teritorial reinforcement etc.) principles wherever appropriate. Emergency response and access. Accommodation for communication and electrical other related equipment. Appropriate Way finding Measures; Signage; Building Identification and Corporate Branding. Incorporation of Sustainable Design Principles, energy efficient lighting and other proven green initiatives and/or technologies to mitigate potential environmental impacts. 400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
2 of 17
Accommodation for salt protection and safe service and maintenance activities / equipment and user friendly, easily operated building design. Accommodation for safe and easy service and maintenance activities/equipment. Accommodation for known or potential retail opportunities and planning for any loading or unloading conditions such as future Mobility Hubs integration, so as not to interfere with the parking garage traffic.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
PARKING STALLS CONFIGURATION Standard parking and designated accessible parking spaces and stall size modules are identical to the surface parking ones. Designated Accessible parking space and accessible passenger pick-up areas that serve the parking garage should be located on the shortest possible circulation route to an accessible entrance. Related accessibility features such as accessible pathway away from vehicles that may be backing out, curb cuts, drop off zones, pavement markings, width, clearance, etc., should be provided.
CLEAR HEADROOM The vehicular entrance to and egress from at least one parking level and all areas intended to be used by wheelchair accessible vehicles to gain access to a parking space on that level shall have a vertical clearance of not less than 2.1 m per the OBC. It is recommended to maintain a uniform clear vertical clearance of 2.1 m to the underside of any obstruction (signage, bulkhead, light fixture, beam, etc.) in all levels of the parking garage.
ACCESS ENTRY & EXIT Adequate queuing accommodation/space at vehicle entry and exits points should be proposed. The access roads surrounding the facility and their traffic flow must be taken into consideration when planning entrances and exits and deciding on ramp configurations.
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
3 of 17
Internal circulation patterns shall minimize vehicular and pedestrian conflict, minimize travel distances, conflicting movements and number of turn and avoid congestion problems at driveway entrances. Improved surface friction at entrance locations using a variety of techniques such as (but not limited to) grooves, heated ramps, additional drainage, should be considered. Interface with paid parking equipment (queuing dynamics etc) should be adequately addressed. Interface with existing road authorities (traffic lights, right-turns, etc) should be considered where applicable. All vehicular ramps shall be provided with transition zones at the top and bottom of the ramp at a minimum.
ELEVATORS & LOBBIES

Appropriately sized Electric MRL passenger elevator(s), determined by the size and height and parking capacity of the parking garage shall be provided, incorporating latest requirements of the B44 barrier-free requirements of the elevator code and CI Design Requirements Manual. Custom features such as glass doors and walls to be site specific based on orientation, shaft walls, etc. All elevator lobbies shall have barrier-free operable accessible doors and are to be climate controlled (minimal) with no exposed ducts and piping in lobbies and public waiting areas. For signage compliance requirements, refer to the GO Static Signage Catalogue.
STAIRWELLS Stairwells should have appropriate fire separations as well as rated doors on all stairwell walls that open into the garage. Stairwells shall at a minimum meet or exceed all related Easier Access Features referenced in the DRM. Stair handrails and guardrails where provided shall be stainless steel and walls shall be protected with clear, non-sacrificial, anti graffiti coat.
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
4 of 17
Exterior stairwell walls should be provided with glazing for natural light and security, with consideration of limiting distance issues. Eliminate potential hiding places under open stairs by suitable design options. Stairwell doors are to have exit devices, proper latching and smoke seals. There shall be no ceiling mounted luminaries over stairwells due to maintenance access problems with stair step lighting recessed in the concrete walls below the handrails. Lighting at the top of the stairs shall be easily accessed from a flat surface by a 2m ladder. These lights may be ceiling mounted. Stairwells shall be natural ventilated with louvers complete with fly screens, in door transoms. Provide water supply and hose bibs at each level inside the stairwell and a 120V convenience outlet at each level outside the stairwell as a minimum.
EXTERIOR ELEVATION Where parking structures and pedestrian areas adjoin, the exterior edge of the parking structure should exhibit a high level of architecture detail such as decorative screens, overhead canopies over pedestrian walkways that establish a comfortable and well proportioned human scale. The exterior design of a structure should minimize its visual identity as parking by disrupting the monotony of its underlying structure system through wall mass and window opening and through variations in color, material, and/or texture and a combination of solid and transparent areas. Exterior lighting should always be aimed away from adjacent buildings with shades, shields, and optics and residential areas to avoid light pollution. Architectural elements such as spandrel or enclosure panels should minimize snow drifting and wind. They should be tall enough to satisfy building code requirements fo fall arrest and to ensure that the overall building envelope meets the open air requirements. Maintenance, bird control and lighting should be considered in the exterior finishes and configuration.
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
5 of 17
The use of concrete, masonry, galvanized steel, stainless steel, anodized aluminium and other low maintenance materials is preferred. Refer to the GO Signage and Branding Guidelines for detailed guidelines on exterior signage and branding elements.
EXTERIOR PAVEMENT & WALKWAYS

Walkways shall be constructed of hard and sustainable materials that are slip resistant and capable of clearing during winter months and shall include cantilevered canopies as directed by GO. Pavement patterns are to follow and assist in defining entrances, ramps, stairs, and pedestrian paths. Exterior pavement and walkways should be suitable for wheelchair and mobility device usage, physical delineation of walkways is preferred.
STRUCTURAL DESIGN
The parking structure must be designed to withstand the loading to which is it subjected in the completed state as well as when it is partially complete during construction, and also during maintenance. The design shall be based on the most cost effective structural system when considered in the context of both the capital cost of construction and the projected life-cycle cost of the parking garage with a design service life in accordance with the latest CSA standards. Ideal structural bays that allow for maximum number of parking spaces and flow of automobiles dependent upon site and structure should be designed. The ground level parking slab shall be concrete slab on grade. The designer will consider the geotechnical information in the selection and design of the foundation system and structure type and consideration and recommendations will also be required for any special conditions that may exist at the site, such as slopes or adjacent land features. Various miscellaneous features of the parking structure must be included in the structural design. Each feature must be designed to accommodate the proper functioning and maintenance of the item in question, including installation and removal as appropriate.
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
6 of 17
These features may include but are not limited to: Pole lighting supports, equipment bases sleeved penetrations, permanent interior partitions, miscellaneous metals, stairs and handrails, curtain wall and cladding systems, doors and frames, ceiling support requirements and the like, elevator support requirements, mechanical and electrical support requirements; fall arrest system; decorative metal screens; signage; and window washing system. Window washing systems and Fall Protection systems shall be designed in accordance with the Occupational Health & Safety Act and regulations, as a minimum requirement, and should consider incorporating reasonably optimal and practical safety measures beyond these requirements. The window washing system shall ensure building surfaces and finishes will not be marred or otherwise damaged during normal operation of equipment.
WALLS
All interior and exterior walls materials selected shall depend on location and site specific elevational constraints. Interior walls are to have a smooth finish to limit potential abrasion and allow easy maintenance. All areas exposed to high traffic public use should be coated with non sacrificial, clear anti-graffiti coating (stairwells etc.) Consideration should be given to the use of colour on walls, doors and in key locations for coding or location identification. See GO Signage Manual for detailed requirements.
ROOF
The design of the parking garage shall accommodate a maintenance free roof. Sustainable roof construction options could be proposed such as white reflective roof; roof systems with PV roof applications with related inverter room provision in the structure as directed by GO. Peripheral roof protection shall be provided by parapets as mandated by industry standards and code requirements. Extended stairwell to mitigate fall arrest and provide better serviceability to the roof is required.
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
7 of 17
DOORS & WINDOWS

Service rooms and storage areas shall be enclosed with doors and louvered vents or windows as required. All service rooms including electrical, communication and mechanical rooms shall be provided with access controls i.e. fob access and keypad Application of security films should be considered for vandal and abuse resistance in glazed stairwells, and elevator lobbies. Exterior window frames, doors and door frames are to be constructed of heavy duty anodized or pre-finished aluminium frames. Interior doors, frames and screens are to be constructed of heavy duty hollow metal sections with appropriate fire rating. Proper security and exiting hardware as appropriate for specific environmental conditions is to be provided at all doors.
RAILING & GUARDRAILS

Provide stainless steel handrails and faade metal elements at all stairs, stairwells, and ramps in compliance with the Ontario Building Code. All handrails/railings should be designed to meet the accessibility requirements as mandated by industry accessibility standards and code requirements. Guard rails should be a minimum of 1100mm above the finished floor at all locations where required. This is to include locations along spandrel panels or exterior structures at the perimeter of the parking garage. Around the interior perimeter of the parking areas or stalls, sacrificial bumper panels in wood or recycled plastics should be installed at adequate height and colour. Pedestrian control guardrails should be provided at all pedestrian entrances and exits; these should be located around pedestrian doors, stairs, and at access points to rail or bus platforms.
EXTERIOR METAL
All exterior exposed metal is to be stainless steel, use of galvanised metal should be limited and it should be pre-finished or coated with a high performance coating system. These systems must include a zinc rich epoxy primer.
FINISHES 400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
8 of 17
All traffic surfaces will be capable of taking paint for pavement markings. Pavement markings are to give direction, define parking stalls, barrier-free parking spaces, and pedestrian paths. For corresponding signage requirements, see GO Signage Manual. All exposed structural steel structures will be hot dip galvanized. All exposed Mechanical and Electrical systems to be painted and primed. Ramps should be provided with additional texture and snow melting systems if exposed to the exterior or otherwise required. Refer to the DRM for Standard Finishes in Stairwells, Elevator Lobbies, Elevators, Mechanical, Electrical, Communication and Storage/Service Rooms.
ELECTRICAL ROOM
Electrical rooms are not to be below grade and to be designed with adequate drainage. The service entrance distribution panel board, transformers, transfer switches, contactors and controls and branch circuit panel boards shall be located in the electrical room. Access controls i.e. fob access and keypad to the electrical room shall be provided. Refer to GO Station Electrical Room Standard in the Design Requirements Manual for detailed guidelines.
COMMUNICATIONS ROOM Refer to the DRM TAB 6 for detailed guidelines.
SERVICE & MAINTENANCE AREA STORAGE/SERVICE ROOM

A designated storage area in the parking structure should be provided. The room(s) can be used to accommodate service equipment; sweeper storage and tools in a secure location. Service rooms shall contain sprinklers, water valves, switches and mechanisms, etc. All ancillary room doors shall not open onto vehicular traffic; a concrete apron shall be provided with bollards to protect egress of service personnel onto the drive aisle. Rooms that contain temperature sensitive equipment shall be insulated and shall require special design.
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
9 of 17
ELECTRICAL SERVICES AND DESIGN CRITERIA

Investigate impact of parking structure on the existing electrical service because the existing service may not accommodate the additional load. Refer to the DRM for detailed requirements. Energy Management System/ Smart Panels should provide the most flexible control system available: multi-level lighting, occupancy lighting changes, light harvesting, programmable circuit control, IP addressable for future remote control, open architecture backnet/modbus compliant accessible through Microsoft windows software. Emergency Backup Power Systems shall include, but not be limited, to the following: Communications equipment, safety and security equipment shall be supported by a conditioned backup power source like a UPS. Egress Lighting shall be on the UPS or use of battery powered light packs if a generator power source is not available. Except for elevators that form part of an accessible route and elevators that serve access through tunnel level, generators are not required to back up the elevators. The backed-up elevator shall be supported on at a time in sequential order. Generators, when provided under the above conditions, shall be sized to meet the current load of the parking structure and near by stations emergency load and 50% growth. The generators should be sufficiently sized to permit lighting and dynamic signage to continue to operate (both in the parking garage and throughout the Station facility). The generator should be located and positioned to minimize public exposure to noise, vibration, exhaust and Arc Flash (if hazard level is greater than 1). All backup power systems shall have monitoring and alarms local and remote capability, and ability to connect by modem or internet. The ability to monitor and change set point remotely. Appropriately sized fuel storage tank for the size and height of the parking garage shall be provided and shall have a minimum of 24hr support or generator.
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
10 of 17
The Generator and fuel tank are to be TSSA certified and a fuelling number provided. Convenient 20 amp 5-20RA duplex GFI receptacles shall be located at each stairway and elevator area, on each level, around equipment on roofs, in service and storage rooms, near entrances and exits and at convenient locations on each parking level. All electrical components, panels, ducts are to be mounted on standoffs. No direct connections to the wall or ceilings are permitted. Lightning protection and surge suppression systems shall be part of the design. Provide Fire Alarm and Security Systems as applicable. Provide cathodic protection on underground metal piping. Provide heat tracing on all water pipes and down spouts. Power and communication lines should be provided to accommodate future payment equipment at point of entry and exit, as well as for dynamic and/or illuminated signage.
ILLUMINATION OF THE STRUCTURE LED lighting to be used in all areas except service rooms. For more details on LED requirements refer to GOs DRM. Photocells and motion sensors are to be used. The lighting levels for inside a covered Parking Facility shall be to a minimum recommended by IESNA and as follows: General parking and pedestrian areas........................ 50 lux or 5fc Ramps and corners............................................... 110 lux or 10 fc. Entrance areas...................................................... 540 lux or 50 fc. Service rooms ....................................................... 500 lux or 50 fc. Stairways and elevator lobbies .............................. 220 lux or 20fc.
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
11 of 17
The lighting control shall be flexible i.e. programmable controlled per circuit complete with IP addressable and remote access and control. The design shall consider methods of reducing energy usage and maintenance. LED lighting by approved manufacturers shall be reviewed. The design shall consider occupied and a 50 % reduction in light levels when unoccupied. Light harvesting systems shall also be considered. The system shall be controlled by a Programmable Logic Controller which can handle multiple lighting levels and areas complete with unique on and off, a remote override, and a changeable daylight savings time. The changes to the on and off configurations shall be done either remote or local computer connections. Service areas like electrical rooms are to have ceiling mounted occupancy sensors on all light switches. Exterior decorative, illuminated signage and perimeter lighting shall be all part of the design. Pole lighting shall be to GO standards for lighting and poles details referenced in the DRM. Reduction of light pollution of flood lights and wall washers (spill off into surrounding canopies) is to be considered.
ELECTRIC VEHICLES
GO staff shall direct the percentage of the parking spaces in the garage to be planned for Electric Vehicles. Conduit (power and data) are to be provided for future use and the impact on existing power services shall be investigated by the designer. For corresponding signage requirements, see GO Signage Manual.
MECHANICAL SERVICES AND DESIGN CRITERIA

Mechanical systems to be designed without confined spaces The Electrical and Communications rooms shall be heated and air conditioned by a split heat pump A/C unit with R410A refrigerant, variable compressor speed, refer to the DRM for ambient cooling range tables. Also, provide in these two rooms low and high temperature alarms. Refer DRM for HVAC requirements within these service rooms. 400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
12 of 17
If drainage from level 1 cannot be connected to the proposed building sanitary sewer by gravity, provision shall be made for a sanitary sump pit including: Duplex sump pump system, pumps shall be epoxy coated with two totally independent seal assemblies; Guide bars; Four float level control system; Lifting equipment including lifting davit, chain hoist, lifting device, chain hook; Gas tight access frame and selfopening cover complete with piston kit and safety grid cover shall be traffic bearing where needed and completely assembled stainless steel control panel shall be provided There shall be no need for personnel to enter the wet well to service the pumps.
Complete storm and sanitary systems shall be provided as part of the parking structure design. Utility water meter to municipal standards shall be provided with 3 valve by-pass arrangement. Water service on every level including the roof should be accommodated for. Provide exterior non-freeze water hydrants evenly spaced along the perimeter. Incorporate heat tracing where needed to prevent freezing. All pipes and mechanical fixtures shall be designed to be corrosion free. No Copper type M is permitted. Provide heavy duty parking area drains complete with heavy duty grate and sediment buckets. Provide dry sprinkler system in rooms requiring sprinklers as per OBC. Provide standpipe systems if required by OBC, depending on area and number of storeys. Provide portable fire extinguishers conforming to NFPA 10 throughout the parking facility and ancillary spaces as required by OBC and OFC. The Fire Safety Plan to be developed according to facility design category and consistent with local Fire
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
13 of 17
Department requirements. Proper notification systems, lighting, and signage are required to facilitate safe and speedy evacuation during an emergency. Septic tank, if required, to be isolated from oil collecting system.
WAYFINDING & SIGNAGE

All signage shall meet AODA, FLSA and Branding compliance requirements. A consistent appearance or theme should be presented throughout the facility. Signage for entrances and directions should be clear and kept at appropriate drivers eye levels. Coordinate with related disciplines, e.g., Architectural, Structural, Electrical, etc., for placement of signage requirements (i.e., locations). Provide power, communication, feeder and conduit to facilitate the installation of dynamic and/or back/top lit signage. Directional signs should always be located at decision points. Where possible, signs should be located perpendicular, not parallel, to the visitors line of sight and movement. Signage shall not to conflict with overall height and clear span requirements. Signs have to have a break away feature and colour coded for each level. For further details on wayfinding; signage and pavement marking requirements, refer to GO Multilevel Parking Structures Signage Manual and GO Signage & Manual.
SPACE COUNTING SYSTEMS

The design shall incorporate requirements for space counting systems as directed by GO staff.
LANDSCAPING
Landscaping around the parking garage should focus on low maintenance materials and shade trees. All trees should be located away from any building structures and out of any snow storage areas and should not provide hiding areas adjacent to paths or walkways.
SNOW MANAGEMENT
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
14 of 17
Entry areas for pedestrian and vehicles should be configured to allow easy snow removal and minimize any damage from its operations and chemical treatment applications. Exterior samps and stairway areas to be provided with hydronic or electric resistance snow melting embedded below the traffic surface and specific entry and exit areas. Consideration may be given to the use of trench drains at entrances, grates at pedestrian entrances and constructing lower flights of stairs out of grating to catch and remove snow, slush, and water entering the buildings. In all areas, floor drains and floors should be configured to prevent ponding and allow for quick and easy drainage.
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN
GO supports incorporation of Sustainable Design Principles where the actual construction of the garage with criteria in site strategies, material selection and features, construction waste management and technologies to achieve a high level of environmental performance, durability and healthy indoor air quality through integrated design, best practices and emerging technologies.
SAFETY
The Parking Structure shall at a minimum follow the below listed basic Safety Engineering principles: Defined pedestrian access to and from the structure; adequate walkway provision, clearances, visibility, illumination, etc. Ease of traffic flow; access control, avoidance of abrupt reverse direction turns and traffic crossovers. (i.e., pedestrians, vehicles, bikes). The design should avoid bottle-necks pinch points / blind spots / corners, light, noise, vibration, pollution, spill over with human factors Integration concepts integrated to provide information effectiveness, minimized visual obstruction, permanent signage, etc. Consider all relevant safety legislations (i.e., OHSA, TSSA, CSA, OESC, CEC, OFC, etc.) in order to minimize exposure to hazard(s). Avoid Fall Hazards (for vertical access, internal steps are preferred) and provide adequate edge perimeter protection by means of parapets and guardrails in the
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
15 of 17
absence of which adequate clearance from the edge is required. Serviceable equipment to be located and orientated in such a way to be easily accessible from ground, flat level, within reach as much as possible. Avoid Confined Spaces conditions. Any sources of power and communication shall be in a secure location. Forced ventilation systems to be installed in enclosed spaces, where applicable and or necessary. Qualified equipment / machines shall be properly safeguarded. Consider bollards, jersey barriers, curbs and other protective measures, as appropriate. Electrical and Communications Rooms to be physically separated. Electrical Arc Flash hazard levels to be optimized before equipment purchase, and verified after 'as built' stage. Equipment to be labelled accordingly, when Arc Flash Hazard Level exceeds 1. Emergency Generator, if provided, to be strategically placed (away from the public exposure and easily accessible for refuelling) and adequately protected according to its Arc Flash Rating. Pipes to be colour coded according to their content and flow direction indicated. Entire facility's perimeter to be adequately delineated, CPTED principles to be utilized to maximize visibility and line of sight. Storage rooms to be designed according to their contents, i.e., bulk fluids tank to be strategically placed and protected, equipment storage (i.e., floor cleaners, pressure washers, etc.). Mirrors for Sight Distance. Blind corners shall be provided with viewing mirrors maintained in a position and condition to provide adequate sight distance.
EMERGENCY RESPONDING SERVICES

Adequate space must be provided for a fire route and parking area for emergency vehicles. Emergency routing signage to be strategically placed to suit. Refer to Wayfinding & Signage.
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Program
December 01, 2011
16 of 17
Emergency Responders Plan (Police, Fire Department, Ambulance or others) to be developed and local emergency responding agencies to be consulted, notified, trained, and familiar with the facility. Oversized vehicles (emergency responders, maintenance) to have adequate and unrestricted structure access from outside and easy access to staircases, elevators etc.
RELEVANT CODES AND STANDARDS

Latest versions of: Ontario Building Code Ontario Fire Code Canadian Electrical Code/ Ontario Electrical Safety Code CSA (Z 432, Z 460, Z 462) CAN/CSA-B44 Elevator and Escalator Safety Code (latest edition including any appendices) and Appendix "E", Elevator Requirements for Persons with Physical Disabilities GO Design Requirements Manual (DRM) CSA 413 Parking Structures, Structures Design CAN/CSA B651-04 Barrier-Free Design OPSS Ontario Provincial Standards and Specifications IESNA Urban Public Transportation (MTO, Transport Canada, FTA, APTA) and Canadian Parking Association practices & bulletins. Standards for Barrier-Free Design of Ontario Government Facilities (Dec. 31, 2006) Future AODA Built Environment Standards Consideration of municipal host standards/guidelines/practices
400WP

CI-0304-02
Page
Multilevel Parking Structures TSSA
Program
December 01, 2011
17 of 17
TAC standards and guidelines CPCI (Canadian Precast / Prestressed Concrete Institute) Resource Binder Local planning documents CAGBCs LEED Canada latest version for New Construction CPTED Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design
400WP

CI- 0304-03
Page
Air Rail Link (ARL)
Overview
December 01, 2011
1 of 1
OVERVIEW
This section outlines key criteria that are intended to provide guidelines in designing the rail platforms that will accommodate the Air Rail Link (ARL) service and associated rail vehicles at GO rail line stations. These guidelines are to be integrated into the overall design of GO and/or ARL rail line stations, where applicable. For additional details, the consultant shall refer to other relevant subjects of the DRM.
400WP

CI-0304-03
Page
Air Rail Link (ARL)
Line Station Design Requirements December 01, 2011
1 of 6
BASIS OF CRITERIA
The ARL service will provide an express rail shuttle service between Union Station and Pearson Airport (Terminal 1 or T1 station); at present two intermediate rail line station locations on the Georgetown corridor have been identified at Bloor and Weston GO stations. The design requirements and basis of criteria listed below form the basis of design at rail line stations. Detailed design will be developed at the individual project level, based on existing site conditions. The Union Station and Terminal 1 locations will have additional, site specific, infrastructure and operational requirements The assumptions that form the basis of design criteria for the ARL platform shall in general comprise the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Design for three (3) car length vehicles; if direction is provided by Metrolinx to design for four (4) car lengths, suitable adjustments to platform length need to be made. Integration with existing rail platform elements of the GO Rail Station; Platform location at one extremity of the GO platform. Shared accessibility with GO platform barrier free amenities to meet or better AODA and other industry accessibility standards. Customer amenities that will match the Designated Waiting Area (DWA) features of the GO mini platform. Minimized walking distances to main access points as site conditions allow. Boarding height difference (at ARL platform will be different from that at the GO mini platform) Tangent Track conditions
Exclusions include: ARL Branding elements Electronic signage (only conduit shall be provided) Premium customer amenities, if required. Future electrification impact.
400WP

CI-0304-03
Page
Air Rail Link (ARL)
2 of 6
PLATFORM DESIGN ELEMENTS

Design elements of an ARL platform in addition to all standard GO rail platform elements shall comprise the following: Accessibility: Defined accessible route with related amenities and signage. Edge protection: Detectable tactile platform edges, handrails etc. Location: Integration with GO platform to minimize overall walking distances Weather protection: Waiting area, with canopy and integrated shelters. Customer amenities: Matching DWA features of GO mini platform. Structural Design: Structural design should address problems that may be posed by concrete deterioration with minimized future maintenance requirements. Sufficient interior drainage should be provided within the crib (fill) material of the platform as applicable. Snow Melting: The ARL Platforms shall be snowmelted, refer to the relevant DRM section for specifications. Fare Handling Systems: Shall be either free standing or integrated weather protected fare vending machines. Access hatches handholes locations shall be identified not conflicting with snowmelt or foundations Electrical power supply and distribution: Separate subpanel for power with illumination control for shared access with GO rail stations; cable chase raceways, etc,. The location of conduits etc, at canopy, shelters should be on the exterior of the wall under the cantilever overhang. Communciation Systems: Zoned PA; CCTV to be provided and shall be able to view ARL separately as an extension of GO services sharing and utilizing existing GO IT infrastructure. Rail Clearances: The ARL platform shall follow the clearance criteria as outlined in the Heavy Rail Tab of the DRM based on CN Rail data, applicable also to CP Rail. Horizontal Gap: The platform shall have a 50mm horizontal gap between step from the ARL car and edge of ARL platform with a 16mm vertical and 25mm horizontal tolerance under normal passenger load considerations to meet industry accessibility guidelines.
400WP

CI-0304-03
Page
Air Rail Link (ARL)
3 of 6
Platform Height:: The ARL platform shall be designed at 1203mm height above top of rail with considerations for ideal conditions and future operational requirements and will include at a minimum allowances for: - Accessibility tolerances - Track settlement; - Tolerance and wear and tear of wheel; - Wear and tear of rail and - Industry tolerances for track laying. Platform Refuge: A refuge area shall be designed within the platform underside as a safety feature, which could also be used for running cables. Possible noise attenuation measures must be considered. Integral Platform Edge Protection: Shall be provided with consideration for snowmelt heat transfer, material selection shall consider factors shall as operational factors, wear and tear and environmental impact .Width of the integral platform edge protection should not violate the integrity of the clearance envelope requirements. Platform Width and Cross Slopes: The overall width of the ARL island platform, from clearance envelope to clearance envelope is 7158mm (23'-6"). The overall width of the ARL side platform, from clearance envelope to clearance envelope is 3479mm (11'-5). Cross and longitudinal slopes shall follow existing GO Rail platforms profile. Platform Access: Passageways, shelters and stairways shall be located to encourage balanced train loading and unloading. Surge and queuing spaces shall be provided ahead of every barrier and change in circulation, direction, or mode. Platform Exiting: Emergency exiting shall provide minimum access/egress from the ARL platform to meet the requirements of the Ontario Building Code and occupant load of the ARL under peak conditions. Exits shall provide safe egress from trains and platforms under normal operational and emergency conditions. Platforms and exits shall be sized to allow passengers to completely clear the platform prior to the arrival of the next train. Secondary access or exit points should be provided in a visible location. Platform Furnishings: Benches, trash receptacles, fare collection equipment, newspaper racks, etc. shall be standardized to provide a uniform appearance within the overall station context and for ease of maintenance and replacement. (TBD per ARL Branding requirements)
400WP

CI-0304-03
Page
Air Rail Link (ARL)
4 of 6
Holistic Wayfinding and Signage: Shall be integrated within the existing station signage system (integrated within the accessibility route). Platform identification, etc,.shall aim to create obvious, simple and clear signage between modes of transportation maintaining a degree of graphic continuity. Signage placement shall conform to all applicable clearance restrictions. Platform lighting: Shall be in any area that is used to load and unload a train. The lighting elements shall extend the entire length of the platform and shall demarcate the platform and emphasize the platform edge and vertical vehicle surfaces. Operational Considerations: Train spot marker locations and longitudinal dimension from mini platform needs identification. Two (2) car consist positioning (centered in position 1-2 or position 2-3) needs to be determined. Rail should be replaced when ballast is replaced to maintain tolerances Crew Access: A gated crew access ladder shall be provided at the end of the platform. Refer to the ARL Platform Plan and Section schematic for detailed description of platform design elements.
400WP

CI-0304-03
Page
Air Rail Link (ARL)
5 of 6
400WP

CI-0304-03
Page
Air Rail Link (ARL)
6 of 6
400WP
DESIGN REQUIREMENT MANUAL ARCHITECTURE

EN-0305-01
Page
Maintenance Buildings Program
June 1, 2006
1 of 2
TRAIN LAYOVER BUILDINGS

OVERVIEW GO Transit has a number of rail side layover facilities for the purpose of parking train consists during off hours. During that evening time period, minor maintenance and cleaning activities are performed. Trains are connected into electrical power to light them and heat them during the winter months. Detailed design criteria will be provided by GO Transit at the commencement of new projects. Facilities generally include a building to accommodate the needs of train crews, a separate electrical building accommodating switchgear and motor control centres as well as communications equipment, and sometimes a small unheated storage building. YARD COMPONENTS In addition to the lengths of track required to park the trains, yard components can include: Layover Yard ID sign; Access road adjacent to tracks for access by maintenance vehicles; and Wayside Power for connection of trains.
CREW BUILDING GO Transit will identify the number of train crew that the building is to accommodate. The building program will be determined on the basis of the number of train crew who work out of the building. GO has a variety of building types accommodating train crews. Many of the current facilities are portable type prefab buildings of wood frame construction and clad in metal siding. In one location, GO renovated an existing house to accommodate the crews. In another, they share a station building. The new crew building for the Barrie layover is very visible from a principal street and the City requested that the building be of a higher design standard than the typical pre-fab building. The consultants will be required to assess the program and location and, working with GO establish the most ideal facility for the location. The crew quarters generally contain the following areas: Mens Locker Room with metal lockers to accommodate all the staff working out of the facility, toilets, urinals, wash basins. Washrooms to be barrier free accessible; Womens Locker Room with room for three (3) lockers, a single toilet and a wash basin. While women crew are not comment, an allowance is being made to accommodate at least three. Washroom to be barrier free accessible;
400WP
DESIGN REQUIREMENT MANUAL ARCHITECTURE

EN-0305-01
Page
Maintenance Buildings Program
June 1, 2006
2 of 2
Common Room accommodating tables and chairs for use as a pre-start of shift gathering/coffee room. This space can also double as a training and meeting room. The Common Room is also to have a desk with computer stations for Rail Operations. GO will advise the number of computers to be provided; Maintenance Contractor room of approximately 10 m2. This room to have a desk and chair, several lockers, and a metal storage shelf for miscellaneous storage; Janitors Room to have a slop sink, hot water tank and metal storage shelving; and Mechanical and Electrical room sized as required to accommodate the mechanical and electrical systems for the building.
ELECTRICAL BUILDING The most recent buildings are more consistent in their design approach. The Electrical Building accommodates the Motor Control equipment and possibly the switchgear. The most recent buildings are approximately 12 m long x 10 m wide. Constructed of load bearing masonry cavity wall construction with a flat roof of open web steel joists. A separate communications room of approximately 7 m2 is included in the above footprint area. The communications room is accessed from the exterior and is air conditioned separately from the main electrical room.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
Maintenance Buildings Bus Operational Facilities
April 30, 2012
1 of 30
BASIS OF CRITERIA
GO owns a number of Bus Operational Facilities for the purpose of storage, repair, maintenance, cleaning and fuelling, with ancillary administrative offices. Bus Operational Facilities are classified as Type A, B or C based on land sizing, parking, facilities provided and fleet requirements. Refer to the Table for Bus Operational Facility Typology and associated amenities. Consultants are required to incorporate LEED building rating system strategies, features and technologies for the design of these facilities to achieve minimum LEED Silver certification. The building must be designed and built in accordance with all applicable legislations, as a minimum requirement. The optimum design solution shall demonstrate the architectural integration of all building elements, including structural, mechanical, electrical, communications, life safety, security systems, Easier Access and accessible route. Detailed design criteria will be provided by GO at the commencement of new projects. This Section is not intended to be a specification; the intent is to ensure uniformity in the Bus Operational Facility designs. Any variance from these guidelines will require written approval from GO. The standard Bus Operational Facility program is based on the following: Maintenance Facility Storage Facility Office Facilities.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
2 of 30
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
This program describes the general spatial provisions at a Type A bus operational facility to accommodate storage, repair, maintenance, cleaning and fuelling, and associated administrative activities/ functions. ADMINISTRATION AND SERVICES: GENERAL OFFICE Space
Main Entrance Vestibule and Lobby Unisex Visitors Washroom Managers' Offices Radio System Specialist Office Senior Fleet Supervisor Office Bus Facilities Supervisor Office Administrative Staff Workstations Customer Care Coordinator Performance Advisor Spare 'hotelling' Work Station Storage Room Meeting Rooms Lunch Room / Kitchen Printer / Fax / Photocopier Room Men's Washroom Women's Washroom File Area
Design Requirements
Reception counter and separate work station.
Barrier free. Fleet Transit Safety and Facilities Managers, rooms sized per GO Standard Office Module Furniture. GO Standard Workstation Modules. GO Standard Workstation Modules. GO Standard Workstation Modules. GO Standard Workstation Modules. GO Standard Workstation Modules. GO Standard Workstation Modules. Common to all functions. Secure File Storage, Printer, Fax and Vault. Capacity: (8/12/20 persons), as advised by GO. To accommodate 12 people at any given time. Centrally located room with supply storage, work surfaces and office mail slot. Barrier Free, WCs and urinals per program requirement. Barrier Free, 3 WCs. Central file and office supply and MTO Records Storage.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
3 of 30
ADMINISTRATION AND SERVICES: SAFETY AND TRAINING (PROGRAM AS ADVISED BY GO) Space
Transit Safety Group Supervisors (Min. 2) Transit Safety Staff Coordinators Workstations Video Viewing Room Transit Safety File Storage Room Drivers Safety & Training Centre Simulator room Training Centre Supply Room Kitchenette Training Centre Safety & Training Supervisor File storage area required. Shall be provided with shelving.
Design Requirements
GO Standard Workstation Modules. GO Standard Workstation Modules.
Video Storage Shelves. Secure file Storage Printer and Fax. To be used by Transit Safety for presentations to 30 people.
ADMINISTRATION AND SERVICES: OPERATIONS Space Design Requirements

Manager of Operations and Bus Facilities Superintendent of Operations Bus Operations Supervisor Bus Driver's Quiet Room Bus Driver's Reporting Room Dispatch Area Room sized per GO Standard Office Module Furniture. GO Standard Workstation Module. GO Standard Workstation Module. File storage area required. To accommodate recliners per program requirement. No more than 20% attendance at any time. Adjacent to Reporting Area, with pass thru window, Radio system, Bus AVL, Train AVL, White Board, TV. Monitors faced away from general viewing. Includes workstations per program requirement. Type A Facility: 3.2 x 6.6 m .Space for 6 racks Type B Facility: 3.2 x 5.4 m .Space for 5 racks Type C Facility: 3.2 x 4.8 m .Space for 4 racks Should be located with a view to Dispatch. Provided with built-in work
Main Communications Equipment
Cash In Room
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page

station and pass-through window. Driver's Mail & Forms Room With shelving for storage and mail slots.
April 30, 2012
4 of 30
ADMINISTRATION AND SERVICES: OPERATIONS CONTD.

Men's Washroom & Showers Women's Washroom & Showers Bus Drivers Lockers Meeting Room Records Storage Room Wellness Centre (with external view) Bus Drivers Lunch Room Separate Wellness Centre lockers required. Lockers shall accommodate half size lockers per facility type requirements. Sized to suit program requirement, outdoor patio with natural gas connection. Shall be provided with BBQ with provision for outdoor furniture. Adjacent to Lunch Room. Capacity to meet LEED requirements with electrical receptacles. Operations and Maintenance. WC's, urinals, showers, lockers for the Wellness Centre and full lockers for Transit Safety and Station Services per program requirement. Close to Wellness Centre, with size lockers as required, placed on a 100mm concrete curb.
Bus Drivers Kitchen Bike Storage Room Uniforms Room First Aid Room
MAINTENANCE FACILITIES: SERVICE LANES Space Design Requirements

Service Lanes Drive through bays, bus wash lanes, plus bypass lane per program requirements. Rapid doors required. Additional 3m at the end of the bus to be provided. The layout should incorporate smooth functional flow, forward moving with minimized reverse movements, one-way traffic and the ability to circulate buses within the property. Design to eliminate potential for sharp and abrupt turning (more than 90). Barrier free. Within Service Lanes, Pressure Wash in separate room.
Unisex Washroom Wash Equipment Room
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
Maintenance Buildings Bus Operational Facilities MAINTENANCE FACILITIES: PLANT MAINTENANCE Space
Facility Office Repair Shop PM Storage room PM Drive in Area
April 30, 2012
5 of 30
Design Requirements . Two (2) Work Stations with two high file cabinets
Requires sink, good ventilation tools cages, racking and HD cabinets.
MAINTENANCE FACILITIES: BUS REPAIR SHOP Space Design Requirements

Internal Driveway In floor heating system will be embedded in concrete apron and snow melt system for all exterior door areas. Heat tracing systems should be installed, if required. Minimum 1 bus per bay. Industrial vacuum with six outlets and commercial grade hoses, hangers and tools, pressure washer, hose bibs, sink and trench drains. Hot & cool water source required.Vehicle exhausts system and wet area to be provided. Bus wash equipment should be placed on elevated concrete pads. Harvested rain water could also be used for bus wash. Between Special Clean and Degrease. Houses pressure washer, vacuum cleaner, air compressor and related equipment and supplies. (Provide foot operated wash basin(s).) Between Special Clean and Degrease. In-ground hoist with sediment pits, trench drains and pressure washer with reels and hoses (wet area). Complete fluid distribution system. Vehicle exhausts system. Floor mounted equipment should be placed on elevated concrete pads. With portable hoist to assist in transporting bus windows, windshields during removal and installation. Vehicle exhausts system. Drill press, band saw, welding materials supplies, sink / parts washer, portable hoists, exhaust hoods and additional ventilation. Design foundation (concrete base) with adequate capacity to accept mobile hoists. With waste oil removal and pit jacks. Complete fluid distribution system. Vehicle exhausts system.
Special Clean (double bay)
Mechanical Room
Shop Electrical Room Degrease Bay
Body Repair Bay
Fabrication Rebuild/Shop
Inspection Pit Bays
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page

In Ground Hoists
April 30, 2012
6 of 30
Complete fluid distribution system with side drains and central drains. Vehicle exhausts system. Portable bus hoists. Vehicle exhausts system and fluid distribution.
Above Ground Hoists Waste Fluids Disposal Area Pump Room
Oil/grease interceptors. Dedicated catchbasin as floor drains shall be provided. Mobile repair equipment. Wash/spray equipment (area). Hybrid water recycling & wash, all structural steel to be galvanised, walls, no copper or schedule 40 pipe PVC or stainless only Anti-Slip floor, one dispenser per lane, monitoring system
Fleet Equipment Storage Parts Degrease Room Bus Wash Area
Fuel Area Shop Equipment Storage Small Comp. Rebuild / Storage Transit Enforcement Storage Room Radio Storage Room Radio Repair
Shelving. Caged parts storage area. Shelving. Shelving with HVAC.
MAINTENANCE FACILITIES: SUPERVISORY TRAINING AREA Space Design Requirements

Fleet Maintenance Supervisors File Storage, Fax/Photocopy Kitchenette Meeting Room Mechanic's Training Room Classroom with Kitchenette Classroom Storage Workstations to be located in one room at centre of shop. Good view of shop. In the Maintenance Supervisor space. Attached to the Maintenance Supervisors office. Seating capacity per program requirement, kitchenette, smart board, projector and power screen. Located on the exterior wall. Sound proofed. With small kitchenette. Seating capacity per program requirement, kitchenette, smart board, projector and power screen. Accessible from classroom, storage for wheel chair, scooter.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page

Training Supervisors Office Men's & Womens Washroom
April 30, 2012
7 of 30
Located on the exterior wall. Sound proofed. Adjacent Fleet Maintenance Supervisors.
MAINTENANCE FACILITIES: SHOP EMPLOYEE SERVICE ROOMS Space

Mens Washroom & Showers Womens Washroom & Showers Men's Lockers Women's Lockers Lunch Room Laundry Room First Aid Room Eyewash station and drinking fountains Should be tucked / niched in. Located on the shop floor and provided with bottle fill spouts and filers.
Design Requirements
Barrier Free, with urinals, WCs and showers per requirement. Barrier Free, with WCs and showers per requirement. 2 lockers per person & Half-Bradleys adjacent to washroom. 2 lockers per person. Seating capacity as advised, outdoor patio.
STORAGE FACILITIES: BUS STORAGE GARAGE Space Design Requirements

Garage Capacity based on a Type A facility. Based on a () 14.5m long () 2.75m wide bus. Double Decker buses need a minimum height clearance of 5.2m in the storage garage and minimum 7m height clearance at the repair shops (includes the portable hoists clearances). Provide for future expansion (as advised by GO).
STORAGE FACILITIES: STORES Space

Part's Counter Large Parts Storage
Design Requirements
Workstations with PC`s, rugged stainless counter. Under counter storage for computers and office supplies. Adjacent to Shipping / Receiving Dock, Shelving requirements.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page

Small Parts Storage Tool Storage Room Bulk Drum Storage & Dispensing Empty Drum Storage Stores Office Station Services Area Tire Storage & Repair Area Battery Storage & Charging Bulk Fluid Storage (Oils/Lube/etc) Flammable Dispensing Room Mezzanine Receiving Loading Dock Men's & Womens Washroom Racking requirement. Shelving requirement. Area included in Parts Storage. Area included in Parts Storage.
April 30, 2012
8 of 30
Office staff in on enclosed space with HVAC. Includes one (1) office and storage room with shelving and HVAC. Used/rebuild tires, max. 125 with appropriate storage and racking. Shelving and chargers, special ventilation and forklift access. Special Ventilation adjacent flammables room. Blast wall, grounding, containment, special ventilation and fire safeguards. Threshold (concrete) to contain spills and dedicated Catch Basin as floor drain. Over Small Shop Areas with clear fork lift access. Two loading docks (one at grade, one below grade with dock leveller). One work station shielded when doors are open. Located close to Parts counter.
OTHER: INTERIOR SPACES
Space
Sprinkler Room Mechanical Room Electrical Room Communications Closets Janitor's Room Garbage Recycling Room Other
Design Requirements
Workstations with PC`s, rugged stainless counter. Under counter storage for computers and office supplies. Adjacent to Shipping / Receiving Dock, shelving requirements.
Placed as needed, easily accessible. In Administration Office Area
Catwalk by the clerestory windows provides access to bay fluid lines on/off valves. Sound Isolation shall be provided for all noise generating equipment. High Pressure hot water equipment should not be located in wet areas.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page

PRESTO Room Electrical Closet Placed as needed, easily accessible Placed as needed
April 30, 2012
9 of 30
OTHER: EXTERIOR SPACES Space

Transformer Generator Patio Gatehouse Brake Test Area Compressed Gas Storage Area Compressor Room Garbage/Recycling Storage Area Bulk Fuel Storage Exterior Location Exterior Location Exterior Ground Level Location. Exterior Location. Exterior Location (included in circulation driveways). 1 for propane, 1 for oxygen - gated, fenced with roof. Scroll Compressor with dryer Exterior Location, visually hidden. Exterior, In ground Location for 2 X 50,000 litres. Card lock system with remote access shall be provided. SS Fittings Double fuel pump hoses: (1) " nozzle for light trucks; and (1) 1" nozzle for buses shall be provided. Service Fluids tanks Guarded with additional containment near shop. Automatic Tank gauges monitoring system shall be provided with remote access.
Design Requirements
Powered Gas Tools Storage Shed Service Vehicles Parking Bus Storage Parking
For Operations, Fleet and Transit Safety. Exterior, 12 buses in a single area near fleet shop. 115V 15Amp circuits for block heaters and battery chargers. Exterior, 220 parking spots with gated personnel entrance to the secure facilities compound + 16 parking spots for GO Transit support. Motorcycle Pad. EV plug in locations as advised. As advised. If provided, minimum Area needed =15m X 8m.
Staff Parking
Bus Storage Parking Expansion space Tri-generation
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
10 of 30
EXTERIOR
FEATURES Exterior circulation should be planned with necessary roadway tie-ins to existing and future road networks with interface between main access roads with walkways and an internal road network. One way traffic is preferred with minimum reverse operations, abrupt sharp turning operations (i.e., more than 90) and awkward sight lines should be optimized by design. Paving shall support vehicle types without cracking or settlement from standing or moving traffic. Concrete surfaces shall be provided for high bus traffic areas especially corners and outdoor fuelling areas. Parking stalls configuration and line painting shall meet GOs Design Requirements Manual standards. Concrete curbs, gutter and sidewalks shall be designed and located per site conditions and industry standards. Exterior stairs and/or ramps shall be provided where deemed necessary to provide barrier free and pedestrian access. Fencing shall be a 2.44m high wrought iron fence along the front faade as deemed by urban design requirements providing adequate delineation of property / perimeter and as per local Threat & Risk assessment. The remaining perimeter will be 2.4m high black vinyl coated chain link fence as per OPSD standards. Vehicle entrances requiring high speed by-fold automatic gates can be operated remotely from area(s) designated by the owner or through the FOB, phone/intercom system if available. Gates must also be activated by underground loop detectors, proximity cards and existing bus transponders. Electrical controls shall be provided as part of the gate system and gate height is to match site fencing. Storm water management, sanitary/wastewater handling and recycling facilities shall be designed by grading the site to direct run-off water to catch basins and subsequently to storm sewer system. In areas where drainage to grade would run to paved areas, direct to storm sewer. Ensure grades are provided to slope away from the building. No surface storage/ponding of water will be accepted in parking areas during storm events. Provide impact protection to hydrants and any other structures or equipment installed within 2.0m of vehicle traffic areas, with 0.2m diameter concrete filled bollards. Also provide bollards to protect all outdoor equipment and control monuments.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
11 of 30
Other site elements such as parking/roadway lighting; outside material/equipment storage sheds/enclosures; Hydro, Sanitary and Gas services shall receive due design consideration.
LANDSCAPING
FEATURES Landscape design shall ensure ease of maintenance. Materials shall be durable (e.g., salt resistant) and resistant to vandalism. Snow storage shall be taken into consideration. Landscape design shall respect the form, scale and materials of both the surrounding area and proposed development. Circulation, comfort and safety, environment and crime protection (CPTED) shall also be considered in the choice of landscaping elements. Native plant material as appropriate is encouraged. Patio areas with coloured concrete are preferable. Lawn Sprinkler systems, if required, shall be provided with timer (plus manual override). Landscape should be able to accommodate future expansion with minimal disruption or disturbance.
SIGNAGE
Refer to GOs Signage Catalogue.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
12 of 30
CLEARANCE AND CIRCULATION

FEATURES Coordinate clear building heights with actual heights of buses, equipment, and the like. Maintain minimums provided and as required for full and complete operation of the facility. Design the facility to accommodate ample clearance requirements in plan and elevation of all current GO buses and equipment and GO standard vehicle turning radius' and sweep paths with allowable safety factors.
STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
FEATURES The design shall be based on the most cost effective structural system when considered in the context of both the capital cost of construction and the projected life-cycle cost of the maintenance facility garage assuming a fifty (50) year service life. The building shall be reinforced concrete, pre-stressed concrete, structural steel, or a combination of these. The design shall consider the loading and deformation requirements of the structure in relation to the requirements of other disciplines. These disciplines shall identify the loading and deflection requirements and the anticipated structural deformations and movements of their work for incorporation in the structural design and construction.
ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS
FEATURES Architectural pre-cast panels: Panels must comply with OBC requirements and have R values as required by current industry standards. Rainscreens, if proposed, are to be installed with proper joint treatment using low VOC sealant. Interior of the precast panels shall be finished smooth suitable for paint application. Architectural elements carrying branding features need prior approval from GO. Insulated metal siding: Shall be designed to withstand windload from inside and outside as required by current industry standards.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
13 of 30
Explosion relief panels: Design pressure relief panel system and shop calibrate to release at a static pressure differential between interior and exterior. Design panels and structural supports to withstand wind loads as required by current industry standards. Pre-finished aluminum panels: Oil canning and deflection are unacceptable. Standard materials, components, fasteners and cap flashing per industry standards are preferred. Canopy: Soffit and flashing shall be prefinished aluminum panels. Roofing: Easily maintained, roofing system technologies to meet specific LEED criteria. Aluminum curtain walls and windows: Fenestration shall comply with CAN/CSA standards regarding air and water leakage for aluminum windows. Exterior doors shall meet air leakage rate requirements. The system should be designed to accommodate expansion and contraction with a service temperature range of -35 C to +35 C. Roof Items: Above ground, roof serviceable items should be designed to avoid fall hazards. Skylights: Tinted, sealed double glazed units in clear anodized aluminum framing with positive drainage and complete with integral curbs is recommended. Sealed glass requirements shall be the same as specified for curtain walls but with heat strengthened exterior light and laminated heat strengthened interior light. Exterior bollards: To be 200 mm diameter steel pipe, concrete filled, galvanized,covers, projecting 1.2 m above grade and set min. 1220 mm. into concrete pier. At fuel storage areas, provide 250 mm diameter concrete filled bollards. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Private offices, meeting rooms, training rooms, drivers quiet areas and all office washrooms shall be designed to achieve a minimum STC rating of 55. Stores and Simulator rooms shall have a STC rating of 63, unless otherwise specified. Masonry partitions: Block size; fire rating, etc. shall be standard concrete block, reinforced to Code Requirements. Exterior industrial doors overhead doors: Foam-in-place, insulated, sectional overhead, torsion spring counterbalanced and electrically operated. Controls and
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
14 of 30
equipment and shall be of minimum lift 30 per sec speed with multiple safety systems to prevent damage or injury. Doors should have a min. R-value of 12.5. Edge protection for operators (Machine Safeguarding) shall be provided. Door height shall accommodate overhead clearances per bus type at designated facilities. Interior hollow metal doors: To have the maximum glass lites as allowed by Code. All exterior hollow metal doors shall have clear insulating vision lites (150 x 600 typical). Oversized doors: At electrical rooms, storage rooms, mechanical rooms, compressor rooms, etc. shall allow for equipment delivery and removal. Wood Doors: Hardwood veneer in species in all administration areas with side and door lights. Overhead Coiling Fire Doors: Shall be face-of-wall mounted galvanized steel, manually operated complete with locking mechanism, fabricated in accordance with NFPA 80 standards. Counter shutter: Coiling steel in the administration area shall have similar requirements as above above and electrical powered. High Speed Fabric Doors: Shall be fabric curtain with break-away and electric reversing bottom bar, view windows, frames, counterbalance mechanism, controls and operators, dual electric safety eyes. Curtain shall be selected to suit door opening width. Office doors: Shall have frosted glass for glazing and adjoining windows to have roller shades. Traffic Lights: Shall be provided for all non pedestrian doors: Green and red signals to indicate safe or unsafe conditions for vehicle IN movement. Lights shall be traffic style, complete with signs. Motion Sensors: Shall be provided to increase monitoring distance to stop and reverse doors when in downward motion. Sliding Automatic Entrances Doors (Exterior and Interior): Shall include operator, header and track, jambs, sliding door panels, and sidelites. Units can be mounted within rough opening with sliding panels sliding along sidelite. Units will be bipart and slide-swing panels shall slide along interior side with Microprocessor Master Control.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
15 of 30
Internal handrails and guardrails: Shall be stainless steel. All external and wet location handrails and guardrails shall be Hot Dip Galvanized. Interior bollards: Shall be 150mm diameter steel pipe concrete filled, galvanized and protected with a yellow 1/8 thick high density polyethylene safety yellow coloured cover, projecting 1.2 m. above floor and cast with welded plate and 4 anchors into concrete slab, they shall be equipped with pole sleeve covers. Lockable gates: Shall be minimum (600 mm x 1200 mm wide) with heavy duty hinges and cylinder locks. Barrier free gates where located, shall be sliding and motorized with security features. Wash splash guards: Shall be provided on each side of service lanes between bus wash equipment and building wall. Splash guards shall be corrosion-proof, minimum height 1.2m above top of wash equipment. Hallway windows: Shall allow natural light infiltration, UV protection film is recommended for sunlight diffusion. Bike lockers: Should be provided with power outlets for electrical bikes as determined by GO staff. Concrete curbs: Underneath the electrical panels shall be provided to protect conduits from the maintenance equipment (floor sweepers, etc.).
ARCHITECTURAL FINISHES
Ceramic tiles: Shall be installed on high traffic area walls (4' high tile cladding for corridors) and wall dado installation for washrooms. Porcelain/Resilient Tile flooring: Shall be provided in maintenance offices, hallways and vestibules and high occupancy areas. Carpet tile: Shall be provided in offices, meeting rooms, etc. Rubber sports floor: Shall be provided in Wellness room. Stair treads and landings: To be rubber treads with non-slip nosings to meet current industry accessibility standards. Service Lanes and degrease bay floors: 3-part trowelled system consisting of 2-part epoxy sand aggregate and topcoat in manufacturers standard colour range.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
16 of 30
Shop and Garage Area floors: Minimum 4.88 kg/m2 trap rock, water cure and liquid densifying sealer. Floor sealant shall provide necessary traction to avoid bus skidding at storage/service area/garage area. Interior Painted Lines: Shall be provided along Safety area around electrical panels and fire hoses and at hoist bays, pits and all shops. Epoxy based line painting shall be provided in all bus storage and maintenance areas. Stock Room counter: Shall be Stainless steel with wood backing. Touch zone (up to 3m) of the maintenance and storage facilities should be epoxy coated to allow for pressure washing.
FIXTURES
Toilet Partitions and Urinal Screens: Shall be stainless steel, ceiling or wall mounted. Sloped top Lockers: Pre finished, sloped top, located on concrete base. Coat and Hat Racks: Shall be provided in administration areas. Foot Grilles: Shall be vinyl surfaced, recessed type, in extruded 6063-T52 aluminum alloy framing. Roller shades: Shall be provided for all windows in the Administration Building. Meeting rooms: Shall be equipped with ceiling mounted motorized projection screen, projectors and speakers. Kitchen: Commercial quality, energy star compliant, refrigerators, ovens with range ventilation hood to outside, built in or counter top microwaves and dishwashers. Dual Burner Coffee makers with inline water filter: Shall be provided in Training Centre and Administration Lunch Room. TVs all LCD or plasma: Shall be provided to suit Lunch Room size.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
17 of 30
Countertops: In all kitchens, washrooms and dispatch area to be solid surfacing 12 or 13 mm thick, backsplash 6 mm thick. Pop and snack dispenser: One (1) each shall be located in the lunch area.
SPECIALITIES
The facility design shall incorporate the following specialty features: Hybrid Bus Wash System : Shall be environmentally friendly, with front and rear high pressure wash and side brush systems. Fuelling Monitoring: Indoor or outdoor bus fuelling service bays per facility type with full TSSA compliance for operation and maintenance. Inspection pit bays: Shall comprise of inspection pits, pit jacks, central pit catch basins, fluids distribution, waste fluid drains and compressed air distribution and explosion proof low voltage lighting / ventilation (bottom pit air vents). Fluid Dispensing and tank storage, designed for spill containment.. Compressed air distribution. Radio/Antennae/Vehicle tracking systems/Satellite TV provision. High Speed Doors: With machine safeguarding. Traffic Signals/detector loops. Environmental controls: Separators/sand pits and Sand and oil interceptors. Geodetic control survey movements. Roof Fall Arrest System. Travel Arrest as Required Electric Traction MRL Elevator(s). Snow melting at desired locations. Radiant floor heating.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
18 of 30
Loading Dock, Door, Seal, Trailer Restraint and Leveller Equipment. Architectural specialities: Include toilet partitions and screens, washroom accessories, lockers, coat and hat racks, foot grilles, coat hooks and shelf unit, ceiling mounted projection screen, pass-thru window.
LIFE SAFETY
FEATURES Fire Safety Plan to be developed specifically to the category / facility type it is design for, and consistent with local Fire Department requirements. The facility design shall incorporate the following features: Alarm systems interface/monitoring including vehicle emission alarms with CO2 and NO sensors. Automated energy and environmental monitoring/management systems. First Aid/Emergency routing. Monitoring systems. Sprinklers.
SAFETY & SECURITY

FEATURES Design Consultant to demonstrate its Design's optimal safe solutions based on comprehensive Risk Assessment and sound Safety Engineering Principles. Some elements may include Cost Benefit Analysis, Alternatives Comparison, Threat Vulnerability Assessment, Safety Factors and Residual Risks. Office of System Safety shall be consulted for solution assesment. Each site should be assessed to determine the extent to which perimeter security and controlled access points are provided. In general, perimeter fencing and controlled gated vehicular access shall be required to protect the Bus Maintenance Facility from unauthorized entry, vandalism, theft and terrorism.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
19 of 30
All points of entry must be furnished with street lighting, controlled access systems monitored with closed circuit video system camera which is to be fed to a central location named by GO. Fencing shall be designed as one of the physical delineation measures around the facility to control and monitor authorized access into the area. Designs should consider first passive security measures i.e., CPTED (Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design) before active ones.
The design shall incorporate the following features: High speed gates Surveillance Access control Proximity cards Local intercom controlling gates onto property Design facilities to follow basic Safety Engineering principles: Eliminate hazards by engineering design Follow FTA / APTA recommendations, guidelines for Bus Facilities Exceed relevant safety legislations (i.e., OHSA, TSSA, CSA, OESC, CEC etc) as required to minimize risk(s) Consider potential future expansion, modifications, retrofits The design of the facility shall be safe and easily serviceable, maintainable and user friendly.
Some of the typical, but not limited concerns include: Fall Hazards (adequate roof perimeter protection - parapet, guardrails if necessary, adequately load rated skylights, location and position of serviceable equipment above ground level / at height, roof access, adequate clearance from the roof edge (min. 3.0 m), etc. Aligning of lighting fixtures, gas lines, power lines (and other serviceable components ) with flat landing section and avoid interference with structural components for easy access.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
20 of 30
Avoid Confined Spaces (adequate ventilation, atmospheric condition, access, egress, rescue, etc.). Avoid pinch points / spots / corners (adequate walkways, clearances, visibility, access, egress, reach, etc.). Any sources of energy to be lockable - (CSA Z 460) All qualified equipment / machine to be properly safeguarded - (CSA Z 432) Electrical Arc Flash hazard levels (CSA Z 462 / NFPA 70E) to be reviewed before equipment purchase, and verified after 'as built' stage. Equipment to be labelled accordingly. PSR's (Pre-Start H&S Reviews - Industrial Establishments, O. Reg. 851 / 06 section 7) to be conducted as required. Ergonomics, cognitive concepts to be utilized (signage, information effectiveness etc). Human Factors, Ergonomics, cognitive concepts to be utilized (signage, information presentation, effectiveness etc); MIL STD 1472 is suggested as a minimum, may by supplemented by other respected references. Traffic flow to separate / reduce cross-overs (cars, buses, pedestrians).
Design Facilities to be adequately secured and monitored. Some of the typical, but not limited, concerns include: Follow proper Safety & Security Planning (i.e., TVA, study crime rate within the specified area etc) Entire facility's perimeter to be adequately delineated / fenced ( physical security, CPTED principles to be utilized). Gates / Access control plan. Fire Separation Zones (vulnerable areas). CCTV cameras / system. Other Security measures ('cash in / out' activities, secure transactions) where applicable.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
21 of 30
Design Facilities to be environmentally friendly. Some of the typical, but not limited concerns: Isolate and protect vulnerable areas, enhance detection systems, hardened protective materials i.e., storage tanks. Spill containment to be within the room, few levels of redundancies anticipated. Septic tank, if required, to be isolated from oil collecting system (potential overflow concern). Bulk fluids tank to be strategically placed and protected (accidental damages.
Bus Traffic flow: to eliminate 180deg bus turns. to separate / reduce traffic cross-overs (passenger cars, buses, pedestrians). Skylights shall be designed with consideration for material, location, position, fall protection, etc.). Guardrails on the roof shall be provided if required as a fall arrest system.
COMMUNICATIONS
FEATURES The key components of communications in bus maintenance facilities are as follows: CCTV Security and Telephone (interconnected with GO regional offices) GPS synchronized clock and coax cable distribution. PRESTO
The following systems shall interface with existing GO related services: Radios Trunking system Telephones
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
Maintenance Buildings Bus Operational Facilities IT/LAN Public address system Intercom system Cable TV distribution system Security system Building Automation System (BAS) Tank and Fuel Card Lock System CCTV system Signal lights
April 30, 2012
22 of 30
The Bus Operational Facilities require a Communication room on the ground floor and are to adhere to DRM requirements. The following facility types have carying minimum communication room sizes: Type A Facility: 3.2 x 6.6 m .................................................................. Space for 6 racks Type B Facility: 3.2 x 5.4 m .................................................................. Space for 5 racks Type C Facility: 3.2 x 4.8 m .................................................................. Space for 4 racks
MECHANICAL
FEATURES Guidelines for the design, specification and installation of mechanical equipment and is to be used in conjunction with GOs Design Requirements Manual. The Consultant shall ensure that all applicable codes and standards are included in the construction documents. Fire suppression systems should be provided in all applicable areas.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
23 of 30
Domestic hot water will be supplied by natural-gas fire instantaneous hot water heaters. Floor drains should be used in the office and general area and trench drains or precast concrete catch basins and degrease bays are to be provided in repair garages, bus bays and storage areas. Control Flow of roof drainage with heat tracing shall be provided. Stand pipe system for type A facilities shall be provided. Use CSA approved plumbing fixtures in all washrooms, showers, lunchrooms and kitchenettes and wherever else applicable. Provide gravity drainage systems wherever possible. Comply with code requirements for indoor air quality. Ensure proper maintenance of repair garages, inspection pits, service lanes and storage garages. High level ducted exhaust shall be provided. Unit heaters or radiant heating system shall be provided at every external door location. Central hot water generating and distribution system shall be provided. Bus engine exhaust and bus auxiliary heater exhaust system, battery charging areas, lube room and hazardous materials storage, shall be provided. Insulate ductwork and piping shall be provided as specified. Piping materials which are compatible with environmental conditions shall be used. Valves, thermometers, pressure gauges shall be installed as detailed. Complete building automation and energy management system shall be provided. Where applicable, provide a fuel storage and dispensing system which shall be designed and certified by a licensed engineer. Provide gas fired, heated, multi-station pressure washer systems.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
24 of 30
Provide vehicle wash systems as specified by GO standards. Provide in-ground bus hoists, mobile lifting columns, inspection pit axle hoists, service fluids, central vacuum systems, compressed air systems and gas detection systems as specified by GO standards. Mechanical systems and services must be designed to permit future expansions with minimum disruption in operations.
The following should also be provided as part of the mechanical requirements of the facility: Commissioning Energy efficiency Construction IAQ managing Electric heat tracing and snow melting.
Building automation and energy management system shall control: All ventilation and exhaust systems All HVAC units and associated systems Air compressors Gates Gas, Hydro and Water Vehicle Gates and Doors Sump pumps and Pits Well water systems, if installed Compressed air dryers Drainage interceptors Gas detection systems
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
Maintenance Buildings Bus Operational Facilities Process equipment and systems to include: Fuel storage and dispensing Pressure-washer systems Vehicle wash systems Bus hoists Fuelling card lock system Tank monitoring system Service fluids dispensing system Central vacuum systems Compressed air system Hose reels Gas Detection Systems
April 30, 2012
25 of 30
ELECTRICAL
FEATURES The following studies need to be completed for design: Short circuit, protective device, device evaluation and arc flash hazard with coordinated ground fault protection and feeder plus main brace feeders on the main switchboard. Ensure that system voltages are adequately selected; provide appropriate main incoming service and transformer. Provide a power factor correction system with the following characteristics: Capacitors in banks, automatic switching of banks, maintain power factor between 0.9 and 1.0, ensure that power is supplied by the nearest available utility free standing enclosure, located near the main switchboard. In the event of a utility power failure, provide emergency power by means of a standby diesel generating set or a group of generator sets connected to a common bus; also provide an uninterruptible power system for critical components.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
26 of 30
Electrical handholes shall be precast concrete and designed for heavy traffic areas. Cast iron covers should be bolted down. All metal components are to be grounded, except the cover. Provide galvanized steel mounting channel for all surface mounted or suspended equipment. No equipment is to be mounted directly to any wall or structural element. Provide enclosures with the following characteristics: sprinkler proof, NEMA type 1 (dry and damp), NEMA type 4 (outdoor and wet), 100mm concrete housekeeping pads for floor mounted equipment, disconnect switch at each motor. Provide dedicated disconnect switches at electrical equipment. Provide a grounding system consisting of 19mm copperclad steel ground rods and bare copper conductors around the perimeter of the building. Major electrical equipment connected to systems at 600V and higher to be connected to ground system through a minimum of two (2) paths. Provide a lighting system to be designed to IESNA recommendations for industrial facilities with the following characteristics: Exterior circulation areas Exterior parking areas Pedestrian gates Building entrances and exits Interior repair garage, general Interior repair garage, workbenches Bus garage areas Utility areas Office areas Emergency and nighttime lighting 30 lux 30 lux 100 lux 100 lux 500 lux 750 lux 300 lux 200 lux 200 lux 20 lux
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
27 of 30
Control interior lighting by local switches, occupancy sensors and the low voltage lighting control system. Control exterior lighting by means of a photocell and contactor with a manual override; provide a computer based low voltage lighting control system to switch various lighting circuits through the building All receptacles are to be duplex type spec grade to code use Receptacles are to be located in the following places: plant areas, offices, control and electrical rooms, on a dedicated circuit, at each workbench, on the roof adjacent to each HVAC unit, in wet and outdoor locations, distributed equally along the building perimeter; Pendant cord mounter single receptacles in the repair garage and the front and rear of each hose location;
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
28 of 30
Welding outlets to be installed at appropriate location for supplying power to portable welders Provide traffic signals as required near the entrances of the facility. Multiplex fire alarm system to be provided. Bus Storage Garage - lighting not to interfere with structural components, gas lines, power lines (easily accessible for maintenance). Stair Shaft - lighting to be easily accessible for maintenance.
FUTURE EXPANSION
Mechanical and electrical systems and services must be designed to permit future expansion with minimum disruption to operations. Radiant floor heating systems must be expandable without cutting the slab previously installed. Fire suppression systems must be designed so that zones installed may be expanded without modification of existing piping, or spare piping must be run from the header or preaction control unit, for connection extension in the future. Headers and/or preaction control equipment must be sized to accommodate the future expansion. Compressed air piping must include valves and capped connection to permit extension of the system installed in this phase without disruption to operations. Sanitary drainage systems and storm drainage systems must be installed with invert elevations and configuration to permit expansion without removal of more than 2 m2 of slab on grade at each connection within 1.2 m of building exterior wall. Controls systems shall include provision for future expansion without replacement or duplication of operators workstation.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
29 of 30
MAINTENANCE FACILITIES BUS

Are located currently at : Steeprock, Streetsville, Lincolnville, Halton Hills, Brampton, Aberfoyle and Newmarket.
CCTV
Exterior to the main facility may have storage for buses and other maintenance equipment. Bus movement is restricted to authorized and appropriately licensed personnel with directional control in and around the facility. Automated or Monitored Gates Dedicated cameras; Individual cameras for each gate; Identify individual and vehicle movement; Read licence plate and or any vehicle identifiers; and PTZ type set to maximize control point area. May be mounted on building or dedicated 6m pole, depending on location. Man Gates Individual cameras for each man gate; Identify individual and movement; and PTZ type set to maximize control point area. May be mounted on building or dedicated 6m pole, depending on location.
400WP

CI-0305-02
Page
April 30, 2012
30 of 30
FIGURE: BUS MAINTENANCE FACILITY CLASSIFICATION
400WP

CI-0306-01
Page
Ancillary Buildings
Program
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
OVERVIEW
GO Transit has a number of smaller buildings for ancillary uses at various sites, as well as tenant buildings or structures.
CRITERIA
Ancillary buildings under GO Transit control shall be to OBC and municipal requirements and meet the following criteria: Overall compatibility with GO Transit facilities and the site context; The location shall not have negative impacts on station or terminal operations, passenger safety, or the visual consistency of existing facilities. For cell towers, the location shall be acceptable to the adjacent property owners, if required by the municipality. Monopoles are preferred over vertical truss-type towers; Materials shall be durable and require minimal maintenance; Any illuminated components shall be compatible with rail operations requirements and shall not present glare problems for passengers or the adjacent property owners; Overhead structures shall not result in an ice or snow accumulation passenger safety problem, nor in bird-nesting or interference with bird migrations; and Construction and maintenance of ancillary buildings shall be compatible with GO Transits pavement structures or the scope of work, particularly tenant work, shall include pavement re-construction accordingly at tenant cost to suit heavy-duty vehicles.
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
1 of 22
OVERVIEW
Key exterior materials have already been mentioned in preceding sections such as Security Guidelines and Station Design Guidelines. Materials shall suit the overall GO Transit operations context.
GENERAL CRITERIA
SYSTEM IMAGE In order to maintain a unified system image and to control capital and operating costs, all materials shall be selected from a family of materials as follows: Availability of Materials Materials selected shall have matching replacement stock available for the expected life of the material. Sustainable Development Material selection, where possible, should reflect green initiatives of sustainable development. Although GO buildings are not LEEDS accredited, general compliance is encouraged. Durability and Performance Shall be generally durable and hard-wearing. Shall have a twenty-five (25) year performance capability. Selected materials shall age predictably, and with a continuously attractive appearance. Shall be chemically inert, acid and alkali-resistant, dense, non-porous and non-staining. Maintenance and Cleaning Resist soiling, be easy to maintain and clean. Shall be maintainable using standard cleaning agents and procedures. Approved Standards Selected materials shall be CSA approved and meet ULC or other appropriate standard. 400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
2 of 22
Installation and Application All materials shall be installed using tested and proven methods, in accordance with established trade standards. All materials, hardware and fasteners shall be able to withstand the anticipated pressures of ground-borne vibration, as well as air pressure changes generated by wind and by the passage of the GO Transit vehicle. Whenever possible, wearing surfaces in public areas shall be designed and installed in unit sections separate from their structural bed, to facilitate removal for repairs and/or replacement. Unit size (maximum and minimum) (TBD). All materials shall be secured in a manner which deters and prevents tampering and vandalism. Joints (TBD). Installation of materials shall generally facilitate their removal without affecting the integrity of adjacent materials. Colour, Pattern and Texture Colour, pattern, and texture may be used in stations providing they do not conflict with other functional requirements of the station. Colours shall exclude dedicated corporate and signing colours except for those purposes. They shall be sufficiently reflectant to contribute to the overall lighting of the station. Integral and applied colours shall be selected which resist undue fading in the environment in which they are used. Textures shall not conflict with those used in the information and guidance system. Those subject to direct contact by passengers shall not be abrasive. The effect of textured surfaces on lighting and acoustics shall be considered. Glare and unnecessary reflectance from building surfaces shall be avoided. Reflectance Levels (TBD)
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials Light colours; and
Program
May 26, 2011
3 of 22
Non-specular surfaces.
Public Areas General Criteria Sound attenuating materials shall be used as required to minimize noise levels. Public areas are subject to intensive use and hard wear. They shall be divided into high and low contact zones to identify those areas particularly susceptible to public contact. High Contact Zone This zone covers areas within normal passenger reach and extends from the floor, up to 2.5 m above the floor. Ceilings less than 3.8 m shall also be treated as High Contact Zones. The selection of materials for use in this zone shall reflect outstanding durability, especially in and around passenger circulation routes or public amenities. Finishing materials used in the lowermost 500 mm of this zone must be unaffected by salt and slush, and shall be capable of being quickly and easily cleaned. Edges of finishing materials shall be reinforced where vulnerable to damage. This includes platform edges, stair nosings, outside corners and projecting sills. Paint applied to walls, ceiling, etc. shall be graffiti-resistant. Hardware and fastenings in this zone shall particularly discourage tampering. Low Contact Zone This zone is less susceptible to public contact and extends up from 2.5 m above the finished floor. Materials in the Low Contact Zone are subject to less convenient service access, and are still vulnerable to vandalism, dirt and grime.
EXTERIORS
Exterior key building elements include: Roofs; 400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials Walls; Columns; Doors; Windows; and Skylights.
Program
May 26, 2011
4 of 22
Materials and colours for these elements have been mentioned in foregoing sections as integral to some design concepts. The following provides additional detail, general performance requirements and objectives, primarily for station buildings. The general principles; however, are applicable to all GO Transit buildings. ROOFS Station roofs: Minimum 20 year polymer plastic/laminated shingles or asphalt. Colour: black or charcoal grey; Integral eaves troughs: black anodized aluminum or equal. Rainwater leaders: those that are susceptible to public contact shall be constructed of metal downpipes or concealed to prevent public contact; Snow guards: metal, finished to suit roof; Fascias: pre-formed metal-face rigid sandwich panels with flush interlocking joints, to prevent surface distortion and to achieve straight lines. Colour: to be selected by GO Transit; Shelter roofs: tinted (not clear) thermoclear lexan, for sun-shading and to hide dirt; Shelter roof glazing components: metal, finished colouring to hide air-borne rust from rails; Station roof extensions as canopies: same as station roof; Soffits: cement plaster on exterior gypsum board or equal, or pressure-treated wood, stained. Metal slat or panel systems shall not be used due to pitting from diesel fumes and acid rain condensation; Flat roofs: built-up roofing, ballasted, preferred to single membranes due to better resistance to UV radiation. Parapet interior faces to be continuously flashed to capping.
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
5 of 22
Features to be provided include metal screens around HVAC equipment and ladder restraint guardrails for maintenance access, galvanized metal. WALLS As already noted, stations in residential areas shall have steam-era vernacular walls composed of split-faced concrete block on a projecting plinth, with red brick above a perimeter sill course, with soldier and/or row-lock colour accent courses above punched windows, etc. as follows. Plinth: 200 mm high minimum, projecting 50 mm min. canted 45 cover; part of concrete foundation wall or pre-cast concrete, clear sealant finish; Building base wall: split-faced concrete block, to window sill, concrete colour, concave mortar joints (no tints) cement colour; Perimeter sill: pre-cast concrete projecting 50 mm minimum, with drip cut, 150 mm high including sloped top, 75 mm minimum height of vertical front face. Colour: cement colour (no tints). Window slope recess to be inset in units wider than window openings: design to suit; Brick veneer: severe weathering (SW) clay brick (not concrete), approximate hardness 83 Mpa, colour box-car red or colour-blend equivalent, with magnesium flecks, if available, concave cement-colour mortar joints (no tints); and Row-lock or soldier-courses: accent colour brick, solid brick at corners (no 45 corner cuts). Any exposed steel lintels to be painted red steel primer, and finish colour to suit.
COLUMNS Columns for vernacular stations shall be painted HSS, in/on column bases to match base wall (plinth, split-faced block, concrete cap). The pre-cast concrete cap shall have one joint only (no 45 corner joints) and shall be silicone caulked at the steel joint. HSS brackets shall have saddle roof drainage flanges at the inside joint; Full height masonry columns shall have caps 150 mm minimum from soffits with an inset steel transition cap; HSS columns or steel pipe columns anchored on low concrete bases shall have gusset plates with radius corners; HSS column sleeves, such as used with standard platform shelters, shall be galvanized, lightly sand-blasted, primed, and finished with a minimum of 6 coats of epoxy paint. 400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
6 of 22
The present standard detail does not prevent rusting of the base plate and column sleeve and the proper finish is to be determined, as recommended above or better (TBD); Stair and elevator building columns shall be behind glazing, as noted previously, and exposed canopy columns shall be sono-tube formed concrete or steel on sono-tube concrete formed column bases at least as high as the wall bases; and Consultants shall pre-determine GO Transit timetable and sign requirements and design columns accordingly, especially bus terminal canopy columns, so that signs are integrated with columns (concealed conduits, etc.).
DOORS Public entrance doors shall be thermal-break clear anodized aluminum in medium bronze anodized aluminum thermal-break frames. Objective: to meet CNIB guidelines for colour contrast. Doors for platform access buildings can also be anodized in accent colours, such as standard shelter doors (orange); Service doors and frames shall be painted to match the medium bronze anodized window frames. In other facilities, colours shall suit the context, but generally shall be dark, to mask dirt; All exterior door frames shall have their bottoms foamed closed. Frames shall be dipped 600 mm into a silicone type clear sealant, and caulked at the base with clear silicone. Objective: to combat salt deterioration. Major facilities may require stainless steel frames. Subject to a business case (life-cycle maintenance costs vs. capital cost premium analysis and justification), if requested by GO Transit; and Consultants shall familiarize themselves with GO Transit standard door sign decal strips for public entrances which visually subdivide full glass doors; the more economical fully glazed doors with a horizontal push bar are preferred, using thinner glazing, and providing for simpler push-bar panic hardware installation, as well as easier glass replacement in case of breakage.
WINDOWS Window frames shall be thermal break anodized aluminum, medium bronze finish, or to suit; All glazing shall be clear fully tempered insulating glass;
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
7 of 22
Glazing thickness shall suit windloads: minimum 6 mm thickness for buildings, 10 mm thickness for standard shelter fully tempered single glazing, platform access building shall be fully tempered single glazing, thickness shall be engineered to suit air pressure changes generated by high speed trains and vibration, as noted previously; Where frosted film or solar film is required on glass, it shall be installed on the interior surface; 75 mm diameter safety-colour dots or lines on glass shall be installed on the interior glass surface spaced 300 mm o/c. Height as per CNIB guidelines; Opening sash frames shall be anodized to match fixed glass frames; and To minimize salt damage to aluminum frame, window sashes shall be 600 mm minimum above grade for all elevator and stair enclosures.
SKYLIGHTS Frames shall be anodized aluminum thermal-break frames with condensation gutters, finish dark bronze or in a colour to suit the ceiling finish; Glass shall be insulating triple-glazing, with low-E glass; Skylights shall be fixed glazing and not opening; Large framed or pyramid skylights for buildings shall be industry standard, detailed by manufacturers specializing in skylights, with glass as noted above; Skylights for bus terminal canopies and platform access buildings may be lexan or thermoclear single or continuous skylights, subject to the OBC, tinted for sun-shading, or translucent kalwall; Luminaires shall be located to illuminate skylight interiors at night for added value, or within skylights, to unify daytime and night illumination sources, with luminaire heat to promote the evaporation of condensation and the melting of surface ice and snow; Skylight bulkheads can accommodate accent colours (See Artwork) or integral colouraccent material finishes; and Consultants shall also consider the design of virtual skylights by the use of diagonal light wells from clerestorey windows and light pipes into tunnels from platforms.
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
8 of 22
INTERIOR
Interior materials include those that form part of the interior surface of: Floors; Walls; Ceilings/skylights; Doors; Windows (sills); Door hardware; Station furniture; and Millwork.
They also include materials for the following: Lighting elements such as luminaires, light diffusers and lenses forming part of the finished surface of the ceiling; HVAC diffusers, air return grilles, fans, access hatches, floor drains; P.A. speakers, smoke detectors, sprinklers; and Outlets for Christmas lights, outlets in walls, switches and covers for these fittings and fixtures attached to walls and ceilings, such as: Clocks, CCTV cameras, motion detectors, alarm devices, exit lights, emergency lights, room fresheners, soap dispensers, mirrors, coat hooks, door stops, washroom fittings, fare equipment, pay telephones, information displays, signs, bulletin boards, fire extinguishers, etc. The scope of these Guidelines is primarily for preliminary design and for detail design in general, providing an overview and insights into GO Transit operating requirements, so as to facilitate viable design solutions. Therefore the following materials and finishes are in general terms only, and for key interior components only.
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
9 of 22
FLOORS
Walking surfaces (including stairs, ramps, public pedestrian ways, platforms, etc.) shall have a non-skid finish. Minimum skid resistance factor of 0.6 required. Floor areas that are sprinklered, contain plumbing fixtures, or water lines or are subject to weather penetration, shall be sloped and drained. Stairways and ramps shall be edged with gutters discharging directly into drains. Permissible slopes range between 1:100 and 1:200; Mini platform edges shall be detectable, slip resistant, visually contrasting warning surfaces at the boarding edges, 24 inches (610mm) wide, and shall extend the full length of the public use areas of the platform consistent with ADA and CNIB requirements. Floor drains shall be screened and capped flush with finished floor. Caps shall be designed to avoid trapping spiked shoe heels; To minimize the abuse at the junction between floors and walls and eliminate the collection of dirt and debris: The wall base shall be a continuation of the floor extending 150 mm up from the finished floor; Electrical boxes and other wall-mounted equipment shall not project into this base; and The bases of floor anchored equipment shall be continuous, matching adjacent wall base details. Where possible, thresholds shall be flush with the finished floor. Thresholds higher than 10 mm from the finished floor shall be bevelled to a 30 angle; Foot grilles inside public doors shall be recessed flush with the finished floor and the recess shall be connected to drain. Foot grilles shall be fabric type, closely spaced so as not to trap high heels, and shall have stainless steel or aluminum frames. The pans shall be removable for cleaning; Where enclosed, stairs shall be cast-in place concrete sealed, steel trowelled broom finish with contrasting cast in safety nosing inserts on an extruded aluminum or carborundum base with epoxy or abrasive filler. Minimum strength of concrete shall be 35 MPa with non chloride admixture for waterproofing.
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
10 of 22
Refer to B651-M90 and CNIB for contrasting factor. A detectable ribbed tile shall indicate whether approaching grade changes are ramp or stairs, with ridges placed perpendicular to the direction of travel. Refer to Figure Tiles at Ramp/Stair Approach. (Page 22).
WALLS
See preceding criteria concerning High and Low Contact Zones. All high contact zones in station and terminal buildings shall have walls finished with ceramic tiles: Waiting rooms or other high resistance material; Public washrooms; Staff washrooms (dado height); and Concession areas that are part of waiting rooms and where a tenant lease has not been executed in advance of design and construction or where such space may become a vending machine area. Ceramic tile finishes, full height or dado height, shall also be provided for staff washrooms in maintenance buildings (full height in shower rooms); Tunnel walls, though high contact zones, shall NOT be finished with ceramic tiles. Objective: monitoring of hair-line cracks and leaks, and facilitation of repairs. They shall be concrete, sealed, with accent-colour graphic lines as previously noted; and to be protected by clear non-sacrificial anti-graffiti coating; Walls in platform access buildings (stairwells, elevator shafts, etc.) shall be sandblasted or smooth concrete sealed, protect with clear non-sacrificial anti-graffiti coating. High profile station platform access walls may require ceramic tile finishes (see CNE GO Station) if requested by GO Transit; The colour for all utility, storage and shop rooms shall be a manufacturers standard lightest off-white; Communication room walls: painted drywall over suitable framing system for brick veneer vernacular stations, or painted concrete block where cavity walls are constructed; Electrical room walls: Major electrical panels, inverters and the UPS unit are floor mounted and transformers are generally exterior located. Walls shall be concrete block with a latex eggshell enamel painted finish;
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
11 of 22
Mechanical room walls: as above; Office walls: drywall, latex eggshell enamel painted or to suit; and Maintenance Building walls: TBD, but whatever the materials for shops and storage rooms, there shall be a painted finish for dust reduction and light-reflectivity, and a vinyl base (minimum) shall be installed for floor/wall juncture cleanliness. Steel columns shall similarly be painted. A graphic accent colour line shall be painted above door height around room perimeters and on columns to humanize the work environment.
CEILINGS
CEILING FINISH SCHEDULE Room Waiting Finish and Notes Drywall, painted, curved to maximize indirect lighting from above the perimeter bulkhead, subject to acoustical repercussions. Off-white colour. Bulkhead soffit: drywall painted off-white. Drywall joints and corners: J-mould, typical. Consideration should be given to 13 mm radius corner moulds (interior and exterior corners) for drywall bulkheads and skylight apertures. Waiting room flat ceilings: perforated off-white or silver satin metal faced acoustical tile, 600 mm x 600 mm recessed module, on suspended T-bars, inset. Diffusers and PA speakers to be behind the ceiling (integral ceiling system). Suspended metal acoustic tile ceiling as above. Continuous luminaire parallel to the ticket sales counter, starting at the back edge of the cash drawer projections or approximately 1 metre from the glass, with 18 mm x 18 mm x 18 mm parabolic silver eggcrate lenses minimum 300 mm wide 2-tube fluorescents above in a ceiling coffer. All luminaires in the station attendant room shall have the same lenses. Objective: to reduce glare from fare equipment and computers. Alternative: indirect illumination (TBD). Minimum ceiling height: 2.44 m.
Station Attendant
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials Room Staff Washroom
Program
May 26, 2011 Finish and Notes
12 of 22
Drywall, painted latex eggshell enamel. Recessed fluorescent 2-tube luminaire with lens or strip fluorescent in ceiling-recessed cove along the plumbing fixture wall for indirect illumination.
Public Washrooms
Drywall, as above. Objective: to prevent ceiling access and tampering which may occur with a suspended T-bar or metal acoustic tile ceiling, and for acoustical separation. Drywall, as above. Drywall, as above. Drywall, as above. Drywall, as above. Drywall, as above. As station attendant room including parabolic eggcrate luminaire lenses, but ceiling height minimum may be 2.13 m. As station attendant room, but luminaires shall be office type recessed fluorescent fixtures with standard acrylic lenses (task lighting underside kitchenette wall cabinets. Ceilings shall be the underside of the architectural roof. Luminaires in stairwells shall be wall-recessed below the handrail access as noted previously. For maintenance accessibility there shall be no luminaires in high spaces and skylights in such spaces do not require internal or adjacent luminaires. The undersides of roofs shall have a factory finish integral to the materials and be light in colour for reflectivity without glare. Roof fasteners shall be concealed with plastic covers coloured to match underside of roof. Standard shelter roof tinted thermoclear translucent and barrel vaulted roofs are recommended. Objective: continuity of forms and space for surface mounted CCTV cameras and PA speakers. Medium bronze tinted thermoclear lexan, barrel vaulted, translucent, as noted above.
Janitor Room GO Storage Room and Bus Driver Room Communications Electrical Mechanical Dispatcher Driver
Standard Platform Shelters
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials Room Train Layover Buildings
Program
May 26, 2011 Finish and Notes
13 of 22
Tunnels
Exposed open web steel joists and the underside of corrugated steel decks as the ceiling, with the structural assembly, sprinklers, ducts, conduits and all fittings painted (sprayed) white (except gas lines, etc. to Code). Utility rooms: as for stations, see above. Washrooms: as noted above for staff washrooms. Concrete, sealed walls, to be protected by clear nonsacrificial anti-graffiti coating. Raceways to be painted accent colour (TBD). Exposed conduits between luminaires to be painted gray to match concrete.
DOORS
GENERAL It is imperative that doors and frames throughout the GO Transit system be consistent in design and structural adequacy. Public use doors are subjected to high frequency use and, therefore, the minimum requirements noted in this specification must be adhered to. Metal gauges, thicknesses, rail and stile dimensions and frame dimensions specified represent GO Transits minimum requirements. Should there be a need for more substantial requirements to satisfy a particular use or application, it is the Consultants responsibility to specify accordingly. Aluminum door stiles must be of adequate width to accommodate panic exit hardware where required. Mullions must be provided for multiple entry, exit doors. Where space permits at least 300 mm should be provided between doors, all doors to be hinged on the same side.
PUBLIC AREA DOORS

With exception of washroom and service room doors, all doors shall be either fully or partially transparent, as directed by GO Transit. Where a partially transparent vision panel is provided in a barrier-free access, such panel shall meet minimum OBC Barrier Free Requirements. Washroom doors to be undercut only. 400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
14 of 22
Provide thermally broken frames and doors for exterior use in heated buildings. All aluminum doors and frames to be prepared for continuous hinges and reinforced as required for closers and door stops, holders and backsets as required.
NON-PUBLIC AREA DOOR

Where washroom doors have an air transfer grille, dimensions to be determined by the H.V.A.C. Consultant. Single use washroom doors shall be undercut. Provide thermally broken frames and doors for exterior use in heated buildings.
WOOD DOORS
Wood doors are generally not permitted in GO Transit buildings, however, should a need arise for their use, the Consultant shall obtain GO Transits approval.
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials DOOR SCHEDULE Room Waiting
Program
May 26, 2011
15 of 22
Description Glazed aluminum frame public entrance doors. Doors to public washrooms: paint doors and frames same colour to suit walls, preferably dark to mask dirt. glass door to station attendant room. GO Transit may add frosted film on glass. Door to Janitor Room - as public washroom doors.
Station Attendant Staff Washroom Public Washrooms Janitor Room GO Storage Room and Bus Driver Room Communications Electrical Mechanical Dispatcher Driver
Door to staff washroom - paint door and frame same colour to suit walls. Paint to match outside. Paint to match outside. Note there is no door grille. Paint to match public washroom doors. See Exterior, Doors item, Paint inside to match. Paint inside as outside: See Exterior, Doors item. Paint inside as outside: See Exterior, Doors item. Paint inside as outside: See Exterior, Doors item. glass HC metal door and frame painted accent, colour both sides. See Exterior, Door item: to match Utility Room doors or can be glass door with wire glass (insulating glass in exterior type HM door) with frosted film added by GO Transit to suit. See Exterior, Doors item. Where platform access buildings are connected to station buildings, interior connecting doors shall be the same as exterior public access doors. See Shelters. Doors to be painted hollow metal. Overhead doors solid metal segmented, painted, or high-speed light weight thermoclear lexan glazed doors for daylighting.
Standard Platform Shelters Train Layover Buildings
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials Room Tunnels
Program
May 26, 2011 Description
16 of 22
See Platform Access Buildings, and Exterior, Doors item. Service room doors in tunnels (elevator machine rooms, electrical/communication rooms) to be as Utility room doors in stations, but painted gray to match concrete tunnel walls, with the graphic accent line continuing across them. Sump pump closet doors similar, unless they are access hatch doors: then they are to be stainless steel, textured No. 4 finish or equal.
WINDOWS
Windows shall have solid laminate (solid surfacing polymer) interior sills, sloped away from windows. (See Standard Drawings (TBD)).
SKYLIGHTS
Skylight bulkheads may have accent colours or materials as artwork and luminaires to retain same light sources day and night.
GRILLES, COVERS, ETC.

Cover panels, screens, grilles, etc. and outlet plates shall be flush-mounted using a vandal resistant security system which can be unlocked only by authorized maintenance personnel, or tamper resistant screws shall be used for smaller items. This applies also to the exterior and the interior, and to signs, light standard or shelter column electrical access covers, hose bibs, soap dispensers, coat hooks, etc.
DOOR HARDWARE
Key items are linear hinges, heavy duty closers, brush sweeps, guardrails with door holdopens and power assisted door buttons, etc.
STATION FURNITURE
Most station furniture is supplied by GO Transit and shall be of salt-resistant and durable materials and finishes, and amenable to relocation by staff but secured in place or weighted 400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
17 of 22
to resist vandalism. Furniture items include fare equipment, bicycle racks, salt bins, waste receptacles, information displays, benches, newspaper boxes, recycling bins, and freestanding advertising assemblies. The consultant shall locate all such items on the interior and around the exterior of station and terminal buildings as part of the general arrangement plan, incorporating them into the architectural/electrical design.
MILLWORK
See Station Buildings, EN-0303-01, Figure Typical Ticket Sales Area Layout for general arrangement of millwork; The key millwork and related features are a solid laminate (solid surfacing polymer) counter top for all items in the station attendant rooms, with an abrasion resistant plastic laminate finish on all cabinets, and a standard plastic laminate cabinet interior finish. All drawers are to be on high quality metal glides. All hinges are to be concealed. All pulls are to be stainless steel. Eases shall be aluminum or stainless steel wall-hung cabinets are to have task-lighting for counters below; Millwork relates mostly to the station attendant room and the ticket sales counter shared with the waiting room. There are also back-counters, a communications cabinet, a coat closet, staff lockers and a vanity in the staff washroom of the station attendant room; Millwork is also located in the dispatch room: a window wall built-in counter, with side or back counters and wall-hung cabinets; Other millwork comprises the driver room kitchenette counter and cabinets, similar kitchenettes in the Maintenance Facility kitchens, and various office and workstation counters and cabinets; All station building window sills shall be solid laminate sills; Magnetic whiteboards are to be provided as part of the telephone masts located between station attendants; Outlet access panels below the ticket sales counter may be hinged with piano hinges to save space; Footrests shall have a non-slip rubber finish; The front face of the ticket sales counter shall have a soft continuous shin-guard moulding;
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
18 of 22
Wheelchair foot space recess edges shall be rounded with stainless steel mouldings; Cash scoops and a continuous purse shelf shall be solid laminate, integral with the counter top; Cash scoop plugs shall be solid surfacing polymer to match ticket sales counter; Wall cabinets shall have sloping tops or in-fills to ceiling height, to prevent dust collection; A back-splash shall be provided along counter walls, and counters fronting windows with lower window sills; Grommets shall be inserted in counter tops for electrical and communications plugs to go through (diameter to suit; extra large); Adjustable tilt pull-out keyboard trays required at back-counter and station attendant locations; Solid wood rounded nosings shall front the cash-drawer recess. Objective: no sharp corners or edges in or near the station attendant knee-spaces; Cabinet doors shall have the same laminate finish on both sides, and on edges. Cabinet and drawer interiors shall be an off-white laminate finish; Coat closet to have a removable corrugated rubber raised-edge floor-mat for footwear, to collect dirt and water; The communications cabinet to have concealed touch-latches (push doors to release) and separately keyed lower cabinets for secured hard drive storage; Staff lockers may be prefabricated, pre-finished metal lockers with recesses to house padlocks (staff private padlocks) (TBD); The CCTV rack recess shall be finished with the same plastic laminate as cabinet fronts; The Communications cabinet top part interior shall be laminate; Pull handles shall be stainless steel bow-shaped contemporary smooth and streamlined design fastened from the inside with tamper-proof screws; The staff washroom vanity shall have back and side-splashes and the same lower cabinet door pulls as noted above;
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
19 of 22
If a sink is located (in a large terminal station attendant kitchenette) in a cabinet, the cabinet shall have a back-splash full height to any cabinets above or a ceramic tile wall finish shall be provided behind the sink to a minimum height above the regular laminate backsplash of 600 mm (or equal, TBD); and The 10 mm tempered glass above the ticket counter shall be set into a 6 mm deep groove in the solid surfacing polymer. The glass edge shall be polished and bull-nosed continuously. Securement of the glass shall be with clear silicone with no residue on the countertop or into the cash scoops spanned by the glass.
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
20 of 22
FIGURE: STANDARD MATERIAL & COLOUR SELECTIONS

INTERIOR FINISHES
Group Ticket Booth Subgroup Counter Top Type Solid Polymer Solid Polymer Alternate Plastic Laminate Millwork Plastic Laminate Alternate Floor/Base Ticket Booth Marmoleum Marmoleum Alternate Quarry tile Quarry tile 8 x 8 8 x 8 Size
Waiting Area Field Colour Waiting Area Accent Colour Vinyl Wall Base Utility Rooms Walls Waiting Area Waiting Area
Johnsonsite Paint/Anit-Static Tiles Porcelain Tile 1 Field Colour Porcelain Tile 2 Accent Colour Ceramic Tile 1 Field Colour Ceramic Tile 2 Accent Colour Lay In Metal Panels Acrovyn 12 x 12 12 x 12
Washrooms
4.25 x 4.25
Washrooms Ceiling Miscellaneous Ticket Booth Accent Rail Safety Strip
4.25 x 4.25
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
21 of 22
EXTERIOR FINISHES
Group Exterior Brick Subgroup Field Colour Accent Colour Stone Still and Concrete Plinth Architectural Block Type Brick Veneer 1 Brick Veneer 2 Product
Full Face Ledge Split
Roof Flashing Rain Water Leader Facia and Soffit Entrance Systems and Window Frames Shingles Platform Mini Platform Detectable 600x600mm safety tile, vitrified polymer composite
ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE

Room Waiting Area Open Area Ticket Sales Area Staff Washroom Counting Area Mechanical Room Electrical Room Comm. Room Womens Washroom Mens Washroom Storage Room Janitors Room Floor Quarry Tile Quarry Tile Marmoleum Quarry Tile Marmoleum Epoxy Paint Epoxy Paint Anit-Static Tiles Quarry Tile Quarry Tile Epoxy Paint Quarry Tile Base Quarry Tile (coved) Quarry Tile (coved) Vinyl Quarry Tile Vinyl Vinyl Vinyl Vinyl Quarry Tile Quarry Tile Vinyl Quarry Tile (coved) Walls Porcelain Tile Porcelain Tile Paint Ceramic Tile Paint Paint Paint Paint Ceramic Tile Ceramic Tile Paint Paint/Ceramic Tile Ceiling Suspended Ceiling Paint Suspended Ceiling Paint Suspended Ceiling Paint Paint Paint Paint Paint Paint Paint
400WP

CI-0307-01
Page
Materials
Program
May 26, 2011
22 of 22
FIGURE TILES AT RAMP/STAIR APPROACH
400WP

CI-0308-01
Page
Landscaping
Program
April 30,2012
1 of 12
OVERVIEW
The Landscaping Guidelines respond to both the urban design and environmental challenges associated with various surfaces at GO facilities. The Guidelines are intended to create surfaces and lots that are not only efficient, but also safe, attractive and environmentally responsible. Landscaping for all surfaces involves planting trees and plants, providing good quality soil and generous landscaped areas, enhancing pedestrian and cycling infrastructure, managing stormwater on-site, reducing the urban heat island effect, and using sustainable materials and technologies. Ladscaping design should reflect the following objectives: Respect the existing or planned context Enhance the safety and attractiveness of the public realm Create direct, comfortable and safe pedestrian routes Provide shade and high-quality landscaping Mitigate the urban heat island effect Manage stormwater quality and quantity on site Incorporate sustainable materials and technologies
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Retain and protect existing trees, vegetation natural slopes and native soils and integrate these features into the overall landscape plan. Distribute landscaping throughout the site to soften and screen facility edges, break hard surfaces, reinforce circulation routes, create pleasant pedestrian conditions and maximize shade and stormwater benefits Consolidate soft landscaped areas, particularly in larger parking lots, to enhance tree and plant material growing conditions. Where possible, collect water for plant irrigation.
400WP

CI-0308-01
Page
Landscaping
Program
April 30,2012
2 of 12
Identify hose bibs, storage reservoirs, and other applicable irrigation elements on the Landscape Plan. Locate valves and other maintenance controls in discrete, yet accessible areas. Where landscaping might impact motorist/ pedestrian sight distance, keep shrubs below 0.85m in height and prune trees so that the lowest branches will be at least 2m above ground level. Limit any other landscape features that might cause obstructions to a maximum height of 1m. Ensure overhanging branches of trees or shrubs adjacent to pedestrian pathways maintain a clear headspace of at least 2.1m. Coordinate tree planting with the location of light standards and other utilities. For edges not adjacent to the public realm, provide soft landscaping with variety of deciduous and coniferous trees and plantings. Include bio-retention or other stormwater management systems as appropriate. Where possible, include landscaping and a pedestrian walkway between parking lots and public amenities. When not feasible to provide areas of landscaping, planters should be introduced to enhance the appearance when approaching site, around buildings and waiting areas.
CODES AND STANDARDS

All landscape design and implementation shall be governed by latest edition of the following standards and codes, as applicable: Ontario Building Code; The Tree Act R.S.O Landscape Canada Canadian Nursery Trades Association
Landscape design shall also address local municipal codes and requirements and meet local approvals. It is the consultants responsibility to determine which codes are applicable.
400WP

CI-0308-01
Page
Landscaping
Program
April 30,2012
3 of 12
PLANT MATERIAL
Select plant material that is suitable to the growing environment of the site: Plant materials shall be located with consideration for shadow patterns which might adversely affect the melting of snow and ice from walkways, stairs and ramps Use species (native or non-native) that are hardy, drought and salt-tolerant, and resistant to the stresses of compacted soils and weather exposure; Include suitable native species where possible and appropriate (see The Native Species Planting Lists); Avoid planting invasive species near ravines and other natural areas; Avoid monocultures which can be susceptible to disease; Consider sun, shade and irrigation requirements when choosing plants Incorporate a variety of deciduous and coniferous trees and shrubs for year-round interest, texture, shape and seasonal colour; Boulders excavated from sites shall be retained and incorporated into the landscape design; and Shrubs shall have a variety of summer colour and colour changes seasonally, to reduce the need to floral beds. Wood chip, brick chip, gravel and rock groundscaping shall have geotextile underlays to eliminate weeds, and shall be contained by edge strips. Such a groundscaping under fences should extend 300 mm on each side of a fence. Groundscaping must be provided under roof overhangs, where adjacent to landscaped areas. Gas meters, transformers, etc in landscaped areas shall have patio stones or equal service access pathway
INTERNAL LANDSCAPING
Incorporate soft landscaped areas and trees within the parking lot to define major vehicle and pedestrian routes, provide shade and break-up large paved areas.
400WP

CI-0308-01
Page
Landscaping
Program
April 30,2012
4 of 12
Note: Soft landscaped areas include islands, medians, bio-retention areas and other consolidated planting areas. All soft landscaped areas should contain suitable growing medium and be sized and designed to support healthy trees and plants (refer to Appendix B). Consolidate smaller landscaped areas to provide better quality growing conditions and support for a broader range of tree and plant species. Define internal landscaped areas with a continuous 0.150 mm curb to prevent damage from vehicles and snow clearance, to separate planting areas from pedestrian pathways, and to prevent soil and other landscape material from spreading over adjacent surfaces. Note: Taller or shorter curbs are permitted where vehicle overhang and door clearances are not an issue. Curb cuts are permitted to support accessibility and stormwater initiatives. Plant high-branching deciduous trees throughout the parking lot interior to provide shade for pedestrians, vehicles and surfaces. Include landscaped islands at the beginning and end of each parking row and to break up longer rows or highlight special features.
STORMWATER MANAGEMENT
Manage rainwater and snowmelt on-site with designs that encourage infiltration, evapotranspiration and water re-use: Apply a treatment train approach; Sustainable materials paving for parking surface, drive aisles, overflow parking, snow storage areas and other hard surfaces in the parking lot ; Plant trees, shrubs and other absorbent landscaping throughout the parking lot to provide shade and places for water uptake; Create bio-retention areas, such as swales, vegetated islands and overflow ponds; Include catchbasin restrictors and oil/grit separators as appropriate; Incorporate opportunities to harvest rainwater (active or passive) from rooftops; and other hard surfaces for landscape irrigation.
Where installed, bio-retention areas should be appropriately designed and located to filter, store and/or convey the expected stormwater flows from surrounding paved areas.
400WP

CI-0308-01
Page
Landscaping
Program
April 30,2012
5 of 12
Although the design of each bio-retention area should be site specific, consider the following: select plant species that are tolerant of extreme conditions, such as flooding; drought, salt and other contaminants (refer to Appendix B); provide a planting medium, composed of good quality soil, with a minimum depth of 0.6m and at least 0.9m depth if trees are planted Plant trees (if applicable) above grade from ponding areas and clear of stormwater flow; Ensure that any surface water is fully drained within 48 hours or less; Use poured in place curbs with cuts for water inlets; include a perforated subdrain, check dams and overflow catchbasins as required to manage excess water; and Ensure overland flow routes and stormwater inlets and outlets are clear of debris and snow piling.
SNOW STORAGE
Snow storage areas should be identified on the Landscape Plan. Provide snow storage areas away from public streets and other areas where motorist/pedestrian sight distance and continuous landscape screening is essential. Sodded areas or portions of landscaped areas may be identified for snow storage with plant material selected accordingly. Where overflow parking or bio-retention areas are provided, those areas may be used for snow storage. Hard surfaces areas used for snow storage are encouraged to have sustainable materials to retain snowmelt on-site.
400WP

CI-0308-01
Page
Landscaping
Program
April 30,2012
6 of 12
SNOW CONTROL
Provision for snow control to reduce snow deposits in unwanted areas shall be employed. Generally, a vertical barrier will provide protection for a distance equal to 45 degrees projection. A porous barrier will protect for a distance of 10 m times the height although, the degree of protection may be reduced. Designers shall consider the height, length, width and porosity in the design of the shelterbelts. Shelterbelts shall be located at the right angles to the prevailing wind direction and shall not be located directly on the crest of a hill.
PLANTING GUIDE
The reference material provided in the Tables Guideline is intended to assist with the planting and selection of tree and plant species within and adjacent to sites and parking lots. The Planting Guide provides general recommendations only. Consultants are encouraged to generate site specific solutions that enhance the site conditions and are consistent with the surrounding context. COMFORT AND SAFETY Planting shall not interfere with sight lines at any roadway and intersections Landscaping shall not compromise site illumination levels
GENERAL PLANT SPECIFICATIONS Install plant material that meets or exceeds the following minimum sizes: deciduous street tree 70 mm caliper deciduous trees 60 mm caliper small deciduous trees 50 mm caliper coniferous trees 1500 mm ht. deciduous shrubs 600 mm ht. coniferous shrubs 600 mm ht. or spread
400WP

CI-0308-01
Page
Landscaping
Program
April 30,2012
7 of 12
perennials 2 years container grown
SOIL QUALITY SPECIFICATIONS Good quality soil shall consist of a minimum 0.9m* depth, over and above any required drainage system and/or granular material, of sandy loam soil with the following composition: Sand (50%-60%) Silt (20%-40%) Clay (6%-10%) Organic (2%-5%) pH = 7.5 or less Note: In landscaped areas without tree planting, the minimum depth for good quality soil can be reduced to 0.6m.
NATIVE SPECIES PLANTING

The Native Species Planting List provides a catalogue of species native to the GTA area that should be considered for use in a parking lot environment. The List includes Native Trees, Shrubs, Grasses, Ferns and Wildflowers. The List also recommends which plants are suited to the growing conditions of the various parking lot features defined below: Street Perimeter refers to the planting area flanking the street facing portion of a site. If appropriate, perimeter planting areas facing parks and other public open space should be treated in a similar manner to a street perimeter. Non-street Perimeter refers to the planting area along parking lot edges not adjacent to a street. Island refers to a landscaped area within a parking lot, typically used to define driveways and ends of parking rows. Median refers to a linear landscaped area within a parking lot, typically used to define driveways, separate parking rows and provide pedestrian connections. Bio-retention Area refers to a landscaped area that is designed to collect, retain, filter, infiltrate, evapotranspire and/or treat stormwater and snowmelt.
400WP

CI-0308-01
Page
Landscaping
Program
April 30,2012
8 of 12
The Native Species Planting List (see following pages) is intended to promote the use of native species and broaden plant diversity within a parking lot. It is not intended to be absolute or restrictive. Where appropriate, the use of suitable non-natives is also encouraged.
NATIVE TREES GUIDELINE Common Name Red Maple Attributes Orange to bright red fall colour Fast growing, tolerant Light Full Sun, partially shade Full Sun, partially shade Shade, partially Sun Full Sun, partially shade Full Sun, partially shade Full Sun Full Sun Full Sun Full Sun, partially shade Full Sun, partially shade Full Sun Full Sun, partially shade Full Sun, partially shade Full Sun, partially shade Soil Sand, loam Moisture Moist-wet Height 25 m
Silver Maple
Sand, loam, clay Loam, sandyloam Sand, loam
Moist-wet
35 m
Blue Beech Bitternut Hickory Hackberry
Interesting thin, smooth, slate grey bark Fast growing
Moist Moist
8m 20 m
Fast growing, tolerant
Loam, clay
Dry-wet
15 m
Red Cedar Tulip Tree Black Tupelo White Spruce
Sycamore
Provides food & shelter for wildlife, tolerant Golden yellow fall colour Salt tolerance, dark red fall colour Provides wildlife habitat, salt tolerance, year-round screening Interesting, peeling bark
Sand, loam Loam Loam Sand, loam, clay Sand, loam, clay Sand, loam, clay Loam, clay
Dry-moist Moist Dry-wet Moist
4m 25 m 15 m 25 m
Moist-wet
30 m
Trembling Aspen Bur Oak
Leaves flutter in wind, fast growing, tolerant Provides food and shelter for wildlife Fast growing, wildlife value
Moist Dry-wet
25 m 15 m
Red Oak
Sand to loamy-clay Sand, loam, clay
Dry-moist
25 m
White Cedar
Provides wildlife habitat
Dry-wet
15 m
400WP

CI-0308-01
Page
Landscaping
Program
April 30,2012
9 of 12
NATIVE SHRUBS GUIDELINE Common Name Downy Serviceberry Smooth Serviceberry Buttonbush Red-Osier Dogwood Bush Honeysuckle Witch-Hazel Winterberry Attributes White flowers, berries attract birds White flowers, berries attract birds Fragrant flowers attract bees White flower, tolerant, attractive red colour in fall Fast growing, tolerant, small yellow flowers Yellow star shaped flowers in fall Attractive red fruit in the winter Cone like flower clusters, scented leaf Showy white flowers Scented leaves Brilliant fall colour Rose hips persist into winter Attractive pink flowers Showy purple flowers Light Full Sun, partially shade Full Sun, partially shade Full Sun Full Sun Full Sun, partially shade Shade, partially Sun Full Sun, partially shade Full Sun Full Sun Full Sun Full Sun Full Sun, partially shade Full Sun Full Sun, partial shade, shade Partial shade, shade Full Sun Full Sun, partially shade Soil Sand, silt, clay Sand, silt, clay Sand, silt, clay Sand, silt, clay Sand, silt, loam Sand, silt, loam Peat, muck, silt Sand, silt, loam Sand Sand Sand, silt, clay Sand, silt, loam Sand, silt, clay Silt-loam Moisture Dry-moist Height 10 m
Dry-moist
10 m
Moist-wet Moist-wet Dry
3m 3m 1m
Moist Moist-wet
6m 4m
Sweet Gale Ninebark Fragrant Sumac Staghorn Sumac Pasture Rose
Moist-wet Dry-moist Dry Dry-moist Dry
1m 3m 2m 6m 1m
Swamp Rose Purple Flowering Raspberry Maple-Leaf Viburnum Nannyberry Highbush Cranberry
Moist-wet Dry-moist
2m 2m
Black berries
Sand, silt, clay Sand, silt, clay Sand, silt, clay
Dry-moist
2m
White flowers, brilliant fall colour Red berries attract birds
Moist-wet Moist-wet
6m 4m
400WP

CI-0308-01
Page
Landscaping
Program
April 30,2012
10 of 12
Common Name Big Bluesteam Wild Columbine
NATIVE FERNS, GRASSES AND WILDFLOWERS Attributes Light Moisture Turkey foot seed head, very tall Attracts hummingbirds, selfseeds Full Sun Full Sun, partial shade, shade Partial shade, shade Partial shade, shade Partial shade Full Sun, partial shade Partial shade, shade Partial shade Full Sun, partial shade Full Sun, partial shade Full Sun, partial shade Full Sun, partial shade Full Sun, partial shade Full Sun Full Sun, partial shade Full Sun, Dry-moist
Bio-retention Area Yes Yes
Wild Ginger
Spreads by creeping rhizomes
Moist
Yes
White Wood Aster Fringed Sedge Turtlehead
Heart shaped leaves, spreads
Dry-moist
Yes
Attracts butterflies Attracts butterflies
Moist-dry Moist-wet
Yes Yes
Dutchmans Breeches Riverbank Wild Rye Bottle Gentian
Grows under Sugar Maples
Moist
Yes
Stabilizes soil Spreads from root crowns
Moist Moist
Yes Yes
Wild Geranium
Deciduous woods
Dry-moist
Yes
Thin-leaved Sunflower Dense Blazing Star Great Blue Lobelia Evening Primrose Sensitive Fern
Attracts butterflies
Moist
Yes
Moist prairie/meadow
Dry-moist
Yes
Attracts hummingbirds
Moist-wet
Yes
Tall, tolerates disturbed sites Wet woods, rapid spreader
Dry-moist Moist
Yes Yes
Foxglove
Open woods, best in groupings
Dry
Yes
400WP

CI-0308-01
Page
Landscaping
Beardtongue Christmas Fern
Program
partial shade Partial shade, shade Partial shade Full Sun, partial shade Full Sun, partial shade Partial shade, shade
April 30,2012
11 of 12
Compact, woods/streams, evergreen Moist meadows, very hardy Swamps, wet meadows
Dry-moist
Yes
Green-headed Coneflower Rough-leaved Goldenrod Indian Grass
Moist Moist
Yes Yes
Large seed head, prairie/savannah Spreads by stolons, groundcover
Dry
Yes
Foamflower
Moist
Yes
LANDSCAPING DESIGN ELEMENTS & FIXTURES

SITE FURNITURE The following site furnishing criteria are required for GO site facilities. Site furnishings to be as per GO Standards and Guidelines. All materials shall be durable and shall be securely anchored. BENCHES Benches shall have back and arm rests. They shall be anchored securely into a concrete base or wall mounted where site conditions allow. WASTE RECEPTACLES Exterior waste receptacles shall be placed in close proximity to benches and anchored securely into a concrete base. They shall have lids and removable baskets and their colour and materials shall coordinate with adjacent benches. BICYCLE RACKS Bicycle racks shall be galvanized and either be anchored into concrete base or set into concrete. The arrangement of the racks and the number to be provided will be site specific. BICYCLE SHELTERS Bicycle shelters shall be as per GO Bicycle Shelter Standards. 400WP

CI-0308-01
Page
Landscaping
Program
April 30,2012
12 of 12
TREE GRATES Prefabricated cast iron tree grates shall be installed flush with the surrounding grade. They shall be either 1200mm square or 1200mm diameter round and shall compliment station architecture and paving patterns. The pattern design shall not have an opening exceeding 25mm (13mm maximum opening on Barrier Free routes). Tree trunk openings shall be a minimum 400mm in diameter. TREE GUARDS Tree guards shall be used for trees in paving at station entrances. They shall complement surrounding site furnishings such as tree grates, benches and trash receptacles. NEWSPAPER BOXES Newspaper boxes shall not be chained to fences or tree guards or cluttered around signs or light posts. Provision shall be made to secure a grouping of boxes to one uniform structure. The location of this structure shall not obstruct or hinder the follow of pedestrian circulation.
400WP

CI-0309-01
Page
Signs and Graphics
Program
June 1, 2006
1 of 3
OVERVIEW
GO Transit has a separate Signage Manual, sign department, and a sign shop that makes or procures all GO Transit signs, based on a sign and graphics program developed by professionals. Consultants shall meet with GO Transit sign staff during the preliminary design stages of a project to familiarize themselves with the GO Transit information and guidance system (station or facility identification sign, blade entrance signs, directional signs, regulatory traffic signs, warning signs, information signs, station site and floor plan directories, LED variable letter signs including on-board signs, advertising signs, and decals), to establish constraints and design opportunities, define electrical requirements, location and mounting criteria, and to define the scope of sign related work.
LEGIBILITY
The Consultant may be required to design a surface on a building or structure for the GO logo or other signage, and needs to determine whether the size and shape of the surface is adequate for a sign to be legible from the prescribed distance. The following type size criteria apply. There are twelve (12) permitted type sizes. Size refers to capital height. Walking readability is assumed to be approximately 1:500. Driving readability is reduced by 1/3 or approximately 1:330. For permitted sizes refer to Signage Design Manual. For station identification and facia sizes refer to Signage Design Manual.
CONSTRAINTS/OPPORTUNITIES
Signs shall not interfere with the CCTV system (glare); Advertising signs shall not interfere with GO Transit information and guidance signs; Advertising signs shall not be on station or terminal building exterior walls; Advertising signs may be in tunnels but not in stairwells, and shall not interfere with exit signs, nor GO Transit signs;
400WP

CI-0309-01
Page
Signs and Graphics
Program
June 1, 2006
2 of 3
Advertising signs may be independently located around light standards or as freestanding pylons, but shall not result in obstruction of sight-lines essential for passenger vision of information and guidance signs, nor with the CCTV system; There shall be no illuminated signs on platforms due to potential interference with railway signals. The exception is pay telephone graphics and the small illuminated display panel, preferably oriented perpendicular to the tracks (subject to Railway approval); Passenger Information Display Boards shall be located on walls in station interiors, and electrical outlets shall be provided; GO Transit buildings should have the year of construction commemorated at or above entrances, or a cornerstone; Plaques commemorating the inauguration of certain stations, terminals and facilities shall also be pre-located and walls designed or alcoves detailed to suit; and Signs and graphics or small explanatory plaques may be required for heritage items found at sites or provided for sites. The incorporation of such items into building design along with such plaques shall also be in the consultants scope of work, if required by GO Transit. At a minimum, this would entail framing and permanently displaying historical photos related to the facility. See Aurora GO Station, Ajax GO Station. See also ARTWORK section.
ADVERTISING
OVERVIEW Advertising shall be incorporated into stations to take advantage of its revenue-producing potential. It shall be used in a controlled manner to contribute to the overall station aesthetic. Advertising shall be well integrated into the station design, and shall not interfere with the operational requirements of the station. There shall be no physical interference with the pedestrian circulation system, and no visual interference with the visual information system. Interference is defined as overpowering proximity/brightness/glare, physical obstruction of GO Transit signs, obstruction of station attendant sight lines of the station/terminal interior or exterior, dominance of the architecture of walls, distraction to passengers using stairs or driving cars.
400WP

CI-0309-01
Page
Signs and Graphics Sizes
Program
June 1, 2006
3 of 3
All advertising in the GO system is provided by a media company specializing in advertising on a contract basis. Advertising panels shall be modules of standard poster sizes provided by the industry. They are approximately as follows: Back illuminated signs, rectangular, mounted vertically, approximately 150 mm thick x 1.2 m wide x 1.85 m high, interior and exterior locations. They can be single, on walls, double sided free-standing, in threes free-standing on a base/core or around light standards open below (elevated), or as 4 sided pylons; Surface illuminated billboard type stretched fabric images on exterior walls, approximately 1.85 m high x 3.66 m long horizontally mounted, elevated to suit (above high contact zones); and Billboards as such on monopoles, surface illuminated fabric images. Heights, sizes TBD. All of these require an electrical supply, generally 2-15 amp. circuits for the smaller units.
CONSTRAINTS
See Overview above; Power for back-lit advertising shall be provided in concealed conduit. Exposed conduit on the surface of walls or ceilings shall be avoided; Advertising used indoors shall be considered part of the interior finish of the station, and shall conform to the flame spread requirements for interior finishes, in accordance with the OBC. Units shall be CSA approved construction; Consultants shall locate advertising in accordance with directions from GO Transit; and For renovation projects requiring the temporary relocation of existing advertising Signs, consultants shall specify a temporary electrical supply accordingly and coordinate the relocation and re-installation as directed by GO Transit, bearing in mind that lack of coordination may result in claims.
400WP

CI-0310-01
Page
Artwork
Program
June 1, 2006
1 of 6
OVERVIEW
The guidelines in this section establish an approach to artwork for GO Transit stations, terminals and maintenance buildings. The approach is that of architectural enhancement. See examples below.
OBJECTIVES
The primary objective of artwork in a station is to provide visual enhancement of the environment, over and above the strictly utilitarian functionality. The purpose is to humanize the passenger environment.
DESIGN OPPORTUNITIES
Particular design issues and opportunities shall be identified for each station and site. At an early stage of design, the consultant should look for special opportunities to develop artwork as an integral part of the station architecture. In identifying the direction in which such artwork may be developed, the architect shall give careful consideration to cost, durability of materials, suitability of the artwork to the function of the system, and integration into the overall station design. Within these criteria, the quality of artwork should be a primary consideration. LOCATIONS Locations which may be considered are: Exterior Site; and Building envelopes.
Interior Waiting room; Platform access buildings; and Platform canopies.
400WP

CI-0310-01
Page
Artwork CONSTRAINTS
Program
June 1, 2006
2 of 6
The artwork shall not in any way conflict with the operational, functional, emergency, safety, fare, information, and sign systems of GO Transit. Artwork shall conform to all applicable codes. Permanence/Durability The artwork should be designed to meet or exceed the projected life of the station. Stability of materials is an essential quality, as is the colourfastness of the material. The materials used shall be resistant to oxidation and shall have a lasting finish. The infrastructure for the artwork should be equally durable. Maintenance and Cleaning Maintenance of the artwork shall comply with the prescribed procedures of the GO Transit maintenance and cleaning system as directed by GO Transit. The artwork shall be vandal and graffiti-resistant. The artist shall provide a manual on the materials used, replacement components; and standard care and cleaning requirements. Safety/Health All artwork must conform to applicable health and safety codes. The use of disorienting works shall be avoided. All artworks must be fireproof. The construction and installation of works must be secure and safe. The location of artwork shall suit an unimpeded pedestrian flow, and shall not obstruct station attendant or passenger sight lines to destinations, fare equipment, or signs.
MEDIA AND APPLICATION

MEDIA Paint (graphics, murals, etc.); Ceramic tiles (photo images, mosaics, etc.;
400WP

CI-0310-01
Page
Artwork Metal;
Program
June 1, 2006
3 of 6
Masonry (sandblasted images, etc.); Granite (sandblasted images, flamed finish, polished, etc.); Marble (inlays, sculpted, sandblasted images, etc.); Terrazzo; Porcelain enamel (murals, images, etc.); Glass (etched, translucent colour, mylar film, etc.); Glass block; Glass fibre (FIBREOPTICS, etc.); Wood, clay, terra cotta, gypsum, etc.; Epoxy (sculptural reliefs, etc.); Light (spotlights, neon, stained glass, etc.); fabrics (banners, awnings, etc.) Fixed media; and Restoration (heritage stations, incorporation of historical items, etc.).
Applications Floors; Walls; Ceilings (bulkheads, light-wells, skylights, etc.; Sculpture: Wall/suspended/kinetic/free-standing Functional utilities:
400WP

CI-0310-01
Page
Artwork
Program
June 1, 2006
4 of 6
Light standards (artform bases, luminaire forms, etc.); Conduit (cluster forms, colour accents, etc.); Ducts (circular, linear diffusers, funnels, colour accents, etc.); and Piping. Environmental art (boulders, berms, earth-roofs, scuppers, etc.); and Pictures (framed heritage reproductions, history texts, plaques, etc.).
EXAMPLES
HAMILTON GO CENTRE Restored 1933 Historical Art modern style architecture, TH&B Railway heritage museum, commemorative inauguration plaque, cable-stayed canopy design accommodates ivy on retaining walls, radiating checker-board pattern unit paving, bus platform prismatically articulated, semi-circular unit paving at seating alcoves, checker-board glass block in concrete wall, primary colour accents on structural framing and roof, frosted film on glass (custom logo), flag on flagpole, etc. BURLINGTON Domed roof tunnel entrance buildings with perforated steel circumferences, inlaid with coloured glass, and perforated tapered steel columns. Colour-accented skylight light-well, etc. OAKVILLE Sculptural sun-shade parasol canopies on platform. Curved translucent roofs, cablestayed, on monopole concrete columns. Circular windows in brick walls. CNE STATION Frieze of translucent yellow and orange dots on glass of tunnel entrance building. UNION BUS TERMINAL Salvaged doors from the historical CP Express Building built into a sculptural concrete archway and interpretive plaque.
400WP

CI-0310-01
Page
Artwork PICKERING
Program
June 1, 2006
5 of 6
Salvaged Ontario Provincial crest from a 1950s Highway 400 bridge, incorporated into a tunnel end as concrete relief sculpture. AJAX Salvaged early 20th century turbine excavated from site, mounted as a free-standing sculpture. Framed historical Ajax photographs mounted above tunnel stairs. UNIONVILLE Copper rooster weather vane on a sculptural cupola over a skylight. Blue, yellow and magenta colour-accented skylight light-well in waiting room. TUNNELS, SYSTEM-WIDE Broad graphic lines in colour accents along tunnel and stairwell walls. PORT CREDIT Glass block platform surface segment, providing daylight into tunnel; trees at station building roof level behind the rail platform providing dappled shadows and shade, behind glazed balustrade; architecture as artwork. WESTON Tunnel walls painted with a train interior mural, stylizing windows and seat profiles; antigraffiti clear coating. DANFORTH AND ROUGE HILL Sculptural glazed elevator towers with translucent GO logos on glass. MOUNT JOY Monopole columns with knee bracing supporting cantilevered canopy roofs, extending from the station roof parallel to the platform, to present a classical steam-era railway station image, including box-car red column and brick colours and charcoal shingle roof. Patterned concrete building apron with bulky-boulder raised planter beds on the pattern grid; architecture as artwork.
400WP

CI-0310-01
Page
Artwork
Program
June 1, 2006
6 of 6
WILLOWBROOK (RAIL MAINTENANCE FACILITY) GO Bi-level supergraphic mural on both sides of an enclosed pedestrian bridge; green paint on metal cladding.
400WP
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL SYSTEMS

CI-0401-01
Page
Introduction
Overview (of Tab)
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
SUMMARY
This Tab 4 is a guide to the design requirements for Communications of GO Transit fixed facilities in terms of the following subjects: Telephone Network Security System Fare Handling Equipment Ticket Booth Talk-Thru System Public Address System CCTV System
This Tab 4 shall be read in conjunction with GO Transits Station Telecommunications Electronic Systems Document, dated August 2004.
400WP

CI-0402-01
Page
Communications
Telephone Network
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
OVERVIEW
The main telephone switch shall consist of trunk lines supplied as either individual or T1 circuits to allow for local and/or long distance calling. The network is to be capable of interfacing with 4-digit dialling as well as integrating with the voice mail system. Telephone switches at remote sites such as Middlefield or Wolfedale shall be linked to the main switch at Head Office to permit 4-digit dialling between all sites. All systems are to be provided with back up power supplies from Uninterruptible Power Sources at each location and where available by generator power. The network shall be capable of permitting paging to be performed through the local telephone system at all stations. Provision shall be made for local caller I.D., call hold, call waiting, transfer and conferencing. Individual telephones shall be speaker type, capable of accepting multiple lines and speed dialling. WIRING Conduits and power for the telephone network shall be provided at each trunk switch location.
400WP

CI-0402-02
Page
Communications
Security System
June 1, 2006
1 of 7
SCOPE
Security at GO Transit Rail and Bus Stations is managed by integrated access control and alarm systems. These systems are supplied and installed, as well as monitored by Chubb Security Systems on a 24-hour basis. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE Access Control Entry into the station sets off the time-delay actuated intrusion alarm, which is disarmed by entering an accepted I.D. code in the system keypad. The alarm control panel will continue to monitor all connected functions except the intrusion alarm sensors. When the premises are exited, re-entering the accepted I.D. code will reactivate the intrusion alarm. Designated employees are provided with individual I.D. codes to permit access into the premises. Time and date are recorded at central monitoring stations at the East and West Region facilities. Building Alarms Actuation of any equipment failure or fire alarm devices will cause a digital signal to be transmitted to Chubb Security central alarm monitoring location, as well as the local keypad. Activation of a hold up pushbutton will cause a silent signal to be transmitted to the Chubb central monitoring location, indicating where the alarm originated.
CODES AND STANDARDS

The equipment, materials, installation methods and workmanship will be equal to or exceed the standards specified by the Canadian Standards Association, Electrical and Electronics Manufacturers Association of Canada, Ontario Electrical Safety Code, OBC, ULC, NFPA and all other current applicable codes.
ALARM SYSTEMS
Devices are strategically located throughout the buildings to detect and alarm the following conditions: Intrusion Smoke
400WP

CI-0402-02
Page
Communications Low Temperature High Temperature
Security System
June 1, 2006
2 of 7
Hold Up (manually operated by the Station Attendant) Sump Pump Failure Inverter and UPS Failure Low Voltage (station main power supply)
GENERAL FEATURES
SYSTEM The complete station alarm system shall include, but not be limited to, the following components: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Chubb AFX Control Panel AFX User Interface Signal Transmitter and Receivers Audible Signal Device Hold-Up Alarm Buttons Intrusion Detectors Smoke Detection Devices Low and High Temperature Sensors Inverter System Trouble and AC Output Sensors Smoke Detector By-Pass Switch Central Commercial Monitoring Services
400WP

CI-0402-02
Page
Communications
Security System
June 1, 2006
3 of 7
ALARM MONITORING EQUIPMENT Chubb Alarm Control Panel The system controls are housed in a surface wall-mounted EEMAC cabinet either with hinged lockable door and gasket or secured by screws for tamper protection. A tamper switch is included to provide an alarm in the case of tamper for the latter protection. The alarm control panel is microprocessor controlled for monitoring 8 to 128 zones including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Fire alarm detection with smoke detectors Intrusion alarm with dual microwave and infrared motion detectors Hold up alarm from high collar pushbuttons AC power failure, voltage sensor relays Low station temperature alarm Inverter system trouble and AC failure output sensors Alarm system trouble/low battery condition Annunciation time delay devices for voltage sensors and thermostats
System Test momentary contact pushbuttons are provided to test the alarm control functions including alarm output and telephone transmission. A manual System Reset pushbutton is provided to reset each alarm function at the keypad after the initiation devices have been set. An Alarm Signal Silence pushbutton in the alarm control panel is provided at the keypad to silence the audible alarm signals. A 8,192 event memory is either retrievable on site or from a remote PC located at a central facility. The system shall be subdivided from 2 to 16 areas that can carry up to 4,000 programmable codes, with 50 levels of authority. The system shall have false alarm prevention zones. All zones to be displayed on a liquid crystal display. POWER SUPPLY A 12 volt DC power supply for all system supervision, control and alarm functions shall be provided in the alarm control panel as an integral part of the system, complete with sealed
400WP

CI-0402-02
Page
Communications
Security System
June 1, 2006
4 of 7
gel type batteries and solid state charging equipment through 120 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hz normal power supply and step down transformer. The battery capacity will be sufficient to operate supervisory conditions for a minimum of 12 hours, including audible alarm signals and auto-dialler and at the end of this period to energize all alarm devices simultaneously for a period of 5 minutes continuously. The automatic charger shall be capable of restoring 90% of dead battery capacity within 12 hours. Discharge protection shall be provided to disconnect the charger when the voltage drops below 60%. The system shall report locally on the display loss of power and battery failure. AUDIBLE SIGNAL DEVICE The audible signal device shall be a vibrating horn with 110dB rating for intrusion and fire, operating at 12 volt d.c. USER INTERFACE The user interface shall be surface mounted with tamperproof alarm. This unit will be used for entering application oriented commands such as BA day-set/night-set, silencing audible annunciation and programming of access codes, etc. It contains a sounder and a liquid crystal display, which annunciates zones and system status. Should more than one alarm be registered at the same time, the liquid crystal display will scroll through all alarms. The 8 digit code for alarming and disarming the systems intrusion alarm is programmable. INTRUSION DETECTOR Dual technology (microwave and infrared) motion detectors shall have fresnel lenses, multisegment mirrors and automatic temperature compensation. SMOKE DETECTOR A single zone, single state detection system shall be installed. The photoelectric combustion detector is of solid-state design, surface or flush mounted. At stations with an existing Fire Alarm Panel, the output contacts will be wired to The Alarm Control Panel. HOLD-UP BUTTON The hold-up pushbuttons shall be of the high collar momentary type.
400WP

CI-0402-02
Page
Communications
Security System
June 1, 2006
5 of 7
LOW TEMPERATURE SENSOR The temperature sensor shall have an adjustable setting with a scale from 10C to 30C. The thermostat shall be housed in a vandal-resistant enclosure with maximum air circulation over the sensing element. AC VOLTAGE ADAPTOR The AC voltage sensor shall be of solid state type with adjustable pick up and drop out settings. INVERTER SYSTEM The inverter unit shall have trouble and AC output failure alarm settings as provided by the manufacturer. Dry output contacts from the Inverter shall be wired to the security control panel. Trouble Alarm Set 1. 2. 3. 4. AC Failure: Shall indicate failure of AC supply to the unit. Low Battery Voltage: Shall indicate the battery voltage has fallen below a preset limit during the discharge process. High Battery Voltage: Shall indicate that the battery voltage has risen above a preset limit during the charging process. Charger Failure: Shall indicate the charger is not providing any output to the batteries.
The occurrence of any of the above conditions will provide a common alarm. AC Failure Output Alarm Set No AC Output: This alarm shall trigger upon the absence of AC output for any reason. SMOKE DETECTOR BY-PASS SWITCH A smoke detector by-pass pushbutton switch, a double contact shunt switch, shall be provided to indicate to central monitoring that the detector is in the by-pass mode.
400WP

CI-0402-02
Page
Communications
Security System
June 1, 2006
6 of 7
SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE

GENERAL 1. Actuation of any intrusion alarm initiating device will cause the system local alarm panel to operate as follows: To transmit a signal, depending on the location and type of alarm, to a central alarm monitoring location and to annunciate on the local keypad. An audible alarm signal in the station will sound continuously for 5 minutes and then be automatically silenced. 2. Actuation of any fire alarm initiating devices will cause the system local panel to operate as follows: To transmit a digital signal, depending on the location and type of alarm, to a central alarm monitoring location and to annunciate on the local keypad. 3. Actuation of a hold-up pushbutton will cause the alarm control panel to transmit a silent alarm to a central alarm monitoring location, identifying to the operator the station where the alarm originated and the type of alarm. Actuation of a thermostat for low temperature, AC power failure, inverter system trouble, or security system trouble, will cause the alarm panel to: (a) Transmit a digital signal, depending on the location and type of alarm, to a central monitoring location and to annunciate on the local keypad after the preset time delay has expired. An audible signal in the keypad will sound continuously for 5 minutes and the be automatically silenced.
4.
(b)
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION The following is a typical procedure for entry into and exit from a station: Entry The designated door is unlocked and the time delay intrusion alarm is immediately activated. The alarm is disarmed by key-in at the keypad located in the station before expiry of the time delay. If the code is accepted, the intrusion alarm is disarmed and the alarm control panel will continue to monitor all the connected functions except the intrusion alarm sensors.
400WP

CI-0402-02
Page
Communications Exit
Security System
June 1, 2006
7 of 7
The exit code is entered in the keypad and the system will respond by initiating the time delayed intrusion alarm. The station must be exited and the door locked before the end of the time delay. The system will respond at the end of the time delay by arming all of the intrusion sensors.
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
Fare Handling Equipment
December 15, 2011
1 of 18
SCOPE
Fare handling machines are proprietary equipment and will be provided and installed by the appropriate supplier. Consultants shall meet with GO Transit staff to ensure the required facilities needed to operate these machines, e.g., power, are provided. Station Ticket Issuers (STIs) Station Ticket Cancellers (STCs) Interac, etc. (including data polling, Station Control Computer (SCC), Debit and Credit equipment Smart Card equipment Presto Ticket Vending Machines (TVMs) GPS Clock
LOCATIONS
The STIs Interac equipment and calculator are generally situated in the station ticket office. STCs Smart card equipment and TVMs may be located either in the station building, platforms and accesses to platforms or in tunnels.
CONDUITS
Conduits designated for fare handling equipment wiring will be clearly identified and will be installed well clear of power conduits. Conduits will be RSG or EMT depending on the location with a minimum size of 19 mm.
WIRING
Most fare handling equipment operates with low voltage electrical circuits. Conduits carrying wiring operating at higher voltage must be kept well clear to avoid any possibility of interference. For maximum communications wiring distances see ENGINEERING, TAB 2. Any of the above machines that are located outside of heated areas such as the station building will necessarily be fitted with anti-condensation heaters. Wiring and circuit protection will be sized to suit the wattage of heater supplied.
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
2 of 18
PRESTO OVERVIEW
Presto Fare Handling System is a smartcard-based fare payment system designed to support the use of one common fare card for fare payment on the various participating public transit systems. Presto equipment is proprietary, provided and installed by the appropriate supplier, and comprises:
CC Rack (Concentrator Complex Rack) - located in the Communications Room SPOS (Station Point of Sale) located in the Ticket Booth SFTP (Station Fare Transaction Processor) CQD (Card Query Device) HCR (Handheld Card Reader ) and the HCR Cradles located in Safety Systems Offices WAP (Wireless Access Points) located at bus facilities
See standard diagram number P1 for Presto System Architecture.
PRINCIPLES OF DEVICE PLACEMENT

Devices may be located either in the station building, on the platforms, at access points to platforms (tunnels, pedestrian bridges, walkways, stairs, ramps, etc), as directed by Station Services, Field Services and/or Fare Systems. General:
Placement of devices and way-finding signage is site specific Devices shall be placed to avoid rail platform flagging Bus service locations require CQDs only, all fare collecting equipment is located on the bus Minimum clearance of 500 mm between two adjacent devices shall be maintained Devices shall placed in accessible routes and shall not impede accessible clearances
SFTP
Similar to the placement of legacy STC devices Devices shall be placed at all rail platform access points. Devices shall be placed maximum 75 m apart at locations with direct parking lot to rail platform access Devices shall be placed along passenger natural flow, at clear and visible locations, and shall be readily accessible by Cardholders for fare payment Remote locations shall be provided with two (2) devices on different circuits, to provide redundancy in case of power failure .
CQDs
Shall be located outside the passenger flow, near TVM and Information Board
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
3 of 18
COMMUNICATIONS CONDUITS Conduits designated for Presto equipment data wiring shall be clearly identified and shall be installed well clear of power conduits. Conduits shall be depending on the location with a minimum size of 21 mm. Acceptable conduit type as per Design Requirements Manual. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIVITY AND WIRING In the Communications Room, two dedicated receptacles, each fed from dedicated 120(208) V normal power circuits (non UPS), shall be provided at each CC Rack. The types of receptacles are as follows:
Two (2) NEMA 5-15R (120V, 15A) at transit rail stations and bus terminals One (1) NEMA 5-15R (120V, 15A) and one (1) NEMA L5-30R (120V, 30a) at Bus Depots when a WLAN solution is deployed One (1) NEMA 5-15R (120V, 15A) and one (1) NEMA L6-20R (2P, 208V, 20A) at Bus Depots and Enforcement Offices that have a server
SFTPs and CQDs require dedicated power circuits from UPS located in the CC Rack (UPS provided by Presto equipment supplier). Power for up to four (4) devices (SFTP and CQD) can be daisy-chain connected to the UPS in the CC Rack. If devices are daisy-chained, they shall be staggered such that devices in close proximity to each other will be fed on separate circuits. Each such circuit shall be protected by circuit breaker (or fuse) which will also serve as an isolation point (see standard diagram P3 for power wiring termination details at CC Rack location). An individual ground wire for each SFTP and CQD shall be run and terminated in the copper ground bus at power junction box at CC Rack location. In order to facilitate operations and maintenance, the power cables that are connected to the Presto system UPS must be clearly labeled to indicate which device is connected to each receptacle, following Design Requirements Manual labeling guidelines. Each SPOS is locally backed-up by its own UPS (provided by Presto equipment supplier) and requires a separate NEMA 5-15 receptacle fed from a dedicated normal power circuit. The power outlet shall be located within a maximum 2 m of the wicket. Wiring and circuit protection will be sized to suit the total wattage on circuit, to address potential voltage drops, and derating requirements for multiple circuits run in the same conduit. The following table provides an estimate of the maximum wattage that each device requires.
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
4 of 18
Table 1 shows power requirements for each device. Device SPOS (Station Point of Sale) SFTP (Station Fare Transaction Processor) CQD (Card Query Device) HCR (Handheld Card Reader) Cradles Table 1: Power Requirements DATA CONNECTIVITY AND WIRING The main CC Rack shall be placed in a location close to the demarcation point. CC Rack and all associated equipment excluding Cat 6 and fiber optic distribution panels will be supplied by Presto System supplier. Where possible, fare devices will be aggregated such that wired distances do not exceed 90 m (300 ft) from the Concentrator Complex. For distances within 90 m, Ethernet cable (Cat 6) shall be used and terminated with 8P8C (RJ-45) male connectors at both ends (excluding SPOS). Data cable for SPOS shall be terminated into 8P8C (RJ-45) wall jack at device end and 8P8C (RJ-45) male connectors at CC Rack (see standard diagram P4 for data wiring termination details at CC Rack location). The HCR and Enforcement Data Concentrator will be connected to the switch in the CC using Cat5 cable at a minimum; however Cat5e or Cat6 can also be used for a distance of up to 90 m. All Cat5e cabling should be terminated with an 8P8C (RJ-45) connector. Fiber optic cable shall be used for distances exceeding 90 m. Multimode fiber that can extend up to 2 km shall be employed and shall be terminated with LC connectors at CC Rack location. Fiber optic cable shall be 62.5/125 um, 6-strand, tight buffered, OFNP. Cable shall be comprised of individually jacketed, and uniquely identified fibers with an overall orange sheath suitable for outdoor underground installation. Fiber optic cable shall be converted into Cat 6 cable through a transceiver (provided by Presto equipment supplier) close to device locations. Each transceiver is equipped with 4 (8) Ethernet outputs to serve 4 (8) devices. An enclosure to house a fiber transceiver shall be provided (see standard diagram P5 for transceiver enclosure detail). Watts 200 35 35 120
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications CC RACK
December 15, 2011
5 of 18
At all new facilities, Presto and Network equipment will share the same rack; the rack is physically segregated and separately locked doors are provided for each section. The rack is also to include a 21 RU Security front and rear door for the lower half. This is to protect Presto equipment from tampering. This is also to include a full depth shelf installed directly in-line with the top of the security door to provide further separation and protection. The network rack front rails are to be set back from the front of the rack by 120mm for proper cable bend radius with the door closed. All Metrolinx equipment is to be installed above the middle shelf. All rack frames and accessories are to be Middle Atlantic WMRK Series and are to conform to IT current standards. Any additional information on IT standards can be obtained from Metrolinx upon request. If the space is limited at existing facilities, a wall mounted CC Rack may be used and installed. The maximum capacity of the rack and weight shall be stamped on the rack for future information and mounting requirements. CC Rack to be a half size rack at bus facilities Type C and full size rack at bus facilities Type A and Type B. Expansion of Presto system at facilities that are live, may require upgrading the existing CC Rack to a larger size or addition of a new rack. Rack mounted Cat6 distribution panels and cords shall be provided in CC Rack to terminate all copper data cables from devices (SPOS, SFTP and CQD):
The panel shall be offered in 24 port configuration. Panels shall have the ability to allow for single port replacement of inoperative ports. The patch cords shall provide Category 6 performance for cross connecting Category 6 equipment and/or backbone cables to high performance Category 6 horizontal cable systems. The patch cords shall be 24 AWG stranded UTP, with a standard 8 position modular plug and colored strain relief boot on each end. The cords shall be available in minimum one meter lengths. Patch cords to be provided for each device (i.e. SPOS, SFTP and CQD) plus 20% spare. Rack mounted Fiber Distribution Unit (Patch Panel) and fiber optic patch cords shall be provided in CC Rack to terminate all fiber optic cables from either transceivers or other CC. Rack mounted fiber distribution unit (FDU) to be 1RU in height with three (3) termination panel capacity and slide out master panel tray.
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications

December 15, 2011
6 of 18
FDU to be c/w loaded LC MM adapter panels, splice trays and pigtails (fully terminated) Multimode fibre patch cords to be c/w LC/LC connectors; cords minimum 1m in length. Four patch cords for each fiber transceiver plus 20% spare to be provided.
DEVICE (SFTP/CQD) MOUNTING SFTPs/CQDs are designed for both stand and wall mounting. Wall mounted devices do not require any special boxes and will be mounted directly on the wall as shown on standard diagram P10. Custom made Base Boxes are required to mount SFTP and CQD devices when using stand mounting method. Stainless steel two-piece base box under SFTP and CQD shall be supplied and installed by contractor. Box manufactured by Commex Group Manufacturing Inc. (905-890-0077). See standard diagrams P6, P7, P8, P9 and P10 for fare device (SFTP and CQD) installation details. DEVICE (SFTP/CQD) SIGNAGE Standard signage for SFTPs and CQDs shall be provided; refer to Static Signage Catalogue, performance Spec (10400) and Design Requirement Manual (DRM) for design, material and installation details on signage. TICKET BOOTH MODIFICATIONS TO ACCOMMODATE SPOS All required modifications shall be performed in wickets millwork, including adequate ventilation provisions, to accommodate the SPOS equipment.
The SPOS dimensions of the central unit and its peripherals are shown in Table 2:
Components Computer Touch screen CID (Card Interface Device) Receipt Printer UPS
Physical dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) 177 x 400 x 530 mm 434 x 430 x 238 mm (Including base) 151 x 37 x 191 mm 147 x 148 x 213 mm 147 x 236 x 419 mm
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
7 of 18
Physical dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) Base: 220 x 41 x 110 mm Display Head: 260 x 70 x 60 mm PID (Process Identifier) Overall Height: 291 ~ 426mm Table 2: SPOS Required Component Dimensions Components A monitor bracket shall be provided at each wicket to the right of the desk which will mount two monitors, one for the SPOS and one for GO operations. Brackets shall be provided to suit monitors. Final location of brackets shall be confirmed by Station Services. HVAC The operating temperature range for the Concentrator Complex is 0C - 40C. TESTING Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall perform complete copper and fiber optic cable certification tests, according to all manufacturer's requirements for warranty and all testing including, but not limited to:
A. Copper Data Cable

Continuity checks on each cable, checking for opens and shorts.

Cable length (Channel and Permanent Link). Correct pair polarity. Correct cable labelling at both ends. Tests shall be performed with connectors installed.
B. Fiber Optic Cable
All cable testing shall be conducted by an experienced technician using a Microtest Simplifiber meter or equivalent tester. Test all fiber (100%) using a power meter in both directions and provide following in the report:
Fiber cable number Fiber length. Attenuation (loss in dB). Test date Tester make and model no. Tester calibration date.
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
8 of 18
INSTALLATION COMPLETION Installation and Testing of Presto system infrastructure (conduit, wiring, bases, etc) as described in this document and shown on standard drawings shall be completed at least six(6) to eight(8) weeks prior to new area/device/station opening to allow for device installation and testing by supplier.
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
9 of 18
FIGURE: PRESTO SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
10 of 18
FIGURE: PRESTO SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
11 of 18
FIGURE: POWER WIRING TERMINATION DETAIL AT CONCENTRATOR COMPLEX RACK
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
12 of 18
FIGURE: CAT6 (FIBRE OPTIC) WIRING TERMINATION DETAIL AT CONCENTRATOR COMPLEX RACK
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
13 of 18
FIGURE: FIBRE TRANSCEIVER ENCLOSURE POST DETAIL
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
14 of 18
FIGURE: BOTTOM ENTRY OUTDOOR BASE MOUNTED CQD/SFTP INSTALLATION DETAIL
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
15 of 18
FIGURE: SIDE ENTRY BASE MOUNTED CQD/SFTP INSTALLATION DETAIL
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
16 of 18
FIGURE: SIDE ENTRY INDOOR BASE MOUNTED CQD/SFTP INSTALLATION DETAIL
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
17 of 18
FIGURE: SFTP/CQD ON BASE BOX FRONT VIEW (CUSTOMER FACING)
400WP

CI-0402-03
Page
Communications
December 15, 2011
18 of 18
FIGURE: BACK ENTRY MOUNTED CQD/SFTP INSTALLATION DETAIL
400WP

CI-0402-04
Page
Communications
Ticket Booth Talk-Thru System
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
SCOPE
The talk-thru system provides instant 2-way voice communication between the public and station attendants through the glass divider at the station ticket counter.
FUNCTION
The talk-thru unit provides hands free and effective duplex communication between the station operator and the passengers. The voice switching function is automatically biased in the direction from the passenger to the operator. Noise cancelling and omni-directional microphones will be mounted on the passenger and ticket seller sides respectively, of the booth glass divider. Two rotary encoded controllers will be provided to adjust the volume of each microphone. The operators boom microphone will automatically override the passenger microphone when activated. Provision will be made for inter speech pause time.
COMPONENTS
Microphone Override Pushbutton Power On/Off L.E.D. Switch Noise Cancelling Microphone Sellers Mike-Off Switch
WIRING
Conduits and 120 volt a.c. source power outlets for each voice link assembly. See ENGINEERING, TAB 2.
400WP

CI-0402-05
Page
Communications
Public Address System
April 30, 2012
1 of 11
OVERVIEW
Public Address Systems are provided at bus terminals and rail stations for direct communication to passengers. These systems are used by Station Operations and Rail Operations and predominantly include rail and bus platforms, bus loops, passenger waiting areas, tunnels/stairways and shelters. Announcements are made from a wall-mounted touch-tone DTMF paging phone located in the Station Ticket Sales Area. This phone is compatible with the zone selection equipment in the Communication Control enclosure.
COVERAGE
LOCAL A system of speakers divided into zones enable announcements from the ticket office throughout the station or to specific areas, e.g., tunnels or platforms. Under normal working conditions pages are made using the all call feature to all areas. REMOTE Rail Station P.A. Systems can be accessed through a Bell Canada SST Red phone interface to enable announcements to be made by Rail Operations at Union Station. This allows GO Operations personnel to access rail stations P.A. systems to make announcements.
PAGING
Paging is presently conducted manually throughout the Rail System P.A. Network. However, both Union Bus and Rail Stations have the capability of automatically making pre-recorded announcements. An IP Ethernet link between these stations also allows access to either system. Replacement or new systems at bus and rail stations will contain provision for connection for any future system-wide IP network.
REFERENCES
The design and installation of the P.A. System will comply with the following: 1. 2. GO Transit Station Telecommunications and Electronics Systems Document. Electrical Specifications, ENGINEERING, TAB 2.
400WP

CI-0402-05
Page
Communications DEFINITIONS Controller
April 30, 2012
2 of 11
Provides, through a system processor, audio input to the various groups of speakers, refereed to as zones. This is accomplished by means of Zone Drivers and Zone Relay Cards. It also interfaces with the Red and Local Paging Phones. DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Red Phone A Bell Canada SST system, serves as an emergency communications network and provides a direct link with the Meridian phones at the stations and terminals. Both Red phones are interfaced with the P.A. system at each facility. EXISTING SYSTEMS If required by GO Transit to phase out, disconnect and remove an existing system, the Consultant shall specify that the Contractor turn over all removed and unused equipment to GO Transit. The process of phasing in the new system shall not cause any undue disruption to the services of the existing system. CODES AND STANDARDS The Consultant shall specify that the equipment, materials, installation methods and workmanship shall be equal to or exceed the standards specified by the Canadian Standards Association, Electrical and Electronics Manufacturers Association of Canada, Ontario Electrical Safety Code, OBC, ULC, NFPA, Electrical Safety Authority Bulletins, CSA Standards and all other current applicable codes. Consultants for specific projects shall define codes as applicable and list them in the contract tender documents. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS The P.A. System generally consists of zone-grouped speakers strategically located in or at GO Transit facilities, buildings, tunnels, stairwell entrances, elevator vestibules, rail platforms, Kiss and Ride Areas, and Bus Loops, and a System Controller located in the Communications Room of the facility. For Station and Terminal Facilities, the System shall accept local inputs from local RED phone and DTMF paging phone in the Tickets Sales Area and a remote input from GO Transit RED phone system (Bell Canada SST System).
400WP

CI-0402-05
Page
Communications EMERGENCY POWER
April 30, 2012
3 of 11
P.A. System equipment shall be supplied from the emergency power panel located inside the station electrical room. PRIORITIZED PAGING The P.A. system shall be user configurable to provide prioritized paging announcements when announcements are generated simultaneously from different inputs. Initial configuration shall establish to the following priority level.
Highest Priority................................................................................. GO Operations 'Red' phone .........................................................................................................................Local 'Red' phone Lowest Priority..................................................... Other paging telephones including ticket office
The system shall provide for a separate 600 ohm audio input whose priority access level in the system is also user configurable. TIME CLOCK The system shall provide for volume adjustment of the P.A. announcements using an internal real time clock. Automatic adjustment of clock changes shall be provided for daylight savings time.
GENERAL FEATURES
1. The P.A. system shall interface with a maximum of seven and minimum of four P.A. paging phone inputs and up to three - 600 ohm audio circuits. All three audio inputs shall provide independent audio adjustment of the incoming signal. A common audio adjustment shall also be provided for the P.A. paging phone inputs. Signal levels for the local paging and remote paging shall be separate inputs requiring individual adjustments. The equipment provided shall be capable of adjusting all audio inputs over a range of -30db to +6db. A solid state controller shall provide the switching and signalling required for priority calls, selective zone paging, zone "group" paging, all call, background music mute, paging alert tones and emergency override.
2.
400WP

CI-0402-05
Page
Communications 3. 4.
April 30, 2012
4 of 11
On-site user-configurable, prioritized paging access for all audio inputs shall be provided. The P.A. system shall interface with the GO Transit 'RED' phone system to allow both 'RED' phone paging from Union Station and local 'RED' phone paging from the ticket office/s. The local 'RED' phone paging facility shall automatically provide ticket office/s paging speaker override whenever the local >RED= phone system is used. Group zone selection codes shall be configurable through the system configuration menu. The operation of either >RED= phone shall automatically select independent user- defined group zones.
5.
AUDIO POWER, COVERAGE AND QUALITY

1. 2. The amplifier capacity of the system shall be determined by the number of speakers required to achieve the design criteria: 3 amplifiers minimum, as follows. A minimum of two amplifiers shall be provided for the Platform area in order to maintain continuous system functionality. The amplifiers shall operate independently of each other. The first amplifier shall not be used to feed an audio signal to the second amplifier. A third amplifier shall be provided to cover the Kiss and Ride area, Station building, tunnels, stairwell entrances, elevator vestibules, and if required, a third platform or bus platform. The method of cable installation and speaker mounting on the rail platforms shall be arranged such that, not more than a 6dB drop shall be experienced whenever one amplifier fails. Platform speakers shall be arranged in such a way as to maintain 50% coverage on each platform upon failure of a single amplifier. For all areas which require coverage, the P.A. system shall maintain a uniformly distributed sound pressure level measured at 1.5m above floor level. The minimum sound pressure level at station platforms shall be 10dB above the measured ambient noise level to a maximum of 82dBA at day time hours and a maximum of 76 dBA at night time hours. The speech quality of the system shall be high and messages shall be clean and intelligible. There should be no unwanted noise or spurious audio signals (20dB or less) emanating from the system. A real time clock shall be used to provide the timing signals for volume adjustment. The real time clock shall run continuously even when power is removed and it shall
3.
4.
5. 6.
7.
400WP

CI-0402-05
Page
Communications
April 30, 2012
5 of 11
maintain full date and time with automatic spring and fall Canadian daylight-saving time adjustments. 8. The P.A. system shall be designed to minimize unwanted noise at nearby residences in compliance with applicable noise control bylaws, should these be less than the maximum values specified above, without however, reducing the effectiveness as an emergency voice communication system.
COMPONENTS
P.A. SYSTEM CONTROLLER Rack The P.A. System Controller shall be housed in a clear width 483mm (19") 35U rack enclosure having external dimensions of (559mm W X 635mm D X 1,500mm H) (22"W x 25"D x approx. 60 H). Note: The cabinet shall be floor standing with heavy-duty swivel castors and lockable front and rear doors. The enclosure shall be fully welded construction, with ventilation slots provided in both sides and front. Finish shall be textured black polyester powder coat. Wiring ducts shall be provided within the enclosure to route internal wiring between the various control assemblies. All internal wiring shall be marked with point-to-point identification using heat shrink sleeve markers. Unused enclosure U spaces shall be provided with blanking plates. Quick Disconnect Terminal All speaker cabling entering the communication enclosure shall be individually connected to a quick disconnect terminal. The quick disconnect facility shall allow individual outgoing zone cables to be quickly disconnected from the controller without the use of a screwdriver. The rail shall be marked to identify each respective zone/cable and incoming cables shall be tie- wrapped to rigid internal cable bars to prevent undue movement. The termination rail also provides individual earth (ground) terminals to allow the screen of each zone cable to be grounded. A laminated termination rail diagram, in addition to a control riser and/or single line block diagram shall be mounted on the inside of the rear door and a copy of such drawings shall also be included in the system manual. Surge Protection An independent transient voltage suppression and surge protection device shall be provided meeting UL 1449 TVSS rating power source located at the bottom of the
400WP

CI-0402-05
Page
Communications
April 30, 2012
6 of 11
enclosure. All required control system power supplies shall be installed on a quick disconnect DIN rail. Limiter Circuits The enclosure shall incorporate all the required driver assemblies suitably wired to their respective control circuits and terminal rail connections. Voltage Adjustment The System Controller shall provide for automatic volume adjustment for configurable Day/Night time periods using an integrated real time clock in addition to automatic daylight saving time adjustment. The automatic volume adjustment shall be available for all input channels via the system controller. PCB Cards (Printed Circuit Board Cards) The System Controller shall include a 483mm (19) card frame shelf, with suitable backplate assembly to receive the following plug-in pcb cards: Amplifier Processor Control card c/w Real Time Clock Chip Zone Switch Card Zone Switch SST Red Phone/Paging Phone Interface Zone Driver Cards (quantity as required) Zone Relay Cards (quantity as required) Power Supply Back Plate
System Controller The System Controller shall provide the following primary functions: 1. Switches of audio channels to the required zone drivers. The switching function shall be performed by the zone switching card.
400WP

CI-0402-05
Page
Communications 2. 3. 4. 5.
April 30, 2012
7 of 11
Allows programming and testing through a RS 232 /RS 485 port. Supplies power to the system processor, display and interface cards. Interfaces all Red Phone circuits to the required Zones. Four audio input channels that can each provide an audio output on any preconfigured group combination or manually selected zone. Provision shall be made for an ALL Call broadcast to all zones simultaneously. Appropriate Zone Driver and Zone Relay Cards for the requisite number of drivers/zones within the system. The audio channels are interfaced to the driver input/output circuits by zone driver and relay cards. Provides appropriate Paging Telephone interface. Configurable automatic Day/Night audio level capability. Automatic Daylight saving time adjustments.
6.
7. 8. 9.
Zone Cards 1. Each Zone Card shall provide independent audio level adjustment, all audio inputs shall have independent level control in order to adjust incoming signals. Any audio channel shall be capable of automatically being connected to any combination of zones for broadcast of P.A. messages. Power On and Status LED indicators shall be provided on the front panel of the Display Card in addition to a processor reset button. All system processor modules shall be interchangeable. All P.A. system components shall be protected by electrical current limiting and thermal overload devices.
2.
3.
Amplifiers Amplifiers in the P.A. rack shall provide input for telephone and microphones. Amplifiers shall have automatic voice limiter circuit to compensate for varying voice levels and paging styles. Amplifiers shall include RFI filtering, input/output overload protection, and open short circuit protection.
400WP

CI-0402-05
Page
Communications
April 30, 2012
8 of 11
SPEAKERS OUTDOOR POLE-MOUNTED Mounting Speakers shall be outdoor weatherproof types mounted on lighting poles in such a manner as to eliminate the necessity of drilling the lighting poles (by stainless steel banding) and to provide resistance to vandalism. Speakers shall be resistant to the environment and provide for the direct entry of any connected P.A. cable. Speakers shall use an NPT threaded gland entry with liquid tight cable gland and be coupled to the pole gland plate using liquid tight flexible conduit. No exposed P.A. cable is allowed. Refer to GO Standard Electrical Drawings. Height The mounting height for speakers on light standards shall be generally 4m above grade. Audio Coverage The distance between speakers and the number of speakers required to achieve the specified audio coverage will depend upon the station's inherent acoustic properties and the locations of the light standards and shelters on the platform. Temperature The operating temperature shall be between -30C to +70C. Features Line voltage 70V and maximum wattage 15W RMS continuous. Full adjustment in both the vertical and horizontal plane. Speaker Format shall be dual cone phenolic impregnated resin manufactured with 70V multi-tap transformer and a sealed back for extra protection and audibility.
SPEAKERS INDOOR Surface and Recessed Types Speakers shall be dual cone, treated paper design with a built-in 70V multi-tap transformer. A steel baffle or suspended ceiling tile support bridge and back box shall be provided for either flush or surface mounting applications to suit the location. The speakers back box
400WP

CI-0402-05
Page
Communications
April 30, 2012
9 of 11
shall be supported independently of the grid in a ceiling tile application. The finish shall match location colour or as required by GO Transit. Speakers in public areas shall be flush mounted or camouflaged whenever possible. The Consultant shall co-ordinate flush or surface mounted locations with the architect. Volume Control in Waiting Areas Flush mounted speakers shall incorporate an integral volume control accessible from the front baffle plate that shall provide attenuation of 20 dBA at any wattage tap. Temperature Operating temperature range shall be within 0 C to 50 C. Features Line voltage 70V and maximum wattage 10W RMS continuous.
SPEAKERS SHELTER AND TUNNEL Housing Speakers shall have a vandal resistant diecast housing complete with stainless steel tamper-resistant TORX screws to prevent unauthorized access. (Phillips or Robertson screws are not acceptable). Output and Power Speakers shall be designed for maximum output at a minimum power loss and shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Format Speakers shall be sealed dual cone construction and manufactured of phenolic impregnated resin. Speakers shall incorporate a sealed back for extra protection and audibility. They shall be white in colour or finished as required by GO Transit. Brackets When used in exposed areas or inside tunnels, a stainless steel speaker-mounting bracket must be used.
400WP

CI-0402-05
Page
Communications Features
April 30, 2012
10 of 11
Line voltage 70V and maximum wattage 8W RMS continuous. Operating temperature range of -30 C to +50 C.
INSTALLATION
P.A. CABLING 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. All cables shall be run in a neat and orderly fashion in a conduit system. P.A. cables shall be designated at both ends as per information supplied on tender. All cables that run from speakers to terminating equipment shall be single length (splices in these cables are not allowed that is: no splices in conduits). Sufficient slack (1 meter) shall be left in case it is necessary to re-terminate the cable. Emergency power all systems and components shall be powered via a single source from the emergency power panel.
P.A. CABLING SPECIFICATIONS AWG: 14 Stranding: 41 x 30 Conductor: TC, 2 conductors Insulation: 0.02" Polyolefin Capacitance: 30 pF/ft (conductor to conductor) 58 pf/ft (1 cond. and other cond. connected to shield) Shield: Delfoil Aluminum/Polyester Jacket: Blue or White Polyvinylchloride (depending on application) Nom. Cable OD: 0.302"
400WP

CI-0402-05
Page
Communications Voltage: 600 Temp: 80C Weight: 56 lbs/mft CSA: AWM, CMG UL: CM Flame Test: FT4
April 30, 2012
11 of 11
Application: 70V PA Speaker Applications
CONDUITS 1. 2. Conduits shall be designated with P.A. at terminating ends. Wiring shall be run in conduit. Outdoor cable shall be run in epoxy coated galvanized rigid steel; indoor cable may be R.G.S. or E.M.T. depending on the location. All underground conduits shall be Rigid PVC.
3.
CONNECTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. All speakers connected in a single zone shall be run in a single line configuration. All splices or connections shall be copper-to-copper compression type with insulating covers. Poles with speakers shall have one metre slack cable in raceway. Fish cord in all P.A. raceways shall be installed for future use.
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System
April 30, 2012
1 of 16
BASIS OF CRITERIA
Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) systems provide a method to remotely monitor and assess areas identified either as secure, public or controlled access. GO utilizes Closed Circuit Television systems at stations, terminals and other locations to monitor train, bus arrivals and departures, observe customer flow, and to conduct surveillance related to the protection of its corporate assets. The level of CCTV system design and installation at each station or facility depends upon the unique conditions of each site and in accordance with GO corporate needs. Monitoring and recording requirements are determined by the stakeholders.
CODES AND STANDARDS

The equipment, materials, installation methods and workmanship shall be equal to or exceed the standards specified by the Canadian Standards Association, TIA/EIA Standards for Communication and Cable Installation, Electrical and Electronics Manufacturers Association of Canada, Ontario electrical Safety Code, OBC, ULC and all other applicable codes. All the CCTV cameras at various GO locations can be viewed by the following user groups: 1. 2. 3. Rail Operations and Bus Operations; Station Services; and GO Transit Safety.
The CCTV systems are divided into two significant groups: OPERATIONAL SYSTEM This system supplies operational assistance to various GO Transit departments by providing and also recording real time images. SECURITY SYSTEM This system also provides and records images in real time, and it is used to deter the entry of unauthorized personnel, and provide record for System Safety investigations. The video information derived from the cameras of the Operational and Security systems are recorded on local servers. The CCTV system records on a seventy-two hour cycle.
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System
April 30, 2012
2 of 16
LOCAL MONITORING
All cameras, including pan/tilt/zoom (PTZ) at each site are viewed locally on a dedicated video monitor by means of a keyboard, mouse, and joystick.
REMOTE MONITORING
The systems are connected to GO Transit network which allows remote and local access to all cameras on all systems The current method of transmission of video images is operating on MPLS circuits and Metrolinx IT WAN Infrastructure. Various CCTV system viewing and monitoring rights are granted through administrative privileges as set out by GO System Safety.
COMPONENTS
The equipment required for either the Operational or the Security CCTV system generally includes, but is not limited to the following: Colour Monitors 24 or 32 display monitor inside station ticket booth, 32 or 50 at Transit Safety Dispatch, wall or ceiling mounted each site is dependant on local requirements and conditions. This will include all hardware required for the installation. Outdoor grade platform monitors to assist CSA to ensure doorways are clear of passengers. Typically used on curved platforms with obscured vision and installed on mini-platform on dedicated pole. Cameras Fixed or Pan/Tilt/Zoom, high sensitivity (0.08fc) and other new technology compatible with the corporate standard system. Camera Housings weatherproof (outdoor), moisture and dust-proof, maintain the ambient temperature within the housing in the camera operating temperature range of 10C to +50C. A sunscreen is fitted to protect the camera from direct sunlight. Indoor housings are either high impact polycarbonate or epoxy coated steel, dustproof, with top mount assembly, suitable for cameras with fixed focal length. Lenses Fixed with auto-Iris. Aspherical lenses are used on platforms to suit lighting conditions.
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System
April 30, 2012
3 of 16
CCTV Head End System.
DESIGN/INSTALLATION CRITERIA
CCTV system implementation is part of the overall facility design. The level of design and installation at each station, facility or wayside layover will depend upon the unique conditions of each site and in accordance with GO corporate needs. Monitoring and recording requirements will be determined by the user groups.
DESIGN
GENERAL 1. Coordination with Lighting and Signage System installation. For new facilities, Lighting and Video Systems should be designed concurrently. For existing facility that already have lighting, the Video System must be designed to work with the existing lighting or upgrades may be needed for the existing lighting; Privacy concerns of viewing and recording video images; Work rule concerns of viewing and recording video images; Legal implications of video surveillance; and The corporate standard system for archiving recorded video must be used. This includes, but it is not limited to, the following factors: Legal requirements; and Secure and controlled storage area. 6. Design Plans shall comprise of: CCTV Block Diagram CCTV coverage zones and locations Power support for systems, including Emergency and UPS power Communication support for systems Temperature control for systems
2. 3. 4. 5.
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System
April 30, 2012
4 of 16
DATA AND POWER TRANSMISSION Must be included in the overall system wiring and power design, and includes the following: 1. Cable Systems (wire and fiber optic) 2. Twisted Pair Coaxial Cable Fiber Optic preferred medium of data transmission
Transmission Architecture Network
3.
Transmission Distance Repeaters Signal Boosters Equalization
4.
Environmental Temperature extremes (high and low) Weather (rain, snow, icing, flooding, etc.) Physical (topographic conditions) Lightning and Transients (electrical grounding)
INSTALLATION
CCTV CABLING 1. 2. All cables shall be run in a neat and orderly fashion in a conduit system. CCTV cables shall be designated at both ends as per design requirements provided in the Electrical Section of the DRM.
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications 3. 4. 5.
CCTV System
April 30, 2012
5 of 16
All cables that run from cameras to terminating equipment shall be single length (splices in these cables are not allowed) Sufficient slack (1 meter) shall be left in case it is necessary to re-terminate the cable. Emergency power all systems and components shall be powered via a single source from the emergency power panel.
CONDUITS 1. 2. 3. 4. Conduits shall be designated with CCTV at terminating ends. Wiring shall be run in conduit. Outdoor cable shall be run in epoxy coated rigid galvanized steel; indoor cable may be R.G.S. or E.M.T. depending on the location. All underground conduits shall be rigid PVC. Conduit breaks prior to entry in to a building shall be incorporated in the design. For detailed design requirements refer the Electrical Section of the DRM.
CONNECTIONS 1. 2. 3. 4. All copper connections shall be copper-to-copper compression type with insulating covers. Poles with cameras shall have one metre slack cable in raceway. Fish cord in all CCTV raceways shall be installed for future use. Splices are not allowed.
HANDWELLS 1. 2. 3. Dedicated handwells, located away from doors and main traffic areas, shall be provided for CCTV, separate from power. Where installed in public areas, all enclosures, cover-plates, outlet plates, access panels, and handwells shall be provided with keyed temper-proof hardware. Drainage shall be considered for all handwells.
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System
April 30, 2012
6 of 16
CCTV CAMERA PLACEMENT

Placement should include the following considerations: Mount cameras at 6 m height to prevent damage and provide good field of view. 6 m dedicated poles are to be used for normal mounting. If higher installation is required, firm mounting masts shall be used to prevent motion; Utilize and include existing physical characteristics and infrastructure using CPTED guidelines; Civil structures roads, building, windows, important rooms, etc. Existing barriers and fencing, terrain and ground contours; Use of lens, zoom, and terrain conditions when setting and selecting camera locations; Be aware of rising and setting sun when setting camera alignment to avoid the flare and blinding effects on the camera. Mount cameras inside secure areas and provide tamper protection assume all cameras are subject to tamper; Outdoor, cold, hazardous conditions, etc. Provide appropriate camera housings for worst-case environmental conditions; Existing lighting; existing power; existing data and communication networks; Existing environmental controls; Imapct considerations on neighbouring properties; At a minimum, an illumination of 2 foot-candles throughout assessment area should be maintained.
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System PARKING GARAGES
April 30, 2012
7 of 16
Area All Vehicle and Pedestrian Entrances & Exits
Activity Identify vehicle license plates, facial recognition of drivers and pedestrians entering or exiting the parking garages, not both. (Preference given to entering.) RECORDING (FIXED)
Primary Purpose(s) Security, public confidence, deterrence. Investigations. Claims management. Maintenance.
Image Quality Recognize.
Stairwell Entrances and Exits.
Facial recognition of pedestrians entering or exiting, not both on each floor / entrance. Not in stairwells
Security, public confidence, deterrence. Claims management. Investigations.
Recognize
RECORDING (FIXED) Maintenance. Parking Levels One fixed camera visible from any location within a vacant facility. + increased signage Maintenance. RECORDING (FIXED) Exterior Perimeter One fixed camera visible from any perimeter location. RECORDING (FIXED) Security, public confidence, deterrence. Investigations. Maintenance. Monitor and detect Security, public confidence, deterrence. Investigations. Monitor and detect.
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System STATION OPERATIONS
April 30, 2012
8 of 16
Area Bicycle Shelters
Activity One PTZ in close proximity but not necessary dedicated or necessary unless history of criminal activity. RECORDING (FIXED)
Primary Purpose(s) Security, public confidence, deterrence. Investigations. Maintenance. Maintenance Claims Management
Image Quality Monitor and detect
Open Pedestrian Bridges
Not required unless history of criminal activity / accidents.
Monitor
Elevators
Observe occupants inside the elevator cab. Identify pedestrians entering or exiting. RECORDING (FIXED)
Equipment failure / medical emergency / redundancy. Security, Public confidence, deterrence.
Recognize.
Escalators
Maximum achievable length of each escalator. LIVE MONITORING (PTZ)
Maintenance / Ops Claims Management
Monitor
Exterior Stairs
Maximum achievable length of each stair case. RECORDING (FIXED)
Maintenance Claims Management
Monitor
Pedestrian Tunnels
One fixed camera visible from any location within the tunnel. Eliminate blind spots. RECORDING (FIXED)
Security, public confidence, deterrence. Investigations Claims management Security, public confidence, deterrence. Claims management.
Detect
Entrance and Exit Doorways at stations
Facial recognition of pedestrians entering or exiting, not both on each floor / entrance. LIVE MONITORING
Recognize
Investigations. Maintenance.
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
Platforms
CCTV System
PTZ at either end to monitor trains and deter trespassing. View maximum length of platform achievable. LIVE MONITORING (PTZ)
April 30, 2012

Rail operations. Security, public confidence, deterrence. Maintenance. Detect
9 of 16
Union Station Platforms
100% coverage and PTZ at either end to monitor trains and deter trespassing. View maximum length of platform achievable. LIVE MONITORING (PTZ)
Rail operations. Security, public confidence, deterrence. Maintenance.
Detect
Designated Waiting Area (Platforms)
Full view of entire accessible platform. LIVE MONITORING (PTZ)
Rail operations. Security, public confidence, deterrence. Maintenance.
Recognize
Platform Monitors for CSA
Assist CSA to ensure doorways are clear of passengers. Typically used on curved platforms with obscured vision. Camera shall not be used for any recording.
Rail operations, safety. Passenger safety
Detect.
Ticket Vending Machines (TVM)
On lakeshore stations, one camera visible to customers. Identify customers using the TVM machines. New TVMs will have their own cameras. RECORDING (FIXED)
Security, public confidence, deterrence. Investigations
Recognize.
Hold-up
One camera per ticket booth to identify the customer currently at the ticket window. RECORDING (FIXED)
Security, public confidence, deterrence. Investigations
Recognize.
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System PARKING LOTS
April 30, 2012
10 of 16
Area Vehicle entrances/exits
Activity Parking lots with a capacity greater than 1,000 cars and/or higher crime rates. Identify vehicle license plates, facial recognition of drivers entering or exiting the parking lot, not both. (Preference given to entering.) RECORDING (FIXED)
Primary Purpose(s) Security, public confidence, deterrence. Claims management. Investigations. Maintenance.
Parking Area Parking lots with a capacity greater than 1,000 cars and/or higher crime rates.
One PTZ camera visible from any location within the lot. Max 10% blind spots.
Monitor
Record vehicle movements. LIVE MONITORING (PTZ) Parking Area Parking lots with a capacity less than 1,000 cars and/or low crime rates. One PTZ camera visible from any location within the lot. Max 25% blind spots.
Maintenance.
Monitor
Record vehicle movements. LIVE MONITORING (PTZ) Bus Loop (Attached to station) LIVE MONITORING (PTZ) Support operations, bus scheduling.
Maintenance.
Bus Operations Security, public confidence, deterrence. Claims management.
Detect
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System
April 30, 2012

Investigations. Maintenance.
11 of 16
Passenger Waiting/Shelter Area
On lakeshore stations, one camera visible to customers. No cameras required on limited lines unless history of criminal activity / accidents. RECORDING (FIXED)
Security, public confidence, deterrence. Claims management. Investigations. Maintenance.
Detect
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System RAIL OPERATIONS
April 30, 2012
12 of 16
Area Layover Site entrances
Activity Identify vehicle license plates, facial recognition of drivers entering or exiting the facility, not both. (Preference given to entering.) RECORDING (FIXED)
Primary Purpose(s) Security, deterrence. Investigations. Maintenance.
Layover Site - rail equipment
Highly visible PTZ at either end to monitor trains and deter trespassing. Highly visible PTZ on both sides of railway equipment with capability to view full length of train. High Mast PTZ with full view of yard and equipment. Due to unique characteristics of layover yards, CPTED audits should be performed prior to finalizing CCTV plan. LIVE MONITORING (PTZ)
Security, deterrence. Investigations. Operations.
Detect
Major Support Facilities (Rail)
Identify vehicle license plates, facial recognition of drivers entering or exiting the facility, not both. (Preference given to entering.) Facial recognition of pedestrians entering or exiting at each entrance. PTZ if gate supported by intercom access.
Security, public confidence, deterrence. Investigations. Maintenance.
Recognize.
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System RAIL OPERATIONS
April 30, 2012
13 of 16
Area
Activity LIVE MONITORING (PTZ)
Primary Purpose(s)
Image Quality
Corridors (ARL)
View train location, operations LIVE MONITORING (PTZ)
Operations
Monitor
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System BUS OPERATIONS
April 30, 2012
14 of 16
Area Bus Maintenance and Storage Facilities
Activity Identify vehicle license plates, facial recognition of drivers / pedestrians entering or exiting the facility, not both. (Preference given to entering.) PTZ only if gate supported by intercom access. LIVE MONITORING
Primary Purpose(s) Security, deterrence. Investigations. Maintenance.
Image Quality Recognize
Bus Terminal Buildings
Identify vehicle license plates, facial recognition of drivers / pedestrians entering or exiting the facility, not both. (Preference given to entering.) PTZ only if gate supported by intercom access. LIVE MONITORING
Security, public confidence, deterrence. Investigations. Maintenance.
Recognize
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System MISCELLANEOUS
April 30, 2012
15 of 16
Area Carpool Lots Park and Ride Lots Bus Rapid Transit Transit Safety Interview Rooms Nil Nil Nil
Activity
Primary Purpose(s)
Image Quality
Inside interview room, full view of room. Exterior camera with full view of receiving area. LIVE MONITORING (PTZ)
Security, deterrence. Investigations.
Recognize
Treasury Room
Inside interview room, full view of room. Exterior camera with full view of receiving area. LIVE MONITORING (PTZ)
Recognize
Reception areas
Facial recognition of pedestrians entering or exiting at each entrance. RECORDING (FIXED)
Recognize
Vault rooms
Inside interview room, full view of room. Exterior camera with full view of receiving area. Facial recognition of pedestrians entering or exiting at each entrance. RECORDING (FIXED)
Recognize
Elevator Lobby
Facial recognition of pedestrians entering or exiting at each entrance.
Recognize
400WP

CI-0402-06
Page
Communications
CCTV System MISCELLANEOUS
April 30, 2012
16 of 16
Area
Activity RECORDING (FIXED)
Primary Purpose(s)
Image Quality
Monitors
Live view monitoring Monitors shall be positioned to protect against public access.
Operations, security
CCTV HEAD END SYSTEM

Refer the IT Station Telecommunications and Electronic Systems document for detailed specifications.
400WP
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL PROCEDURES

CI-0501-01
Page
Introduction
Overview
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
SUMMARY
This Tab 5 is a guide to the following section: Drawing Standards
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
1 of 20
CAD SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACT AND RECORD DRAWINGS DOCUMENTS

All drawings are to be produced on a CAD (Computer-Assisted Design) system with file portability and which is compatible with GO Transits CAD system via the following format: drawing file (.DWG); AutoCAD 2007
Consultant to provide GO Transit with As Built contract drawings both on hard copy and respective computer (CAD) files and PDF format. The computer (CAD) files to be forwarded such that they are in a format compatible with and directly readable by GO Transits CAD system namely: Operating System: WINDOWS XP Software Program: AutoCAD 2007 Storage Media: CD ROM
STANDARD REQUIREMENTS
Drawing presentation, size symbols and details must be standardized as much as possible to facilitate reading and handling. The criteria contained herein have been compiled for the purpose of establishing, defining, and clarifying procedures and standards to be used for project drawings.
STANDARD GO TRANSIT DRAWING SHEET SIZES

ANSI D (22 x 34)/ISO A1 SIZE (Full size drawing submission must be plotted on exact media size of 22 x 34 and 11 x 17 for half-size.) ANSI E/ISO AO SIZE (Subject to approval)
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
2 of 20
PEN ASSIGNMENT & STANDARD GO TRANSIT DRAWING SHEET ANSI D/ISO A1 SIZE (Unit in Metric) * all files shall be saved in AutoCAD version 2007 format Pen Assignment: No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 252 Colour Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta White Grey Light Grey Grey (screen) Pen Size 0.15 0.25 0.20 0.45 0.35 0.25 0.25 0.15 0.10 0.10
Others 0.25mm or specified by the Consultant.
Please use Pack n GO or e-Transmit includes all related attachments and submit ctb file to GO Transit with each drawing submission.
TITLE BLOCK
GO Transit will supply the latest titleblock in electronic format both in block and layout template settings for consultant to use as default. Any modifications need to be submitted for GO Transit approval prior to drawing production. The layout of the title block, including the reference drawings and revision columns, shall be as indicated on Page 13, Standard Title Block. For example of the Drawing Identification Block. Refer to Page 12. DRAWING FILE NAMING SYSTEM FILE NAME:gobassht.dwg* (or copy and paste block file ANSI_D titleblock.dwg) (dwt file can be saved in users AutoCad application template location for quick layout creation) *Use for all design drawings as title block. Please insert and edit attribute w/attedit command. (Note: DO NOT explode or rename block or treat as external reference in order to maintain the attributes integrity). Insert block @0,0,0 Original scale: 1 to 1 mm Drawing size ANSI D 558.8 mm x 863.6 mm (22 x 34)
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
3 of 20
FILE NAME:GO ANSI D sigsheet.dwg (dwt file can be saved in users AutoCad application template location for quick layout creation) Copy drawing file and rename to suit.. DO NOT explode or rename block. Edit attribute w/attedit command. Drawing size ANSI D 558.8 mm x 863.6 mm (22 x 34) Plot to limits. Layer: BORDER_NOT_PLOT plotting function has been disabled and do not change the setting.
FILE NAME:GO ANSI D titlepage.dwg (dwt file can be saved in users AutoCad application template location for quick layout creation) Copy drawing file and rename to suit.. DO NOT explode or rename block. Edit attribute w/attedit command. Drawing size ANSI D 558.8 mm x 863.6 mm (22 x 34) Plot to limits. Layer: BORDER_NOT_PLOT plotting function has been disabled and do not change the setting.
TEXT SIZE Dimension Arrowhead shall be arrow, oblique or tick. Typical note font shall be RomanS with 3.5 mm high and 1.0 width scale. Medium font size: 4.5 mm; Large font size: 6 mm. * DO NOT create multiple drawings/tabs in ONE file and please remove all unrelated layouts (tabs).
STANDARD NAMING OF DIGITAL DRAWING FILES All drawings file names created for GO Transit must be named in the following manner: i.e., CAD file name = GO Project No. (6 digits) with (-) Drawing No..dwg Digital File Name Example: 059243-A001.dwg Drawing number 1 of architectural job w/ GO project number 059243 059243-A002.dwg Drawing number 2 or architectural job w/ GO project number 059243 052053-M001.dwg Drawing number 1 of mechanical job w/ GO project number 052053 052053-M002.dwg Drawing number 2 of mechanical job w/ GO project number 052053 400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
4 of 20
Drawing No. and Drawing Type in titleblock shall be C-001, L-001, A-001, S-001, M-001, E-001, etc. accordingly. All civil, landscape, structural, electrical and other drawings shall be named in a similar manner. DESCRIPTION OF TITLEBLOCK ATTRIBUTES
Attribute Tag Facility Prompt Enter Station Name Enter Value XXXXXXXX STATION *do not insert word GO before STATION or BUS TERMINAL. Examples MAPLE STATION; MIDDLEFIELD; WILLOWBROOK; FINCH BUS TERMINAL*; STEEPROCK GARAGE*; WHITBY WAYSIDE*; VARIOUS STATIONS (pertain to contract that is for more than one station in the same corridor); VARIOUS FACILITIES (pertain to contract that is for more than one station in the various corridors). Desc Enter Description TYPE OF WORK PARKING LOT EXPANSION CCTV UPGRADE STREETSVILLE P.A. UPGRADE CREW CENTRE PLATFORM EXPANSION WHITBY EXISTING LAYOUT REMOVAL XXXXXX XX-200x-EN-xxx 059625 (6 digits) IT-2004-EN-025; PT-2005-EN-001
Minordesc Minordesc2 Cap_Pro_Nu Contract_N
Enter Minor Desc 1 Enter Minor Desc 2 Enter GO Project Number Enter GO Contract Number
DESC 1
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
Attribute Tag Dwg_No Rev Sheet DrawnBy DwgDate Designedby Designdate CheckBy CheckDate ApprovedBy Approvdate Scale
General Standards
Prompt Enter Drawing Number Enter Revision Number Enter Sheet No. (of Total Sheet No.) Enter Cad Operator Drawn Date Enter Designers Name Designed Date Checked By Checked Date Approved By Approved Date Enter Drawing Scale YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD YY/MM/DD
December 01,2011
Enter Value C-001 0 0 X.X.X. YY/MM/DD Examples
5 of 20
C-002, A-001, M-001, E-001, L-001, etc. 0,1,2,3 12/120 (cover page = p.1 & signing sheet = p.2)
beginning of the project.
DRAWING NUMBERING SYSTEM A 2 segment drawing numbering system will be used (e.g., C-001, A-001, M-001, E-001, SP-001, PP-001): 1. 2. 1st segment - drawing type - see below; and 2nd segment - sequence number - from 001 to 999.
SEQUENCE NUMBER If more than one consultant prepares drawings for one contract, groups of numbers will be allocated to each Subconsultant by main Consultant, i.e., 001 to 099, 100 to 299, etc. SKETCHES When the drawing is a Sketch, the letters SK will precede the sequence number, e.g., PR-SK-001. CONTRACT NUMBER Contract number will be assigned by GO Transit. 400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards SHEET NUMBERS
General Standards
December 01,2011
6 of 20
Drawing order in the contract book shall be established by numbering (1, 2, 3 of total sheets, e.g. 1/28) each sheet, in the box at the bottom right-hand corner, adjacent to the drawing number, in the sequence desired. New drawings added after the contract book has been prepared, shall be placed in the order desired, by using the preceding sheet number followed by the letter A, B, C, etc. REVISIONS Revisions shall be recorded in the appropriate location in the Drawing Identification Block. All amendments or revisions to preliminary, contract or standard drawings shall be recorded in the revision column as follows. PRELIMINARY DRAWINGS All revisions to preliminary drawings and sketches shall be recorded, initialled and dated in the revision column. Each revision shall be numbered sequentially starting with number P1. It shall not be necessary to identify the change in the drawing or to retain a record file copy of the drawing. Should a preliminary drawing become a contract drawing, all noted revisions shall be removed from the revision column. CONTRACT DRAWINGS All amendments or revisions to contract drawings shall be recorded, initialled and dated in the revision column. Amendments made during the tender period (by addendum) or revisions made afterward during construction (by change order) shall be numbered sequentially starting with number one (1) and shall be clearly marked to identify the change. The revision number shall be placed directly below the revision triangle in the bottom border to highlight the change location. Description of the change, in the revisions column shall be brief, and should include the change order number. Amendments made during the tender period need not be described, but reference to the Addenda No should be indicated. When a drawing is redrawn or a new drawing added, the revision column should indicated Redrawn or New Drawing respectively. If there are previous revisions on a drawing to be redrawn, then the next sequential revision number shall be used on the redrawn drawing. STANDARD DRAWINGS All revisions to standard drawings should be made by CAD and only by the original consultant and shall be recorded, initialled and dated in the revision column, numbered sequentially, starting with number one (1). These revisions shall remain on the drawing when used in a contract.
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards REFERENCE BLOCK
General Standards
December 01,2011
7 of 20
The reference drawing block should list drawings containing related information. Specific reference drawings called up in the body of the drawings should be repeated in the Reference Drawings block. SCALES All scales shall be metric, unless circumstances dictate use of imperial and approved by GO Transit. GRAPHIC SCALES The basic scale used on each drawing shall be noted and shown graphically where indicated on the title block. A graphic scale shall be provided on all scale drawings as shown on Page 29. A sampling of recommended scales to be used are as follows: 1:2000, 200, 20; 1:1000, 100, 10; and 1:5000, 500, 50, 5.
LINE WORK
Line work shall be of sufficient size, weight, and clarity to be read easily from a print which has been reduced to one-half size. Lines denoting a structural outline or centreline, etc., shall have even thickness and uniformity within a set of Contract Drawings. Where a reference line runs between a series of parallel lines (i.e. in the case of overlays on highway drawings), the reference line must stand out clearly.
LETTERING, DRAWING IDENTIFICATION BLOCK AND CONTRACT TITLE SHEETS LETTERING

For samples and sizes refer to Page 12.
DIMENSIONS
In general, keep dimension lines outside of views. Show horizontal dimensions on plans, vertical dimensions on sections and elevations. Show dimensions above dimension line
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
8 of 20
and do not break the line. Dimension style shall be consistent and uniform. Refer to Page 15.
SECTION AND DETAIL MARKERS

On the sheet where the section is taken or the detail indicated, the reference will indicate the drawing on which the section or detail is drawn. On the sheet on which the section or detail is drawn, the reference will indicate the sheet on which the section or detail is indicated. No reference or cross references are required for sections and details indicated and shown on the same sheet. For standard section and reference markers, refer to Page 16.
SCALES ON SUBTITLES
Where a scale differs from the basic graphic scale indicated on the title block, it shall be noted under the appropriate subtitle.
SIGNATURES
The name, giving initials and surname of the drafter, checker and designer, shall be entered in the appropriate blocks and also the signature of the supervising engineer or architect. The date shall be shown numerically giving the year, month, and day, e.g., 04/12/20, immediately below each name or signature listed above.
ENGINEERS OR ARCHITECTS SEAL

An engineers or an architects seal shall be stamped on all contract and record drawings and signed in accordance with the provincial law governing the practice of professional engineering and architecture.
DRAWING ORIENTATION AND NORTH ARROWS

When possible, drawings shall be oriented so that the stationing increases from the left to the right across the sheet. In general, plan views shall be oriented so that north is toward the top of the sheet. If this is not convenient, all plan view drawings in a set shall be oriented in the same general direction with the second preference being north towards the right- hand side of the sheet. The standard north arrow as indicated on Page 14 shall be
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
9 of 20
displayed in the upper right-hand corner of all plan drawings, if possible. The small size arrow will be located in the key plan.
CHAINAGES
Stationing shall be governed by Rail or Transportation Authority. Refer to GO Transit, CNR, StL&H, and MTO coordinates. Stationing is along the reference line of the horizontal alignment. It shall follow the arcs of the spirals and curves.
ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

The abbreviations of words on drawings shall be held to a minimum to ensure clarity and to reduce the chance of misinterpretation. Only industry recognized abbreviations are to be used and shall be applied consistently on all drawings and specifications. Each respective discipline (civil, architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, etc.) shall include on their drawings, a legend which indicates the abbreviations and symbols used on the disciplines drawings. Alternatively, a single drawing with a legend listing standard abbreviations and symbols used by all disciplines may be used.
STRUCTURE IDENTIFICATION AND DETAILING

In general, all structures of substantial length or size shall be broken down into parts, to be dealt with as units each detailed separately. The unit will be identified on the basis of transverse joints in the structure. UNIT NUMBERING SYSTEM Rail or highway structures are to be identified and referenced by a number. The number shall be based on the station at the centre of the unit. The number shall be the station rounded up to the nearest multiple of 5 metres. For example, if the station at the centreline of a unit is 16+043, the station number would be rounded up to 16+045 and the reference number of the unit would be expressed as 16045. If the GO Transit unit
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
10 of 20
coincides with another structure, the GO Transit unit numbering system shall be continued with adequate cross reference to the other structure reference number. REFERENCE GRIDS The structural drawings frequently involve column lines and column grids identified by letters and numbers. It is often convenient and desirable to superimpose this grid on other contract drawings to permit dimensioning to an established grid reference point. In general, all horizontal dimensions should be tied to either the reference line or the basic column grid. Secondary column lines should not be used to tie in significant dimensions. FLOOR PLANS Except in simple structures, layouts should present a plan of every floor or other significant elevation. The drawings should be arranged so that a plan of each level is presented first, followed by details and sections which clarify and supplement the plan views. Plans should indicated the level at which they are cut in the title; e.g., Plan at Platform Level, Street Level Plan, etc. ELEVATIONS Elevations shall be drawn to define and detail the exterior form or walls of a structure. The elevation should generally be to scale (not isometric) and should, where possible, be identified as Looking North, etc. CROSS SECTIONS Cross sections shall be portrayed looking in the direction of increasing stationing, where possible, with identifying section and reference markers, as indicated on Page 16. DETAILS Detailed blowups of parts of plans, elevations or sections will be required to clarify the contract drawings. Details shall be identified by encircling the area to be clarified and connecting this circle with the detail symbol as indicated on Page 16. The orientation of the detail shall be identical to that of the plan, elevation or section where it is identified. Wherever practical, a detail which is drawn on the same sheet on which it is identified, shall be drawn in the immediate vicinity of its identification symbol. Details shall be standardized wherever possible.
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
11 of 20
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
Graphic symbols for construction are to follow established graphic symbols as set forth by respective discipline. (Typically, these symbols are addressed in software application, i.e., AutoCAD). Symbols used in Ontario Provincial Standards for Roads and Public Works for civil projects are to be utilized. Each discipline is to provide a legend of graphic symbols used. The legend is to be located on the same drawing as the abbreviations. Symbols are to be consistently applied on all contract drawings.
DRAWING MEDIA AND CLOSE OUT DRAWINGS

As part of the close-out package, the Consultant shall provide: Three (3) sets 11 x 17 on BOND PAPER AutoCad files (version 2007) on CD Drawings converted to PDF format on CD
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
12 of 20
STANDARD DRAWING TITLE BLOCK
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
13 of 20
GRAPHIC SCALES, NORTH ARROWS
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
14 of 20
LINE WORK AND MISCELLANEOUS SYMBOLS
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards DIMENSIONING
December 01,2011
15 of 20
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
16 of 20
SECTION AND DETAIL MARKERS
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards TITLE SHEET
December 01,2011
17 of 20
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards SIGNATURE SHEET
December 01,2011
18 of 20
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
19 of 20
CONTRACT TITLE BLOCK SHEET
400WP

CI-0502-01
Page
Drawing Standards
General Standards
December 01,2011
20 of 20
LEGEND/LIST OF DRAWINGS
400WP
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL HEAVY RAIL

CI-0601-01
Page
Introduction
Overview (of Tab)
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
SUMMARY
This Tab 6 is a guide to the design requirements of GO Transit fixed facilities in terms of the following sections: Heavy Rail Standard Drawings (Rail)
400WP

CI-0602-01
Page
Heavy Rail
Scope
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
GENERAL
This Trackwork Section provides: Information on track material; Track construction standards, indicating the track hardware required for main line and yard track; and Layout & spacing of tracks and track components.
This Trackwork Section is not intended to be a track specification. The intent is to ensure uniformity in the selection of track hardware, and alignment design of track on all Union Station Rail Corridor (USRC), and GO-owned trackage.
PURPOSE
This Section also enables the track designer to identify: Track material quantities; Where track design may restrict the proximity of other features; Where special track hardware may be required; Where track design may influence, and be influenced by clearance requirements; Where track hardware selection may influence track alignment design or vice versa; and Geometric design criteria.
400WP

CI-0602-02
Page
Heavy Rail
Definitions
June 1, 2006
1 of 4
CLEARANCE POINT
The location between two adjacent tracks beyond the frog of a turnout at which a specified clearance is provided between the tracks. In the Union Station Rail Corridor, the Clearance Point is 13-0 centre-line of track to centre-line of track.
COMPROMISE BARS
Rail joint bars connecting rails of different heights and sections.
CROSSING, DIAMOND
An intersection of two tracks at grade with no connecting route between the two tracks.
CROSSOVER
Two turnouts connecting two generally parallel tracks, which allow rail vehicles to cross from one track to another. Crossovers can be left-hand or right-hand.
CURVATURE, TRACK
Horizontal track curves will be expressed by the curve radius in meters. To accommodate obsolete railway chord definition of curvature, the radius will be followed by the chord definition degree of curve in parentheses. e.g.: 300 m radius, (D = 5-49-25.5).
DOUBLE SLIP SWITCH

A combination of a movable-point crossing and two turnouts interconnected into one assembly. The turnout switches are located between the end frogs of the crossing.
FROG
A track structure in a turnout or track crossing used at the intersection of two running rails to provide support for wheels and passageways for their flanges, thus permitting wheels on either rail to cross the other.
400WP

CI-0602-02
Page
Heavy Rail
Definitions
June 1, 2006
2 of 4
GAUGE, TRACK
The distance between the inside faces of the running rails, measured perpendicular to the rails, 16 mm, (5/8"), below the top of rail. Track gauge is 1435 mm, (4-8-).
INSULATED JOINT (IJ)

A rail joint in which electrical insulation is provided to stop electrical current from flowing from one rail to another, separating sections of track into distinct circuits for signal shunting and operation of signal system and crossing protection.
RAIL, BRIDGE GUARD

Rail installed on bridges, high embankments and other designated locations as a safety appliance. They are intended to contain and guide a derailed truck, keeping the vehicle upright on the track structure. On timber tie construction, Bridge Guard Rails are located inside the running rails to provide a gap of 230 mm (9") between rail heads. On concrete track tie construction, special bridge guard rail concrete ties are required. These ties have inserts with which the guard rail can be secured.
RAIL, COMPROMISE
A special rail rolled to different rail sections at each end for joining two rails of different size. This type of rail eliminates the need for compromise joints.
RAIL, CONTINUOUS WELDED (CWR)

Undrilled rails, welded end to end into lengths of 120 metres (400 ft.) or more, providing a track without rail joints. This minimum length is required in order to contain sufficient rail anchors & ties that the rail can be restrained from longitudinal translation caused by thermal & dynamic forces.
RAIL, GUARD
Rail installed within special trackwork, contacted by the back of wheels to provide additional guidance. Guard rails may be modified running rails, or a special cross-section. Guard rails are secured to the running rail using rigid or adjustable separator blocks. In some special trackwork a special U33 section, guard rail projecting above the top of the running rail, may be used. 400WP

CI-0602-02
Page
Heavy Rail
Definitions
June 1, 2006
3 of 4
RAIL, RUNNING
Rail carrying all vertical loads of the railway vehicle.
RAILWAY
A company (CN, CP and TTR) that operates and/or dispatches trains within their corresponding right-of-way.
RAIL, WELDED
Two or more rails welded together at their ends to form a length less than 120 metres (400 ft.), usually used in road crossings and special trackwork. The length of one piece of welded rail should not exceed 156 feet (47.5 m). Rail should not be welded in lengths longer than 156 ft and shorter than 400 ft.
SPECIAL TRACKWORK
A general term used to describe all track hardware that is not standard tie-and-ballast track. Special Trackwork includes, turnouts of all sizes, single and double slip switches, expansion joints (sliding rail joints), and crossings (diamonds).
SUPERELEVATION
The vertical distance the outer rail is raised above the inner rail on curves to resist the centrifugal force of moving trains.
TURNOUT
A track structure by means of which vehicles are diverted from one track to another. It consists of; a switch, switch machine or switch stand, switch connecting rods, closure rails, stock rails, guard rails, frog, switch ties, and all other special hardware associated with the turnout. A turnout is left hand or right hand depending on the side of the diverging route when looking from the switch point toward the frog.
400WP

CI-0602-02
Page
Heavy Rail
Definitions
June 1, 2006
4 of 4
WELD, FLASH BUTT

A process of fusing rail ends together using electric current. Flash butt welds provide a weld superior to thermite welds and are always to be preferred over thermite welds where practical.
WELD, THERMITE
A process of welding the ends of two rails together by pouring molten steel between the rail ends causing fusion. [Note: Thermit is a trade name for the alumino-thermic (thermite) welding process].
400WP

CI-0602-03
Page
Heavy Rail
Track Material
June 1, 2006
1 of 7
GENERAL
The track is an integrated structure. The weight (size), of running rail, tie spacing, tie type, tie length, fastening hardware, ballast depth, sub-ballast depth and ballast shoulder width, are all inter-related. Track standards are guidelines only. Selection of track components should be made considering all other track components and the resulting characteristics of the overall track structure. Selection of track material should be based upon: safety, available capital, life cycle cost, maintainability, and product standardization. Generally, track standards are based on CN Rail Engineering Standard Practice Circular, (SPC), CN Rail Standard Plans, GO Transit plan for #11 Double Slip Switch, AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, AREMA Manual for Signals, and Transport Canada Draft Road/Rail Grade Crossing Technical Standards, document RTD 10.
RAIL
RUNNING RAIL Running rail shall be 115# RE section only, as shown on Figure 3.2.1. (Refer also to AREMA Chapter 4, Part 1.1, page 4-1-3). Use standard carbon rail with a minimum Brinell Hardness Number (BHN), of 300 on all main line tangent track and main line curved track having a radius greater than 600 metres. Use head hardened rail or fully heat treated rail having a minimum BHN of 352, within all special trackwork and for curved main line track having a radius less than 600 metres. The use of head hardened rail requires the approval of GO Transit and corresponding Railway. BRIDGE GUARD RAIL The guard rail consists of standard, used or scrap running rail installed as jointed rail without tie plates. For 115# running rail, guard rail shall be 115# or 100# section. Obsolete rail sections may be used provided appropriate joint hardware is available. The top of the guard rail shall not project above the top of the running rails and shall be either the same elevation as the running rail or no greater than 20 mm below the top of the running rail. For bridges carrying concrete tie and ballast track, bridge guard rail shall be the same section as the running rail. RAIL, OTHER U33 guard rail is a special U-shaped rail supplied with certain European style turnouts. It has the advantage of being able to be removed or replaced without disturbing the running rails. 400WP

CI-0602-03
Page
Heavy Rail
Track Material
June 1, 2006
2 of 7
Thick-web rail sections may be used in the design of special trackwork switch points. Similarly a special rail cross-section is used in asymmetrical switch points. A Compromise Rail is a rail of relatively short length, the ends of which are of different section, corresponding with the sections of rails to which they are to be joined. A Compromise rail, welded into the track, eliminates the need for a bolted compromise joint.
FROGS
Mainline turnouts and double slip switches shall have rail bound manganese (RBM), frogs. Yard turnouts shall have RBM or bolted frogs. Note that different frog types have different lengths. Care must be taken to ensure the correct distance from point of frog to heel of frog is used when locating adjacent horizontal & vertical curves. For appropriate usage of other frog types, refer to AREMA Portfolio of Trackwork Plans, plan no. 300-79.
OTHER TRACK MATERIAL (OTM)

TIE PLATES All rails on timber ties shall be supported on AREMA 1:40 cant double shoulder (DS) tie plates. Fourteen inch (long) DS tie plates shall be installed with 136#, 132# and 115# rail new main line construction, and in road crossings. Eleven inch DS tie plates may be installed under 115# rail in service & yard tracks. See Figure 3.4.1.A for details. Wherever practical, rolled or cast steel tie plates suitable for use with elastic fasteners (Pandrol or equal) shall be used on main line tracks. See Figure 3.4.1 B for details TIMBER TIE FASTENERS Steel cut spikes, 150 mm (0-6), long shall be used to fasten the tie plate to the tie. Spike quantities vary from a minimum of 4 per tie on tangent track up to 8 per tie on highly superelevated, curved track. Refer to CN SPC 3604 for various spiking patterns. In special trackwork, screw spikes shall be used to fasten the tie plate to the tie. Wherever practical, elastic fasteners (Pandrol or equal) shall be used to fasten the rail to the tie plate. CONCRETE TIE FASTENERS Rail shall be fixed to concrete ties using one-piece spring-tension fasteners as manufactured by Pandrol or equal. Spring-leaf-with-bolt style fasteners shall not be used.
400WP

CI-0602-03
Page
Heavy Rail RAIL ANCHORS
Track Material
June 1, 2006
3 of 7
All timber tie & ballast track construction using cut spikes or screw spikes, shall have rail anchors installed to prevent longitudinal movement of rails. A minimum of 12 anchors per 11.9 m (39) rail is required for jointed track. Apply 4 anchors on every other tie in CWR territory*. All ties shall be fully anchored (4 anchors on every tie), in special trackwork and at the ends of CWR*. Apply anchors from the gauge side of the rail. Use only Improved Fair anchors. Refer to CN SPC 3601 for other details regarding application of rail anchors. *Refer to CN SPC 3205 for details and exceptions regarding the application of rail anchors in CWR territory. JOINT BARS Use 6-hole bars, 0.914 m (36 inch) long, punched for alternating oval-head 1-1/16 inch diameter bolts. Refer to CN Standard Plan TS-1202. DERAILS Derails shall be installed wherever there is a possibility of rail cars rolling from a secondary track onto a main line. The type of derail to be installed d shall be based on typical train speeds and track geometry as follows: Hinged type derail Hinged or sliding type derail with wheel crowder Switch point derail Train speeds less than 9 mph (15 km/h) 9-15 mph (15-24 km/h) on tangent track or 0-15 mph on curved track Train speed greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) or on inside rail of curved track
See CN Standard Plans Nos. TS-2208, TS-2209, and TS-2210 for selection of type of derail & installation instructions. Refer to CN Standard Practise Circular SPC 3603 for instructions regarding derail installation requirements. INSULATED JOINTS Insulated joints (IJs) are supplied as: bolted joints, bonded (glued) joints, and IJ plugs, (a short rail containing a glued IJ). For standard jointed rail, bolted IJs may be used. Only the encapsulated style of IJs is permitted. i.e., 3M fibreglass joints and continuous armoured joints are not permitted. For jointed track, bonded insulated joints are preferred over bolted
400WP

CI-0602-03
Page
Heavy Rail
Track Material
June 1, 2006
4 of 7
insulated joints. For CWR track, insulated joint plugs are preferred over bonded IJs, and bolted IJs are not permitted. See Figure 3.4.7 for details of insulated joint types. SIGNAGE There are a number of signs directed at railway operating personnel. These are: zone speed signs, restricting & resume speed signs, CTC begins/ends signs, USRC limit signs, restricted clearance signs, block/block ends signs, private crossing signs, etc. Use standard reflectorized aluminum signs in accordance with CN Rail Standard Plan Nos.; TS721, TS-725, TS-726 and TS-728. There are a number of signs in station areas directed at railway patrons. These are: no trespassing signs, wayfinding signs, platform identification signs, etc. Care must be taken to ensure these signs do not form a clearance restriction, and are not oriented or illuminated in such a way that they may be confused with, or obscure, railway signals or signs. The first source for supply of signs shall be GO Transits Graphic Services Department. SWITCH STANDS Where hand throw turnouts are used the following switch stands shall be used: Main Line Tracks 31B switch stands only, with red reflectorized target and red & green reflectorized target tip assembly per CN Standard Plan TS-701. 17B, 36D or 20B stand, with yellow & green reflectorized target. No. 22 semi-automatic stand with yellow & green reflectorized target may be used in yards only with permission of GO Transit.
Sidings and Yard Tracks
Switch stands shall be placed on the turnout side of the main track except where the view is obstructed or clearance is restricted. The switch stand handle shall be positioned so that when the switch is in the normal position, the handle faces away from the frog and away from the track. When the switch is lined for the diverging route, the handle should move in the same direction as the points.
400WP

CI-0602-03
Page
Heavy Rail
Track Material
June 1, 2006
5 of 7
TRACK TIES
TIMBER TIES On main line tracks, install CN grade #2 hardwood ties, 2.590 m (8-6), long at 517 mm centres, 1932 ties per kilometre, (20-3/8" centres, 3110 ties per mile). On secondary tracks or main line tracks primarily used by GO trains, install #2 hardwood or ties at 540 mm centres, 1852 ties per kilometre, (21-1/4" centres, 2980 ties per mile). Do not mix hardwood and softwood ties. See CN SPC 3300, Appendix B for information which relates tie installation to train speed and traffic volumes. See Figure 3.5.1.A for timber tie dimensions. All new timber ties shall be 2.6 m (8'-6"), long. The longer 2.6 m ties may be intermixed with existing 2.4 m (8'-0") long ties. A set of timber transition ties must be installed between concrete ties and timber ties. See Figure 3.5.1.B for details of transition ties. TURNOUT TIES Turnout ties, or switch ties are a set of ties of various pre-defined lengths and spacing, supporting the entire turnout structure. The length & spacing of turnout ties may affect available access for switch heater ducts. Turnout ties remain perpendicular to the straight route. (Some European turnouts have fanned turnout ties). Ties under slip switches and some crossings (diamonds) are located perpendicular to the long diagonal. TURNOUT HEADBLOCK TIES Long ties supporting the switch machine shall be dapped in accordance with Figure 3.5.1.A and pre-treated before delivery and installation. ROAD CROSSING TIES In road crossings install 9-0 long CN grade #1 treated hardwood ties. Tie spacing to be 18 on centers unless specified otherwise by the crossing surface material manufacturer. CONCRETE TIES Prestressed, monobloc concrete ties should be used on any new track construction that has a limited number of turnouts, bridges & road crossings which require timber tie construction. The use of concrete ties on curves having a radius less than 875 m, (2-00'), is encouraged. CWR must be used with concrete ties. Install concrete ties at 0.610 m centres. Timber ties must be used in road crossings, special trackwork and for transition approaches to bridges. Concrete ties with special inserts are available where Bridge Guard
400WP

CI-0602-03
Page
Heavy Rail
Track Material
June 1, 2006
6 of 7
Rails must be installed in concrete tie territory. See Figure 3.5.5 for concrete tie dimensions.
BALLAST
SPECIFICATION Track ballast shall be #4 crushed rock to AREMA specification as described in AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter 1, Section 2, Table 1-2-2. Rock shall be granite, trap rock or quartzite. Limestone may be considered in yard application. CROSS-SECTION Ballast depth shall be a minimum of 0.30 m (12 inches) below bottom of tie. Ballast shoulder width shall be a minimum of 0.30 m (12 inches) beyond end of tie. See Figure 3.6 for details of ballast & sub-ballast cross-sections.
END-OF-TRACK CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL Various designs of bumping posts and wheel stops are placed at the ends of tracks to prevent railway equipment from running off the end of track. Except for sliding or hydraulic bumping posts, these are retaining, not stopping devices; they can be struck without damage only at very low impact speeds. Where a train needs to be constrained at an intermediate location on a track, removable/retractable bumping posts or wheel stops are available. BUMPING POSTS A bumping post is a braced block made up of steel angles & channels, attached to the running rails which arrests motion upon contact with the coupler of a car. They are available in various strengths; made to suit various rail sizes; and can be fitted with brace rails, spring loaded bumping faces, etc. Even the heaviest bumping post cannot sustain an impact over 5-6 km/h without damage. Where there is the possibility of the bumping post being struck at higher speeds, customdesigned sliding-friction bumping posts can be fitted. These require a length of track behind the striking face over which a struck post can slide. Friction wedges within and behind the post bring the train to a controlled stop without damage. The longer the available sliding length, the greater the train speed that can be absorbed.
400WP

CI-0602-03
Page
Heavy Rail
Track Material
June 1, 2006
7 of 7
Hydraulic bumping posts, fitted with large shock absorber-type devices are also commercially available and can also absorb higher impact speeds. WHEEL STOPS Wheel stops, also known as Car Stops, are fixed to the running rails and stop a rail vehicle by engaging the wheels as opposed to the coupler. Various sizes & styles of wheel stops are available. RETRACTABLE BUMPING POSTS AND WHEEL STOPS Where it is necessary to restrain a railway vehicle on a continuous track, but at other times allow the passage of trains at that location, retractable devices are available. These are expensive, high maintenance devices whose need should be thoroughly assessed, and which should be used only in the absence of other reasonable alternatives. These devices may be considered, for example, for a double berthing scenario at Union Station. Hydraulic style bumping posts are available that are mounted at the side of the track and are capable of swinging out of the way when required for the passages of a train. Similarly retractable wheel stops are available that slide or rotate off the rail when required. Double ended devices are available which can restrain a rail car from either direction.
400WP

CI-0602-04
Page
Heavy Rail
Special Trackwork
June 1, 2006
1 of 3
TURNOUT
GENERAL A turnout is a track structure for diverting vehicles from one track to another. Except for the smallest turnouts, used in yards, or turnouts with self-guarded frogs, trains may travel at unlimited speeds in either direction through the straight route of signalled turnouts. Train speed is restricted for the diverging route. The speed through the diverging route depends on the size of the turnout, and the turnouts internal geometry. The train speed through turnouts is independent of travel direction, i.e., speeds are the same for facing moves (from switch toward the turnout frog), or trailing moves (from turnout frog toward the switch). TURNOUT SIZES The size of a turnout is identified by the frog number. The frog number is the nearest integer to one-half the cotangent of one-half the frog angle, the frog angle rounded to the nearest second, (North American definition). European suppliers use a slightly different definition, i.e., the number of units of centre line length in which the routes diverge by one unit. For, say, a #8 turnout, the distance between diverging tracks increases by 1 cm (or m or ft.), over a length of 8 cm (or m or ft.). Generally, the smallest turnout that can be negotiated by a GO bi-level car is a #8, but #10 turnouts are preferred. #8, #9 & #10 turnouts are used in yards. # 11, #12 or #15 turnouts are used on main lines. #20 turnouts are used for high speed main line use. For all new mainline turnouts, use #12 or #20. For all new Yard turnouts, use #12 or #10. Number 9, #11 and #15 turnouts are to be phased out where practical. See Figure 4.1.2 for turnout dimensions and speeds. TURNOUT ORIENTATION Turnouts are left hand or right hand depending on the side of the diverging route when standing at the switch facing the frog. TURNOUT SPACING & CLEARANCES There is a minimum practical distance between adjacent turnouts, necessary to ensure that turnout frogs and stock rails do not have to be bent or cut, which can complicate future replacement. Generally adjacent track construction should not require non-standard longer or shorter switch stock rails, longer or shorter frog rails, curved frog rails that are otherwise straight, etc.
400WP

CI-0602-04
Page
Heavy Rail SWITCH
Special Trackwork
June 1, 2006
2 of 3
A switch consists of two tapered movable rails with the necessary fixtures, designed to divert trains from one track to another. Curved, tangential geometry switch points with an asymmetrical cross section are recommended for all new high speed, (> #12) turnouts. Except for yard turnouts, and on main lines where Occupancy Control System (OCS) Rules apply, all switches require an electrically operated, remote control switch machine. Where practical the switch machine shall be located on the same side of the turnout as the diverging route. The Railways Signal Department shall supply and install the switch machine as well as determine the type and location of the switch machines. FROG The frog angle is the angle formed by the intersecting gage lines of a frog. Frogs are manufactured with the frog angle rounded to the nearest second. Consequently the true frog number is not an exact integer, i.e., A #12 frog has an angle of 4-46'-19.00" exactly, making it technically a #11.99986 frog. The standard railway frog is a rail bound manganese (RBM) frog. The use of spring frogs is encouraged on main line tracks where traffic predominately uses the through route. Moveable point frogs can be considered for high speed turnouts, but the frog will require a switch machine and snow melter. CROSSOVERS Where sufficient length is available for their installation, the use of crossovers is preferable to the use of double slip switches, due to the reduced complexity of the track hardware. Crossover length increases with increased track centres and increased turnout size. A double crossover layout of a consecutive LH & RH crossover is preferable to scissors crossovers or a double slip switch. Refer to Figure 5.3.A for crossover lengths. There are physical and dynamic limits to the proximity of adjacent turnouts and crossovers. Refer to Figure 5.3.B.
DOUBLE SLIP SWITCHES

A double slip switch has the advantage of providing all the operating flexibility of a double crossover in a much smaller area. Further, one switch machine can operate two pairs of switch points; as a result only three switch machines are required, versus four machines for a double crossover.
400WP

CI-0602-04
Page
Heavy Rail
Special Trackwork
June 1, 2006
3 of 3
The disadvantage is that simultaneous parallel train moves are not possible. Slower speeds may be required on the diverging route, and complex track hardware is required. Double slip switches are categorized by their size exactly like turnouts. Double slip switches are symmetrical and do not have a hand or specific orientation. Currently the USRC uses a #11 DSS. See Figure 4.2 for double slip switch dimensions.
CROSSINGS (DIAMOND)
A crossing (colloquially known as a diamond), is the at-grade intersection of two tracks with no connecting route between them. Crossings are expensive, require significant ongoing track maintenance, are a source of wheel-rail noise, potential wheel damage, and reduced ride quality. Consequently the use of crossings should be avoided unless absolutely necessary. There are a number of different styles of crossings: one-rail, two-rail and three-rail bolted rail crossings, manganese steel insert crossings, solid manganese steel frog crossings, and movable-point crossings. The preferred design of crossing is dependent on train speed, expected annual tonnage, and crossing angle. Further, some crossing designs are applicable only within a limited range of crossing angles. The proximity of adjacent turnout or DSS hardware may affect crossing guard rail construction, joint location or other crossing characteristics. Consequently, GO Transits Rail Services Department and associated Railway shall be consulted regarding the selection of a design of crossing.
400WP

CI-0602-05
Page
Heavy Rail
Track Layout and Construction
June 1, 2006
1 of 5
GENERAL
Track construction & maintenance costs are reduced and safety enhanced, when tracks are placed at standard centres, and consistent standards are used for the design, size and location of special trackwork.
TRACK CENTRES
GENERAL Desirable track centres for all new tangent track construction should be 4.267 metres, (14'-0"). Minimum track centres for all new tangent track construction should be 3.962 metres, (13'-0"). Where additional main line tracks are to be constructed parallel to existing main line tracks that are now at less than 4.267 m centres, the new track centres shall be increased, where practical, to provide for future widening of the existing tracks to 4.267 m (14-0), centres. The distance between tracks on curves and between curved tracks and adjacent structures shall be increased to account for inswing and outswing. In addition, the distance between curved concentric tracks having different super-elevation shall be increased. Refer to CN Rail SPC 2103, also Standards Respecting Railway Clearance approved under the Railway Safety Act, Sec 7(2), and Figure 5.2. YARD TRACKS Yard track centres vary with function. Typical centres for tangent, parallel tracks are listed below. Track centres with pedestrian walkway between tracks: 4.88 m (16=0). Track centres with one way service road between tracks: 7.32 m (24-0). This dimension assumes that the road surface is at the elevation of the top of ties. Track centres with one way service road and lighting poles (or shallow drainage ditch) between tracks: 8.53 m (28-0). Track centres with two way service road between tracks: 9.75 m (32-0). Track centres with two way service road & light pole between tracks: 10.0 m (33-0).
400WP

CI-0602-05
Page
Heavy Rail
June 1, 2006
2 of 5
See Figures 5.2.A, 5.2.B, and 5.2.C for typical yard track cross sections.
SPACING OF SPECIAL TRACKWORK

Certain distances must be maintained between special trackwork elements in order to permit the use of standard track components, as well as minimizing track-train dynamic problems. See Figures 5.3.A for typical crossover lengths. See Figure 5.3.B for typical spacing between adjacent turnouts and crossovers. See Figure 5.3.C for clearance dimensions between horizontal curves and turnouts.
TRACK ALIGNMENT AND SPECIAL TRACKWORK

At the frog end of the turnout, both the straight and diverging tracks rest on the same long ties, consequently a vertical curve cannot extend onto the long ties of one track without affecting the other. Good practice requires that vertical and horizontal curves not extend onto the long ties.
CLEARANCE POINTS
Track capacity is based in part on the permitted proximity of rail vehicles on adjacent converging tracks. For reasons of safety the clearance point, also known as the fouling point, shall be located where the tracks are 3.962 m, (13-0) apart, centre of track to centre of track.
CLEARANCE ENVELOPE
All wayside structures shall be located to comply with Transport Canada Standards Respecting Railway Clearances (May, 1992), Diagrams 1 and 2. Refer to Figure 5.6.A which is derived from Transport Canada Diagram 1. These clearance requirements have been accepted by the Minister of Transport and are therefore binding upon GO Transit. Any proposed structures falling outside these dimensions are deemed acceptable and no further action is required. Any proposed temporary or permanent construction which encroaches upon the Standard Clearance Diagram must be first approved by GO Transits Rail Services and the associated Railways Chief Engineer. Union Station train shed has a number of overhead and side restricted clearances. This does not relieve the designers from seeking approval for adding any new restrictions nor does it imply that clearance restrictions need not be considered. In fact the designer must 400WP

CI-0602-05
Page
Heavy Rail
June 1, 2006
3 of 5
be especially vigilant in ensuring that trains may safely clear proposed structures without endangering people or equipment. A new Minimum Clearance Envelope, Figure 5.6.B has been developed which can be used to assist in sizing new construction within the Union Station train shed. This is a less than standard clearance envelope which must have the approval of the TTR. It is meant to provide guidance as to how much of a restriction the TTR will allow.
BRIDGE GUARD RAILS

Install guard rails on the outside tracks of multi-track ballast-deck bridges, all tracks of timber-deck bridges, high embankments, and locations where adjacent bridge piers, structure columns or structures may be struck by a derailed vehicle. The guard rail should extend a minimum of 2.5 m beyond the bridge back wall. Refer to CN Standard Plan TS1108 for construction details.
TRACK CAPACITY
The capacity of a siding, passing track or depot track is: The distance from point of switch (PS) to point of switch, less the distance from PS to clearance point of signal, at both turnouts, less a reaction/stopping distance, less any other track obstructions such as road crossings, or derails. See Figure 5.8 for details of track capacity calculations.
ROAD CROSSINGS
For crossings used by baggage carts, wheelchairs, and other small-wheeled vehicles, a higher standard of crossing smoothness is justified. It is recommended that such crossings have double rubber mudrail. Refer to Figure 5.9 for crossing details.
DRAINAGE
The track designer must ensure that adequate sub-surface drainage is provided for all new track construction or alteration of existing track. A complete hydraulic analysis may have to be carried out depending on location and track work involved. Drainage design must take into consideration melt water produced by switch heaters. Generally there shall be one surface catch basin for every two switches, with the catch basin located no more than 10 m from the switch points. Drainage infrastructure design must facilitate future maintenance, including but not necessarily limited to:
400WP

CI-0602-05
Page
Heavy Rail
June 1, 2006
4 of 5
Provision of vehicular & pedestrian access to catch basins; Provision of cleanouts at appropriate intervals; and Consideration for adjacent track maintenance requirements such as undercutting and track tie replacement.
Drainage design must take into consideration environmental requirements. This may require installation of oil separators if runoff and sub-surface water could contain locomotive fuel or other contaminants.
TRACK ASSEMBLY
This section summarizes how the material described in Section 3 should be assembled
ITEM Rail weight Track tie. All track ties 8-6 long Tie spacing MAIN LINE 115# RE #2 THW 517 mm (20-3/8) 3110 ties per mile Tie plate Turnout Ballast depth below bottom of tie Ballast shoulder width Tie plate-to-tie fastening Rail-to tie plate fastening Rail anchors Frog Crossing (diamond) frog 14 DS #20, #12 305 mm (12) 305 mm (12) Cut spikes, screw spikes Elastic, or cut spikes Improved Fair RBM Manganese insert YARD & USRC 115# RE, 100# ARA-A #2 THW or TSW 540 mm (21-1/4) 2980 ties per mile 14 or 11 DS #10, #8 230 mm (9) 150 mm (6) Cut spikes Cut spikes Improved Fair RBM, SGM or bolted N/A
CONTINUOUS WELDED RAIL The minimum length of CWR is approximately 120 metres, considering the longitudinal restraining capacity of standard rail anchors. Anything shorter is Welded Rail. Where practical, CWR shall be used on all main line track. CWR must be laid at the preferred laying temperature, and de-stressed in accordance with CN Rail Standard Practice Circular 3205.
400WP

CI-0602-05
Page
Heavy Rail WELDING OF RAILS
June 1, 2006
5 of 5
Where practical rails shall be flash butt welded by the supplier and delivered by rail in CWR strings. Where rails have to be field welded a portable flash butt welding machine shall be used. Where field flash butt welding is not possible, rails can be Thermit welded. BRIDGE GUARD RAIL Install guard rails on the outside tracks of multi-track ballast-deck bridges, all tracks of timber-deck bridges, high embankments, and locations where adjacent bridge piers, structure columns or structures may be struck by a derailed vehicle. The guard rail should extend a minimum of 2.5 m beyond the bridge back wall. Refer to CN Standard Plan TS-1108 for construction details. See also AREMA Manual Chapter 7, Section 3.6.2.
400WP

CI-0602-06
Page
Heavy Rail
Track Tolerances
June 1, 2006
1 of 2
GENERAL
This section describes tolerances to which new track must be constructed. This must not be confused with the tolerances to which track must be maintained. Track maintenance tolerances describe the amount of permitted track degradation under traffic that is allowed to exist before remedial action must be taken, and are more permissive than track construction tolerances. Track maintenance requirements are outside the scope of this Section. Generally if a track misalignment can be plainly seen, then it is out of spec.
TRACK GAUGE
All track shall be constructed to track gauge of 1435 mm (4-8-1/2). Gauge shall not be widened on curves. Track gauge may be widened in special trackwork only as required by the supplier. Main line track gauge shall be plus/minus 3 mm for new track construction/reconstruction. Yard track gauge shall be plus 6 mm minus 3 mm for newly constructed/reconstructed track.
LINE
Line is a measure of the horizontal uniformity of track. New track shall be constructed so that the maximum positive or negative horizontal mid-ordinate of a 20 m long chord, measured at the gauge point, centred on visible horizontal misalignments, shall not exceed 7 mm for main line track.
SURFACE
Surface is a measure of vertical undulation along the track. The maximum vertical midordinate of a 10 m chord, measured along the surface of either rail, centred on visible peaks or sags, shall be 3 mm for new track construction.
CROSS-LEVEL
Cross-Level is a measure of the vertical relation between the top of two rails measured at right angles to the rails. Cross-Level is zero on tangent track, varies uniformly in spirals, and is constant on curves. Cross-Level at any point in the track shall not differ (positive or negative), from the design Cross-Level by more than 5 mm. The difference in cross level readings taken 6.0 m apart shall not exceed 6 mm.
400WP

CI-0602-06
Page
Heavy Rail
Track Tolerances
June 1, 2006
2 of 2
DEVIATION
Deviation is the difference between theoretical and actual track position at any point in the track. Total horizontal and vertical deviation of newly constructed / reconstructed track shall be plus/minus 12 mm for main line track and plus/minus 24 mm for yard track.
400WP

CI-0602-08
Page
Heavy Rail
Structure Interface
May 26, 2011
1 of 2
GO TRANSIT PLATFORMS
GO station platforms adjacent to tangent track shall be located laterally and vertically in accordance with the following table:
Location Platform Clearances Horizontal Distance: Edge of Platform to Centre of Track m (ft.) 1.525 m (5-0-1/16) ** Vertical Distance Above Top of Nearest Rail m (ft.) 0.203 m (0-8)
Union Station
Track Used exclusively by GO Transit Equipment Track used by GO, VIA and Freight Railway Equipment Track used by GO exclusively
GO Owned Corridors
1.632 m (5-4 1/4)
0.127 m (0-5)
GO Subdivision
1.632 m (5-4 1/4)
0.254 (0-10)
**Note:
The Horizontal distance given here of 1.525 m is 25 mm larger than the clearance shown on Figure 5.6.B, 1.500 m. This additional 25 mm provide for construction tolerances to ensure that the platform is outside the clearance envelope.
For station platforms on super-elevated or curved track, both horizontal and vertical trackto-platform clearances may need to be adjusted. See Figures 5.6A, 5.6B and 5.6C.
PEDESTRIAN TUNNELS
Clearance from top of tunnel structure to base of rail shall be a minimum of 0.508 m, (1-8). Tunnel shall have a minimum slope of 0.30% for drainage. Pedestrian tunnels shall be designed for railway loading, minimum Cooper E90 plus diesel impact. Pedestrian tunnels used by the public have other requirements regarding ventilation lighting, emergency lighting, etc. See Tab 2, Site Development.
UTILITIES
Underground utilities must be located so as not to interfere with the safe & convenient operation of trains. At a minimum utilities parallel to the track must be located laterally so as not to be within the Zone of Influence of the track. The Zone of Influence is defined as a
400WP

CI-0602-08
Page
Heavy Rail
Structure Interface
June 1, 2006
2 of 2
line extending from the bottom of end of track tie at a slope of 1:2. At a minimum, utility structures such as duct banks, pull boxes, maintenance holes, catch basins, etc., must be no higher than the bottom of track tie. This is to permit track ties to be extracted as part of routine track maintenance.
LIGHTING
The level of station platform lighting shall be minimum of 247 lux (22.9 foot-candles) at the platform surface. Additional illumination may be required where there are CCTV cameras or passenger information signs. Existing USRC platform light poles outside the train shed are spaced 30.5 m (100 ft) apart. For all other platforms see Tab 2, Electrical. For parking lots access roads, and yards, lighting shall be as outlined in the latest edition of the IESNA Lighting Handbook. Refer to CI-0206-06 for additional lighting requirements.
MAINTENANCE ACCESS
It is necessary for track maintenance personnel, in the performance of their duties to gain access to the track, signals and wayside infrastructure with road vehicles. It is probable that emergency vehicles will also need to access the maintenance roadway network. Where practical provision shall be made for roadway access in the layout of track, utilities and railway related infrastructure. Ideally there shall be a continuous road network to allow prompt and efficient entrance to and egress from the Railway Corridor.
400WP

CI-0602-07
Page
Heavy Rail
Continuous Welded Rail
June 1, 2006
1 of 1
GENERAL
Continuous welded rail (CWR) is rail welded together in lengths of 120 m or more. CWR shall be used wherever practical. Where CWR abuts special trackwork, a single buffer rail shall be used at the heel of a frog and ahead of each switch point (for non-welded turnouts).
PREFERRED LAYING TEMPERATURE

CWR is restrained from longitudinal movement. Under these conditions ambient temperature changes can induce significant axial forces in the rails. These forces can lead to track buckling or rail pull-aparts when ambient temperatures are extreme and the rail has been anchored at the wrong temperature. There is one temperature at which welded rail (not under train load) should be in a state of zero-stress, i.e., neither in compression or tension. This is the Preferred Laying Temperature (PLT). Based upon the ambient temperatures in the Toronto vicinity, a PLT of 32 degrees Celsius (90 F), is suggested. CWR shall be installed at, or de-stressed to, this temperature. Refer to CN SPC #3205 for PLT temperature calculation.
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
1 of 23
FIGURE: 115 RE RUNNING RAIL SECTION
FIGURE 3.2.1
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
2 of 23
FIGURE: 14 TIE PLATE FOR 100/115 RAIL-5-1/2 BASE WIDTH
FIGURE 3.4.1.A
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
3 of 23
FIGURE: TIE PLATE FOR 100/115 RAIL FOR ELASTIC FASTENERS AND SCREW SPIKES
FIGURE 3.4.1.B
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
4 of 23
FIGURE: INSULATED RAIL JOINT
FIGURE 3.4.7
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
5 of 23
FIGURE: TIMBER TIES
FIGURE 3.5.1.A
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
6 of 23
FIGURE: TIMBER TIE TO CONCRETE TIE TRANSITION
FIGURE 3.5.1.B
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
7 of 23
FIGURE: CONCRETE TRACK TIES
FIGURE 3.5.5
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
8 of 23
FIGURE: CROSS-SECTION SINGLE TRACK
FIGURE 3.6.A
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
9 of 23
FIGURE: BALLAST CROSS SECTION
FIGURE 3.6.B
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
10 of 23
FIGURE: BALLAST CROSS SECTION SUPER-ELEVATION
FIGURE 3.6.C
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
11 of 23
FIGURE: TURNOUT DIMENSIONS & SPEEDS
FIGURE 4.1.2
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
12 of 23
FIGURE: DOUBLE SLIP SWITCH
FIGURE 4.2
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
13 of 23
FIGURE: ONE-WAY VEHICLE SERVICE ROAD (SURFACE AT TOP OF TIES)
FIGURE 5.2.A
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
14 of 23
FIGURE: ONE-WAY VEHICLE SERVICE ROAD WITH DRAINAGE DITCH (SURFACE AT TOP OF TIES)
FIGURE 5.2.B
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
15 of 23
FIGURE: TWO-WAY VEHICLE SERVICE ROAD AT LIGHTING POLES 76M (250) TO 91M (300) APART (SURFACE AT TOP OF TIES)
FIGURE 5.2.C
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
16 of 23
FIGURE: CROSS OVER LENGTHS
FIGURE 5.3.A
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
17 of 23
FIGURE: TURNOUT AND CROSSOVER SPACING
FIGURE 5.3.B
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
18 of 23
FIGURE: TRACK CLEARANCES
FIGURE 5.3.C
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
19 of 23
FIGURE: TRACK CLEARANCES
FIGURE 5.3.D
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
20 of 23
FIGURE: CLEARANCE ENVELOPE ON ALL STRUCTURES OVER OR BESIDE THE RAILWAY TRACKS
FIGURE 5.6.A
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
21 of 23
FIGURE: USRC TRAINSHED MINIMUM CLEARANCE ENVELOPE
FIGURE 5.6.B
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
22 of 23
FIGURE: TRACK CAPACITY
FIGURE 5.8
400WP

CI-0603-01
Page
Standard Drawings
Track Material
May 14, 2010
23 of 23
FIGURE: MUD RAIL CROSSING DETAIL
FIGURE 5.9
400WP

Section Subject
CI-0501-01
Static Signage
Overview
OVERVIEW
Static signage within the GO system serves four (4) primary functions: 1. 2. 3. 4. Identify- site and entrance. Direct vehicular and pedestrian movements. Inform maps and electronic. Regulate governing bodies.
Signage design requirements are an extensive subset of the GO Branding Style Guide, and looks to the Style Guide for corporate philosophy on how and when to use the GO brand essence. GO signage standards have been developed based on criteria and rules related to industry best practice, compliance with corporate branding, and governing bodies such as, but not limited to: FLSA (French Language Services Act); AODA (Accessibility of Ontario Disabilities Act); OTM (Ontario Traffic Manual); and OBC (Ontario Building Code), etc.
GOs static signage program is based on operational requirements, customer care and industry best practice. It is intended that all GO signage plans be developed with these basic principles plus that they be EASY, have appropriate corporate colors and contrast, defined French Language treatment, minimal text, maximum use of icons and are caring to the environment.
Static Signage CORPORATE INFRASTRUCTURE
Page 1 of 1

Section Subject
CI-0501-02
Static Signage
Objectives
OBJECTIVES
The purpose of the static signage design requirements is: To address typical signage at GO stations and facilities; and To provide a guide on how to develop a comprehensive way finding program during the station or facility design.
The station/facility wayfinding program is to be designed to guide GO customers to the station or facility and to their final destination. The requirements will address the methodology, placement, and type of signage used throughout the GO system. Familiarizing with the matrix show below, and identifying typical signage required for various customer paths of travel. Consult and use as a tool, the static signage catalogue (Appendix) to develop a comprehensive, holistic wayfinding strategy.
Page 1 of 1

Section Subject
CI-0501-03
Static Signage
Guiding Principles
ACCESSIBILITY
Many times it is considered that users are a single homogeneous group. A signage program should not be designed with only the able-bodied person in mind; it should be aimed at the myriad of user groups that will utilize the services. GO provides amenities for customers with special needs. Customers with special needs include customers who use mobility devices; have hearing or sight impairments; are elderly or ill; travel with children; have luggage or bicycles. Provisions are made in the design of stations and facilities to ensure that there is an accessible route(s), in accordance with corporate policies. The accessible route is defined as a barrier-free travel path between the barrierfree parking or drop-off area, and the rail platform. Features on the accessible route are to meet the conditions listed above and be accompanied with appropriate signage. In general, accessible signs follow CSA guidelines, are to be matt finished inside, to be reflective finished outside and have reduced glare.
Page 1 of 2

Section Subject
CI-0501-03
Static Signage
Guiding Principles
FRENCH LANGUAGE SERVICES ACT (FLSA)

The French Languages Services Act (FLSA) guarantees the right of Ontario's French-speaking population to receive services in French form, and communicate with the offices of provincial ministries and agencies within the 25 designated French-language services areas. As a provincial crown agency since January 1, 2002, GO Transit is subject to the Act. To meet the objective of the Act, it is intended to provide all permanent and temporary static interior and exterior signage in areas accessible to the public in both English and French. Demonstration of new-generation signage which is either pictogram-based, or has bilingual text, is inherent in the product family available in this Catalogue. French language is treated with the same prominence on static signs, but is distinguished by separation and/or shading. In general, French text occupies 1/3 more space than English text.
Page 2 of 2

Section Subject
CI-0501-04
Static Signage
Design Requirements
Static Signage design requirements have been developed based on criteria and rules related to conveying messages through the use of universally recognized pictograms; development of standard font, sizes, and colours, contrast, reducing overall sign text, and compliance with corporate branding. These requirements have been compiled in the Static Signage Catalogue (Appendix). This Catalogue is to be used as a guide in developing the static signage component of the way finding program at GO rail line stations (excludes Union Station) and facilities. It includes a detailed listing of: The product family; Electronic drawing files; and Methodology for design and implementation.
The Static Signage Catalogue does not include electronic signage. TYPEFACE Clearview ADA has been approved as the signage typeface of choice, for usage throughout the GO system (including Union Station), as outlined in catalogue. COLOUR Consistent colours and information layouts should be applied to all stations so that users can familiarize themselves with the design and can more easily recognize the signs as belonging to the same transit system during their travels. ATTAINMENT OF MAXIMUM LEGIBILITY Factors which affect legibility are: typeface, type size, contrast between text and background, sign location, and illumination and/or finish glare, as well as a number of words and symbols along with travel speeds. If any of these elements are not properly addressed, the overall effectiveness of the sign system may be reduced.
Page 1 of 3

Section Subject
CI-0501-04
Static Signage
Design Requirements
Many of these elements are identified in the signage catalogue and abovereference standards; others include: All texts must use upper and lower case; A Cap height to be between 68 82mm if the viewer is traveling at a speed up to 30km/h, and up to 136mm if the viewer is traveling up to 50km/h; All signs must be placed within the majority populations cone of vision (10 from centerline); and Signage design, placement and layout shall take into account the varying mobility and cognitive skills of potential customers; Accessibility guidelines recommend a minimum of 70% contrast which is defined in terms of Light Reflectance Value (LRV). New signs should be at least 75 80% for permanent signs subject to fading; and As a benchmark to define a matte or non-glare finish, (per ADA (AODA) 30.5 Finish and Contrast) - An eggshell or matte finish is recommended (11-19 gloss on a 60 gloss meter). This information is available from product specifications.
RETENTION OF CONSISTENT PLACEMENT It is important to attempt to keep signs in the same portion of ones field of vision, and in consistent typical locations along the travellers path. Safety clearances should also be observed as placement criteria. Signs mounted at random heights and locations may cause the user to become frustrated in searching for information. If all signs are placed, for example, on the right hand corners of intersections at the same height, finding signs becomes very easy and users will learn to identify these patterns. CONSIDERATION OF EXISTING ENVIRONMENT Keep physical interference with the environment to a minimum and provide signage only where necessary. It is equally imperative not to include any items that are not absolutely required.
Page 2 of 3

Section Subject
CI-0501-04
Static Signage
Design Requirements
PRACTICAL CONSIDERATION (MATERIALS/DURABILITY) As with the buildings wherein they are found, signs face a high level of wear from natural elements and other factors in their environment. To address issues of potential environmental stress, designers are to create with a selection of appropriate materials and innovative construction details, whether for interior or exterior usage.
Page 3 of 3

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
The following section contains information that can be utilized when implementing signage programs at GO Stations. General information related to typical placements, sizes, fabrication and materials, is described, as well as a general overview: 1. 2. 3. Some specific site conditions may require some modifications which should be approved. Avoid clutter and confusion. It is imperative not to include items that are not absolutely necessary. For capital projects, the design, fabrication and installation is to be addressed through respective contract documents by Consultants, e.g., signage professional and contractor. Project Management Programs and Systems (formerly Controls & Standards Office) Signage Services will review all Design drawings at various submission stages.
4.
Sign Installation at GO Facilities is required throughout the entire facility, such as: Stations and tunnels, usually wall mounted or mounted on customized bracketing and hardware, or adhesive tapes/backing film. Platform Rail and Bus utilizing light poles and canopy supports with banding and brackets as well as customized brackets mounted to structural platforms, also may require driven U-Channel post and often make use of adhesive tapes/backing films. Lastly, median fences and platform bound fences are used with fence blocks. Parking lots and access lanes typically rely on banding to light stands, where possible or driven U-Channel post and related brackets and hardware. Parking structures employ all means of sign installation methods
Page 1 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
INSTALLATION 1. Sign installation at GO facilities is typically accomplished through use of the following methods: (a) Bolted to driver Post (U-Channel, PT 4 x 4 or 6 x 6 wooden post, galvanized solid and perforated 2 x 2 square steel and 3 round poles; Banding and brackets; Fence mounted; Custom bracket and anchorage; and Pressure-sensitive adhesive tapes and backing films.
(b) (c) (d) (e) 2.
All sign installations are subject to the previously detailed criteria guidelines and safety procedures of: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Minimum safety heights; Maximum visibility and sight lines; Standardized general placements and orientation; Adaptation and cohabitation with site conditions; Exclusive use of high quality non-staining fasteners (typically, stainless steel); and Avoid plastic ZIP tabs fasteners except for temporary construction signs.
3.
For traffic-related signage, standardization of sign position is important so that drivers can quickly find signs in expected locations, for instant delivery of critical information. Parking lot and traffic control signage at GO Transit6 facilities relies heavily on U-Channel post installations. Typical sign placement for lot access roads and parking grid lanes is at, or upstream of, the condition to which the sign applies. Signs should normally be placed in separate locations, except where one sign supplements another, or whether route directional signs must be grouped. Signs must be placed in the most
Page 2 of 15 CORPORATE INFRASTRUCTURE
4.
Static Signage

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
advantageous positions and must be adapted to the road design and alignment. Orientation and minimum height safety clearances are to be carefully observed during all installations. 5. Where light stands and hydro poles can be utilized, banding is the preferred method of installation for sign installations to avoid post installation safety and clutter issues. Core drilling of the asphalt or concrete surfaces are required for installation of the identified post and related yellow delineation sign post marker sleeves. Wall-mounted signs are facilitated by stainless steel screws in either drilled and tapped or anchor plugged holes, or with double-sided pressure sensitive adhesive tapes. Fence-mounted signs use fence blocks or signs are mounted back-toback with appropriate sized nut bolts and washers. Signs mounted to a structures glazing or on doors rely on double side pressure sensitive adhesive tapes. Decals applied to structural glazing and doors will use pressure sensitive adhesive backing films.
6.
7.
8. 9. 10. I
Page 3 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
Installation Details must be read in conjunction with Installation Materials and Hardware.
Page 4 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
TYPE 1: SINGLE POST 3050 MM (10) DIRECT BURIAL
Page 5 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
CORE DRILLING
Where sign post installation requires penetration of asphalt or concrete surfaces, core drilling is required. For the most commonly used steel U channel post, a 75 mm (3) core drilled hole is needed. The hole depth is to clear the thickness of the asphalt or concrete. The post is to be properly aligned and driven into the underlying base to the depth determined by the type of post used. The yellow plastic post marker tubes can be slipped over the post and fitted into the core drilled hole or the holes can be filled and compacted with cold mix asphalt.
All dimensions are in millimetres (mm) except as otherwise noted.
Page 6 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
TYPE 1A POST TYPE 1 POST WITH A TYPE-A BRACKET (TYPICALLY RESERVED PARKING SIGNS)
Page 7 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
TYPE 2-10 POST 10 SIGN POST SPLICED TO 5 PARTIALLY BURIED LOWER POST (Typical max. of 600 mm wide X 900 high mm total sign area)
TYPE 2-12 POST 12 SIGN POST SPLICED TO 5 PARTIALLY BURIED LOWER POST (Typical max. of 450 mm wide x 1200 mm high total sign area)
Page 8 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
UNDER CANOPY PLATFORM STAIR ENCLOSURE
WEST TUNNEL ENTRANCE FROM PLATFORM
Page 9 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
DETAIL 2 BRACKET & SIGN PLACEMENT
Page 10 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
U-CHANNEL (FLANGED) STEEL SIGN POST

As a typical minimum, we require a 2-2.3 lb/foot steel sign post that is a low carbon steel, engineered to withstand the required wind loads and to bend without breaking if hit or pushed by a car. The profile stiffness is to be resistant to bending and twisting forces reducing vibration and bolt loosening. It is to be strong enough that it can be driven directly into the ground without special equipment and yet is able to be manually straightened if bent over. These posts are available in a number of lengths ranging from 1520 mm to 4570 mm. the most commonly used lengths at GO Transit facilities are 1520 mm (5), 3050 mm (10) and 3658 (12). Design dimensions include 64mm (2.5) wide by 32 mm (1.25) deep with an approximate core thickness of 4.2 mm. The upper 1220 mm of each post is punched on 50.8 mm (2) centres to permit the mounting of signs. Long life is provided by hot dip galvanizing to C.S.A. G164 specifications.
Page 11 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
SIGN POST MARKER TUBES

The plastic sign post marker tubes are almost always used in conjunction with the U Channel post. These post markers are unsplit, highly visible yellow HDPE UV stabilized plastic. Design dimensions are 70 mm (2.75) i.d. by 2130 mm (84) long with a 2 mm (.080) wall thickness. The tubes are to be cut to the required length and slid over the U channel post immediately after the post is installed. Where core drilling has been required, the tubes fit nicely into the bore hold for a finished look.
RECOMMENDED HARDWARE
Sign post spacers fill the section flush to the face so the attached signs obtain a flat surface that eliminates sign deformity.
Page 12 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
Each sign requires: Two (2) spacers; Two (2) 18-8 grade stainless steel hex bolts 3/8 x 2; Two (2) 18-8 grade stainless steel 3/8 nuts; Two (2) 18-8 grade stainless steel lock washers; and Two (2) 18-8 grade stainless steel flat washers. Two-piece posts require an additional three (3) sets of nuts, bolts and lock washers for the splice. The bolt length for the splice is 3.
Page 13 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
M.T.O. BANDING BRACKET NO. 17 AND ALUMINUM FENCE BLOCK
All dimensions are in millimetres (mm) except as otherwise noted.

Static Signage CORPORATE INFRASTRUCTURE Page 14 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-06
Static Signage
Installation
Page 15 of 15

Section Subject
CI-0501-07
Appendix
Signage - Decals
NO SMOKING SIGNS AND DECALS

(SCWR-09-004(A) - RE: NO SMOKING SIGNS ON PLATFORMS) GENERAL NOTES 1. Sign Type R25 (450mm square sign) to be mounted on column or light standard, as shown placed about 60 metres apart (200 feet). [Each sign visible from about 30 metres (100 feet)]. Ensure a minimum clearance of 2.14 metres (7 feet) to bottom of sign, wherever there is a possibility that an individual may be able to walk under the sign. 2. Sign Type D_R25L (450mm square 2-sided decal) to be mounted on glass of stair, elevator and escalator enclosure foyer, predominantly on the shade-side where possible, as shown. Bottom of decal to be positioned 1.6 metres (63) above finished ground. Sign Type D_R255 (125mm square 2-sided decal) to be mounted on glass, as shown. Bottom of decal to be positioned 1.75 metres (69) above finished ground, 10 15mm (0.5) from edge of visible glass @ latch side of door. Place on window next to door, if available, every other door, one per shelter, on end of shelter closest to exits.
3.
Page 1 of 2

Section Subject
CI-0501-07
Appendix
Signage - Decals
The decal size and positioning images are approximate, as shown, are not to scale. Refer to the actual dimensions below:
D R25S (125mm Square 2-sided Decal) to be mounted on glass, as shown. Bottom of Decal to be 1.75 Metres (69) Above Ground Level, 10 - 15 Mm (0.5) From Edge of Visible Glass at Latch Side Of Door. Place on window next to door, if available, every other door, one per shelter, on end of shelter closest to exits.
Page 2 of 2

DRM Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DRM Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL INTRODUCTION

Section Subject Approved

How To Use Your Manual

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL INTRODUCTION

How To Use Your Manual

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

Overview ....................................................................................................1 400WP

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

April 30, 2012

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL GENERAL

Overview (of Tab)

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL GENERAL

May 27, 2010

ONTARIO BUILDING CODE

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL GENERAL

May 27, 2010

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL GENERAL

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL GENERAL

November 10, 2010

STATION SITE PROGRAM

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL GENERAL

Utilities and storm water management.

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL GENERAL

November 10, 2010

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL GENERAL

STANDARDIZATION OF FIXED FACILITIES

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL GENERAL

November 10, 2010

JOINT VENTURE DEVELOPMENT

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS MANUAL GENERAL

FARE COLLECTION AND VALIDATION